2014 qx80 Owner Manual PDF

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2014 Infiniti QX80

Printing: June 2013 (09) / OM14E 0Z62U0 / Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Infiniti QX80 Owner’s Manual
1512389 EN QX80 OM Cover.indd 1 5/23/13 3:57 PM

Foreword
Your INFINITI represents a new way of warranties covering this vehicle, the re- READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
thinking about vehicle design. It integrates quirements to keep the warranties in effect Before driving your vehicle, read your
advanced engineering and superior crafts- as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assis- Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
manship with a simple, refined aesthetic tance program. familiarity with controls and maintenance
sensitivity associated with traditional Ja- Additionally, a separate Customer Care requirements, assisting you in the safe
panese culture. and Lemon Law Information Booklet will operation of your vehicle.
The result is a different notion of luxury explain how to resolve any concerns you
and beauty. The car itself is important, but may have with your vehicle, as well as
so is the sense of harmony that the vehicle clarify your rights under your state’s WARNING
evokes in its driver, and the sense of lemon law.
satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI — IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMIN-
In addition to factory installed options,
from the way it looks and drives to the high DERS FOR SAFETY!
your vehicle may also be equipped with
level of retailer service. additional accessories installed by INFINITI Follow these important driving rules to help
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to or by your INFINITI retailer prior to delivery. ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you
the fullest, we encourage you to read this It is important that you familiarize yourself and your passengers!
Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains with all disclosures, warnings, cautions . NEVER drive under the influence of
all of the features, controls and perfor- and instructions concerning proper use of alcohol or drugs.
mance characteristics of your INFINITI; it such accessories prior to operating the
also provides important instructions and vehicle and/or accessory. See an INFINITI . ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
safety information. retailer for details concerning the particu- and never drive too fast for conditions.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet lar accessories with which your vehicle is . ALWAYS give your full attention to
is included in your Owner’s literature equipped. driving and avoid using vehicle features
portfolio. The INFINITI Service and Main- or taking other actions that could dis-
tenance Guide explains details about tract you.
maintaining and servicing your vehicle. . ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
Always carry it with you when you take priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The children should be seated in the rear
Warranty Information Booklet contents seat.
provide complete information about all
. ALWAYS provide information about the MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
proper use of vehicle safety features to This vehicle should not be modified. THIS MANUAL
all occupants of the vehicle. Modification could affect its performance, You will see various symbols in this
. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for safety or durability, and may even violate manual. They are used in the following
important safety information. governmental regulations. In addition, ways:
damage or performance problems result-
ing from modification will not be covered
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD under the INFINITI warranties. WARNING
DRIVING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger WHEN READING THE MANUAL hazard that could cause death or serious
This manual includes information for all personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,
car because it has a higher center of
options available on this model. Therefore, the procedures must be followed precisely.
gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, failure you may find some information that does
to operate this vehicle correctly may not apply to your vehicle.
result in loss of control or an accident. Be All information, specifications and illustra- CAUTION
sure to read “On-pavement and off-road tions in this manual are those in effect at
driving precautions”, “Avoiding collision the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the This is used to indicate the presence of a
and rollover” and “Driving safety pre- right to change specifications or design at hazard that could cause minor or moderate
cautions” in the “5. Starting and driving” any time without notice. personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
section of this manual. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures
must be followed carefully.
those above call attention to an item in the hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
illustration. Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.
WARNING
SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires
subscription, sold separately.
WARNING Not available in Alaska, Hawaii
or Guam. For more information,
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, visit www.siriusxm.com.
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects
SIC0697 or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do certain products of component wear contain
not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
If you see a symbol similar to those above
in an illustration, it means the arrow points CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-
to the front of the vehicle. SORY © 2013 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
batteries, may contain perchlorate materi-
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
al. The following advisory is provided:
those above indicate movement or action. retrieval system, or transmitted in any
“Perchlorate Material - special handling
form, or by any means, electronic, mechan-
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
ical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
INFINITI CARES ...
Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your You can write to INFINITI with the informa- If you prefer, visit us at:
INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or tion on the left at: www.InfinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers)
you would like to provide INFINITI directly For U.S. customers or
with comments or questions, please con- INFINITI Division
tact our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs De- Nissan North America, Inc. www.Infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)
partment using our toll-free number: Consumer Affairs Department We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and
For U.S. customers P.O. Box 685003 thank you for buying a quality INFINITI
1-800-662-6200 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 vehicle.
For Canadian customers or via e-mail at:
1-800-361-4792 nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask INFINITI Division
for the following information: Nissan Canada Inc.
. Your name, address, and telephone 5290 Orbitor Drive
number Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
. Vehicle identification number (on dash or via e-mail at:
panel) information.centre@nissancanada.
. Date of purchase com
. Current odometer reading
. Your INFINITI retailer’s name
. Your comments or questions
OR
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Instrument panel............................................... 0-10

System (SRS)....................................................... 0-2 Meters and gauges ........................................... 0-11
Exterior front ....................................................... 0-3 Engine compartment ......................................... 0-12
Exterior rear......................................................... 0-5 VK56VD engine............................................ 0-12
Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-6 Warning and indicator lights ............................. 0-13
Cockpit ................................................................ 0-8
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P.1-55)
7. Child restraint anchor points (for top
tether strap child restraint) (P.1-36)
8. 3rd row seats (P.1-8)
— Child restraints (P.1-34)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P.1-36)
10. Armrest (2nd row seat) (P.1-18)
11. 2nd row seats (P.1-5)
— Child restraints (P.1-34)
12. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-68)
13. Front armrest (P.1-18)
14. Front seats (P.1-4)
— Occupant classification sensors
(weight sensors) (P.1-61)
15. Front passenger air bag status light
(P.1-63)
SSI0728
1. Seat belt for 3rd row center seat belt — Front-seat Active Head Restraints
(P. 1-28) (P.1-16)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 4. Seat belts (P.1-21)
and rollover supplemental air bags 5. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
(P.1-55) plemental air bags (P.1-55)
3. Head Restraints (P.1-10)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
7. Towing hook (P.6-18)

8. Front view camera (P.4-21)
9. Center sensors*
— Around View Monitor (P.4-21)
10. Fog light (P.2-44)
11. Headlight washers* (P.2-42)
12. Headlight and turn signal (P.2-38)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-28)
— Adaptive Front lighting System
(AFS)* (P.2-41)
13. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-31, P.9-9)
— Flat tire (P.6-3)
— Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (P.2-15, P.5-4)
14. Outside mirrors (P.3-30)
— Side view camera (P.4-21)
— Welcome light (P.2-65)
15. Side turn signal lights (bulb replace-
ment) (P.8-28)
JVC0448X 16. Doors
1. Hood (P.3-20) — Window washer fluid (P.8-15) — Keys (P.3-2)
2. Windshield wiper and washer 3. Moonroof (P.2-63) — Door locks (P.3-4)
— Switch operation (P.2-34) 4. Power windows (P.2-61) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)
— Rain-sensing auto wiper system 5. Roof rack (P.2-60) — Remote keyless entry system*
(P.2-35) 6. Corner sensors (P.3-15)
— Wiper blade replacement (P.8-20) — Around View Monitor (P.4-21) — Remote engine start* (P.3-17)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3

17. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-6)
*: if so equipped

EXTERIOR REAR
9. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-36)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-15)
10. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P.6-3)
11. Corner sensors
12. Towing hook (P.6-18)
13. Trailer hitch (P.9-22)
14. Center sensors*
*: if so equipped
JVC0409X
1. Fuel-filler door (P.3-25) 5. Satellite antenna (P.4-47)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-4) 6. Rear view camera (P.4-21)
2. Antenna (P.4-82) 7. High-mounted stop light (bulb repla-
3. Rear combination light (bulb replace- cement) (P.8-28)
ment) (P.8-28) 8. Lift gate (P.3-20)
4. Rear window defroster (P.2-37) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
control switch (P.3-30)

8. Automatic drive positioner switch
(P.3-33)
9. Sun visors (P.3-29)
10. SOS call switch* (Refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.)
11. Moonroof switch (P.2-63)
12. Map lights (P.2-66)
13. Sunglasses holder (P.2-56)
14. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-30)
— HomeLink® universal transceiver
(P.2-68)
15. Cargo area
— Power outlet (P.2-52)
— Cargo floor box (P.2-60)
— Luggage hooks (P.2-59)
— Jacking tools (P.6-5)
16. Rear console box (P.2-58)
— Cup holders (2nd row seat)*
JVC0410X
(P.2-54)
1. Cargo light (P.2-68) — USB memory operation* (P.4-67) — Pocket* (P.2-58)
2. Cup holders (3rd row seat) (P.2-55) — iPod® player operation* (P.4-76) 17. Cup holders (2nd row seat)* (P.2-54)
3. Rear ventilators (P.4-38) 7. Door armrest 18. Dual head restraint DVD system*
4. Coat hooks (P.2-59) — Power window controls (P.2-61) (P.4-83)
5. Rear personal lights (P.2-66) — Power door lock switch (P.3-5)
6. Tray (P.2-58) — Outside rearview mirror remote

19. Console box (P.2-57)
— Power outlet (P.2-52)
— Auxiliary input jacks* (P.4-78,
P.4-84)
— Rear automatic air conditioning
system* (P.4-44)
20. Power outlet (P.2-52)/Front cup
holders (P.2-54)
*: if so equipped

COCKPIT
— Audio control steering switch

(P.4-81)
— Hands-Free Phone System switch
(P.4-98)
6. Trip computer switch (P.2-28)
7. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-34)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls
(right side)
— Cruise control system* (P.5-54)
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-
tem* (P.5-56)
9. Dynamic driver assistance switch*
— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
system* (P.5-21)
— Distance Control Assist (DCA) sys-
tem* (P.5-78)
— Blind Spot Intervention system*
(P.5-31)
10. Shift lever (P.5-16)
11. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch*
JVC0444X (P.5-100)/SNOW mode switch
(P.2-49)/TOW MODE switch (P.2-49)/
1. Power lift gate switch* (P.3-20) switch Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
2. Instrument brightness control switch — Headlight (P.2-38) switch (P.5-115)
(P.2-43) — Turn signal (P.2-43) 12. Headlight aiming control* (P.2-41)
3. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od- — Fog light (P.2-44) 13. Power lift gate main switch (P.3-20)
ometer (P.2-7) 5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal side)

14. Warning systems switch* (P. 2-48)
— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
(P.5-21)
— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)* (P.5-31)
— Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
(P.5-90)
15. BCI (Back-up Collision Intervention)
switch* (P.5-31) or Power lift gate
switch* (P.3-20)
16. Electric tilting/telescopic steering
wheel switch (P.3-28)
17. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF
switch* (P.5-94)
*: if so equipped

INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Clock (P.2-51)
8. Defroster switch (P.2-37)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-55)
10. Fuse box (P.8-24)
11. Parking brake (P.5-21)
12. Hood release handle (P.3-20)
13. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-45)
— Driver supplemental air bag
(P.1-55)
— Power steering system (P.5-110)
14. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-11)
15. Climate controlled seat switch*
(P.2-47)/Heated seat switch* (P.2-45)
16. Remote tip-up 2nd row seat switch*
(P.1-9)
17. Heated steering wheel switch (P.2-44)
18. Power outlet (P.2-52)
SSI0733 (P.1-63)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-38) — Vehicle information and setting 20. Cup holder (P.2-54)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6) buttons (P.4-7) 21. Automatic climate control system
(P.4-39)
3. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2) 6. Center display
— Around View Monitor (P.4-21) 22. Audio system (P.4-47)
4. Center ventilator (P.4-38)
— Navigation system** 23. Glove box (P.2-57)
5. Center multi-function control panel
(P.4-3) — DVD player operation (P.4-64) *: if so equipped

METERS AND GAUGES
**: Refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.
SIC4450
1. Tachometer (P.2-8) 6. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-11) Odometer/twin trip odometer
3. Speedometer (P.2-7) (P.2-22)
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge 7. Engine oil pressure gauge (P.2-9)
(P.2-8) 8. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)
5. Voltmeter (P.2-10)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
11. Drive belts (P.8-18)

12. Air cleaner (P.8-19)
SDI2585
VK56VD ENGINE 5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

1. Window washer fluid reservoir 6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-14)
(P.8-15) 7. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-23)
2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-23) 8. Battery (P.8-16)
3. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10) 9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)
4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13) 10. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning Warning Indicator

Name Page Name Page Name Page
light light light
Low tire pressure warning light 2-15 Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off
2-19
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) indicator light*
2-12
warning light Master warning light 2-17 Lane Departure Prevention
2-20
(LDP) ON indicator light (green)*
Automatic Transmission (AT) Preview Function warning light
2-12 2-17 Malfunction Indicator Light
check warning light (orange)* 2-20
(MIL)
Automatic Transmission (AT) oil Seat belt warning light 2-17
2-12 Security indicator light 2-21
temperature warning light
Automatic Transmission (AT) Supplemental air bag warning
2-12 2-17
light SNOW mode indicator light 2-21
park warning light
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) 2-18
warning light TOW mode indicator light 2-21
Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) 2-13
system warning light (orange)* Turn signal/hazard indicator
2-21
Indicator lights
Name Page
light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) 2-21
Brake warning light 2-13
Adaptive Front lighting System off indicator light
(AFS) indicator light* 2-18
*: if so equipped
Charge warning light 2-14 Automatic Transmission (AT)
position indicator light 2-19
Distance Control Assist (DCA)
2-14 Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON
system warning light (orange)* 2-19
indicator light (green)*
Engine oil pressure warning
2-14 Check suspension indicator
light 2-19
light
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warn-
2-14 Cruise indicator light*
ing light (4WD models) 2-19
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Exterior light indicator
2-15 2-19
system warning light (orange)*
Intelligent Key warning light 2-15 Front passenger air bag status
light 2-19
Lane departure warning light High beam indicator light
2-15 2-19
(orange)*

MEMO

1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats................................................................... 1-3 Child restraints ................................................. 1-34
Front seats ...................................................... 1-4 Precautions on child restraints..................... 1-34
2nd row seats ................................................. 1-5 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
3rd row seats.................................................. 1-8 System (LATCH)............................................ 1-36
Head restraints.............................................. 1-10 Top tether strap child restraint..................... 1-39
Headrest ....................................................... 1-16 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Armrest (if so equipped)................................ 1-18 using LATCH................................................. 1-39
Flexible seating ............................................. 1-18 Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts .............................................. 1-41
Seat belts.......................................................... 1-21
Forward-facing child restraint installation
Precautions on seat belt usage ..................... 1-21
using LATCH................................................. 1-44
Pregnant women ........................................... 1-24
Forward-facing child restraint installation
Injured persons ............................................. 1-24 using the seat belts..................................... 1-46
Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function Installing top tether strap (2nd row
(if so equipped for front seats)...................... 1-24 captain’s seats or 2nd row bench seat) ....... 1-50
Three-point type seat belt ............................. 1-24 Installing top tether strap (3rd row
Seat belt extenders ....................................... 1-31 bench seat).................................................. 1-51
Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-31 Booster seats .............................................. 1-51
Child safety ....................................................... 1-32 Supplemental restraint system .......................... 1-55
Infants........................................................... 1-33 Precautions on supplemental
Small children ............................................... 1-33 restraint system........................................... 1-55
Larger children .............................................. 1-33 INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)................................................. 1-61
Front seat-mounted side-impact Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats).... 1-68
supplemental air bag and roof-mounted Supplemental air bag warning labels ........... 1-69
curtain side-impact and rollover Supplemental air bag warning light ............. 1-70
supplemental air bag systems....................... 1-67
Repair and replacement procedure............... 1-70
SEATS
are most effective when the passenger

sits well back and straight up in the
seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk
of sliding under the lap belt and being
injured is increased.
SSS0133
seat with both feet on the floor and

WARNING adjust the seat belt properly. See “Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage” later in this
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the section.
seatback is reclined. This can be danger-
. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
ous. The shoulder belt will not be
to make sure it is securely locked.
against your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and receive neck . Do not leave children unattended inside
or other serious injuries. You could also the vehicle. They could unknowingly
slide under the lap belt and receive activate switches or controls. Unat-
serious internal injuries. tended children could become involved
in serious accidents.
. For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should . The seatback should not be reclined any
be upright. Always sit well back in the more than needed for comfort. Seat belts
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT SEATS
Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
. The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 sec-
onds, then reactivate the switch.
. Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the
engine is off. This will discharge the
battery.
See “Automatic drive positioner” in the “3. SSS1051
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion for the seat position memory function. Forward and backward: the seatback can be reclined to allow
Moving the switch * 1 forward or backward occupants to rest when the vehicle is
will slide the seat forward or backward to stopped and the transmission is in the P
CAUTION the desired position. (Park) position.
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure Reclining:

not to contact any moving parts to avoid Move the recline switch *2 backward until
possible injuries and/or damages. the desired angle is obtained. To bring the
seatback forward again, move the switch
*2 forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on
seat belt usage” later in this section.) Also,
1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2ND ROW SEATS
WARNING
. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an
accident or sudden stop.
. When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
SSS1052 SSS1053
completely secured in the latched posi-
Seat lifter: Lumbar support: tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
1. Pull up or push down the adjusting The lumbar support feature provides lower dent or sudden stop.
switch to adjust the seat height until back support to the occupants.
the desired position is achieved. . Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
Push the front or back end of the switch to it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to adjust the seatback lumbar area. cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a
adjust the front angle of the seat until sudden stop or collision, unsecured
the desired position is achieved (for cargo could cause personal injury.
driver’s seat).

Reclining adjust the seat belt properly. See “Pre-
Pull the reclining lever *
A and position the cautions on seat belt usage” later in this
seatback at the desired angle. Release the section.
reclining lever after positioning the seat at . After adjustment, check to be sure the
the desired angle. seat is securely locked.
To return the seatback, pull the lever.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of Entry to 3rd row seat
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit.
(See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later CAUTION
in this section.) The seatback may also be
reclined to allow occupants to rest when . Do not drive with the 2nd row seat
SSS1081 the vehicle is parked. tipped up.
Captain’s seat . Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat
to pinch, hit any part of your body or
WARNING other people when operating the 2nd
row seat. Make sure the seat path is
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the clear of all objects before moving the
seatback is reclined. This can be danger- seat.
ous. The shoulder belt will not be
The 2nd row seat can be tipped forward for
could be thrown into it and receive neck
easy entry to or exit from the 3rd row seat.
or other serious injuries. You could also
slide under the lap belt and receive
serious internal injuries.
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
SSS1065 be upright. Always sit well back in the
Bench seat seat with both feet on the floor and

be tipped forward.
To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the lever * A
or *B and fold the seatback forward onto
the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base
and tip it forward.
SSS1094
For remote release type (if so equipped):

Push and hold the switch located on the
instrument panel. The seatback will fold
down and tip forward.
The lower corner of the seat base will lift
and the 2nd row seat will tip forward.
SSS1066
For manual type:

To enter the 3rd row seat, pull the lever *A
or *B located on the 2nd row seat and fold
the seatback forward * 1 at an angle over
the seat base. Then lift up the seat base
and tip the 2nd row seat forward * 2 . This
will release the back of the seat so it may

. Disconnect and secure the center seat
belt and tongues into the retractor
base. See “3rd row center seat belt”
later in this section.
— Always reconnect the center seat
belt when the seat is returned to the
upright position
. Make sure that there are no objects on
the seatback cushion.
SSS1116 SSS1095
3RD ROW SEATS Power reclining

The 3rd row power folding seat controls are Push and hold the rear side of the switch
located behind the 2nd row seat (both the *1 beside the 3rd row cup holders until
driver’s and passenger’s side) on the 3rd the desired seatback angle (up to 20
row cup holder console * 1 . There are also degrees) is obtained. To move the seatback
controls located on the rear quarter trim forward again, push and hold the front side
panel behind the 3rd row seats (passen- of the switch *2 until the desired angle is
ger’s side) *
2 . obtained.
Before operating the 3rd row seats:
. Make sure the 2nd row seatback is not WARNING
reclined.
. Lower the 3rd row head restraint to the . After adjustment, check to be sure the
full down position. seat is securely locked.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the Push and hold the rear side of the switch
seatback is reclined. This can be danger- *2 . The seatback will be returned auto-
ous. The shoulder belt will not be matically. The seatback will rise up while
against your body. In an accident, you holding the switch.
could be thrown into it and receive neck NOTE:
or other serious injuries. You could also
Operating the power folding seats can
slide under the lap belt and receive
discharge the vehicle battery if the vehicle
serious internal injuries.
is not running.
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the CAUTION
adjust the seat belt properly. See “Pre- When operating the rear power seatback
cautions on seat belt usage” later in this return, make sure that the vehicle is
section. stopped and the transmission is in the P
(Park) position.
WARNING
SSS1118 . Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
Power folding fold-down position. Use of these areas
Push and hold the front side of the switch by passengers without proper restraints
*1 located on the passenger side of the could result in serious injury in an
accident or sudden stop.
cargo room. The corresponding seatback
(R: right side, L: left side) will be folded . When returning the seatbacks to the
down automatically. upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured, may increase the risk of serious injury or
passengers may be injured in an acci- death in a collision.
dent or sudden stop.
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a
sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other vehi-
cle safety systems. They may provide addi-
tional protection against injury in certain
rear end collisions. Adjust the head re-
straints properly, as specified in this sec-
tion. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
to the head restraint stalks or remove the
head restraint. Do not use the seat if the
head restraint has been removed. If the
head restraint was removed, reinstall and
properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position. Failure
to follow these instructions can reduce the
effectiveness of the head restraints. This

JVR0201X SSS0992
Front seats and 2nd row outboard seats
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions equipped with head restraints. The
head restraints are adjustable.
Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a head restraint.
SSS1128
3rd row seats

Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notch (es)
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
SSS0997 SSS0993
Adjustment (front seats and 2nd To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
row outboard seats)
Adjust the head restraint so the center is
level with the center of your ears.

restraint before an occupant uses the
seating position.
SSS0994 SSS0995
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and Removal (front seats and 2nd row
push the head restraint down.
outboard seats)
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the
seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a
secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

CAUTION
Models with a head restraint display (if so
equipped) are designed so that the head
restraint cannot be removed. The head
restraint display may be damaged if the
head restraint is forcibly pulled out.
SSS0996 SSS1123
Install (front seats and 2nd row Adjustment (3rd row seats)
outboard seats) To raise the head restraint, pull it up to the
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the lock position.
holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint is facing the correct
direction. The stalk with the adjustment
notches * 1 must be installed in the
hole with the lock knob * 2 .
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint
before an occupant uses the seating
position.

seating position.
SSS1124 SSS1125
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and Removal (3rd row seats)
push the head restraint down.
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the
seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a
secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.
5. Install and properly adjust the head
restraint before an occupant uses the

certain rear-end collisions. After the colli-
sion, the head restraints return to their
original position.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly
as described earlier in this section.
HEADREST
WARNING
Headrests supplement the other vehicle
safety systems. They may provide additional
SSS1126 SSS0508 protection against injury in certain rear end
collisions. Adjust the headrests properly, as
Install (3rd row seats) Front-seat Active Head Restraint specified in this section. Check the adjust-
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the The Active Head Restraint moves forward ment after someone else uses the seat. Do
holes in the seat. Make sure that the utilizing the force that the seatback re- not attach anything to the headrest stalks
head restraint is facing the correct ceives from the occupant in a rear-end or remove the headrests. Do not use the
direction. The stalk with the adjustment collision. The movement of the head seat if the headrests have been removed. If
notch must be installed in the hole with restraint helps support the occupant’s the headrest was removed, reinstall and
the lock knob * 1 . head by reducing its backward movement properly adjust the headrest before an
and helping absorb some of the forces that occupant uses the seating position. Failure
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push to follow these instructions can reduce the
the head restraint down. may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
effectiveness of the headrests. This may
3. Properly adjust the head restraint Active Head Restraints are effective for increase the risk of serious injury or death
before an occupant uses the seating collisions at low to medium speeds in in a collision.
position. which it is said that whiplash injury occurs
most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in

JVR0202X JVR0203X
The illustration shows the seating posi- Components (2nd row center seat)
tions equipped with headrests. (if so equipped)
Indicates the seating position is 1. Headrest
equipped with a removable headrest. 2. Notch
+ Indicates the seating position is not 3. Lock knob
equipped with a head restraint or head-
rest. 4. Stalks

SSS0969 SSS1111 SSS1070
Front seats 2nd row seat
Removal and attachment (2nd row
ARMREST (if so equipped) 2nd row seat
center seat) (if so equipped)
Front seats Pull and draw the armrest forward until it is
To remove the headrest, push and hold the
horizontal.
lock knob *1 and pull the headrest up. The console box lid can be used as an
If the headrest is removed, store it in a armrest. FLEXIBLE SEATING
secure place. Reinstall the headrest before Slide the box lid forward or backward to
an occupant uses the seating position. the desired position (if so equipped). WARNING
To attach the headrest, push and hold the
lock knob * 1 and insert the headrest . Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
stalks into the holes. area or on the rear seats when they are
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.

. Do not allow people to ride in any area of cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a to get caught or pinched in the seat.
your vehicle that is not equipped with sudden stop or collision, unsecured
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in cargo could cause personal injury.
your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
Stowing 2nd and 3rd row seats
. When folding the bench seat seatback
belt properly. To stow 2nd and 3rd row seats for
down for maximum storage, make sure
maximum cargo capacity:
. Do not fold down the rear seats when the seat base is in the latched position
occupants are in the rear seat area or by rocking the seat base. If the seat base
any cargo is on the rear seats. is not properly secured, cargo stored on
. Head restraints should be adjusted top of a folded seatback may become a
properly as they may provide significant projectile causing personal injury or
protection against injury in an accident. vehicle damage.
Always replace and adjust them properly
if they have been removed for any
reason. CAUTION
. If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely . When folding the 2nd row seat for
stored to prevent them from causing maximum cargo hauling, be sure that
injury to passengers or damage to the cargo does not contact the center con-
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an sole of the captain’s seat (if so
accident. equipped) to avoid possible damage to
. When returning the seatbacks to the the console.
upright position, be certain they are . When folding or returning the seat(s) to
completely secured in the latched posi- the upright position, to avoid injury to
tion. If they are not completely secured, yourself and others:
passengers may be injured in an acci- — Make sure that the seat path is
dent or sudden stop. clear before moving the seat.
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent — Be careful not to allow hands or feet
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place

SSS1119 SSS1120 SSS1121
Manual Operation: 2. Push the folded seat down until it locks 3. Fold the 3rd row seat flat using the
1. Pull lever located on the 2nd row seat. in position. switches located in the cargo area. See
The seatback folds down and the seat “Power folding ” earlier in this section.
base will tip forward. See “Entry to 3rd 4. Return 3rd row seats to seating posi-
row seat” earlier in this section. tions by raising the 3rd row seatbacks
Power Operation: to an upright position using the
switches. Make sure the seatback is
1. Push and hold the corresponding
locked in position. See “Power folding ”
switch located on the instrument panel
earlier in this section.
below the audio system. The seatback
will fold down and tip forward. See 5. Return the 2nd row seat to a seating
“Entry to 3rd row seat” earlier in this position by raising the 2nd row seat-
section. backs to an upright position. Make sure
the seatback is locked in position.

SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

CAUTION If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and
When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum well back in your seat with both feet on the
cargo hauling, be sure that cargo does not floor, your chances of being injured or
contact the center console of the captain’s killed in an accident and/or the severity of
seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI
damage to the console. strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you
drive, even if your seating position in-
cludes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
. The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the chance
or severity of injury in an accident.
SSS0136A
Serious injury or death can occur if the
seat belt is not worn properly.
. Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never
put the belt behind your back, under
your arm or across your neck. The belt
should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
. Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in an
accident.
SSS0134A . Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.

. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or should be done by an INFINITI retailer.
twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec- . All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tiveness. tractors and attaching hardware, should
. Do not allow more than one person to be inspected after any collision by an
use the same seat belt. INFINITI retailer. INFINITI recommends
. Never carry more people in the vehicle that all seat belt assemblies in use
than there are seat belts. during a collision be replaced unless
the collision was minor and the belts
. If the seat belt warning light glows
show no damage and continue to oper-
continuously while the ignition is turned
ate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
ON with all doors closed and all seat
use during a collision should also be
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
inspected and replaced if either damage
function in the system. Have the system
or improper operation is noted. SSS0016
checked by an INFINITI retailer.
. All child restraints and attaching hard-
. No changes should be made to the seat
ware should be inspected after any
belt system. For example, do not modify
collision. Always follow the restraint
the seat belt, add material or install
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
devices that may change the seat belt
and replacement recommendations. The
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
child restraints should be replaced if
the operation of the seat belt system.
they are damaged.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious perso-
nal injury.
. Once a seat belt pretensioner has
activated, it cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
See an INFINITI retailer.
SSS0014
. Removal and installation of the preten-
sioner seat belt system components
PREGNANT WOMEN . Activation of the Intelligent Brake Assist Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit
INFINITI recommends that pregnant women (IBA) system. (See “Intelligent Brake upright and well back.
use seat belts. The seat belt should be Assist (IBA) system” in the “5. Starting If the motor cannot retract the seat belt
worn snug, and always position the lap and driving” section.) when the seat belt is fastened or unfas-
belt as low as possible around the hips, . In the event of a high severity rollover tened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat
not the waist, and place the shoulder belt collision. belt system has a malfunction. Have your
over your shoulder and across your chest. The pre-crash seat belt will not be active INFINITI retailer check and repair the
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your when: system.
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for . the seat belt is not fastened When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly
specific recommendations. . the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15 in a short period of time, the motor may
km/h) during emergency braking not be able to retract the seat belt. After 8
INJURED PERSONS
. the vehicle speed is under 19 MPH (30 minutes, the motor reactivates and retracts
INFINITI recommends that injured persons the seat belt. If the seat belt still cannot be
km/h) during sudden steering maneu-
use seat belts, depending on the injury. retracted by the motor, the pre-crash seat
vers or in the event of a high severity
Check with your doctor for specific recom- belt system has a malfunction. Have your
rollover collision.
mendations. INFINITI retailer check and repair the
The pre-crash seat belt will not be active
PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH COM- system.
when the brake pedal is not depressed
FORT FUNCTION (if so equipped for except when sudden steering maneuvers THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
front seats) occur or the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
system activates.
The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat
belt with a motor to help restrain front seat The motor also retracts the seat belt when WARNING
occupants. This helps reduce the risk of the seat belt is fastened or unfastened.
. Every person who drives or rides in this
injury in a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, the motor
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
tightens the seat belt for a snug fit. When
The motor retracts the seat belt under the times.
the seat belt is unfastened, the motor
following emergency conditions: . Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt is not
. During emergency braking fully retracted, the motor retracts the seat seatback is reclined. This can be danger-
. During sudden steering maneuvers belt when the door is opened. ous. The shoulder belt will not be
could be thrown into it and receive neck tongue by inserting a suitable tool (such as
or other serious injuries. You could also a key) into the connector buckle * A . If the
slide under the lap belt and receive seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already
serious internal injuries. unbuckled, release the child by cutting the
. For the most effective protection when seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
be upright. Always sit well back in the
adjust the seat belt properly.
JVR0183X
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are equipped
with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes
wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR
mode activated, the child can be seriously
injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if the
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. For the center of the 3rd
row bench seat, the connector tongue * 1
may also be released. Release the connector

firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
SSS0292 SSS0290
Fastening the seat belts 3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips as shown.
1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in
this section.) 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack. Be
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the sure the shoulder belt is routed over
retractor and insert the tongue into the your shoulder and across your chest.
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. The three-point type seat belts have two
. The retractor is designed to lock modes of operation:
during a sudden stop or on impact. . Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
A slow pulling motion permits the . Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
belt to move, and allows you some The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
freedom of movement in the seat. mode allows the seat belt to extend and
. If the seat belt cannot be pulled retract to allow the driver and passengers
from its fully retracted position, some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull
vehicle slows down rapidly or during forward quickly. The retractor should
impacts. lock and restrict further belt movement.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) If the retractor does not lock during this
mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat check or if you have any question about
belt for child restraint installation. seat belt operation, see an INFINITI retailer.
When the ALR mode is activated the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt
returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information,
see “Child restraints” later in this section. SSS0326
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal Unfastening the seat belts
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR To unfasten the seat belt, push the button
mode should not be activated. If it is on the buckle. The seat belt automatically
activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat retracts.
belt tension.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
WARNING seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that seatbacks are completely secured in . When the belt is pulled quickly from the
the latched position. If they are not com- retractor.
pletely secured, passengers may be injured . When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
in an accident or sudden stop. To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:

SSS1109 SSS0391 SSS0241
Center of 2nd row seat (if so 3rd row center seat belt
equipped) The 3rd row center seat belt has a WARNING
Selecting correct set of seat belts: connector tongue * 1 and a seat belt
tongue * 2 . Both the connector tongue . Always fasten the connector tongue and
The center seat belt buckle is identified by the seat belt in the order shown.
and the seat belt tongue must be securely
the CENTER mark * A . The center seat belt
latched for proper seat belt operation. . Always make sure both the connector
tongue can be fastened only into the center
tongue and the seat belt tongue are
seat belt buckle.
secured when using the seat belt or
installing a child restraint. Do not use
the seat belt or child restraint with only
the seat belt tongue attached. This could
result in serious personal injury in case
of an accident or a sudden stop.

Stowing 3rd row center seat belt:
When folding down the 3rd row seat, the
3rd center seat belt can be retracted into a
stowed position.
1. Hold the connector tongue * 1 so that
the seat belt does not retract suddenly
when the tongue is released from the
connector buckle. Release the connec-
tor tongue by inserting a suitable tool
such as key * A into the connector
buckle.
2. Store the seat belt tongue into the
tongue holder *
B first *
2 .
3. Store the connector tongue into the

retractor base *
3 .
WARNING
Do not unfasten the 3rd center seat belt
connector except when folding down the 3rd
seat.
SSS1077 SSS1078

Attaching 3rd row center seat belt: connector is completely secured.
Always be sure the 3rd center seat belt . If the 3rd center seat belt connector and
connector tongue and connector buckle are the seatbacks are not secured in the
attached. Disconnect only when folding correct position, serious personal injury
down the 3rd row seat. may result in an accident or sudden
To connect the buckle: stop.
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the
retractor base *1 .
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the

tongue holder * B *2 .
3. Pull the seat belt and fasten the

connector buckle until it clicks *
3 . SSS1097
The center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle are identified by the and Storing 3rd row seat belt buckles
mark. Before folding down the seat, put the
The center seat belt connector tongue can buckles in the storage of the seat cushion
be attached only into the 3rd center seat to avoid dropping it under the seat
belt connector buckle. cushion.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the
seat belts” earlier in this section.
WARNING
. When attaching the 3rd center seat belt
connector, be certain that the seatbacks
are completely secured in the latched
position and the 3rd center seat belt

WARNING WARNING
. After adjustment, release the adjustment . Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made
button and try to move the shoulder belt by the same company which made the
anchor up and down to make sure it is original equipment seat belts, should be
securely fixed in position. used with the INFINITI seat belts.
. The shoulder belt anchor height should . Adults and children who can use the
be adjusted to the position best for you. standard seat belt should not use an
Failure to do so may reduce the effec- extender. Such unnecessary use could
tiveness of the entire restraint system result in serious personal injury in the
and increase the chance or severity of event of an accident.
SSS0896 injury in an accident. . Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
Shoulder belt height adjustment SEAT BELT EXTENDERS not secured properly, the child could be
(for front seats and 2nd row seats) If, because of body size or driving position, seriously injured in a collision or a
The shoulder belt anchor height should be it is not possible to properly fit the lap- sudden stop.
adjusted to the position best for you. (See shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
“Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in that is compatible with the installed seat SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
this section.) belts is available that can be purchased. . To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
To adjust, push the button * A , and then The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mild soap solution or any solution
move the shoulder belt anchor to the mm) of length and may be used for either recommended for cleaning upholstery
desired position, so that the belt passes the driver or front passenger seating or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and
over the center of the shoulder. The belt position. See an INFINITI retailer for assis- allow the seat belts to dry in the shade.
should be away from your face and neck, tance with purchasing an extender if an Do not allow the seat belts to retract
but not falling off of your shoulder. Release extender is required. until they are completely dry.
the adjustment button to lock the shoulder . If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
belt anchor into position. guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

CHILD SAFETY
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the tongue by inserting a suitable tool (such as
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry a key) into the connector buckle * A . If the
cloth. seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already
. Periodically check to see that the seat unbuckled, release the child by cutting the
belt and the metal components such as seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
wires and anchors work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other Children need adults to help protect them.
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be They need to be properly restrained.
replaced. In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, includ-
JVR0183X
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organiza-
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to
WARNING learn the best way to transport your child.
Do not allow children to play with the seat There are three basic types of child
belts. Most seating positions are equipped restraint systems:
with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . Rear-facing child restraint
mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes . Forward-facing child restraint
wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR . Booster seat
mode activated, the child can be seriously
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
becomes tight. This can occur even if the
and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
placed in rear-facing child restraints. For-
release the child. For the center of the 3rd
ward-facing child restraints are available
row bench seat, the connector tongue * 1
for children who outgrow rear-facing child
may also be released. Release the connector
restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens child restraint and are at least 1 year old
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who and children be restrained in the rear seat. should be secured in a forward-facing child
can no longer use a forward-facing child Studies show that children are safer when restraint with a harness. Refer to the
restraint. properly restrained in the rear seat than in manufacturer’s instructions for minimum
the front seat. and maximum weight and height recom-
This is especially important because your mendations. INFINITI recommends that
WARNING small children be placed in child restraints
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Infants and children need special protection. Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehi-
The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section. cle Safety Standards. You should choose a
properly. The shoulder belt may come too child restraint that fits your vehicle and
close to the face or neck. The lap belt may INFANTS always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
not fit over their small hip bones. In an tions for installation and use.
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
accident, an improperly fitting seat belt
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
could cause serious or fatal injury. Always LARGER CHILDREN
INFINITI recommends that infants be placed
use appropriate child restraints. Children should remain in a forward-facing
in child restraints that comply with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana- child restraint with a harness until they
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You reach the maximum height or weight limit
territories require the use of approved should choose a child restraint that fits allowed by the child restraint manufac-
child restraints for infants and small your vehicle and always follow the manu- turer.
children. See “Child restraints” later in facturer’s instructions for installation and Once a child outgrows the height or weight
this section. use. limit of the harness-equipped forward-
A child restraint may be secured in the facing child restraint, INFINITI recommends
vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower SMALL CHILDREN that the child be placed in a commercially
Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or Children that are over 1 year old and weigh available booster seat to obtain proper
with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly,
restraints” later in this section for more rear-facing child restraint as long as the booster seat should raise the child so
information. possible up to the height or weight limit that the shoulder belt is properly posi-
of the child restraint. Children who outgrow tioned across the chest and the top,
the height or weight limit of the rear-facing middle portion of the shoulder. The
CHILD RESTRAINTS
shoulder belt should not cross the neck or PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-
face and should not fall off the shoulder. STRAINTS
The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdo-
men. A booster seat can only be used in WARNING
seating positions that have a three-point
type seat belt. The booster seat should fit . Failure to follow the warnings and
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying instructions for proper use and installa-
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle tion of child restraints could result in
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehi- serious injury or death of a child or other
cle Safety Standards. Once the child has passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on — The child restraint must be used and
or near the face and neck, and the lap belt installed properly. Always follow all
can be positioned properly across the SSS0099 of the child restraint manufacturer’s
lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat instructions for installation and use.
belt without the booster seat.
— Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the
WARNING strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat — Do not put a seat belt around both a
and do not allow a child in the cargo area. child and another passenger.
The child could be seriously injured or killed
in a sudden stop or collision. — INFINITI recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
SSS0100 must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see “For-

ward-facing child restraint installa- restraint while in the vehicle. Several manufacturers offer child restraints
tion using the seat belts” later in this for infants and small children of various
. When the child restraint is not in use, sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
section.
keep it secured with the LATCH system keep the following points in mind:
— Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or
. Choose only a restraint with a label
Bag System, never install a rear- collision, loose objects can injure occu-
certifying that it complies with Federal
facing child restraint in the front pants or damage the vehicle.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
seat. An inflating air bag could
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
seriously injure or kill a child. A
dard 213.
rear-facing child restraint must only
be used in the rear seat.
CAUTION . Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the
— Be sure to purchase a child restraint A child restraint in a closed vehicle can vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
that will fit the child and vehicle. become very hot. Check the seating surface . If the child restraint is compatible with
Some child restraints may not fit and buckles before placing a child in the your vehicle, place your child in the
properly in your vehicle. child restraint. child restraint and check the various
— Child restraint anchor points are adjustments to be sure the child
designed to withstand loads from This vehicle is equipped with a universal restraint is compatible with your child.
child restraints that are properly child restraint anchor system, referred to Choose a child restraint that is de-
fitted. as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers signed for your child’s height and
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints weight. Always follow all recommended
— Never use the anchor points for include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- procedures.
adult seat belts or harnesses. ments that can be connected to these All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
— A child restraint with a top tether anchors. territories require that infants and small
strap should not be used in the front For details, see “Lower Anchors and children be restrained in an approved child
passenger seat. Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH)” later restraint at all times while the vehicle is
— Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- in this section. being operated. Canadian law requires the
sible after fitting the child restraint. If you do not have a LATCH compatible top tether strap on forward-facing child
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can restraints be secured to the designated
— Infants and children should always
be used. anchor point on the vehicle.
be placed in an appropriate child
positions only:
. 2nd row captain’s seats (if so equipped)
. 2nd row bench seat outboard positions
only (if so equipped)
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of child
restraints could result in serious injury or
SSS1113 SSS1114 death of a child or other passengers in a
LATCH system lower anchor locations - LATCH system lower anchor locations - sudden stop or collision:
captain’s seats bench seat
. Attach LATCH system compatible child
Lower Anchors and Tethers for restraints only at the locations shown in
CHildren System (LATCH) the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with special . Do not secure a child restraint in the
anchor points that are used with the LATCH center rear seating position using the
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint
system compatible child restraints. This will not be secured properly.
system may also be referred to as the . Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With your fingers into the lower anchor area.
this system, you do not have to use a Feel to make sure there are no obstruc-
vehicle seat belt to secure the child tions over the anchors such as seat belt
restraint. webbing or seat cushion material. The
The LATCH anchor points are provided to child restraint will not be secured
install child restraints in the following properly if the lower anchors are ob-

structed.
SSS1122 SSS1117
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A
label is attached to the seatback to help
you locate the LATCH anchors.

SSS0643 SSS0644 JVR0136X
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment 2nd row captain’s seat
The child restraint top tether strap must be
Installing child restraint LATCH used when installing the child restraint
lower anchor attachments with the LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include or seat belts. See “Top tether strap child
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments restraint” later in this section for installa-
that can be connected to two anchors tion instructions.
located at certain seating positions in your When installing a child restraint, carefully
vehicle. With this system, you do not have read and follow the instructions in this
to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the manual and those supplied with the child
child restraint. Check your child restraint restraint.
for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer. JVR0137X
2nd row bench seat

the center position. . 3rd row bench seat on the floor of the
cargo area behind the center seat
. Child restraint anchor points are de- position as shown.
signed to withstand only those loads
If you have any questions when installing
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
a top tether strap child restraint on the
straints. Under no circumstances are
rear seat, consult an INFINITI retailer for
they to be used for adult seat belts or
details.
harnesses.
. Do not allow cargo to contact the top REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-
tether strap when it is attached to the STALLATION USING LATCH
top tether anchor. Properly secure the Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the
cargo so it does not contact the top “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly tions before installing a child restraint.
SSS1073 secured or cargo that contacts the top
3rd row bench seat Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
tether strap may damage the top tether
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE- strap during a collision. Your child could
the LATCH system:
be seriously injured or killed in a
STRAINT collision if the child restraint top tether 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
If the manufacturer of your child restraint strap is damaged. Always follow the child restraint man-
requires the use of a top tether strap, it ufacturer’s instructions.
must be secured to an anchor point.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
WARNING locations:
. 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) on
. In the 3rd row bench seat, a child
the seatback of the outboard seating
restraint with a top tether strap can only
positions as shown.
be used in the center position. Do not
place in an outboard seating position . 2nd row captain’s seats (if so equipped)
and attempt to angle the tether strap to on the seatback of the outboard seating
positions as shown.

SSS1102 SSS1103 SSS0639
Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- 3. For child restraints that are equipped
tachments to the LATCH lower anchors. with webbing-mounted attachments,
Check to make sure the LATCH attach- remove any additional slack from the
ment is properly attached to the lower anchor attachments. Press downward
anchors. and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

applicable). Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat steps
1 through 4.
SSS0650 SSS0100
Rear-facing — step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-
it before you place the child in it. Push STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
it from side to side while holding the
child restraint near the LATCH attach-
ment path. The child restraint should WARNING
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward . The three-point seat belt with Automatic
and check to see if the LATCH attach- Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
ment holds the restraint in place. If the when installing a child restraint. Failure
restraint is not secure, tighten the to use the ALR mode will result in the
LATCH attachment as necessary, or child restraint not being properly se-
put the restraint in another seat and cured. The restraint could tip over or be
test it again. You may need to try a loose and cause injury to a child in a
different child restraint or try installing sudden stop or collision.
by using the vehicle seat belt (if

. When installing a child restraint system
in the 3rd center seat position, both the
center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle tongue must be secured. See “3rd
row center seat belt” earlier in this
section.
SSS0100 SSS0654
Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
“Child safety” earlier in this section and child restraint and insert it into the
“Child restraints” earlier in this section buckle until you hear and feel the latch
before installing a child restraint. engage. Be sure to follow the child
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing restraint manufacturer’s instructions
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts for belt routing.
in the rear seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the
seat. Always follow the restraint man-
ufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0655 SSS0656 SSS0657
Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the
fully extended. At this time, the seat the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear-
belt retractor is in the Automatic Lock- in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child
ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint restraint to compress the vehicle seat
mode). It reverts to the Emergency cushion and seatback while pulling up
Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when on the seat belt.
the seat belt is fully retracted.

7. Check to make sure that the child
restraint is properly secured prior to
each use. If the seat belt is not locked,
repeat steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the
“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-
SSS0658 tions before installing a child restraint. SSS0645
Rear-facing — step 6 Follow these steps to install a forward- Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2
6. After attaching the child restraint, test facing child restraint using the LATCH 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
it before you place the child in it. Push system: tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
it from side to side while holding the 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Check to make sure the LATCH attach-
child restraint near the seat belt path. Always follow the child restraint man- ment is properly attached to the lower
The child restraint should not move ufacturer’s instructions. anchors.
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to If the child restraint is equipped with a
side. Try to tug it forward and check to top tether strap, route the top tether
see if the belt holds the restraint in strap and secure the tether strap to the
place. If the restraint is not secure, tether anchor point. See “Installing top
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or tether strap (2nd row captain’s seats or
put the restraint in another seat and 2nd row bench seat)” later in this
test it again. You may need to try a section. Do not install child restraints
different child restraint. Not all child that require the use of a top tether
restraints fit in all types of vehicles. strap in seating positions that do not
have a top tether anchor.
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
SSS1104 SSS0647
Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Forward-facing — step 4
3. The back of the child restraint should 4. For child restraints that are equipped
be secured against the vehicle seat- with webbing-mounted attachments,
back. remove any additional slack from the
If necessary, adjust or remove the head anchor attachments. Press downward
restraint to obtain the correct child and rearward firmly in the center of the
restraint fit. If the head restraint is child restraint with your knee to com-
removed, store it in a secure place. Be press the vehicle seat cushion and
sure to reinstall the head restraint seatback while tightening the webbing
when the child restraint is removed. of the anchor attachments.
See “Head restraints” earlier in this 5. Tighten the tether strap according to
section for head restraint adjustment the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
information. move any slack.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or a headrest

the child restraint is loose, repeat steps
1 through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
. The three-point seat belt with Automatic
SSS0638 Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used SSS0640
Forward-facing — step 6 when installing a child restraint. Failure Forward-facing (front passenger seat) —
6. After attaching the child restraint, test to use the ALR mode will result in the step 1
it before you place the child in it. Push child restraint not being properly se- Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the
it from side to side while holding the cured. The restraint could tip over or be “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-
child restraint near the LATCH attach- loose and cause injury to a child in a tions before installing a child restraint.
ment path. The child restraint should sudden stop or collision. Follow these steps to install a forward-
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), . When installing a child restraint system facing child restraint using the vehicle seat
from side to side. Try to tug it forward in the 3rd center position, both the belt in the rear seats or in the front
and check to see if the LATCH attach- center seat belt connector tongue and passenger seat:
ment holds the restraint in place. If the buckle tongue must be secured. See “3rd 1. If you must install a child restraint in
restraint is not secure, tighten the row center seat belt” earlier in this the front seat, it should be placed in a
LATCH attachment as necessary, or section. forward-facing direction only. Move the
put the restraint in another seat and seat to the rearmost position. Child
test it again. You may need to try a restraints for infants must be used in
different child restraint. Not all child the rear-facing direction and, therefore,
restraints fit in all types of vehicles. must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. seating positions that do not have a top
Always follow the child restraint man- tether anchor.
ufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint or headrest to obtain the
correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint or headrest is removed, store
it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint or headrest when
the child restraint is removed. See SSS0360B
“Head restraints” earlier in this section Forward-facing — step 3
or “Headrest” earlier in this section for 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
head restraint or headrest adjustment, child restraint and insert it into the
removal and installation information. buckle until you hear and feel the latch
If the seating position does not have an engage. Be sure to follow the child
adjustable head restraint or a headrest restraint manufacturer’s instructions
and it is interfering with the proper for belt routing.
child restraint fit, try another seating If the child restraint is equipped with a
position or a different child restraint. top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point (rear seat installa-
tion only). See “Installing top tether
strap (2nd row captain’s seats or 2nd
row bench seat)” later in this section.
Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in
SSS0651 SSS0652 SSS0653
Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5 Forward-facing — step 6
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the
fully extended. At this time, the seat the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear-
belt retractor is in the Automatic Lock- in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child
ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint restraint with your knee to compress
mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt while pulling up on the seat belt.
is fully retracted. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.

the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps
2 through 8.
SSS0641 SSS1099
Forward-facing — step 8 Forward-facing — step 10
8. After attaching the child restraint, test 10. If the child restraint is installed in the
it before you place the child in it. Push front passenger seat, place the ignition
it from side to side while holding the switch in the ON position. The front
child restraint near the seat belt path. passenger air bag status light
The child restraint should not move should illuminate. If this light is not
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to illuminated, see “Front passenger air
side. Try to tug it forward and check to bag and status light” later in this
see if the belt holds the restraint in section. Move the child restraint to
place. If the restraint is not secure, another seating position. Have the
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or system checked by an INFINITI retailer.
put the restraint in another seat and After the child restraint is removed and the
test it again. You may need to try a seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
different child restraint. Not all child (child restraint mode) is canceled.
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP If you have any questions when installing
(2nd row captain’s seats or 2nd row a top tether strap on the rear seat, consult
bench seat) your INFINITI retailer for details.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (2nd row captain’s or
bench outboard seating positions only) or
the seat belt, as applicable.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
restraint or headrest to position the top
tether strap over the top of the seat-
back. If the head restraint or headrest
is removed, store it in a secure place.
JVR0136X Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or
2nd row captain’s seat headrest when the child restraint is
removed. See “Head restraints” earlier
in this section and “Headrest” earlier in
this section for head restraint or head-
rest adjustment, removal and installa-
tion information.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point on the back of each
seatback behind the child restraint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack. Make sure the head
restraint or headrest does not contact
JVR0137X the top tether strap.
2nd row bench seat

First, secure the child restraint with the BOOSTER SEATS
seat belt, as applicable.
Precautions on booster seats
1. Position the top tether strap over the
top of the center seating position
seatback. WARNING
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point on the floor behind the If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
child restraint. properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint
installation procedure steps in this . Make sure the shoulder portion of the
section before tightening the tether belt is away from the child’s face and
strap. neck and the lap portion of the belt does
SSS1073 not cross the stomach.
If you have any questions when installing
3rd row bench seat a top tether strap, consult your INFINITI . Make sure the shoulder belt is not
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (3rd retailer for details. behind the child or under the child’s
row bench seat) arm.
. A booster seat must only be installed in
a seating position that has a lap/
WARNING shoulder belt.
In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint
with a top tether strap can only be used in
the center position. Do not place in an
outboard seating position and attempt to
angle the tether strap to the center position.
The center position of the 3rd row bench

seat is the seating position that can use a
top tether strap.
seat is compatible with your child.
Always follow all recommended proce-
dures.
LRS0455 LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered . Make sure the child’s head will be
by several manufacturers. When selecting properly supported by the booster seat
any booster seat, keep the following points or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
in mind: or above the center of the child’s ears.
. Choose only a booster seat with a label For example, if a low back booster seat
certifying that it complies with Federal *1 is chosen, the vehicle seatback
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or must be at or above the center of the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- child’s ears. If the seatback is lower
dard 213. than the center of the child’s ears, a
. Check the booster seat in your vehicle high back booster seat * 2 should be
to be sure it is compatible with the used.

vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. . If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
booster seat and check the various
adjustments to be sure the booster

Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety”, “Child restraints” and
“Booster seats” sections earlier in this
section before installing a child restraint.
LRS0464 SSS0640
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or in the rear seat or in the front passenger 1. If you must install a booster seat in the
territories require that infants and small seat: front seat, move the seat to the rear-
children be restrained in an approved child most position.
restraint at all times while the vehicle is 2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
being operated. Only place it in a forward-facing direc-
The instructions in this section apply to tion. Always follow the booster seat
booster seat installation in the rear seats manufacturer’s instructions.
or the front passenger seat.

adjustable head restraint or a headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take up
extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
LRS0454 positioned across the top, middle por- SSS1099
Front passenger position tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s 7. If the booster seat is installed in the
3. The booster seat should be positioned
instructions for adjusting the seat belt front passenger seat, push the ignition
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
routing. switch to the ON position. The front
If necessary, adjust or remove the head passenger air bag status light may
restraint or headrest to obtain the 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and
or may not illuminate depending on the
correct booster seat fit. If the head instructions for properly fastening a
size of the child and the type of booster
restraint or headrest is removed, store seat belt shown in “Seat belts” earlier
seat used. See “Front passenger air
it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall in this section.
bag and status light” later in this
the head restraint or headrest when section.
the booster seat is removed. See “Head
restraints” earlier in this section or
“Headrest” earlier in this section for
head restraint or headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
RESTRAINT SYSTEM rollover supplemental air bag system: This position, the supplemental air bag warn-
system can help cushion the impact force ing light illuminates. The supplemental air
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to the head of occupants in front and rear bag warning light will turn off after about
section contains important information (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating positions 7 seconds if the systems are operational.
concerning the following systems. in certain side impact or rollover collisions.
. Driver and passenger supplemental In a side impact, the curtain and rollover
front-impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced air bags are designed to inflate on the side
Air Bag System) where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,
. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- the curtain and rollover air bags on both
mental air bag sides are designed to inflate. Under both
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and side-impact and rollover situations, the
rollover supplemental air bag curtain air bags will remain inflated for a
. Seat belt with pretensioner short period of time.
Supplemental front-impact air bag system: These supplemental restraint systems are
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can designed to supplement the crash protec-
help cushion the impact force to the head tion provided by the driver and passenger
and chest of the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for
in certain frontal collisions. them. Seat belts should always be cor-
rectly worn and the occupant seated a
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
suitable distance away from the steering
mental air bag system: This system can
wheel, instrument panel and door fin-
help cushion the impact force to the chest
ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this
and pelvis area of the driver and front
section for instructions and precautions on
passenger in certain side impact collisions.
seat belt usage.)
The supplemental side air bag is designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is The supplemental air bags operate only
impacted. when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

WARNING
. The supplemental front air bags ordina-
rily will not inflate in the event of a side
impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower
severity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
. The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
SSS0131
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
. The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of
position in any way, you are at greater
risk of injury or death in a crash. You
may also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the front air bag if you are up
SSS0132 against it when it inflates. Always sit
back against the seatback and as far-

away as practical from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Always use
the seat belts.
. The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt
usage then inflates the air bags. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
. The front passenger seat is equipped SSS0007 SSS0008
with occupant classification sensors
(weight sensors) that turn the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section.
. Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk of injury if the front air bag inflates.
SSS0006 SSS0009

WARNING
. Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
. Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain and rollover air bags
SSS0099 inflate if they are not properly re- SSS0832
strained. Pre-teens and children should
be properly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.
. Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System, never install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat. An inflating
front air bag could seriously injure or kill
your child. See “Child restraints” earlier
in this section for details.
SSS0100 SSS0833

supplemental air bags ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a front impact,
rear impact, or lower severity side
collision. Always wear your seat belts
to help reduce the risk or severity of
injury in various kinds of accidents.
. The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat. The side air bags
and curtain and rollover air bags inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
SSS0140 SSS0159 place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bags on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
WARNING rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen- extend their hand out of the window or
tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side- lean against the door. Some examples of
impact and rollover supplemental air bags: dangerous riding positions are shown in
the previous illustrations.
. The side-impact supplemental air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of . When sitting in the rear seat, do not
a front impact, rear impact, rollover, or hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
lower severity side collision. Always If the side air bags inflates, you may be
wear your seat belts to help reduce the seriously injured. Be especially careful
risk or severity of injury in various kinds with children, who should always be
SSS0162 of accidents. properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown in
. The curtain side-impact and rollover
the illustrations.

. Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bags inflation.

8. Diagnosis sensor unit
9. Occupant classification sensors
(weight sensors)
10. Occupant classification system con-
trol unit
INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-
TEM (front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passen-
ger’s advanced air bag system, please
observe the following items.
. Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat
to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
. Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9
lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint or in the seatback pocket.
. Do not store cargo behind the seat that
JVR0144X can press into the seatback.
1. Crash zone sensor 4. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- . Do not position the front passenger seat
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag plemental air bag modules so it contacts the rear seat. If the front
modules (INFINITI Advanced Air Bags) 5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact seat does contact the rear seat, the air
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags bag system may determine a sensor
and rollover supplemental air bag 6. Seat belt pre-tensioners malfunction has occurred and the front
inflators passenger air bag status light may
7. Satellite sensors
illuminate and the supplemental air

bag warning light may flash. This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI passenger, the occupant classification
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and sensors are also monitored. Based on
. If a forward facing child restraint is front passenger seats. This system is information from the sensors, only one
installed in the front passenger seat, designed to meet certification require- front air bag may inflate in a crash,
do not position the front passenger seat ments under U.S. regulations. It is also depending on the crash severity and
so the child restraint contacts the permitted in Canada. However, all of the whether the front occupants are belted or
instrument panel. If the child restraint information, cautions and warnings in this unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger
does contact the instrument panel, the manual still apply and must be followed. air bag may be automatically turned OFF
system may determine the seat is under some conditions, depending on the
occupied and the passenger air bag The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering information provided by the occupant
may deploy in a collision. Also the front classification sensors. If the front passen-
passenger air bag status light may not wheel. The passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag is mounted in the instru- ger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag
illuminate. See “Child restraints” earlier status light will be illuminated (if the seat
in this section for information about ment panel above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher is unoccupied, the light will not be
installing and using child restraints. illuminated, but the air bag will be off).
severity frontal collisions, although they
. Confirm the operating condition with the may inflate if the forces in another type of (See “Front passenger air bag and status
front passenger air bag status light. collision are similar to those of a higher light” later in this section for further
. If you notice that the front passenger air severity frontal impact. They may not details.) One front air bag inflating does
bag status light is not operating in inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle not indicate improper performance of the
accordance with the above description, damage (or lack of it) is not always an system.
please take your vehicle to your INFINITI indication of proper front air bag opera- If you have any questions about your air
retailer to check the passenger seat tion. bag system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITI
advanced air bag system. The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System retailer. If you are considering modification
. Until you have confirmed with your monitors information from the Air bag of your vehicle due to a disability, you may
retailer that your passenger seat ad- Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sen- also contact INFINITI. Contact information
vanced air bag is working properly, sors and the occupant classification sen- is contained in the front of this Owner’s
position the occupants in the rear sors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is Manual.
seating positions. based on the severity of a collision and When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
seat belt usage for the driver. For the front noise may be heard, followed by release of

smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does The front air bags operate only when the
not indicate a fire. Care should be taken ignition switch is in the ON position.
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
and choking. Those with a history of a position, the supplemental air bag warn-
breathing condition should get fresh air ing light illuminates. The supplemental air
promptly. bag warning light will turn off after about
Front air bags, along with the use of seat 7 seconds if the system is operational.
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the head and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating front
air bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide SSS1099
restraint to the lower body.
Front passenger air bag status light
Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the Front passenger air bag and status
driver and passenger seated upright as far light
as practical away from the steering wheel
or instrument panel. The front air bags
inflate quickly in order to help protect the
WARNING
front occupants. Because of this, the force
The front passenger air bag is designed to
of the front air bag inflating can increase
automatically turn OFF under some condi-
the risk of injury if the occupant is too
tions. Read this section carefully to learn
close to, or is against, the air bag module
how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat
during inflation.
belt and child restraints is necessary for
The front air bags deflate quickly after a most effective protection. Failure to follow
collision. all instructions in this manual concerning
the use of seats, seat belts and child
restraints can increase the risk or severity

of injury in an accident. Front passenger air bag: Front passenger seat adult occupants who
The front passenger air bag is designed to are properly seated and using the seat belt
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is as outlined in this manual should not
Status light: cause the passenger air bag to be auto-
operated under some conditions as de-
The front passenger air bag status light scribed below as permitted by U.S. regula- matically turned OFF. For small adults it
is located on the instrument panel. tions. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, may be turned OFF, however, if the
After the ignition switch is placed in the it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air occupant does not sit in the seat properly
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag bag and other air bags in your vehicle are (for example, by not sitting upright, by
status light on the instrument panel not part of this system. sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then otherwise being out of position), this could
turns off or illuminates depending on the The purpose of the regulation is to help
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
front passenger seat occupied status. reduce the risk of injury or death from an
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
The light operates as follows: the seat belt properly for the most effective
seat occupants, such as children, by
protection by the seat belt and supple-
. Unoccupied passenger seat: The requiring the air bag to be automatically
mental air bag.
light is OFF and the front passenger air turned OFF.
bag is OFF and will not inflate in a INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and
The occupant classification sensors
crash. children be properly restrained in a rear
(weight sensors) are on the seat cushion
. Passenger seat occupied by a small seat. INFINITI also recommends that appro-
frame under the front passenger seat and
adult, child or child restraint as out- priate child restraints and booster seats be
are designed to detect an occupant and
lined in this section: The light properly installed in a rear seat. If this is
objects on the seat. For example, if a child
illuminates to indicate that the front not possible, the occupant classification
is in the front passenger seat, the Ad-
passenger air bag is OFF and will not sensors are designed to operate as de-
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
inflate in a crash. scribed above to turn the front passenger
the passenger air bag OFF in accordance
air bag OFF for specified child restraints.
. Occupied passenger seat and the pas- with the regulations. Also, if a child
Failing to properly secure child restrains
senger meets the conditions outlined in restraint of the type specified in the
and to use the ALR mode may allow the
this section: The light is OFF to regulations is on the seat, the occupant
restraint to tip or move in an accident or
indicate that the front passenger air classification sensors can detect it and
sudden stop. This can also result in the
bag is operational. cause the air bag to turn OFF.
passenger air bag inflating in a crash

instead of being OFF. (See “Child re- may or may not be illuminated, depending becomes unoccupied, the air bag status
straints” earlier in this section for proper on the size of the child and the type of light will remain off.
use and installation.) child restraint being used. If the passenger If a malfunction occurs in the front
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, air bag status light is not illuminated passenger air bag system, the supplemen-
the passenger air bag is designed not to (indicating that the air bag might inflate tal air bag warning light , located in the
inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects in a crash), it could be that the child meter and gauges area will blink. Have the
placed on the seat could result in air bag restraint or seat belt is not being used system checked by an INFINITI retailer.
inflation, because of the object being properly. Make sure that the child restraint
detected by the occupant classification is installed properly, the seat belt is used Other supplemental front-impact
sensors. Other conditions could also result properly and the occupant is positioned air bag precautions
in air bag inflation, such as if a child is properly. If the passenger air bag status
standing on the seat, or if two children are light is still not illuminated, reposition the
on the seat, contrary to the instructions in occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. WARNING
this manual. Always be sure that you and If the passenger air bag status light will not . Do not place any objects on the steering
all vehicle occupants are seated and illuminate even though you believe that the wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
restrained properly. child restraint, the seat belts and the Also, do not place any objects between
Using the passenger air bag status light, occupant are properly positioned, the any occupant and the steering wheel or
you can monitor when the front passenger system may be sensing an unoccupied instrument panel. Such objects may
air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your become dangerous projectiles and cause
seat occupied. The light will not illuminate INFINITI retailer can check that the system injury if the front air bags inflate.
when the front passenger seat is unoccu- is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your retailer . Do not place objects with sharp edges
pied. on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
that your air bag is working properly,
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the objects on the seat that will leave
reposition the occupant or child restraint
passenger air bag status light is illumi- permanent impressions in the seat. Such
in a rear seat.
nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it objects can damage the seat or occupant
could be that the person is a small adult, The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System and classification sensors (weight sensors).
or is not sitting on the seat properly. passenger air bag status light will take a This can affect the operation of the air
few seconds to register a change in the bag system and result in serious perso-
If a child restraint must be used in the front
passenger seat status. However, if the seat nal injury.
seat, the passenger air bag status light
. Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot material around the air bag system. ment should also be done by an INFINITI
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can . Removing or modifying the front pas- retailer. The Supplemental Restraint
damage the seat or occupant classifica- senger seat may affect the function of System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should
tion sensors. This can also affect the the air bag system and result in serious not be modified or disconnected. Un-
operation of the air bag system and personal injury. authorized electrical test equipment and
result in serious personal injury. probing devices should not be used on
. Modifying or tampering with the front
. Immediately after inflation, several front the air bag system.
passenger seat may result in serious
air bag system components will be hot. personal injury. For example, do not . A cracked windshield should be replaced
Do not touch them; you may severely change the front seats by placing immediately by a qualified repair facility.
burn yourself. material on the seat cushion or by A cracked windshield could affect the
. No unauthorized changes should be installing additional trim material, such function of the supplemental air bag
made to any components or wiring of as seat covers, on the seat that is not system.
the supplemental air bag system. This is specifically designed to assure proper
to prevent accidental inflation of the air bag operation. Additionally, do not * The SRS wiring harness connectors
supplemental air bag or damage to the stow any objects under the front pas- are yellow and orange for easy
supplemental air bag system. senger seat or the seat cushion and identification.
. Do not make unauthorized changes to seatback. Such objects may interfere When selling your vehicle, we request that
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen- with the proper operation of the occu- you inform the buyer about the front air
sion system or front end structure. This pant classification sensors. bag system and guide the buyer to the
could affect proper operation of the front . No unauthorized changes should be appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-
air bag system. made to any components or wiring of ual.
. Tampering with the air bag system may the seat belt system. This may affect the
result in serious personal injury. Tamper- front air bag system. Tampering with the
ing includes changes to the steering seat belt system may result in serious
wheel and the instrument panel assem- personal injury.
bly by placing material over the steering . Work on and around the front air bag
wheel pad and above the instrument system should be done by an INFINITI
panel or by installing additional trim retailer. Installation of electrical equip-

The side air bags and curtain and rollover Side air bags, along with the use of seat
air bags are designed to inflate in higher belts, help to cushion the impact force on
severity side collisions, although they may the chest and pelvis of the front occupants.
inflate if the forces in another type of Curtain and rollover air bags help to
collision are similar to those of a higher cushion the impact force to the head of
severity side impact. They are designed to occupants in the front and rear (2nd and
inflate on the side where the vehicle is 3rd) outboard seating positions. They can
impacted. They may not inflate in certain help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
side collisions on the side where the However, an inflating side air bags and
vehicle is impacted. curtain and rollover air bags may cause
Curtain and rollover air bags are also abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags
designed to inflate in certain types of and curtain and rollover air bags do not
rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a provide restraint to the lower body.
SSS1092
result, certain vehicle movements (for The seat belts should be correctly worn
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM- example, during severe off roading) may and the driver and passenger seated
cause the curtain and rollover air bags to upright as far as practical away from the
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND inflate. side air bag. Rear seat passengers should
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM- be seated as far away as practical from the
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN- an indication of proper side air bag and door finishers and side roof rails. The side
TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS curtain and rollover air bag operation. air bags and curtain and rollover air bags
The side air bags are located in the outside inflate quickly in order to help protect the
When side air bags and curtain and
of the seatback of the front seats. The occupants. Because of this, the force of the
rollover air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise
curtain and rollover air bags are located in side air bags and curtain and rollover air
may be heard, followed by release of
the side roof rails. These systems are bags inflating can increase the risk of
smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
designed to meet voluntary guidelines to injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
does not indicate a fire. Care should be
help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- against, these air bag modules during
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
position occupants. However, all of the inflation. In a rollover, the curtain and
irritation and choking. Those with a history
information, cautions and warnings in this rollover air bags on both sides are
of a breathing condition should get fresh
manual still apply and must be followed. designed to inflate. Under both side-
air promptly.

impact and rollover situations, the curtain side air bag and curtain and rollover air not be modified or disconnected. Un-
air bags will remain inflated for a short bags. This is to prevent damage to or authorized electrical test equipment and
period of time. accidental inflation of the side air bag probing devices should not be used on
The side air bags and curtain and rollover and curtain and rollover air bag systems. the side-impact air bag system.
air bags operate only when the ignition . Do not make unauthorized changes to
switch is in the ON position. your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen- * The SRS wiring harness connectors
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON sion system or side panel. This could are yellow and orange for easy
position, the supplemental air bag warn- affect proper operation of the side air identification.
ing light illuminates. The air bag warning bag and curtain and rollover air bag When selling your vehicle, we request that
light will turn off after about 7 seconds if systems. you inform the buyer about the side air bag
the systems are operational. . Tampering with the air bag system may and curtain and rollover air bag systems
result in serious personal injury. For and guide the buyer to the appropriate
example, do not change the front seats sections in this Owner’s Manual.
WARNING
by placing material near the seatback or SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
. by installing additional trim material,
Do not place any objects near the (front seats)
seatback of the front seats. Also, do such as seat covers, around the side air
not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, bags.
etc.) between the front door finisher and . Removing or modifying the front pas- WARNING
the front seat. Such objects may become senger seat may affect the function of
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the air bag system and result in serious . The pretensioners cannot be reused after
side air bag inflates. personal injury. activation. They must be replaced to-
gether with the retractor and buckle as a
. Right after inflation, several side air . Work around and on the side air bag and
unit.
bags and curtain and rollover air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems
system components will be hot. Do not should be done by an INFINITI retailer. . If the vehicle becomes involved in a
touch them; you may severely burn Installation of electrical equipment collision but a pretensioner is not
yourself. should also be done by an INFINITI activated, be sure to have the preten-
retailer. The Supplemental Restraint sioner system checked and, if necessary,
. No unauthorized changes should be
System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should replaced by an INFINITI retailer.
made to any components or wiring of

. No unauthorized changes should be The pretensioner is encased with the seat
made to any components or wiring of belt retractor and buckle anchor. These
the pretensioner system. This is to seat belts are used the same way as
prevent damage to or accidental activa- conventional seat belts.
tion of the pretensioners. Tampering When a pretensioner activates, smoke is
with the pretensioner system may result released and a loud noise may be heard.
in serious personal injury. The smoke is not harmful, and it does not
. Work around and on the pretensioner indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
system should be done by an INFINITI inhale it as it may cause irritation and
retailer. Installation of electrical equip- choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ment should also be done by an INFINITI ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
retailer. Unauthorized electrical test After pretensioner activation, load limiters
equipment and probing devices should allow the seat belt to release webbing (if SSS1016
not be used on the pretensioner system. necessary) to reduce forces against the
. If you need to dispose of a pretensioner chest. SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI The supplemental air bag warning light LABELS
retailer. Correct pretensioner disposal is used to indicate malfunctions in the Warning labels about the supplemental
procedures are set forth in the appro- pretensioner system. (See “Supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in
priate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect air bag warning light” later in this section the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
disposal procedures could cause perso- for more details.) If the operation of the
nal injury. supplemental air bag warning light indi- SRS air bag
cates there is a malfunction, have the The warning labels * 1 are located on the
The pretensioner system may activate with system checked by an INFINITI retailer. surface of the sun visors.
the supplemental air bag system in certain When selling your vehicle, we request that
types of collisions. Working with the seat you inform the buyer about the preten-
belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt sioner system and guide the buyer to the
when the vehicle becomes involved in appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-
certain types of collisions, helping to ual.
restrain front seat occupants.

rollover air bag and pretensioner systems REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCE-
need servicing: DURE
. The supplemental air bag warning light The front air bags, side air bags, curtain
remains on after approximately 7 sec- and rollover air bags and pretensioners are
onds. designed to activate on a one-time-only
. The supplemental air bag warning light basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged,
flashes intermittently. the supplemental air bag warning light will
. The supplemental air bag warning light remain illuminated after inflation has
does not come on at all. occurred. Repair and replacement of these
Under these conditions, the front air bag, systems should be done only by an INFINITI
side air bags, and curtain and rollover air retailer.
bags or pretensioner systems may not When maintenance work is required on the
SPA1097 operate properly. They must be checked vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the curtain and rollover air bags, pretensioners
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING nearest INFINITI retailer. and related parts should be pointed out to
LIGHT the person conducting the maintenance.
The supplemental air bag warning light, The ignition switch should always be in the
WARNING LOCK position when working under the
displaying in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag hood or inside the vehicle.
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
systems, pretensioners and all related on, it could mean that the front air bag, side
wiring. air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and/or WARNING
When the ignition switch is in the ON pretensioner systems will not operate in an
position, the supplemental air bag warning accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or . Once a front air bag, side air bag or
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and others, have your vehicle checked by a curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,
then turns off. This means the system is retailer as soon as possible. the air bag module will not function
operational. again and must be replaced. Addition-
If any of the following conditions occur, the ally, the activated pretensioner must
front air bag, side air bag, curtain and also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner should be replaced by
an INFINITI retailer. The air bag module
and pretensioner system cannot be
repaired.
. The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
and rollover air bag and the pretensioner
should be inspected by an INFINITI
retailer if there is any damage to the
front end or side portion of the vehicle.
. If you need to dispose of a supplemental
air bag or pretensioner or scrap the
vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer.
Correct supplemental air bag and pre-
tensioner system disposal procedures
are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-
cedures could cause personal injury.

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit ................................................................ 2-3 Windshield wiper and washer switch................. 2-34

>
Instrument panel ................................................. 2-5 Washer operation ........................................ 2-35
Meters and gauges .............................................. 2-6 Rain-sensing auto wiper system................... 2-35
Speedometer and odometer ............................ 2-7 Rear window wiper and washer switch .............. 2-36
Tachometer...................................................... 2-8 Rear window and outside mirror
Engine coolant temperature gauge .................. 2-8 defroster switch ................................................ 2-37
Fuel gauge ...................................................... 2-9 Rear window and outside mirror defroster ... 2-37
Engine oil pressure gauge ............................... 2-9 Headlight and turn signal switch....................... 2-38
Voltmeter ...................................................... 2-10 Xenon headlights......................................... 2-38
Meter/ring illumination and needle sweep .... 2-10 Headlight switch .......................................... 2-38
Warning/indicator lights and Headlight washer (if so equipped) ............... 2-42
audible reminders ............................................. 2-11 Instrument brightness control ...................... 2-43
Checking bulbs.............................................. 2-12 Turn signal switch........................................ 2-43
Warning lights............................................... 2-12 Fog light switch ........................................... 2-44
Indicator lights .............................................. 2-18 Heated steering wheel ...................................... 2-44
Audible reminders ......................................... 2-21 Horn ................................................................. 2-45
Dot matrix liquid crystal display ........................ 2-22 Heated seats (if so equipped) ........................... 2-45
Operational indicators ................................... 2-24 Front............................................................ 2-46
Maintenance indicators ................................. 2-27 Rear............................................................. 2-46
Trip computer ................................................ 2-28 Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) .......... 2-47
Security systems ............................................... 2-31 Warning systems switch (if so equipped) .......... 2-48
Vehicle Security System ................................ 2-31 SNOW mode switch........................................... 2-49
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .............. 2-32 Tow mode switch .............................................. 2-49
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch (if Welcome light ................................................... 2-65
so equipped) ..................................................... 2-50 Battery saver system .................................. 2-65
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ......... 2-50 Interior lights .................................................... 2-66
Clock ................................................................. 2-51 Map lights ................................................... 2-66
Adjusting the time......................................... 2-51 Rear personal lights..................................... 2-66
Power outlet ...................................................... 2-52 Interior light control switch .......................... 2-66
Storage ............................................................. 2-54 Vanity mirror lights ........................................... 2-67
Cup holders .................................................. 2-54 Cargo light ........................................................ 2-68
Sunglasses holder......................................... 2-56 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...................... 2-68
Glove box...................................................... 2-57 Programming HomeLink® ............................. 2-69
Console box .................................................. 2-57 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
Tray............................................................... 2-58 customers and gate openers........................ 2-70
Coat hooks.................................................... 2-59 Operating the HomeLink®
Luggage hooks.............................................. 2-59 Universal Transceiver ................................... 2-71
Cargo floor box ............................................. 2-60 Programming troubleshooting ...................... 2-71
Roof rack....................................................... 2-60 Clearing the programmed information.......... 2-71
Windows ........................................................... 2-61 Reprogramming a single
Power windows ............................................. 2-61 HomeLink® button ....................................... 2-71
Moonroof........................................................... 2-63 If your vehicle is stolen ............................... 2-72
Automatic moonroof ...................................... 2-64
COCKPIT
— Hands-Free Phone System switch

6. Trip computer switch
7. Wiper and washer switch
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls
(right side)
— Cruise control system*
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-
tem*
9. Dynamic driver assistance switch*
— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
system*
— Distance Control Assist (DCA) sys-
tem*
— Blind Spot Intervention system*
10. Shift lever
11. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch*/
SNOW mode switch/TOW MODE
switch/Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF switch
12. Headlight aiming control*
JVC0444X 13. Power lift gate main switch
14. Warning systems switch*
1. Power lift gate switch* — Headlight
— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
2. Instrument brightness control switch — Turn signal
— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)*
3. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od- — Fog light
— Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
ometer 5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
15. BCI (Back-up Collision Intervention)
4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal side)
switch* or Power lift gate switch*
switch — Audio control steering switch
Instruments and controls 2-3

16. Electric tilting/telescopic steering
wheel switch
17. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF
switch*
*: if so equipped
2-4 Instruments and controls

INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Clock
8. Defroster switch
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
10. Fuse box
11. Parking brake
12. Hood release handle
13. Steering wheel
— Horn
— Driver supplemental air bag
— Power steering system
14. Push-button ignition switch
15. Climate controlled seat switch*/
Heated seat switch*
16. Remote tip-up 2nd row seat switch*
17. Heated steering wheel switch
18. Power outlet
20. Cup holder
21. Automatic air conditioning system
22. Audio system
SSI0733
23. Glove box
1. Side ventilator buttons *: if so equipped
2. Meters and gauges 6. Center display **: Refer to the separate Navigation
3. Hazard indicator flasher switch — Around View Monitor System Owner’s Manual.
4. Center ventilator — Navigation system**
5. Center multi-function control panel — DVD player operation
— Vehicle information and setting

METERS AND GAUGES
*: The needle indicators may move slightly

after the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position. This is not a malfunction.
CAUTION
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened
with water. Never use a rough cloth,
alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of
solvent or paper towel with a chemical
cleaning agent. They will scratch or
cause discoloration to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as water on
the meter lens. Spraying liquid may
cause the system to malfunction.
SIC4450
1. Tachometer* Odometer/twin trip odometer

2. Warning/Indicator lights 7. Engine oil pressure gauge*
3. Speedometer* 8. Fuel gauge*
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge*
5. Voltmeter*
6. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch *3 for more
than 1 second resets the trip odometer to
zero.
Average fuel economy and distance to
empty information is also available. (See
“Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later in
this section.)
SIC4369 JVI0543X
Speedometer Odometer/twin trip odometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Odometer/twin trip odometer
Speedometer The odometer * 1 and twin trip odometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed

*2 are displayed on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display when the ignition switch is
in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per in the ON position.
hour (km/h).
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display:
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch * 3 at the
bottom left of the combination meter panel
changes the display as follows:

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated,
continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section for immediate action
SIC4371 SIC4372
required.
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant
the engine into the red zone *
1 . temperature.
The engine coolant temperature is within
CAUTION the normal range when the gauge needle
points within the zone *
1 shown in the
When engine speed approaches the red illustration.

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine The engine coolant temperature varies with
speed. Operating the engine in the red zone the outside air temperature and driving
may cause serious engine damage. conditions.

is convenient, preferably before the gauge
reaches “0”. There will be a small reserve
of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge
needle reaches “0”.
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
SIC4374 SIC4375
After a few driving trips, the light
should turn off. If the light remains on
FUEL GAUGE after a few driving trips, have the vehicle ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel inspected by an INFINITI retailer. The gauge indicates the engine lubrication
level in the tank. . For additional information, see “Mal- system oil pressure while the engine is
The gauge may move slightly during function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in running. When the engine speed is high,
braking, turning, acceleration, or going up this section. the engine oil pressure is also high. When
or down hills. it is low, the gauge indicates the low (L) oil
pressure.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after
the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF The engine oil pressure is normal when the
position. gauge needle points within the zone * 1
shown in the illustration.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers “0” (Empty).
The low fuel warning appears on the
dot matrix liquid crystal display when the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it
METER/RING ILLUMINATION AND
CAUTION NEEDLE SWEEP
The ring illumination surrounding meters
. This gauge is not designed to indicate and gauges illuminates when the driver’s
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to door is closed after getting into the vehicle
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in with the Intelligent Key carried in.
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.) When the engine is started, the indicator
needles will sweep in the speedometer and
. If the gauge needle does not move with tachometer and the ring illumination will
the proper amount of engine oil, have be brightened gradually. This function can
the vehicle checked by an INFINITI be turned off. (See “Trip computer” later in
retailer. Continued vehicle operation in this section.)
such a condition could cause serious SIC4376
damage to the engine.
VOLTMETER
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, the volt meter indicates the
battery voltage. When the engine is run-
ning, it indicates the generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volt drop
below the normal range. If the needle is
not in the normal range (10.5 to 15.5 volt)
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that the charging system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked by an
INFINITI retailer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Intelligent Key warning light Exterior light indicator

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light
Lane departure warning light (orange)* Front passenger air bag status light
Automatic transmission check warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light
Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator
Master warning light
warning light light*
Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indica-
Preview Function warning light (orange)*
light tor light (green)*
Seat belt warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Inter-
vention (BSI) system warning light (orange)*
Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light
Brake warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light SNOW mode indicator light
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indi-

Charge warning light TOW mode indicator light
cator light*
Distance Control Assist (DCA) system warn- Automatic transmission position indicator
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
ing light (orange)* light
Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON indicator Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
Engine oil pressure warning light
light (green)* light
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD
Check suspension indicator light *: if so equipped
models)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
CRUISE indicator light*
warning light (orange)*

CHECKING BULBS WARNING LIGHTS Automatic Transmission (AT)
With all doors closed, apply the parking or Anti-lock Braking oil temperature warning light
brake and push the ignition switch to the This light illuminates when the Automatic
ON position without starting the engine.
System (ABS) warning light
Transmission (AT) oil temperature is too
The following lights will come on (if so When the ignition switch is in the ON high. If the light illuminates while driving,
equipped): position, the Anti-lock Braking System reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely
(ABS) warning light illuminates and then possible until the light turns off.
, or , , , , , ,
turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-
tional.
The following lights come on briefly and CAUTION
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
then go off (if so equipped):
the engine is running, or while driving, it
, or , , , , , , may indicate the ABS is not functioning Continued vehicle operation when the AT oil
, , , properly. Have the system checked by an temperature warning light is on may da-
If any light does not come on, it may INFINITI retailer. mage the AT.
indicate a burned-out bulb or an open If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
circuit in the electrical system. Have the function is turned off. The brake system Automatic Transmission (AT)
system checked by an INFINITI retailer. then operates normally, but without anti- park warning light (4WD models)
Some indicators and warnings are also lock assistance. (See “Brake system” in the
This light indicates that the Automatic
displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal “5. Starting and driving” section.)
Transmission (AT) parking function is not
display between the speedometer and engaged. If the transfer control is not
tachometer. (See “Dot matrix liquid crystal
Automatic transmission check
warning light secured in any driving position while the
display” later in this section.) AT shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position,
the transmission will disengage and the
ON position, the light comes on for 2
wheels will not lock.
seconds. If the light comes on at any other
time, it may indicate the transmission is If the AT park warning light illuminates
not functioning properly. Have your INFINITI with the shift lever in the P (Park) position,
retailer check and repair the transmission. shift the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift
switch to the AUTO, 4H or 4L position

again with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) Parking brake indicator: retailer promptly.
position. (See “INFINITI all-mode 4WD®” in When the ignition switch is in the ON Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
the “5. Starting and driving” section.) position, the light comes on when the indicator:
parking brake is applied.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ When the parking brake is released and
Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) sys- Low brake fluid warning light: the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both
tem warning light (orange; if so When the ignition switch is in the ON the brake warning light and the Anti-lock
position, the light warns of a low brake Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi-
equipped)
fluid level. If the light comes on while the nate, it may indicate the ABS is not
When the ignition switch is pushed to the functioning properly. Have the brake sys-
engine is running with the parking brake
ON position, the indicator light will first tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by
not applied, stop the vehicle and perform
illuminate in orange and turn green before an INFINITI retailer promptly. (See “Anti-
the following:
turning off. This indicates that the Blind lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind Spot Inter- 1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake
earlier in this section.)
vention (BSI) systems are operational. fluid is low, add fluid and have the
system checked by your INFINITI retai-
If the light comes on in orange and remains
ler. (See “Brake fluid” in the “8. WARNING
on, it may indicate that the BSW and BSI
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
systems are not functioning properly.
Although the vehicle is still driveable, have
tion.) . Your brake system may not be working
the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have properly if the warning light is on.
See “Blind Spot Warning/Blind Spot Inter- the warning system checked by an Driving could be dangerous. If you judge
ventionTM/Back-up Collision Intervention INFINITI retailer. it to be safe, drive carefully to the
systems” in the “5. Starting and driving” nearest service station for repairs.
Low hydraulic pressure warning indicator:
section. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
If the brake warning light illuminates when because driving it could be dangerous.
or Brake warning light the engine is running, or while driving with
. Pressing the brake pedal with the
the parking brake is released, check the
This light functions for both the parking engine stopped and/or low brake fluid
brake fluid level. If the brake fluid level is
brake and the foot brake systems. level may increase your stopping dis-
sufficient, it may indicate low hydraulic
tance and braking will require greater
pressure in the brake booster. Have the
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
brake system checked by an INFINITI
. If the brake fluid level is below the If the warning light illuminates, park the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, CAUTION
reservoir, do not drive until the brake restart the engine, resume driving and turn
system has been checked at an INFINITI on the DCA system again. Running the engine with the engine oil
retailer. If it is not possible to turn on the system pressure warning light on could cause
or the warning light stays on, it may serious damage to the engine almost
indicate that the system is malfunctioning. immediately. Such damage is not covered
Charge warning light Although the vehicle is still driveable by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
If the light comes on while the engine is under normal conditions, have the vehicle it is safe to do so.
running, it may indicate the charging checked at an INFINITI retailer.
system is not functioning properly. Turn
See “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system” Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warn-
the engine off and check the alternator
in the “5. Starting and driving” section. ing light (4WD models)
belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or
if the light remains on, see an INFINITI Engine oil pressure warning The warning light comes on when the
retailer immediately. light ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off
soon after the engine is started.
This light warns of low engine oil pressure.
CAUTION If the light flickers or comes on during If the 4WD system malfunctions, or the
normal driving, pull off the road in a safe diameter of the front and the rear wheels
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt area, stop the engine immediately and call are different, the warning light will either
is loose, broken or missing. an INFINITI retailer or other authorized remain illuminated or blink. (See “INFINITI
repair shop. all-mode 4WD®” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
Distance Control Assist (DCA) The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
system warning light (orange; if so Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See
equipped) CAUTION
“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and
This light comes on if there is a malfunc- do-it-yourself” section.) . If the warning light comes on while
tion in the Distance Control Assist (DCA) driving there may be a malfunction in
system. the 4WD system. Reduce the vehicle
speed and have your vehicle checked by
an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible. If it is not possible to set the system or the While the LDW and/or LDP system is on,
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the the light will blink in orange and a warning
. If the 4WD warning light turns on when system is malfunctioning. Although the chime will sound if the vehicle is traveling
driving on dry or hard surfaced roads: vehicle is still driveable under normal close to either the left or the right of a
— in the 4H(I) position, shift the 4WD conditions, have the vehicle checked at traveling lane with detectable lane mar-
shift switch to AUTO an INFINITI retailer. kers.
— in the 4L(O) position, stop the Intelligent Key warning light If the light comes on in orange and remains
vehicle and shift the transmission on, it may indicate that the LDW and LDP
shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) posi- After the ignition switch is pushed to the systems are not functioning properly.
tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to ON position, this light comes on for about Although the vehicle is still driveable, have
AUTO 2 seconds and then turns off. the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer.
This light warns of a malfunction with the See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Pre-
. If the warning light is still on after the
Intelligent Key system. vention (LDP) system ” in the “5. Starting
above operations, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon If the light comes on while the engine is and driving” section.
as possible. stopped, it may be impossible to start the
engine. If the light comes on while the Low tire pressure warning
engine is running, you can drive the light
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) vehicle. However in these cases, contact Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire
system warning light (orange; if so an INFINITI retailer for repair as soon as Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that
equipped) possible. monitors the tire pressure of all tires
This light comes on if there is a malfunc- except the spare.
Lane departure warning light
tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) The low tire pressure warning light warns
system.
(orange; if so equipped)
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
When the ignition switch is pushed to the TPMS is not functioning properly.
If the warning light comes on, park the
ON position, the light will come on in
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this
orange, turn green, and then turn off. This
restart the engine, resume driving and set light illuminates for about 1 second and
indicates that the Lane Departure Warning
the ICC system again. turns off.
(LDW) and Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
systems are operational.

Low tire pressure warning: For additional information, see “Dot matrix screen while driving, avoid sudden
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire liquid crystal display” later in this section, steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also in the “5. Starting and driving” section and a safe location and stop the vehicle as
appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” soon as possible. Driving with under-
display. If you select the tire pressure in the “6. In case of emergency” section. inflated tires may permanently damage
information in the display, the LOW PRES- TPMS malfunction: the tires and increase the likelihood of
SURE information will be displayed. The If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
tire pressure for each tire will also be low tire pressure warning light will flash for could occur and may lead to an accident
displayed. approximately 1 minute when the ignition and could result in serious personal
When the low tire pressure warning light switch is pushed ON. The light will remain injury. Check the tire pressure for all
illuminates, you should stop and adjust on after 1 minute. Have the system four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
the tire pressure to the recommended checked by an INFINITI retailer. The CHECK recommended COLD tire pressure shown
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if on the Tire and Loading Information
Loading Information label. The low tire the low tire pressure warning light illumi- label to turn the low tire pressure
pressure warning light does not automati- nates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. warning light OFF. If the light still
cally turn off when the tire pressure is illuminates while driving after adjusting
For additional information, see “Tire Pres-
adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5.
recommended pressure, the vehicle must you have a flat tire, replace it with a
Starting and driving” section.
be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 spare tire as soon as possible.
km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire WARNING is replaced, the TPMS will not function
pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. and the low tire pressure warning light
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap- . If the light does not illuminate with the will flash for approximately 1 minute.
pears each time the ignition switch is ignition switch pushed ON, have the The light will remain on after 1 minute.
placed in the ON position as long as the vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as
low tire pressure warning light remains soon as possible. possible for tire replacement and/or
illuminated. . If the light illuminates or LOW PRESSURE system resetting.
information is displayed on the monitor

. Replacing tires with those not originally . Loose fuel cap warning Seat belt warning light and
specified by INFINITI could affect the . Check tire pressure warning chime
proper operation of the TPMS. . Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) not The light and chime remind you to fasten
available warning (if so equipped) seat belts. The light illuminates whenever
. Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
malfunction warning (if so equipped) position, and will remain illuminated until
CAUTION
. Extended storage fuse warning (if so the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
. The TPMS is not a substitute for the equipped) same time, the chime will sound for about
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
check the tire pressure regularly. in this section. securely fastened.
. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of The seat belt warning light for the front
Preview Function warning light passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is
less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS (orange; if so equipped)
may not operate correctly. not fastened when the front passenger’s
The light comes on if there is a malfunction seat is occupied. For approximately 5
. Be sure to install the specified size of in the Brake Assist (with Preview Function) seconds after the ignition switch is in the
tires to the four wheels correctly. system. ON position, the system does not activate
If the warning light comes on, park the the warning light for the front passenger.
Master warning light vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — seats,
When the ignition switch is in the ON restart the engine, then resume driving. seat belts and supplemental restraint
position, the master warning light illumi- If it is not possible to set the system or the system” section for precautions on seat
nates if any of the following are displayed indicator stays on, it may indicate that the belt usage.
on the dot matrix liquid crystal display: system is malfunctioning. Although the
Supplemental air bag warning
. No key warning vehicle is still driveable under normal
light
. Low fuel warning conditions, have the vehicle checked at
an INFINITI retailer. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
. Low washer fluid warning
position, the supplemental air bag warning
. Parking brake release warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air
. Door/lift gate open warning bag warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the front-impact air bag and
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems manual.
systems and/or pretensioner seat belts are and/or pretensioner systems will not oper-
operational. INDICATOR LIGHTS
ate in an accident. To help avoid injury to
If any of the following conditions occur, the yourself or others, have your vehicle Adaptive Front lighting System
front air bag, side air bag, curtain and checked by a retailer as soon as possible. (AFS) indicator light (if so
rollover air bag and pretensioner systems equipped)
needs servicing and your vehicle must be
taken to your nearest INFINITI retailer. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) When the ignition switch is pushed to the
warning light ON position, the Adaptive Front lighting
. The supplemental air bag warning light System (AFS) indicator light will illuminate.
remains on after approximately 7 sec- The light will blink when the VDC system or
The light will turn off in about 1 second if
onds. the traction control system is operating,
the AFS is operational.
thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is
. The supplemental air bag warning light If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may
flashes intermittently. nearing its traction limits. The road surface
may be slippery. indicate the AFS is not functioning prop-
. The supplemental air bag warning light erly. Have the system checked by an
does not come on at all. When the vehicle dynamic control warning
INFINITI retailer.
light illuminates when the vehicle dynamic
Unless checked and repaired, the supple- See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)”
mental restraint system (air bag system) control system is turned on, this light
alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle later in this section.
and/or the pretensioners may not function
dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is
properly. Automatic transmission posi-
operating, for example the vehicle dynamic
For additional information, see “Supple- control or hill start assist system may not
tion indicator light
mental restraint system” in the “1. Safety be functioning properly. Have the system When the ignition switch is pushed to the
— seats, seat belts and supplemental checked by an INFINITI retailer. If a ON position, the indicator shows the shift
restraint system” section. malfunction occurs in the system, the lever position.
vehicle dynamic control system function In the manual shift mode, when the
WARNING will be canceled but the vehicle is still transmission does not shift to the selected
driveable. For additional information, see gear due to a transmission protection
If the supplemental air bag warning light is “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in mode, the AT position indicator light will
on, it could mean that the front air bag, side the “5. Starting and driving” section of this blink and a buzzer will sound.

See “Automatic transmission” in the “5. Cruise indicator light (if so Front passenger air bag status
Starting and driving” section for further equipped) light
details.
Cruise main switch indicator: The front passenger air bag status light
Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) This light illuminates when the cruise ( ) located on the instrument panel will
ON indicator light (green; if so control main switch is pushed. The light be lit and the passenger front air bag will
equipped) turns off when the main switch is pushed be OFF depending on how the front
again. When the cruise main switch in- passenger seat is being used.
The light comes on in green when the Blind
Spot Intervention (BSI) system is turned dicator light illuminates, the cruise control For front passenger air bag status light
on. The light turns off when the system is system is operational. (See “Cruise con- operation, see “INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
turned off. trol” in the “5. Starting and driving” System (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —
section.) seats, seat belts and supplemental re-
NOTE: straint system” section of this manual.
Cruise malfunction:
This light is common with the blind spot
If the cruise indicator light blinks while the High beam indicator light
warning light (orange). (See “Blind Spot
engine is running, it may indicate the This light comes on when the headlight
Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Intervention
cruise control system is not functioning high beam is on and goes out when the low
(BSI) system warning light” earlier in this
properly. Have the system checked by an beam is selected.
section).
INFINITI retailer. (See “Cruise control” in
For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning/ the “5. Starting and driving” section.) Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
Blind Spot InterventionTM/Back-up Colli- off indicator light (if so equipped)
sion Intervention systems” in the “5. Exterior light indicator
The light illuminates when the Intelligent
Starting and driving” section. This indicator illuminates when the head- Brake Assist (IBA) off switch is pushed to
light switch is turned to the AUTO, or OFF. This indicates that the Intelligent
Check suspension indicator position and the front parking lights,
light Brake Assist (IBA) system is not operating.
instrument panel lights, rear combination
When the ignition switch is placed in the lights, license plate lights or headlights are When the IBA off indicator light illuminates
“ON” position, the light comes on for 2 on. The indicator turns off when these while the system is turned on (without the
seconds. lights are turned off. warning chime sound), this light indicates
that the system control is temporarily
unavailable.
When the IBA off indicator light illuminates this section.) Technical and consumer information” sec-
with the warning chime sound while the For more details, see “Lane Departure tion.)
IBA system is turned on, this light indicates Warning (LDW)/Prevention (LDP) system ” Operation:
that the system may not be functioning in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
properly. Park the vehicle in a safe place. The malfunction indicator light will come
Check to see if the laser sensor is clean. Malfunction Indicator Light on in one of two ways:
Turn the engine off, then restart the (MIL) . Malfunction indicator light on steady —
engine. If the malfunction indicator light comes on An emission control system malfunc-
If the IBA off indicator light illuminates steady or blinks while the engine is tion has been detected. Check the fuel-
after following the procedures above, it running, it may indicate a potential emis- filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP
may indicate that the system is malfunc- sion control malfunction. warning appears in the dot matrix
tioning. Although the vehicle is still drive- liquid crystal display. If the fuel-filler
The malfunction indicator light may also cap is loose or missing, tighten or
able under normal conditions, have the come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose
vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer. (See install the cap and continue to drive the
or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. vehicle. The light should turn off
“Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system” in Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is
the “5. Starting and driving” section.) after a few driving trips. If the light
installed and closed tightly, and that the does not turn off after a few driving
Lane Departure Prevention vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) trips, have the vehicle inspected by an
of fuel in the fuel tank. INFINITI retailer. You do not need to
(LDP) ON indicator light (green; if so
equipped) After a few driving trips, the light have your vehicle towed to the retailer.
The light comes on in green when the Lane
should turn off if no other potential . Malfunction indicator light blinking —
emission control system malfunction ex- An engine misfire has been detected
Departure Prevention (LDP) system is
ists. which may damage the emission con-
turned on. The light turns off when the
system is turned off. If this indicator light remains on for 20 trol system.
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds To reduce or avoid emission control
NOTE: when the engine is not running, it indicates system damage:
This light is common with the lane that the vehicle is not ready for an 1) Do not drive at speeds above 45
departure warning light (orange). (See emission control system inspection/main- MPH (72 km/h).
“Lane departure warning light” earlier in tenance test. (See “Readiness for Inspec-
tion/Maintenance (I/M) test” in the “9.
2) Avoid hard acceleration or decelera- switch is in the ON position. For additional indicator light illuminates. (4WD models)
tion. information, see “Security systems” later For additional information, see “Vehicle
3) Avoid steep uphill grades. in this section. Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5.
4) If possible, reduce the amount of SNOW mode indicator light Starting and driving” section of this
cargo being hauled or towed. manual.
When selecting SNOW mode while the
The malfunction indicator light may
stop blinking and remain on.
engine is running, this light will illuminate. AUDIBLE REMINDERS
(See “SNOW mode” in the “5. Starting and
Have the vehicle inspected by an driving” section.) Key reminder chime
INFINITI retailer. You do not need to A chime will sound if the driver side door is
have your vehicle towed to the retailer. TOW mode indicator light opened while the ignition switch is pushed
This light will illuminate when the TOW to the ACC position. Make sure the ignition
MODE is selected while the engine is switch is pushed to the OFF position, and
CAUTION running. (See “Tow mode” in the “5. take the Intelligent Key with you when
Starting and driving” section.) leaving the vehicle.
Continued vehicle operation without having
the emission control system checked and Turn signal/hazard indicator Light reminder chime
repaired as necessary could lead to poor lights A chime will sound when the driver side
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
The light flashes when the turn signal door is opened with the light switch in the
possible damage to the emission control
switch lever or hazard switch is turned on. or position and the ignition switch
system.
in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Turn the light switch off when you leave the
Security indicator light off indicator light vehicle.
The light blinks when the ignition switch is The light comes on when the vehicle The chime will also sound for 2 seconds
in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This dynamic control off switch is pushed to when the ignition switch is turned to the
function indicates the security system OFF. This indicates that the vehicle dynamic OFF position with the fog lights on while
equipped on the vehicle is operational. control system is not operating. the headlight switch is in the AUTO
If the security system is malfunctioning, When the 4L position is selected with the position (if so equipped).
this light will remain on while the ignition Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch, the
VDC system is disabled and the VDC off
DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
Parking brake reminder chime . Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system

The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven — “INFINITI all-mode 4WD®” in the “5.
at more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the Starting and driving” section.
parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle . Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)
and release the parking brake. system
— “Blind Spot Warning/Blind Spot
Brake pad wear warning InterventionTM/Back-up Collision In-
The disc brake pads have audible wear tervention systems” in the “5. Start-
warnings. When a brake pad requires ing and driving” section.
replacement, it will make a high pitched . Cruise control system
scraping sound when the vehicle is in
— “Cruise control” in the “5. Starting
motion. This scraping sound will first occur
and driving” section.
only when the brake pedal is depressed. SIC4379 . Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
After more wear of the brake pad, the
sound will always be heard even if the The dot matrix liquid crystal display — “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-
brake pedal is not depressed. Have the appears in the vehicle information display tem” in the “5. Starting and driving”
brakes checked as soon as possible if the *1 located between the speedometer and section.
warning sound is heard. odometer, and shows the indicators for the . Distance Control Assist (DCA) system
driving systems, Intelligent Key operation — “Distance Control Assist (DCA) sys-
and various warnings and information. tem” in the “5. Starting and driving”
For detailed information about each sys- section.
tem, see the following sections: . Intelligent Key system
. Automatic Transmission (AT) — “Intelligent Key system” in the “3.
— “Warning/indicator lights and audi- Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ble reminders” earlier in this sec- ments” section.
tion. — “Push-button ignition switch” in the
— “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. “5. Starting and driving” section.
Starting and driving” section.

JVI0631X

OPERATIONAL INDICATORS 3. SHIFT “P” warning 5. Intelligent Key battery discharge
1. Engine start operation indicator This warning appears when the ignition indicator
switch is pushed to stop the engine with This indicator appears when the Intelligent
This indicator appears when the shift lever the shift lever in any position except the P Key battery is running out of power.
is in the P (Park) position. (Park) position. If this indicator appears, replace the
This indicator means that the engine will If this warning appears, move the shift battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent
start by pushing the ignition switch with lever to the P (Park) position or push the Key battery replacement” in the “8. Main-
the brake pedal depressed. ignition switch to the ON position. tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
2. NO KEY warning An inside warning chime will also sound.
6. Engine start operation for Intel-
This warning appears in either of the (See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- ligent Key system indicator
following conditions.
tion.) This indicator appears when the Intelligent
No key inside the vehicle: Key battery is running out of power and
The warning appears when the door is 4. “PUSH” warning when the Intelligent Key System and
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside This warning appears when the shift lever vehicle are not communicating normally.
the vehicle and the ignition switch in the is moved to the P (Park) position with the If this indicator appears, touch the ignition
ACC or ON position. Make sure that the ignition switch in the ACC position after the switch with the Intelligent Key while
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. SHIFT “P” warning appears. depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli-
Unregistered Intelligent Key: To push the ignition switch to the OFF gent Key battery discharge” in the “5.
The warning appears when the ignition position, perform the following procedure: Starting and driving” section.)
switch is pushed from the LOCK position SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the shift lever 7. Remote engine start indicator (if
and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog- to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the
ignition switch ? ignition switch position
so equipped)
nized by the system. You cannot start the
engine with an unregistered key. Use the is turned to ON) ? PUSH warning ? (Push This indicator appears when the engine
registered Intelligent Key. the ignition switch ? ignition switch has been started using the remote start
position is turned to OFF) function. To start the vehicle, depress the
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-
brake pedal and place the ignition switch
driving checks and adjustments” section
in the “ON” position.
for more details.

For more details, see “Remote keyless securely. The vehicle icon indicates which (switched on). When this warning appears,
entry system” in the “3. Pre-driving checks door or the lift gate is open on the display. push in (switch on) the extended storage
and adjustments” section. fuse switch to turn off the warning. For
12. Loose fuel cap warning more information, see “Extended storage
8. Parking brake release warning This warning appears when the fuel-filler fuse switch” in the “8. Maintenance and
This warning appears when the vehicle cap is not tightened correctly after the do-it-yourself” section.
speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler
parking brake is applied. cap” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and 15. Back-up Collision Intervention
adjustments” section.) (BCI) not available warning (if so
9. Low fuel warning equipped)
This warning appears when the fuel level in 13. Check tire pressure warning
This warning appears when the Back-up
the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it This warning appears when the low tire Collision Intervention (BCI) system is tem-
is convenient, preferably before the fuel pressure warning light in the meter illumi- porarily not available.
gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position. nates and low tire pressure is detected.
The warning appears each time the ignition For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning/
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining Blind Spot InterventionTM/Back-up Colli-
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light sion Intervention systems” in the “5.
the 0 (Empty) position. Starting and driving” section.
remains illuminated. If this warning ap-
10. Low washer fluid warning pears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire 16. Back-up Collision Intervention
This warning appears when the washer pressure to the recommended COLD tire
(BCI) malfunction warning (if so
tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. (See “Low tire pressure
equipped)
as necessary. (See “Window washer fluid”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” warning light” earlier in this section and This warning appears when the Back-up
section.) “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” Collision Intervention (BCI) system is not
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) functioning properly.
11. Door/lift gate open warning For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning/
(ignition switch is in the ON posi- 14. Extended storage fuse warning Blind Spot InterventionTM/Back-up Colli-
tion) (if so equipped) sion Intervention systems” in the “5.
This warning appears if any of the doors This warning may appear if the extended Starting and driving” section.
and/or the lift gate are open or not closed storage fuse switch is not pushed in

17. “TIMER” indicator indicator is displayed, the ICC system is If the BCI system is turned off using the BCI
This indicator appears when the set operational. switch, the BCI OFF indicator (SYSTEM OFF)
“TIMER” indicator activates. You can set The cruise control set indicator (SET) is appears.
the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip displayed while the vehicle is controlled by For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning/
computer” later in this section.) the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- Blind Spot InterventionTM/Back-up Colli-
trol mode of the ICC system. sion Intervention systems” in the “5.
18. Low outside temperature warn- Starting and driving” section.
For more details, see “Intelligent Cruise
ing Control (ICC) system” in the “5. Starting
This warning appears if the outside tem- and driving” section.
perature is below 378F (38C). The warning
can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip 21. Distance Control Assist (DCA)
computer” later in this section.) system switch indicator (if so
equipped)
19. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift
The indicator is displayed when the Dis-
indicator (4WD models)
tance Control Assist (DCA) system switch is
This indicator shows the Four-Wheel Drive pushed on. When the switch is pushed
(4WD) driving mode (AUTO, 4HI or 4LO) that again, the indicator disappears. While the
is selected by the 4WD shift switch. (See indicator is displayed, the DCA system is
“INFINITI all-mode 4WD®” in the “5. Start- operational. (See “Distance Control Assist
ing and driving” section.) (DCA) system” in the “5. Starting and
20. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) driving” section.)
system MAIN switch indicator (if so 22. Back-up Collision Intervention
equipped) (BCI) system indicator (if so
The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system equipped)
main switch indicator (CRUISE) is displayed The BCI ON indicator (SYSTEM ON) appears
when the ICC main switch is pushed. When when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
the main switch is pushed again, the position with the Back-up Collision Inter-
indicator disappears. While the CRUISE vention (BCI) system turned on.

MAINTENANCE INDICATORS yourself” section. Many factors including
tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and
1. Engine oil replacement indicator
road conditions affect tire wear and when
This indicator appears when the customer tires should be replaced. Setting the tire
set time comes for changing the engine oil. replacement indicator for a certain driving
You can set or reset the distance for distance does not mean your tires will last
changing the engine oil. (See “Trip compu- that long. Use the tire replacement indicator
ter” later in this section.) as a guide only and always perform regular
2. Oil filter replacement indicator tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire
checks, including tire pressure checks could
This indicator appears when the customer
result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
set time comes for replacing the oil filter.
could occur and may lead to a collision,
You can set or reset the distance for
which could result in serious personal injury
replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip compu-
or death.
ter” later in this section.)
3. Tire replacement indicator 4. “OTHER” indicator
This indicator appears when the customer This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for replacing tires. You set time comes for replacing items other
can set or reset the distance for replacing than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You
tires. (See “Trip computer” later in this can set or reset the distance for replacing
section.) the items. (See “Trip computer” later in
this section.)
WARNING More maintenance reminders are also
available on the center display. (See
SIC4325 The tire replacement indicator is not a “How to use INFO button” in the “4.
substitute for regular tire checks, including Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
tire pressure checks. See “Changing wheels recognition systems” section.)
and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

SIC4420
TRIP COMPUTER
Switches for the trip computer are located
on the right side of the combination meter
panel. To operate the trip computer, push
the switches as shown above.
*
A switch
*
B switch
ON position, modes of the trip computer
SIC4494
can be selected by pushing the switch
*A .
Each time the switch * A is pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel Resetting is done by pushing the can be driven before refueling. The dte is
consumption and speed ? Elapsed time switch *B for longer than 1 second. (The constantly being calculated, based on the
and trip odometer ? Distance to empty average fuel consumption is also reset at amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the
(dte) ? Outside air temperature (ICY) ? the same time.) actual fuel consumption.
Setting ? Warning check The display is updated every 30 seconds. The display is updated every 30 seconds.
1. Current and average fuel con- The first 30 seconds after a reset, the The dte mode includes a low range warning
display shows “——”. feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning
sumption
3. Elapsed time and trip odometer is displayed on the screen.
The current and average fuel consumption
mode shows the current and average fuel (MILES or km) When the fuel level drops even lower, the
consumption. dte display will change to “——”.
Elapsed time:
. If the amount of fuel added is small, the
2. Average fuel consumption (MPG The elapsed time mode shows the time
display just before the ignition switch
or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH since the last reset. The displayed time can
is pushed to the OFF position may
or km/h) be reset by pushing the switch *B for
continue to be displayed.
longer than 1 second. (The trip odometer is
Fuel consumption: also reset at the same time.) . When driving uphill or rounding curves,
The average fuel consumption mode shows the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
Trip odometer: momentarily change the display.
the average fuel consumption since the
The trip odometer mode shows the total
last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the 5. Outside air temperature (ICY — 8F
switch *B for longer than 1 second. distance the vehicle has been driven since
(The average speed is also reset at the the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing or 8C)
same time.) the switch * B for longer than 1 The outside air temperature is displayed in
second. (The elapsed time is also reset at 8F or 8C in the range of −22 to 1318F (−30
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
the same time.) to 558C).
At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a
reset, the display shows “——”. 4. Distance to empty (dte — MILES The outside air temperature mode includes
a low temperature warning feature. If the
Speed: or km) outside air temperature is below 378F
The average speed mode shows the The distance to empty (dte) mode provides (38C), the warning is displayed on the
average vehicle speed since the last reset. you with an estimation of the distance that screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located . TIMER OPTIONS:
in front of the radiator. The sensor may be Select this submenu to specify when There are 4 submenus under the display
affected by road or engine heat, wind the “TIMER” indicator activates. menu.
directions and other driving conditions. . ICY . BACK
The display may differ from the actual
Select this submenu to display the low Select this submenu to return to the top
outside temperature or the temperature
outside temperature warning. page of the setting mode.
displayed on various signs or billboards.
MAINTENANCE: . LANGUAGE
6. Setting There are 5 submenus under the main- Select this submenu to choose English,
Setting cannot be made while driving. A tenance menu. French or Spanish for display.
message “Setting can only be operated . UNIT
. BACK
when stopped” is also displayed on the Select this submenu to choose the unit.
Select this submenu to return to the top
dot matrix liquid crystal display.
page of the setting mode. . EFFECTS
The switch *
A and switch *B are
. OIL Select this submenu to turn on and off
used in the setting mode to select and the needle sweep function when start-
Select this submenu to set or reset the
decide a menu. ing the engine.
distance for changing the engine oil.
SKIP: . FILTER 7. Warning check
Push the switch *
A to move to the Select this submenu to set or reset the
warning check mode. SKIP:
distance for replacing the oil filter.
Push the switch *
B to select other . TIRE
Push the switch *
A to move to the
menus. warning check mode.
Select this submenu to set or reset the
ALERT: distance for replacing tires. Push the switch *
B to select other
menus.
There are 3 submenus under the alert . OTHER
menu. Select this submenu and set or reset DETAIL:
. BACK the distance for replacing items other This item is available only when a warning
than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. is displayed.
Select this submenu to return to the top
page of the setting mode. Select this menu to see the details of
warnings.

SECURITY SYSTEMS
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual
and audio alarm signals if someone opens
the doors, hood, or lift gate when the
system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that acti-
vates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
nents in all situations. Always secure your
SIC2133 vehicle even if parking for a brief period. SIC2045
Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the
Your vehicle has two types of security vehicle, and always lock it when unat- How to arm the vehicle security
systems, as follows: tended. Be aware of your surroundings, system
. Vehicle security system and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever 1. Close all windows.
. INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System possible.
The system can be armed even if the
The security condition will be shown by the Many devices offering additional protec- windows are open.
security indicator light. tion, such as component locks, identifica-
tion markers, and tracking systems, are 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF
available at auto supply stores and speci- position.
alty shops. Your INFINITI retailer may also 3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the
offer such equipment. Check with your vehicle.
insurance company to see if you may be 4. Close all doors, hood and lift gate. Lock
eligible for discounts for various theft all doors. The doors can be locked with
protection features. the Intelligent Key, door handle request
switch, power door lock switch or
mechanical key.
5. Confirm that the security indicator light tampered with again. INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
comes on. The security indicator light The alarm is activated by: SYSTEM
stays on for about 30 seconds. The
. Unlocking the door or opening the lift The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
vehicle security system is now pre-
gate without using the button on the will not allow the engine to start without
armed. After about 30 seconds the
Intelligent Key, the door handle request the use of the registered Intelligent Key.
vehicle security system automatically
switch or the mechanical key. (Even if Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
shifts into the armed phase. The
the door is opened by releasing the FCC Notice:
security light begins to flash once every
door inside lock knob, the alarm will
approximately 3 seconds. If, during this For USA:
activate.)
30-second pre-arm time period, the This device complies with Part 15 of the
. Opening the hood.
door is unlocked, or the ignition switch FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will How to stop an activated alarm following two conditions: (1) This device
not arm. may not cause harmful interference, and
The alarm will stop when a door is
Even when the driver and/or passengers unlocked by pushing the unlock button (2) this device must accept any interfer-
are in the vehicle, the system will activate on the Intelligent Key, the door handle ence received, including interference that
with all doors, hood, and lift gate locked request switch or using the mechanical may cause undesired operation.
with the ignition switch in the LOCK key, or when the ignition switch is pushed
position. When pushing the ignition switch NOTE:
to the ACC or ON position.
to the ACC or ON position, the system will Changes or modifications not expressly
If the system does not operate as de-
be released. approved by the party responsible for
scribed above, have it checked by an
compliance could void the user’s authority
Vehicle security system activation INFINITI retailer.
to operate the equipment.
The vehicle security system will give the For Canada:
following alarm:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
. The headlights blink and the horn Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
sounds intermittently. the following two conditions: (1) this
. The alarm automatically turns off after device may not cause interference, and
approximately 50 seconds. However, (2) this device must accept any interfer-
the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device. If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, see an INFINITI
retailer for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System service as soon as possible.
Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you
have when visiting an INFINITI retailer for
service.
SIC2045
Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on
the meter panel. It indicates the status of
the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.
The light blinks after the ignition switch
was in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position.
This function indicates the security sys-
tems equipped on the vehicle are opera-
tional.
If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

WARNING and water.
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
If the windshield wiper operation is inter-
tion may freeze on the window and obscure
rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
your vision which may lead to an accident.
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
Warm the window with the defroster before
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
you wash the window.
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately 1
minute, turn the switch on again to
CAUTION operate the wiper.
. Do not operate the washer continuously SIC4492

for more than 30 seconds.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
. Do not operate the washer if the
when the ignition switch is in the ON
reservoir tank is empty.
position.
. Do not fill the window washer reservoir
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
at the following speed:
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may *1 AUTO — operates the rain-sensing
permanently stain the grille if spilled auto wiper system. (See “Rain-sen-
while filling the window washer reser- sing auto wiper system” later in this
voir tank. section.)
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

*2 LO — continuous low speed operation
water to the manufacturer’s recom- *3 HI — continuous high speed operation
mended levels before pouring the fluid *4 MIST — one sweep operation of the
into the window washer reservoir tank. wiper
Do not use the window washer reservoir

WASHER OPERATION front *2 (High) or toward the rear *
3
To operate the washer, pull the lever (Low).

toward the back of the vehicle * 5 until . High — High sensitive operation
the desired amount of washer fluid is . Low — Low sensitive operation
spread on the windshield. The wiper will To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system
automatically operate several times. off, push up the lever to the OFF position,
The headlight washer (if so equipped) will or pull down the lever to the LO or HI
also operate with operation of the wind- position.
shield washer. (See “Headlight washer”
later in this section.)
CAUTION
Wiper drip wipe system:
The wiper will also operate once about 3 SIC4258
Do not touch the rain sensor and around it
seconds after the washer and wiper are when the wiper switch is in the AUTO
operated. This operation is to wipe washer position and the ignition switch is in the
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS-
fluid that has dripped on the windshield. ON position. The wipers may operate un-
TEM expectedly and cause to an injury or a wiper
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can damage.
automatically turn on the wipers and
adjust the wiper speed depending on the
. The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-
rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the
tended for use during rain. If the switch
rain sensor located on the upper part of
is left in the AUTO position, the wipers
the windshield.
may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, fingerprints, oil film or insects are
push the lever down to the AUTO position stuck on or around the sensor. The
*1 . The wiper will sweep once while the wipers may also operate when exhaust
ignition switch is in the ON position. gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be . The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
adjusted by turning the knob toward the operate if rain does not hit the rain

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
sensor even if it is raining. tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
. When the windshield glass is coated WARNING and water.
with water repellent, the speed of the
rain-sensing auto wipers may be high- In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
If the rear window wiper operation is
er even though the amount of the tion may freeze on the rear window glass
interrupted by snow etc., the wiper may
rainfall is small. and obscure your vision. Warm the rear
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
. Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing window with the defroster before you wash
occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and
auto wiper system when you use a car the rear window.
remove the snow etc. on and around the
wash. wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the
. Using genuine wiper blades is recom- switch ON again to operate the wiper.
mended for proper operation of the CAUTION
rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See
“Windshield wiper blades” in the “8. . Do not operate the washer continuously
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- for more than 30 seconds.
tion for wiper blade replacement.)
. Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
. Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reser-
voir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage
the rear window defroster.
SIC4259 SIC4385
The rear window wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR-
position. ROR DEFROSTER
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF To defog/defrost the rear window glass
position to operate the wiper. and outside mirrors, start the engine and
push the switch * 1 on. The indicator light
*1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-
*2 will come on. Push the switch again to
eration (not adjustable)
turn the defroster off.
*2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed
operation It will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Push the switch forward *
3 to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate
several times.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS It is generally desirable not to turn off

the headlights for short intervals (for
example, when the vehicle stops at a
WARNING traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
HIGH VOLTAGE
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
. When xenon headlights are on, they This way the life of the xenon head-
produce a high voltage. To prevent an lights is not reduced.
electric shock, never attempt to modify . If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
or disassemble. Always have your xenon burning out, the brightness will dras-
headlights replaced at an INFINITI retai- tically decrease, the light will start
ler. blinking, or the color of the light will
. Xenon headlights provide considerably become reddish. If one or more of the
SIC3267
more light than conventional headlights. above signs appear, contact an INFINITI
If they are not correctly aimed, they retailer.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
might temporarily blind an oncoming
driver or the driver ahead of you and Lighting
cause a serious accident. If headlights *
1 Turn the switch to the position:
are not aimed correctly, immediately The front parking, side marker, tail,
take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer license plate and instrument lights
and have the headlights adjusted cor- will come on.
rectly.
*
2 Turn the switch to the position:
Headlights will come on and all the
When the xenon headlight is initially
other lights remain on.
turned on, its brightness or color varies
slightly. However, the color and brightness
will soon stabilize.
. The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation.

The autolight system can turn on the
headlights automatically when it is dark
and turn off the headlights when it is light.
For US models: The headlights will also be
turned on automatically at twilight or in
rainy weather (when the windshield wiper
is operated continuously).
If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened
and this condition is continued, the head-
lights remain on for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay:
SIC3268 SAA0642A
You can keep the headlights on for up to
180 seconds after you push the ignition Be sure not to put anything on top of the
Autolight system
switch to OFF and open any door then close photo sensor * A located on the top of the
The autolight system allows the headlights all the doors. instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
to be set so they turn on and off trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
You can adjust the period of the automatic
automatically. photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF)
To set the autolight system: to 180 seconds. The factory default setting headlights will illuminate.
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the is 45 seconds.
AUTO position *1 . For automatic headlights off delay setting,
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON see “Comfort settings” in the “4. Monitor,
position. climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-
3. The autolight system automatically tion systems” section.
turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF, or position.

Battery saver system . Never leave the light switch on when the
A chime will sound when the driver side engine is not running for extended
door is opened with the light switch in the periods of time even if the headlights
or position and the ignition switch turn off automatically.
in the OFF or LOCK position.
When the headlight switch is in the or
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the lights will automati-
cally turn off after a period of time when
the ignition switch has been pushed to the
OFF position.
When the headlight switch remains in the
SIC3269 or position after the lights
automatically turn off, the lights will turn
Headlight beam select on when the ignition switch is pushed to
*
1 To select the low beam, put the lever the ON position.
in the neutral position as shown.
*
2 To select the high beam, push the
lever forward while the switch is in the CAUTION
position. Pull it back to select the
low beam. . When you turn on the headlight switch
again after the lights automatically turn
*
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash
off, the lights will not turn off auto-
the headlight high beam even when
matically. Be sure to turn the light
the headlight switch is in the OFF
switch to the OFF position when you
position.
leave the vehicle for extended periods of
time, otherwise the battery will be
discharged.

flat road, select position 0. running lights illuminate once the parking
brake is released. The daytime running
lights will remain on until the ignition
WARNING switch is pushed to the OFF position.
Xenon headlights are extremely bright
compared to conventional headlights. If WARNING
the xenon headlights hit the rearview mirror
of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of When the daytime running light system is
oncoming vehicle, the driver of these active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.
vehicles may have difficulty driving because It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
of the brightness. Use the headlight aiming headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
control switch to lower the light axis. See accident injuring yourself and others.
SIC2275 “Xenon headlights” earlier in this section
for additional information.
Headlight aiming control (if so Adaptive Front lighting System
equipped) (AFS) (if so equipped)
Daytime running light system (Ca- The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
Depending on the number of occupants in nada only) will automatically adjust the headlights
the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the
The daytime running lights automatically (low beam) toward the turning direction to
headlight axis may be higher than desired.
illuminate when the engine is started with improve the driver’s view. When the head-
If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road,
the parking brake released. The daytime light switch is ON and the driver operates
the headlights may directly hit the rearview
running lights operate with the headlight the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS
mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-
switch in the OFF position or in the system will be activated.
shield of the oncoming vehicle. The light
position. Turn the headlight switch to the The AFS will operate:
axis can be lowered with the operation of
position for full illumination when
the switch. . Right-side headlight
driving at night.
The larger the number designated on the — When the headlight switch is ON
If the parking brake is applied before the
switch, the lower the axis. — When the shift lever is in any
engine is started, the daytime running
When traveling with no heavy load or on a position other than P (Park) or R
lights do not illuminate. The daytime

(Reverse) HEADLIGHT WASHER (if so
— When the steering wheel is turned equipped)
clockwise The headlight washer operates when the
. Left-side headlight headlight is on and the ignition switch is in
— When the headlight switch is ON the ON position.
— When the shift lever is in any Pull the windshield washer switch toward
position other than P (Park) or R you. The headlight washer operates with
(Reverse) the windshield washer operation. This
— When the vehicle is driven at a operation activates once each time either
speed above 16 MPH (25km/h). the ignition switch or the headlight switch
However, when the vehicle’s speed is turned off and on.
decreases below 3 MPH (5 km/h) it After the first operation, the headlight
will stop. washer operates once at every fifth opera-
— When the steering wheel is turned tion of the windshield washer.
counterclockwise
AFS will also adjust the headlight to a
proper axis automatically, depending on CAUTION
the number of occupants in the vehicle, the
load the vehicle is carrying and the road . Do not operate the washer continuously
conditions. for longer than 30 seconds.
If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after . Do not operate the headlight washer if
the ignition switch has been pushed to the the window washer fluid reservoir is
ON position, this may indicate that the AFS empty.
is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by an INFINITI retailer. SIC3270
When the engine is started, the headlights
will vibrate to check the system condition.
This is not a malfunction.

instrument panel lights. The bar *
1 moves
to the − side. When reaching the minimum
brightness, “MIN” appears on the display
*3 . However, “MIN” does not appear
during the nighttime.
The dot matrix liquid crystal display
returns to the normal display under the
following conditions:
. when the instrument brightness control
switch is not operated for more than 5
seconds.
. when the or switch on the right
SIC4378 side of the combination meter panel is SIC3271
pushed.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON- TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
TROL *
1 Turn signal
The instrument brightness control switch
Move the lever up or down to signal the
can be operated when the ignition switch
turning direction. When the turn is com-
is in the ON position. When the switch is
pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-
operated, the dot matrix liquid crystal
cally.
display switches to the brightness adjust-
ment mode. *
2 Lane change signal
Push the upper switch * A to brighten the To indicate a lane change, move the lever
instrument panel lights. The bar *
1 moves up or down to the point where lights begin
to the + side. When reaching the maximum flashing.
brightness, “MAX” appears on the display If the lever is moved back right after
*2 .
moving up or down, the light will flash 3
Push the lower switch *
B to dim the times (if so equipped).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL
Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will turn off.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is above 688F (208C) when the
switch is turned on, the system will not
heat the steering wheel. This is not a
malfunction.
SIC3272 SIC4401
FOG LIGHT SWITCH The heated steering wheel system is

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight designed to operate only when the surface
switch to the position, then turn the temperature of the steering wheel is below
switch to the position. To turn them 688F (208C).
off, turn the switch to the OFF position. Push the heated steering wheel switch to
The headlights must be on for the fog warm the steering wheel after the engine
lights to operate. starts. The indicator light *
1 on the switch
will illuminate.
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, turning the fog light switch to the If the surface temperature of the steering
position will turn on the headlights, wheel is below 688F (208C), the system will
fog lights and the other lights while the heat the steering wheel and cycle off and
ignition switch is in the ON position or the on to maintain a temperature above 688F
engine is running (if so equipped). (208C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

WARNING should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot . When cleaning the seat, never use
monitor elevated seat temperatures or have gasoline, thinner, or any similar materi-
an inability to feel pain in body parts that als.
contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by . If any malfunctions are found or the
such people could result in serious injury. heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by an INFINITI retailer.
CAUTION
SIC4444
. The battery could run down if the seat
To sound the horn, push the center pad heater is operated while the engine is
area of the steering wheel. not running.
. Do not use the seat heater for extended
WARNING periods or when no one is using the
seat.
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so . Do not put anything on the seat which
could affect proper operation of the supple- insulates heat, such as a blanket,
mental front air bag system. Tampering with cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the
the supplemental front air bag system may seat may become overheated.
result in serious personal injury.
. Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.

3. To turn off the heater, push the “HI” or
“LO” side (whichever is selected) of the
switch. Make sure the indicator light
turns off.
SIC2770 SIC2770
FRONT REAR
The front seats can be warmed by built-in The 2nd row outboard seats are warmed by
heaters. The switches located on the built-in heaters. The switches located on
instrument panel can be operated inde- the back side of the center console can be
pendently of each other. operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine. 1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range. 2. Select heat range.
. For high heat, push the HI (High)
*
1 For high heat, push the HI (High)
side of the switch *1 . side of the switch.
. For low heat, push the LO (Low) side
of the switch * 2 .
*
2 For low heat, push the LO (Low) side
of the switch.
. The indicator light *
3 will illuminate
The indicator light in the switch *
3 will
when the heater is on.
illuminate when the heater is on.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so
equipped)
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch or cooled, and/or before you leave the
to the level position. Make sure the vehicle, be sure to turn the control
indicator light goes off. knob to the OFF position (center). The
The heater is controlled by a thermo- indicator light *
B on the control knob
stat, automatically turning the heater goes off at the OFF position.
on and off. The indicator light will To check the air filter for the climate
remain on as long as the switch is on. controlled seat, contact an INFINITI
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, retailer.
or before you leave the vehicle, be sure
to turn off the switch. WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
SIC4334
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
The climate controlled seat warms up or monitor elevated seat temperatures or have
cools down the front seats by blowing an inability to feel pain in body parts that
warm or cool air from the surface of the contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by
seat. The switches located on the instru- such people could result in serious injury.
ment panel can be operated independently
of each other.
1. Start the engine. CAUTION
2. Turn the control knob * A to the heat
side * 1 or to the cool side *2 . The . The battery could run down if the climate
indicator light *B on the control knob controlled seat is operated while the
will illuminate. engine is not running.
3. Adjust the temperature using the con- . Do not use the climate controlled seat
trol knob *
A . for extended periods or when no one is
using the seat.
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so
equipped)
. Do not put anything on the seat which ahead. (See “Forward Collision Warning
insulates heat, such as a blanket, (FCW) system” in the “5. Starting and
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the driving” section.)
seat may become overheated. The LDW system will sound a warning
. Do not place anything hard or heavy on chime and blink the lane departure warn-
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar ing light (orange) to alert the driver if the
object. This may result in damage to the vehicle is traveling close to either the left
climate controlled seat. or the right of a traveling lane with
detectable lane markers. (See “Lane De-
. Any liquid spilled on the seat should be parture Warning (LDW)/Prevention (LDP)
removed immediately with a dry cloth. system ” in the “5. Starting and driving”
. The climate controlled seat has an air section.)
filter. Do not operate climate controlled SSD0956 The BSW system will turn on the BSW
seat without an air filter. This may result indicator lights, located next to the outside
in damage to the system. The warning systems switch is used to turn mirrors, if the radar sensors detect a
. When cleaning the seat, never use on and off the warning systems (Forward vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn
gasoline, thinner, or any similar materi- Collision Warning (FCW), Lane Departure signal is activated in the direction of the
als. Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot Warning detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and
(BSW) systems) that are activated using
. If any malfunctions are found or the the BSW indicator light will flash. (See
the settings menu on the center display. “Blind Spot Warning/Blind Spot Interven-
climate controlled seat does not operate,
turn the switch off and have the system When the warning systems switch is turned tionTM/Back-up Collision Intervention sys-
checked by an INFINITI retailer. off, the indicator *
1 on the switch is off. tems” in the “5. Starting and driving”
The indicator will also be off if all of the section.)
warning systems are deactivated using the
settings menu.
The FCW system will sound a warning
chime and the vehicle ahead detection
indicator light blinks to alert the driver if
the vehicle is traveling close to the vehicle

SNOW MODE SWITCH TOW MODE SWITCH
position.
SIC4454 SIC4474
For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy TOW MODE should be used when pulling a
roads or slippery areas, push on the SNOW heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load.
mode switch. The SNOW mode indicator Driving the vehicle in TOW MODE with no
light will illuminate. When the SNOW mode trailer/load or light trailer/light load will
is activated, engine output is controlled to not cause any damage. However, fuel
avoid wheel spin. economy may be reduced, and the trans-
Push off the SNOW mode for normal mission/engine driving characteristics may
driving. feel unusual.
Push the TOW MODE switch to activate
TOW MODE. The indicator light on the TOW
MODE switch illuminates when TOW MODE
is selected. Push the TOW MODE switch
again to turn TOW MODE OFF.
TOW MODE is automatically canceled when
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) OFF VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
SWITCH (if so equipped) SWITCH
See “Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
SIC3844 SIC4455
The vehicle should be driven with the The vehicle should be driven with the
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system on Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on
for most driving conditions. for most driving conditions.
The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
will sound a warning chime to alert the VDC system reduces the engine output to
driver when the vehicle is traveling too reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
close to the vehicle ahead and will apply be reduced even if the accelerator is
the brake control if necessary. depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
To turn off the system, push the IBA OFF power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
switch. The indicator will illuminate. turn the VDC system off.
The IBA system will remain in the last ON To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
or OFF state it was left in until it is OFF switch. The indicator will illumi-
manually changed by pushing the IBA OFF nate.
switch. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. (See
CLOCK
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in phone and voice recognition systems”
the “5. Starting and driving” section.) section.
SIC3325
If the power supply is disconnected, the

clock will not indicate the correct time.
Readjust the time.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
1. To set the clock forward, push the
button *
1 .
2. To set the clock backward, push the

button *2 .
3. To move forward or backward faster,

push and hold the button more than 5
seconds.
For details about display clock adjustment
(if so equipped), see “How to use SETTING
button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

POWER OUTLET
CAUTION
. Use power outlet with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
. Avoid using power outlet when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned OFF.
. When not in use, be sure to close the SIC4445 SIC4456
cap. Do not allow water or any liquid to Instrument panel Back side of front console
contact the outlet.
SIC4453 SIC4391
Center console Luggage room

Type A
The power outlet is used for powering
electrical accessories such as cellular
telephones.
CAUTION
. The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
. Do not use with accessories that exceed
a combined power draw of 12 volts,
120W (10A) for all the power outlets. Do SIC2648 SIC4451
not use double adapters or more than
Main switch Power outlet
one electrical accessory.
Type B (if so equipped) Pull up the cover and plug in.
. This power outlet is not designed for use
The power outlet (plug type) is located on After using the power outlet, be sure to
with a cigarette lighter unit.
the back side of the front console. It can turn off the main switch.
. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If operate when the ignition switch in the ON
good contact is not made, the plug may position and the main switch (located in
overheat or the internal temperature the console box) is ON. CAUTION
fuse may blow.
The specification of this power outlet is for
. Do not use with accessories that exceed
use of a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power
a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power draw.
draw.
. Use this power outlet with the engine
To turn on or off the power supply to the
running. (If the engine is stopped, this
outlet, push the ON * 1 or OFF *2 side of
could result in a discharged battery.)
the main switch. When the switch is turned
to the ON position, the indicator light *A
will illuminate.

STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS The cap of the bottle can be placed on *

3 .
A small beverage can be placed in the cup

holder *4 .
CAUTION
The cup holder is not designed to store
. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when personal items.
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
. Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
. Do not recline the rear seatback when
you use the cup holders on the rear
armrest. Doing so may cause the bev-
erages to spill over, and if they are hot,
they may scald the passengers.
SIC4495
Front
To open the cup holder, push the lid *
1 .
To close, lower the cup holder lid and push

it down lightly.
Pull up the inside tray *
2 and remove it for
a larger container or cleaning.

SIC3118 SIC2915 SIC4419
Type A Type B
Type B: 3rd row seat
2nd row seat
Type A: To open the cup holder, pull the lid.
To open the cup holder, push the lid *
1 .
The flap will be folded down when insert-

ing a large container.
To close, lower the cup holder lid and push
it down lightly.
To clean the front cup holder, pull up the
inside tray *
2 and remove it.
The cup holder is not designed to store

personal items.

. Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses
holder while parking in direct sunlight.
The heat may damage the glasses.
SIC4501 SIC3246
Soft bottle holder SUNGLASSES HOLDER
CAUTION WARNING
. Do not use bottle holder for any other Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
objects that could be thrown about in driving to prevent an accident.
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident. To open the sunglasses holder, push *
1 .
. Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
CAUTION
. Do not use for anything other than
glasses.

checks and adjustments” section.
SIC4393 SIC4470
Front
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE BOX
WARNING Front
To open the console box, push up the knob
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to *A and pull up the lid.
help prevent injury in an accident or a To close, push the lid down until latched.
sudden stop.
To open the glove box, pull the handle *

1 .
To close, push the lid in until the lock

latches.
To lock *
2 /unlock * 3 the glove box, use
the mechanical key. For the mechanical key
usage, see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving
SIC4422 SIC4423 SIC4493
Rear (if so equipped) Pocket: TRAY

To open the lid, push the knob up *
A and To open the pocket, pull the knob *
1 . To open the tray, push the lid *
1 . To close,
pull up the lid. To close, push the lid until the lock latches. push the lid down.
To close, push the lid down until the lock The USB and/or iPod® connector port is
latches. located inside the tray. (See “Audio sys-
tem” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems”
section or “iPod® player operation” in the
“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section.)

injured or killed.
. Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
. The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in the
cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.
. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
SIC3505 SIC4446
COAT HOOKS LUGGAGE HOOKS

The coat hooks are equipped at the rear CAUTION
assist grips. WARNING Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb
(10 kg) *A or 7 lb (3 kg) * B to the hook.
CAUTION . Always make sure that the cargo is
properly secured. Use the suitable ropes
Do not place items which are more than 2 lb and hooks.
(1 kg) on the hook. . Unsecured cargo can become dangerous
in an accident or sudden stop.
. Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously

driver’s door pillar). For more information
regarding GVWR and GAWR, see “Vehicle
loading information” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.
WARNING
. Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
roof rack.
JVI0309X SIC4447 . Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
CARGO FLOOR BOX ROOF RACK and handling during sudden or unusual
Push the handle to open the cargo floor Always distribute the luggage evenly on handling maneuvers.
board *1 . the roof rack. Do not load more than 221 lb . Roof rack load should be evenly dis-
(100 kg) on the roof rails. Observe the tributed.
maximum load limit shown on the cross-
. Do not exceed maximum roof rack load
bars or roof carriers when you attach them
on the roof rails. Contact an INFINITI weight capacity.
retailer for crossbar or other equipment . Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
information. straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
Be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and
GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.
M.S.S. certification label (located on the
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing items
WARNING
from the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably . Make sure that all passengers have their
lift the items onto the roof rack from the hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is
ground, use a ladder or stool. in motion and before closing the win-
dows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
. Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly
activate switches or controls and be- SIC4352
come trapped in the window. Unat- 1. Driver side window
tended children could become involved 2. Front passenger side window
3. Rear left passenger side window
The power windows operate when the 4. Rear right passenger side window
ignition switch is in the ON position or for 5. Window lock button
about 45 seconds after the ignition switch Main power window switch (driver’s
is pushed to the OFF position. If the
side)
driver’s or front passenger’s door is
opened during this period of about 45 To open or close the window, push down
seconds, power to the windows is can- *A or pull up * B the switch and hold it.
celed. The main switch (driver side switches) will

open or close all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the lock button * C is pushed in, only
the driver side window can be opened or
closed. Push it in again to cancel.
SIC4353 SIC4354
Passenger side power window Automatic operation

switch To fully open or close the window, com-
The passenger side switch will open or pletely push down or pull up the switch
close only the corresponding window. To and release it; it need not be held. The
open or close the window, push down or window will automatically open or close all
pull up the switch and hold it. the way. To stop the window, just push or
lift the switch in the opposite direction.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause
the window to open or close until the
switch is released.

MOONROOF
Auto reverse function If the windows do not close auto-

matically WARNING
WARNING If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly, . In an accident you could be thrown from
perform the following procedure to initi- the vehicle through an open moonroof.
There are some small distances immediately
alize the power window system. Always use seat belts and child re-
before the closed position which cannot be
straints.
detected. Make sure that all passengers 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON
have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle position. . Do not allow anyone to stand up or
before closing the window. extend any portion of their body out of
2. Close the door.
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
3. Open the window completely by oper- is in motion or while the moonroof is
If the control unit detects something ating the power window switch. closing.
caught in the window as it is closing, the
window will be immediately lowered. 4. Pull the power window switch and hold
it to close the window, and then hold
The auto reverse function can be activated the switch more than 3 seconds after
when the window is closed by automatic CAUTION
the window is closed completely.
operation when the ignition switch is in the
ON position or for 45 seconds after the 5. Release the power window switch. . Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
ignition switch is pushed to the OFF Operate the window by the automatic from the moonroof before opening.
position. function to confirm the initialization is . Do not place any heavy object on the
complete. moonroof or surrounding area.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for
be activated if an impact or load similar to other windows.
something being caught in the window If the power window automatic function
occurs. does not operate properly after performing
the procedure above, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI retailer.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF moonroof switch and release it; it need not
The moonroof only operates when the be held. The roof will automatically open or
ignition switch is in the ON position. close all the way. To stop the roof, push the
switch once more while it is opening or
The automatic moonroof is operational for closing.
about 45 seconds, even if the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the Auto reverse function
driver’s door or the passenger’s door is
opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the moonroof is can- WARNING
celed.
There are some small distances immediately
before the closed position which cannot be
SIC3243
detected. Make sure that all passengers
have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
Sunshade before closing the moonroof.
The sunshade will open automatically
If the control unit detects something
when the moonroof is opened. However,
caught in the moonroof when it is closing,
it must be closed manually.
the moonroof will be immediately opened.
Tilting the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then when the moonroof is closed by automatic
push the UP * 1 side of the moonroof operation when the ignition switch is in the
switch and release it; it need not be held. ON position or for about 45 seconds after
To tilt down the moonroof, push the DOWN the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
*2 side. position.
If the moonroof cannot be closed auto-
Sliding the moonroof
matically when the auto reverse function
To fully open or close the moonroof, push activates due to a malfunction, push and
the OPEN * 2 or CLOSE * 1 side of the hold the CLOSE * 1 side of the moonroof

WELCOME LIGHT
switch. the puddle light * A and the passenger

Depending on the environment or driving cabin illumination will illuminate when you
conditions, the auto reverse function may approach the vehicle with the Intelligent
be activated if an impact or load similar to Key (within approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) of
something being caught in the moonroof the antenna built inside the door handles)
occurs. and the following conditions are met.
. All doors are closed and locked.
If the moonroof does not operate . The ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF
If the moonroof does not operate properly, position.
perform the following procedure to initi- . The Intelligent Key is outside the
alize the moonroof operation system. vehicle.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by . The puddle light operates within a set
repeatedly pushing the CLOSE * 1 side
SIC3642 duration.
of the moonroof switch.
2. Push and hold the CLOSE * 1 side of To activate or deactivate the welcome light BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
the moonroof switch to tilt the moon- function, perform the following procedure. The welcome light function will be deacti-
roof up. 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON vated automatically to prevent battery
position. discharge under the following conditions.
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
To activate the welcome light function
moonroof moves slightly up and down. 2. Open the driver’s side door.
again, unlock any door.
4. Push and hold the OPEN * 2 side of the 3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition
. If the welcome light function does not
moonroof switch to fully tilt the moon- switch is pushed to the ON position,
operate within a set duration. Note that
roof down. push the door open request switch on
the duration is set to 9 days as the
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates the driver’s side door handle for more
factory default setting.
normally. than 5 seconds with the driver’s door
open. . If the welcome light function is acti-
If the moonroof does not operate properly vated 15 consecutive times when you
after performing the procedure above, have 4. A chime sounds when the setting is approach and leave the vehicle with the
your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer. completed. Intelligent Key without the doors being
Once the welcome light function is active, unlocked.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
SIC3249 SIC3250 SIC3251
MAP LIGHTS REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Push the button as illustrated to turn the Push the button as illustrated to turn the The interior light control switch has three
light on or off. light on or off. positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.
ON position
When the switch is in the ON position * 1
the map lights and rear personal lights will
illuminate.
DOOR position
When the switch is in the DOOR position
*2 , the map lights and rear personal lights
will illuminate under the following condi-
tions:

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
. ignition switch is switched to the LOCK illuminate under the following condition:
or OFF position . any door is opened with the ignition
— remain on for about 15 seconds. switch in any position
. doors are unlocked by pushing the — remain on while the door is opened.
UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key When the door is closed, the lights
or door handle request switch with the go off.
ignition switch in the LOCK or OFF
position OFF position
— remain on for about 15 seconds. When the switch is in the OFF position * 3 ,
. any door is opened and then closed the lights will not illuminate, regardless of
with the ignition switch in the LOCK or the condition.
OFF position
— remain on for about 15 seconds. CAUTION SIC4448
. any door is opened with the ignition The light on the vanity mirror will turn on
switch in the ACC or ON position Do not use for extended periods of time with when the cover on the vanity mirror is
— remain on while the door is opened. the engine stopped. This could result in a opened.
When the door is closed, the lights discharged battery.
When the cover is closed, the light will turn
go off.
off.
The lights will also turn off after a period
of time when the lights remain illuminated The lights will also turn off after a period
after the ignition switch has been pushed of time when the lights remain illuminated
to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the to prevent the battery from becoming
battery from becoming discharged. discharged.
When the auto interior illumination is set
to the OFF position (see “Vehicle informa-
tion and settings” in the “4. Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-
tion systems” section), the lights will

CARGO LIGHT HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the WARNING
functions of up to three individual hand-
held transmitters into one built-in device. . Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: Transceiver with any garage door opener
. Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) that lacks safety stop and reverse
devices such as garage doors, gates, features as required by federal safety
home and office lighting, entry door standards. (These standards became
locks and security systems. effective for opener models manufac-
tured after April 1, 1982). A garage door
. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
opener which cannot detect an object in
separate batteries are required. If the
the path of a closing garage door and
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is
then automatically stop and reverse,
SIC4418 disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all
does not meet current federal safety
programming.
The cargo light switch has three positions: standards. Using a garage door opener
When the HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
ON *1 , center *2 and OFF * 3 . without these features increases the risk
ver is programmed, retain the original of serious injury or death.
ON position transmitter for future programming proce-
.
When the switch is in the ON position *
1 , dures (Example: new vehicle purchases). During the programming procedure your
garage door or security gate will open
the cargo light will illuminate. Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons and close (if the transmitter is within
Center position range). Make sure that people or objects
should be erased for security purposes.
When the switch is in the center position For additional information, refer to “Pro- are clear of the garage door, gate, etc.
*
2 , the cargo light will illuminate when the
gramming HomeLink®” later in this sec- that you are programming.
lift gate is opened. tion. . Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
OFF position off while programming the HomeLink®
When the switch is in the OFF position *
3 , Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe
the cargo light will not illuminate. exhaust gases; they contain colorless
and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon
monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death. customers and gate openers” later in
this section.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site
at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
NOTE:
It is also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
t h e d e v i c e b e i n g p ro g r a m m e d t o JVI0428X
HomeLink® for quicker programming and
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
accurate transmission of the radio-fre-
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
quency.
button and handheld transmitter but-
1. Position the end of your hand-held ton. DO NOT release until the
HomeLink indicator light *
®
transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away 1 flashes
from the HomeLink® surface, keeping slowly and then rapidly. When the
the HomeLink® indicator light *
1 in indicator light flashes rapidly, both
view. buttons may be released. (The rapid
flashing indicates successful program-
ming.)
NOTE:
Some devices to be programmed may
require you to replace Step 2 with the
cycling procedure noted in the “Pro-
gramming HomeLink® for Canadian

stand on your vehicle to perform the HomeLink® web site at: www.
next steps. homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
4. At the receiver located on the garage PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR
door opener motor in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button (the
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
name and color of the button may vary OPENERS
by manufacturer but it is usually Canadian radio-frequency laws require
located near where the hanging anten- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
na wire is attached to the unit). If there after several seconds of transmission –
is difficulty locating the button, refer- which may not be long enough for
ence the garage door opener’s manual. HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
5. Press and release the “learn” or programming. Similar to this Canadian
“smart” button. law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
JVI0429X
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
3. Press and hold the programmed NOTE: If you live in Canada or you are having
HomeLink® button and observe the Once the button is pressed, you have difficulties programming a gate operator or
indicator light. approximately 30 seconds to initiate garage door opener by using the “Pro-
. If the indicator light *1 is solid/ the next step. gramming HomeLink®” procedures, re-
continuous, programming is com- 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press place “Programming HomeLink®” Step 2
plete and your device should acti- and hold the programmed HomeLink® with the following:
vate when the HomeLink® button is button for two seconds and release.
pressed and released. Repeat the “press/hold/release” se- NOTE:
. If the indicator light * 1 blinks quence up to 3 times to complete the When programming a garage door opener,
rapidly for two seconds and then programming process. HomeLink ® etc., unplug the device during the “cy-
turns to a solid/continuous light, should now activate your rolling code cling” process to prevent possible damage
continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling equipped device. to the garage door opener components.
code device. A second person may 7. If you have any questions or are having Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously
make the following steps easier. Use difficulty programming your press and hold the desired HomeLink®
a ladder or other device. Do not HomeLink ® buttons, refer to the button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During programming, your hand- mitted. CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-
held transmitter may automatically stop For convenience, the hand-held transmitter FORMATION
transmitting. Continue to press and hold of the device may also be used at any time. The following procedure clears the pro-
the desired HomeLink® button while you
grammed information from both buttons.
press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand- PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT-
Individual buttons cannot be cleared.
held transmitter every two seconds until ING However, individual buttons can be repro-
the frequency signal has been learned. The If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn grammed, see “Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly the hand-held transmitter information: HomeLink® button” later in this section.
and then rapidly after several seconds
upon successful programming. DO NOT . replace the hand-held transmitter bat-
teries with new batteries.
To clear all programming
release until the HomeLink® indicator light 1. P r e s s a n d h o l d t h e t w o o u t e r
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the . position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons light begins to flash in approximately
may be released. The rapid flashing HomeLink® surface.
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
indicates successful programming. . press and hold both the HomeLink®
20 seconds.
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption. 2. Release both buttons.
step 3 to complete.
. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 HomeLink® is now in the programming
Remember to plug the device back in when mode and can be programmed at any time
i n ( 2 6 -7 6 m m ) a w a y f r o m t h e
programming is completed. beginning with “Programming HomeLink®”
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI- ter in that position for up to 15 - Step 1.
VERSAL TRANSCEIVER seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro-
grammed within that time, try holding REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
the transmitter in another position - HomeLink® BUTTON
it is programmed, can be used to activate To reprogram a HomeLink ® Universal
keeping the indicator light in view at all
the programmed device. To operate, simply Transceiver button, complete the following.
times.
press and release the appropriate pro-
grammed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
If you have any questions or are having 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
difficulty programming your HomeLink® button. Do not release the button.
button. The amber indicator light will
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site
illuminate while the signal is being trans-
at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash FCC Notice:
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the For USA:
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-
This device complies with Part 15 of the
gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
For questions or comments, contact following two conditions: (1) This device
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1- may not cause harmful interference, and
800-355-3515. (2) this device must accept any interfer-
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- ence received, including interference that
ton has now been reprogrammed. The new may cause undesired operation.
device can be activated by pushing the
NOTE:
HomeLink® button that was just pro-
grammed. This procedure will not affect Changes or modifications not expressly
any other programmed HomeLink® but- approved by the party responsible for
tons. compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN For Canada:
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
that has been programmed into
the following two conditions: (1) this
HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual
device may not cause interference, and
of each device or call the manufacturer or
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
retailer of those devices for additional
ence, including interference that may
information.
cause undesired operation of the device.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-
versal Transceiver with your new transmit-
ter information.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys .................................................................... 3-2 Lift gate ............................................................ 3-20

Intelligent Key ................................................. 3-2 Operating manual lift gate ........................... 3-21
Valet hand-off.................................................. 3-4 Operating power lift gate ............................. 3-21
Doors .................................................................. 3-4 Auto closure ............................................... 3-24
Locking with mechanical key ........................... 3-4 Lift gate release lever .................................. 3-25
Opening and closing windows with the Fuel-filler door................................................... 3-25
mechanical key................................................ 3-5 Opening the fuel-filler door.......................... 3-25
Locking with inside lock knob ......................... 3-5 Fuel-filler cap............................................... 3-26
Locking with power door lock switch ............... 3-5 Tilt/telescopic steering...................................... 3-28
Automatic door locks....................................... 3-6 Electric operation......................................... 3-28
Child safety rear door lock ............................. 3-6 Sun visors......................................................... 3-29
Intelligent Key system ......................................... 3-7 Mirrors.............................................................. 3-30
Intelligent Key operating range........................ 3-9 Inside mirror................................................ 3-30
Door locks/unlocks precaution ........................ 3-9 Outside mirrors............................................ 3-30
Intelligent Key operation ............................... 3-10 Vanity mirror................................................ 3-32
Battery saver system ..................................... 3-12 Automatic drive positioner ................................ 3-33
Warning signals............................................. 3-12 Entry/exit function ....................................... 3-33
Troubleshooting guide................................... 3-13 Memory storage........................................... 3-34
Remote keyless entry system............................. 3-15 Setting memory function.............................. 3-35
How to use remote keyless entry system....... 3-16 System operation......................................... 3-35
Hood ................................................................. 3-20
KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your 1. Intelligent Key (2)

keys. Record the key number and keep it in 2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key)
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in (2)
the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see an 3. Key number plate (1)
INFINITI retailer for duplicates by using the
key number. INFINITI does not record any INTELLIGENT KEY
key numbers so it is very important to keep Your vehicle can only be driven with the
track of your key number plate. Intelligent Keys which are registered to
A key number is only necessary when you your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-
have lost all keys and do not have one to ponents and INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
duplicate from. If you still have a key, this System components. As many as 4 Intelli-
key can be duplicated by an INFINITI gent Keys can be registered and used with
retailer. one vehicle. The new keys must be
SPA2717 registered by an INFINITI retailer prior to
Type A use with the Intelligent Key system and
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. Since the registration process
requires erasing all memory in the Intelli-
gent Key components when registering
new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent
Keys that you have to the INFINITI retailer.
CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a
precision device with a built-in transmit-
JVP0155X ter. To avoid damaging it, please note
Type B the following.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

— The Intelligent Key is water resis- . If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
tant; however, wetting may damage INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code
the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent
Key gets wet, immediately wipe until the Intelligent Key from unauthorized
it is completely dry. use to unlock the vehicle. For informa-
tion regarding the erasing procedure,
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
please contact an INFINITI retailer.
against another object.
— If the outside temperature is below
148F (−108C), the battery of the
Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key for SPA2033
an extended period in a place where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C). Mechanical key
— Do not change or modify the In- To remove the mechanical key, release the
telligent Key. lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
— Do not use a magnet key holder. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert
it into the Intelligent Key until the lock
— Do not place the Intelligent Key near knob returns to the lock position.
an electric appliance such as a
television set or personal computer. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the doors and the glove box.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key to
See “Doors” later in this section, “Storage”
come into contact with water or salt
in the “2. Instruments and controls”
water, and do not wash it in a
section.
washing machine. This could affect
the system function.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS
CAUTION WARNING
Always carry the mechanical key installed in . Always have the doors locked while
the Intelligent Key. driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
VALET HAND-OFF persons from being thrown from the
When you have to leave a key with a valet, vehicle. This also helps keep children
give them the Intelligent Key itself and and others from unintentionally opening
keep the mechanical key with you to the doors, and will help keep out
protect your belongings. intruders.
To prevent the glove box from being . Before opening any door, always look for SPA2457B
opened during valet hand-off, follow the and avoid oncoming traffic.
procedures below. LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY
1. Remove the mechanical key from the the vehicle. They could unknowingly The power door lock system allows you to
Intelligent Key. activate switches or controls. Unat- lock or unlock all doors simultaneously
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical tended children could become involved using the mechanical key.
key. in serious accidents. . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, the front of the vehicle *1 will lock all
keeping the mechanical key in your doors.
pocket or bag for insertion into the . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder
Intelligent Key when you retrieve your once to the rear of the vehicle * 2 will
vehicle. unlock the driver’s door. After returning
See “Storage” in the “2. Instruments and the key to the neutral position * 3 ,
controls” section. turning it to the rear again within 5
seconds will unlock all doors.

. You can switch the lock system to the
mode that allows you to open all the
doors when the key is turned once.
(See “How to use SETTING button” in
the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems” sec-
tion.)
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY
The driver’s door key operation also allows
you to open and close all door windows.
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door SPA2744 SPA2727
key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for
longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
and the window keeps opening while
To lock the door individually, move the SWITCH
turning the key.
inside lock knob to the lock position *
1 . Operating the power door lock switch will
This function can also be performed by
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the lock or unlock all the doors. The switches
pushing and holding the door UNLOCK
button of the Intelligent Key. (See “Remote unlock position *2 . are located on the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrests.
keyless entry system” later in this section.) Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle. To lock the doors, push the power door
To close the windows, turn the driver’s
lock switch to the lock position *
1 .
door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle
for longer than 1 second. The door is Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key
locked and the window keeps closing while inside the vehicle.
turning the key. To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler
door, push the power door lock switch to
the unlock position *2 .

Lockout protection 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step
When the power door lock switch (driver or 2, push and hold the power door lock
front passenger) is moved to the lock switch to the position (UNLOCK) for
position with any door open, all doors will more than 5 seconds.
lock and unlock automatically. With the 4. When activated, the hazard indicator
Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any will flash twice. When deactivated, the
door open, all doors will unlock automati- hazard indicator will flash once.
cally and a chime will sound after the door 5. The ignition switch must be placed in
is closed. the OFF and ON position again between
These functions help to prevent the In- each setting change.
telligent Key from being accidentally When the automatic door unlock system is
locked inside the vehicle. deactivated, the doors do not unlock when
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF SPA2745
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
position. To unlock the door manually, use
. All doors lock automatically when the the inside lock knob or the power door lock CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side). Child safety rear door locks help prevent
km/h). doors from being opened accidentally,
. All doors unlock automatically when the especially when small children are in the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF vehicle.
position.
When the levers are in the lock position
The automatic unlock function can be
deactivated or activated. To deactivate or
*1 , the rear doors can be opened only
from the outside.
activate the automatic door unlock system,
perform the following procedure: To disengage, move the levers to the
unlock position *
2 .
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
nal computer.
WARNING CAUTION . When the vehicle is parked near a
parking meter.
. Radio waves could adversely affect . Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with In such cases, correct the operating condi-
electric medical equipment. Those who you when operating the vehicle. tions before using the Intelligent Key
use a pacemaker should contact the
. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the function or use the mechanical key.
electric medical equipment manufacturer
vehicle when you leave the vehicle. Although the life of the battery varies
for the possible influences before use.
depending on the operating conditions,
. The Intelligent Key transmits radio The Intelligent Key is always communicat- the battery’s life is approximately 2 years.
waves when the buttons are pushed. ing with the vehicle as it receives radio If the battery is discharged, replace it with
The FAA advises that the radio waves waves. The Intelligent Key system trans- a new one.
may affect aircraft navigation and com- mits weak radio waves. Environmental
munication systems. Do not operate the Since the Intelligent Key is continuously
conditions may interfere with the operation receiving radio waves, if the key is left near
Intelligent Key while on an airplane. of the Intelligent Key system under the
Make sure the buttons are not operated equipment which transmits strong radio
following operating conditions. waves, such as signals from a TV and
unintentionally when the unit is stored
. When operating near a location where personal computer, the battery life may
during a flight.
strong radio waves are transmitted, become shorter.
such as a TV tower, power station and For information regarding replacement of a
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
broadcasting station. battery, see “Intelligent Key battery repla-
the door locks using the remote controller
function or pushing the request switch on . When in possession of wireless equip- cement” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
the vehicle without taking the key out from ment, such as a cellular telephone, yourself” section.
a pocket or purse. The operating environ- transceiver, and CB radio.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
ment and/or conditions may affect the . When the Intelligent Key is in contact registered and used with one vehicle. For
Intelligent Key system operation. with or covered by metallic materials. information about the purchase and use of
Be sure to read the following before using . When any type of radio wave remote additional Intelligent Keys, contact an
the Intelligent Key system. control is used nearby. INFINITI retailer.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a perso-

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
CAUTION INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which may prevent the unauthorized use of the
contains electrical components, to come Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For
into contact with water or salt water. information regarding the erasing proce-
This could affect the system function. dure, contact an INFINITI retailer.
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
. Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-
ately wipe until it is completely dry.
. If the outside temperature is below 148F
(−108C), the battery of the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.

SPA2074 SPA2326
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
RANGE glass, handle or rear bumper the request TION
switches may not function. . Do not push the door handle request
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the When the Intelligent Key is within the switch with the Intelligent Key held in
specified operating range from the request operating range, it is possible for anyone your hand as illustrated. The close
switch *1 . who does not carry the Intelligent Key to distance to the door handle will cause
push the request switch to lock/unlock the the Intelligent Key system to have
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
doors. difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
charged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent gent Key is outside the vehicle.
Key system’s operating range becomes . After locking with the door handle
narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not request switch, verify the doors are
function properly. securely locked by testing them.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 . To prevent the Intelligent Key from
cm) from each request switch * 1 .
being left inside the vehicle, make sure

you carry the key with you and then
lock the doors.
. Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.
. The Intelligent Key system (opening/
closing doors with the door handle
request switch) can be set to remain
inactive. (See “Vehicle information and
settings” in the “4. Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition SPA2408 JVP0196X
systems” section.)
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out from your pocket or bag.
JVP0197X

When you carry the Intelligent Key with while the ignition switch is in the ACC or Lockout protection:
you, you can lock or unlock all doors by ON position. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
pushing the door handle request switch *2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
(driver’s or front passenger’s) *
A or the lift Key while any door is open. protection is equipped with the Intelligent
gate request switch * B within the range of Key system.
*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door
operation.
handle request switch with the Intelligent When the driver’s side door is open, the
When you lock or unlock the doors or the Key inside the vehicle. doors are locked, and then the Intelligent
lift gate, the hazard indicator will flash and Key is put inside the vehicle and all the
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the horn (or the outside chime) will sound doors are closed; the lock will automati-
the vehicle, doors can be locked with
as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds.
another registered Intelligent Key.
hazard indicator and horn mode” later in
this section. NOTE:
Locking doors and fuel-filler door CAUTION The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) . After locking the doors using the request operating the request switch to lock the
position, push the ignition switch to the switch, make sure that the doors have door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
OFF position and make sure you carry been securely locked by operating the pocket or your other hand.
the Intelligent Key with you.*1 door handles.
2. Close all the doors.*2 . When locking the doors using the CAUTION
3. Push the door handle request switch request switch, make sure to have the
(driver’s or front passenger’s) *A or the Intelligent Key in your possession before The lockout protection may not function
lift gate request switch * B while operating the request switch to prevent under the following conditions:
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3 the Intelligent Key from being left in the . When the Intelligent Key is placed on top
4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will vehicle. of the instrument panel.
lock. . The request switch is operational only . When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and when the Intelligent Key has been the glove box or a storage bin.
the outside chime sounds twice. detected by the Intelligent Key system.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key the door pockets.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside by pushing the lift gate opener switch. See . The ignition switch is in the ACC
or near metallic materials. “Lift gate” later in this section. position, and
All doors will be locked automatically . All doors are closed, and
unless one of the following operations is . The shift lever is in the P (Park)
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door performed within 1 minute after pushing position.
1. Push the door handle request switch the request switch while the doors are
(driver’s or front passenger’s) *
A or the locked. If during this 1-minute time period, WARNING SIGNALS
lift gate request switch *B once while the request switch is pushed, all doors will To help prevent the vehicle from moving
carrying the Intelligent Key with you. be locked automatically after another 1 unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
When you approach the vehicle with minute. the Intelligent Key listed on the following
the Intelligent Key, the puddle light and . Opening any door chart or to help prevent the vehicle from
the passenger cabin illumination will being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside
. Pushing the ignition switch
illuminate and stay on for a short and outside the vehicle and a warning
period of time. (See “Welcome light” Power lift gate open displays in the dot matrix liquid crystal
in the “2. Instruments and controls” 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
display.
section.) When a chime or beep sounds or the
2. Push the power lift gate opener switch
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and *C .
warning displays, be sure to check the
vehicle and Intelligent Key.
outside chime sounds once. The corre-
3. The lift gate will unlock and automati-
sponding door will unlock. See “Troubleshooting guide” later in this
cally open.
The fuel-filler door will also unlock section and “Dot matrix liquid crystal
when the driver’s door handle request 4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times display” in the “2. Instruments and con-
switch is pushed. and the outside chime sounds. trols” section.
3. Push the door handle request switch BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
again within 60 seconds. When all the following conditions are met
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and for a period of time, the battery saver
outside chime sounds once again. All system will cut off the power supply to
the doors will unlock. prevent battery discharge.
The lift gate can be unlocked and opened

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible cause Action to take
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
When pushing the ignition switch The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
and the inside warning chime sounds con- Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
to stop the engine position.
tinuously or for a few seconds.
When shifting the shift lever to The inside warning chime sounds continu- The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
the P (Park) position. ously. position.
When opening the driver’s door to The inside warning chime sounds continu- The ignition switch is in the ACC
get out of the vehicle ously. position.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display,
the outside chime sounds 3 times and the The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
inside warning chime sounds for a few position.
When closing the door after get- seconds.
ting out of the vehicle
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
position and the shift lever is not in the and push the ignition switch to the OFF
and the outside chime sounds continuously.
P (Park) position. position.
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock. or cargo area.
When pushing the request switch The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
or the LOCK button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
Intelligent Key to lock the door A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
or cargo area.
When pushing the door handle
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds. A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
request switch to lock the door
The door handle request switch is Push the door handle request switch after
pushed before the door is closed. the door is closed.

Symptom Possible cause Action to take
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears
The battery charge is low. “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
on the display.
When pushing the ignition switch yourself” section.)
to start the engine The NO KEY warning appears on the display
and the inside warning chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
seconds.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the It warns of a malfunction with the Contact an INFINITI retailer.
When pushing the ignition switch
meter illuminates in yellow. Intelligent Key system.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
The lock and unlock buttons on the

WARNING Intelligent Key will not operate when:
. the distance between the Intelligent Key
The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).
when the buttons are pushed. The FAA . the Intelligent Key battery runs down.
advises that radio waves may affect aircraft After locking with the remote keyless entry
navigation and communication systems. Do function, pull the door handle to make sure
not operate the Intelligent Key while on an the doors are securely locked.
airplane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the unit is The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies
stored for a flight. depending on the environment. To securely
operate the lock and unlock buttons,
approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m)
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel- from the door. SPA2718
filler door, activate the panic alarm and Type A
open the windows by pushing the buttons
on the Intelligent Key from outside the
vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli-
gent Key can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the
vehicle. (The effective distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
with one vehicle. For information concern-
ing the purchase and use of additional
JVP0156X
Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI retai-
ler. Type B

*
A LOCK button while the ignition switch is in the ACC or . Pushing the ignition switch
*
B UNLOCK button ON position.
*
C Power lift gate button Opening windows
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door
*
D PANIC button To open the windows, push the door
button *
*
E Remote engine start button 1. Push the UNLOCK
Intelligent Key once.
B on the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key
for about 3 seconds after the door is
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The unlocked.
ENTRY SYSTEM driver’s door and fuel-filler door will To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
When you lock or unlock the doors or the unlock. button.
lift gate, the hazard indicator will flash and The puddle light and the passenger Window cannot be closed using the In-
the horn (or the outside chime) will sound cabin illumination will illuminate and telligent Key.
as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting stay on for a short period of time. The door windows can be opened or closed
hazard indicator and horn mode” later in
3. Push the UNLOCK button on the by turning the mechanical key in a door
this section.
Intelligent Key again within 60 sec- lock. (See “Doors” earlier in this section.)
Locking doors and fuel-filler door onds.
Opening/closing lift gate
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) 4. The hazard indicator flashes once
again. All the doors will unlock. 1. Push the power lift gate button
position, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and make sure you carry All doors will be locked automatically
*C for more than 1 second.
the Intelligent Key with you.* unless one of the following operations is 2. The lift gate will automatically open.
2. Close all the doors and the lift gate. performed within 1 minute after pushing The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and
the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key the outside chime sounds for approxi-
3. Push the LOCK button *
A on the
while the doors are locked. If during this 1- mately 3 seconds.
Intelligent Key.
minute time period, the UNLOCK button on To close the lift gate, push the power lift
4. All the doors, the lift gate and fuel-filler the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will gate button for more than 1 second.
door will lock. be locked automatically after another 1
The lift gate will automatically close.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and minute.
the horn chirps once. If the button is pushed while the lift
. Opening any door
gate is being opened or closed, the lift gate
*: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key
will reverse.
The power lift gate button cannot be ignition switch was turned off. vehicle.
operated when the ignition switch is in the Laws in some local communities may Operating a remote engine start:
ON position. restrict the use of remote starters. For To use the remote start function to start the
Using panic alarm example, some laws require a person using engine, perform the following:
remote start to have the vehicle in view.
If you are near your vehicle and feel Check local regulations for any require- 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
threatened, you may activate the alarm to ments. 2. Push the LOCK button to lock all
call attention as follows: doors.
Other conditions may affect the remote
1. Push the PANIC button *D on the
engine start function. See “Conditions the 3. Within 5 seconds push and hold the
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second. remote engine start will not work” later in remote engine start button until
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights this section. the turn signal lights illuminate. If the
will stay on for 25 seconds. Other conditions can affect the perfor- vehicle is not within view, push and
3. The panic alarm stops when: mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. hold the remote engine start
. It has run for 25 seconds, or See “Intelligent Key system” earlier in this button for about 2 seconds.
. Any of the buttons on the Intelligent section. The following events will occur when the
Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button engine starts:
Remote engine start operating range:
or power lift gate button should be . The front parking lights will turn on and
The remote engine start function can only
pushed for more than 1 second.) remain on as long as the engine is
be used when the Intelligent Key is within
running.
Remote engine start (if so the specified operating range from the
vehicle. . The doors will be locked and the air
equipped) conditioner system may turn on.
The remote engine start button *
E is When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
. The engine will continue to run for
on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has charged or strong radio waves are present
about 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to
remote engine start function. This function near the operating location, the Intelligent
extend the time for an additional 10
allows the engine to start from outside the Key operating range becomes narrower,
minutes. See “Extending engine run
vehicle. and the Intelligent Key may not function
time” later in this section.
properly.
Some systems, such as the air conditioner Depress the brake pedal and place the
system, will turn on during a remote start, The remote engine start operating range is
ignition switch in the ON position before
if the system was on the last time the approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the
driving. For further instructions, see “Driv- Canceling a remote engine start: . The ignition switch is pushed with an
ing the vehicle” in the “5. Starting and To cancel a remote start, perform one of Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the
driving” section. the following: brake pedal is not depressed.
Extending engine run time: . Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle . Two remote engine starts, or a single
and push and hold remote engine start remote start with an extension, have
The remote engine start function can be
extended one time by performing the steps button * E until the front parking
already been used.
listed in “Operating a remote engine start” lights turn off. . The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
earlier in this section. Run time will be . Turn on the hazard indicator flashers. position.
calculated as follows: . Cycle the ignition switch ON and then The remote engine start may display an
indicator in the vehicle information dis-
. The first 10 minute run time will start OFF.
play. For an explanation of the indicator,
when the remote engine start function Conditions the remote engine start will not see “Operational indicators” in the “2.
is performed. work: Instruments and controls” section.
. The second 10 minutes will start The remote engine start will not operate if
immediately when the remote engine any of the following conditions are present: Setting hazard indicator and horn
start function is performed. For exam- mode
ple, if the engine has been running for . The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and
5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, horn mode when you first receive the
the engine will run for a total of 15 . The hood is not securely closed.
vehicle.
minutes. . The hazard indicator flashers are on.
. The Intelligent Key warning light re- In hazard indicator and horn mode, when
A maximum of two remote starts, or a
mains on in the vehicle information the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard
single start with an extension, are allowed
display. indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
between ignition cycles.
once. When the UNLOCK button is
The ignition switch must be cycled to the . An Intelligent Key is left inside the
pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.
ON position and then back to the OFF vehicle.
. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal If horns are not necessary, the system can
position before the remote engine start
entry into the vehicle. be switched to the hazard indicator mode.
procedure can be used again.
. The ignition switch is pushed without In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
an Intelligent Key in the vehicle. button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK Hazard indicator and horn mode:
button is pushed, neither the hazard
indicator nor the horn operates. DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
(Using door handle request switch) OUTSIDE CHIME - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - once
Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - once
HAZARD - twice
(Using or button) HORN - none
HORN - once
Hazard indicator mode:
DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none
(Using door handle request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
(Using or button) HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none
Switching procedure:
Push the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the Intelligent Key simulta-
neously for more than 2 seconds to switch
the mode from one to the other.
When pushing the buttons to set the
hazard indicator mode, the hazard indica-
tor flashes 3 times.
When pushing the buttons to set the
hazard indicator and horn mode, the
hazard indicator flashes once and the horn
chirps once.

HOOD LIFT GATE
WARNING
. Always be sure the lift gate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving.
. Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust
gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
SPA2775
the vehicle. They could unknowingly
1. Pull the hood lock release handle * 1 activate switches or controls. Unat-
located below the instrument panel; tended children could become involved
WARNING in serious accidents.
the hood will then spring up slightly.
2. Pull the lever *
2 up at the front of the . Make sure the hood is completely closed . Always be sure that hands and feet are
hood with your fingertips and raise the and latched before driving. Failure to do clear of the door frame to avoid injury
hood. so could cause the hood to fly open and while closing the lift gate.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close result in an accident.
the hood down and make sure it locks . If you see steam or smoke coming from
into place. the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.

. inserting the mechanical key into the
driver’s door key cylinder and turning it
to the rear of the vehicle twice.
To close the lift gate, pull down until it
securely locks.
OPERATING POWER LIFT GATE
To operate the power lift gate, the shift
lever must be in the P (Park) position.
The power lift gate will not operate if the
battery voltage is low.
SPA2774 SPA2547
OPERATING MANUAL LIFT GATE Power lift gate main switch

To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the The power lift gate operation can be turned
lift gate opener switch * A . Pull up the lift on or off by the power lift gate main switch
gate to open. on the instrument panel.
The lift gate can be unlocked by: When the power lift gate main switch is
. pushing the unlock button on the pushed to the “OFF” position, the power
Intelligent Key twice. operation is not available by the power lift
gate switch on the lift gate and lift gate
. pushing the lift gate request switch with
opener switch.
the Intelligent Key carried on you.
. pushing the door handle request switch The lift gate can still be operated by the
twice with the Intelligent Key carried on power lift gate switch on the instrument
you. panel and the power lift gate button on the
Intelligent Key.
. pushing the power door lock switch to
the unlock position.

Power open
When the lift gate is fully closed, the lift
gate will fully open automatically by:
. pushing the power lift gate switch * A
on the instrument panel
. pushing the lift gate opener switch * B
. pushing the power lift gate button * C
on the Intelligent Key for more than 1
second
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds when the lift gate starts
opening.
SPA2793 JVP0214X
Power lift gate switch — Instrument panel Intelligent Key NOTE:
The lift gate can be opened by the power
lift gate switch * A , the lift gate opener
switch * B or the lift gate button *C
even if the lift gate is locked. The lift gate
will individually unlock and open.
Power close
When the lift gate is fully opened, the lift
gate will fully close automatically by:
. pushing the power lift gate switch * A
on the instrument panel
. pushing the lift gate release button *
C
on the Intelligent Key for more than 1
SPA2776 SPA2796 second
Lift gate opener switch Power lift gate switch — Lift gate

. pushing the power lift gate switch * D thing is caught in the lift gate as it is Manual mode
on the lower part of the lift gate opening or closing. When the control unit If power operation is not available, the lift
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside detects an obstacle, the lift gate will gate can be operated manually. Power
chime sounds when the lift gate starts reverse and return to the full open or full operation may not be available if multiple
closing. close position. obstacles have been detected in a single
If a second obstacle is detected, the lift power cycle or if the battery voltage is low.
NOTE:
gate motion will stop and the drive motor When the power lift gate main switch is in
When the lift gate is closed, it remains will disengage. The lift gate will enter the the OFF position, the lift gate can be
unlocked. Manually lock the lift gate. manual mode. opened manually by pushing the lift gate
Reverse function A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of opener switch. If the power lift gate opener
The power lift gate will reverse immediately the lift gate. If an obstacle is detected by switch is pushed during power open or
if one of the following actions is performed the pinch sensor during power close, the close, the power operation will be canceled
during power open or power close. lift gate will reverse and return to the full and the lift gate can be operated manually.
. pushing the power lift gate switch *A open position immediately.
on the instrument panel NOTE:
. pushing the lift gate button *C
If the pinch sensor is damaged or
on the Intelligent Key. removed, the power close function will
. pushing the lift gate switch *
D on the not operate.
lower part of the lift gate
The outside chime sounds when the lift
gate starts to reverse.
WARNING
The power lift gate button *C on the There is a small distance immediately before
Intelligent Key cannot be operated when the closed position that cannot be detected.
the ignition switch is in the ON position. Make sure that all passengers keep their
hands, etc., clear from the lift gate opening
Auto reverse function
before closing the lift gate.
The auto-reverse function enables the lift
gate to automatically reverse when some-

from lift gate opening.
CAUTION . Do not let children operate the lift gate.
. If the power lift gate does not stay open
or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at
any time, do not operate the lift gate.
There may be a pressure loss in one or
both of the lift gate gas stays. Have the
lift gate inspected by an INFINITI retailer.
. Do not activate the power lift gate if one
or both of the lift gate gas stays are
removed. Damage to the lift gate or
SPA2777 power lift gate mechanisms may occur.
Safe Mode AUTO CLOSURE

If the gas stays of the lift gate * 1 lose If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly
pressure, the power lift gate safe mode is open position, the lift gate will pull itself to
activated. When the safe mode is activated, the closed position.
the lift gate intermittently closes. Then the
Do not apply excessive force when the
lift gate will be pulled to the closed and
auto closure is operating. Excessive force
latched position by a motor.
applied may cause the mechanism to
The power lift gate cannot be opened using malfunction.
the switches at any time in the safe mode.
Do not operate the lift gate again until it is
checked by an INFINITI retailer. CAUTION
. The lift gate will automatically close
from a partly open position. To avoid
pinching, keep hands and fingers away
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
CAUTION
Lock all doors before going through auto-
matic car wash. Locking doors helps prevent
fuel-filler door from opening and becoming
damaged.
SPA2778 SPA2752
LIFT GATE RELEASE LEVER To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-
filler door by using one of the following
If the lift gate cannot be opened with the operations, then push the right side of the
door lock switch due to a discharged door.
battery, follow these steps.
. Push the driver’s door handle request
1. Remove the cover * A inside of the lift
switch with the Intelligent Key carried
gate using a suitable tool. with you.
2. Move the lever * B as illustrated to . Push the passenger’s door handle
open the lift gate. request switch or lift gate request
Contact an INFINITI retailer as soon as switch twice with the Intelligent Key
possible for repair. carried with you.
. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
. Insert the mechanical key into the door
lock cylinder and rotate it towards the

rear of the vehicle. sion control system. An incorrect cap can
. Push the power door lock switch to the result in a serious malfunction and CAUTION
UNLOCK position. possible injury. It could also cause the
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely malfunction indicator light to come on. . If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
and lock all doors by operating the door flush it away with water to avoid paint
. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
handle request switch, the LOCK button on damage.
attempt to start your vehicle.
the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or . Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler
the power door lock switch. . Do not fill a portable fuel container in
tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler
FUEL-FILLER CAP can cause an explosion of flammable
cap properly may cause the mal-
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
WARNING injury or death when filling portable fuel
nate. If the light illuminates
because the fuel-filler cap is loose or
containers:
. Gasoline is extremely flammable and missing, tighten or install the cap and
highly explosive under certain condi- — Always place the container on the continue to drive the vehicle. The
tions. You could be burned or seriously ground when filling. light should turn off after a few driving
injured if it is misused or mishandled. — Do not use electronic devices when trips. If the light does not turn off
Always stop engine and do not smoke or filling. after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
allow open flames or sparks near the inspected by an INFINITI retailer.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact
vehicle when refueling. . The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear
with the container while you are
. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank filling it. if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off tightened. It may take a few driving
automatically. Continued refueling may — Use only approved portable fuel trips for the message to be displayed.
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel containers for flammable liquid. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
spray and possibly a fire. properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP
. Use only an original equipment type warning appears may cause the
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to
built-in safety valve needed for proper illuminate.
operation of the fuel system and emis-
Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove.
To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
SPA2753 SPA2815
To remove the fuel-filler cap: LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on
to remove. the dot matrix liquid crystal display when
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly
*A while refueling. after the vehicle has been refueled. It may
To install the fuel-filler cap: take a few driving trips for the warning to
be displayed.
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube. To turn off the warning, perform the
following:
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap”
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
3. Push the switch *A on the right

side of the combination meter panel for WARNING
longer than 1 second to turn off the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tighten- . Do not adjust the steering wheel while
ing the fuel cap. driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort.
The driver’s air bag inflates with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of
position in any way, you are at greater SPA2754
risk of injury or death in a crash. You
may also receive serious or fatal injuries
ELECTRIC OPERATION
from the air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against Tilt or telescopic operation
the seatback and as far away as practical Move the lever * 1 to adjust the steering
from the steering wheel. Always use the wheel up or down, forward or rearward to
seat belts. the desired position.
Entry/Exit function operation:
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up auto-
matically when the driver’s door is opened
with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This lets the driver get into and
out of the seat more easily.
For more information, see “Automatic drive

SUN VISORS
positioner” later in this section.

CAUTION
. Do not store the main sun visor before
storing the extension sun visor.
. Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor * 1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center
mount and swing it to the side *
2 .
3. Draw out the extension sun visor * 3

from the main sun visor to block from
further glare.
SIC3451

MIRRORS
The indicator light will turn off. Push the “I”

switch *C to turn the system on.
Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors * D or apply glass cleaner on
them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensor, resulting in improper
operation.
For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
operation, see “HomeLink ® Universal
Transceiver” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
SPA2450-A
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
SPA2447
INSIDE MIRROR Automatic anti-glare type WARNING

Adjust the height and the angle of the The inside mirror is designed so that it
inside mirror to the desired position. automatically changes reflection according . Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
to the intensity of the headlights of the the passenger side are closer than they
following vehicle. appear. Be careful when moving to the
The anti-glare system will be automatically right. Using only this mirror could cause
turned on when the ignition switch is an accident. Use the inside mirror or
pushed to the ON position. glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
When the anti-glare system is turned on,
the indicator light *
A will illuminate and . Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
excessive glare from the headlights of the You could lose control of your vehicle
vehicle behind you will be reduced. and cause an accident.
Push the “*” switch * B to make the
inside rearview mirror operate normally.

mirror defroster switch” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.)
SPA2739 SPA2738
Adjusting outside mirrors Power foldable outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located
on the driver’s door armrest.
CAUTION
The outside mirror will operate only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON . Do not touch the mirrors while they are
position. moving. Your hand may be pinched, and
Move the switch right or left to select the the mirror may malfunction.
right or left side mirror *1 , then adjust . Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You
using the control switch *2 . will be unable to see behind the vehicle.
Defrosting outside mirrors . If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by
hand, there is a chance that the mirror
The outside mirrors will be heated when
will move forward or backward during
the rear window defroster switch is oper-
driving. If the mirrors were folded or
ated. (See “Rear window and outside
unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust

them again electrically before driving. switch.
4. The outside mirror surfaces move
The outside rearview mirror remote control downward.
operates when the ignition switch is in the When one of the following conditions has
“ACC” or “ON” position. occurred, the outside mirror surfaces will
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push return to their original positions.
the outside rearview mirror folding switch . The shift lever is moved to any position
to the “CLOSE” position * 1 . To unfold, other than R (Reverse).
push to the “OPEN” position * 2 .
. The outside mirror control switch is set
If mirrors are manually operated or to the center position.
bumped, the mirror body can become . The ignition switch is placed in to the
loose at the pivot point. To correct electro- OFF position.
nic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by SIC4448
pushing “CLOSE” until completely closed, Automatic anti-glare
then push “OPEN” until the mirrors are in The outside rearview mirrors are designed VANITY MIRROR
the open position. so that its automatically change reflection To use the front vanity mirror, pull down
according to the intensity of the headlights the sun visor and pull up the cover.
Reverse tilt-down feature of the vehicle following you.
When backing up the vehicle, the right and
The anti-glare system will be automatically
left outside mirrors will turn downward
turned on when you push the ignition
automatically to provide better rear visibi-
switch to the “ON” position.
lity.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
3. Choose the right or left outside mirror
by operating the outside mirror control

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
the steering wheel will move up when the switch pressed for more than 10 seconds
driver’s door is opened with the ignition to turn on or off the entry/exit function.
switch in the LOCK position. The entry/exit function can also be acti-
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will vated or canceled if the “Lift Steering
return to the previous positions when the Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver Seat
ignition switch is pushed to the ACC Back on Exit” key is turned to ON or OFF in
position. the “Comfort” settings. (See “Vehicle
The driver’s seat will not return to the information and settings” in the “4.
previous positions if the seat or steering Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
adjusting switch is operated when the seat recognition systems” section.)
is at the exit position. Initialize entry/exit function
SPA2756
Cancel or activate entry/exit func- If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
tion the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will
SET/memory switches
The shift lever must be in the P (Park) not work though this function was set on
The automatic drive positioner system has
position with the ignition switch in the OFF before. In such a case, after connecting the
three features:
position. battery or replacing with a new fuse, open
. Entry/exit function and close the driver’s door more than two
. Memory storage The entry/exit function can be activated or times after the ignition switch is turned
. Setting memory function canceled by pressing and holding the SET from the ON position to the LOCK position.
switch for more than 10 seconds. The entry/exit function will be activated.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION The indicator lights on the memory
This system is designed so that the driver’s switches (1 and 2) will blink once when
seat and steering column will automati- the function is canceled, and the indicator
cally move when the automatic transmis- lights will blink twice when the function is
sion shift lever is in the P (Park) position. activated. Note that the indicator lights
This allows the driver to get into and out of may illuminate after 5 seconds while
the driver’s seat more easily. holding the SET switch. This indicates
The driver’s seat will slide backward and readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to
a stored memory position. Keep the SET
MEMORY STORAGE memory switch, the previous memory indicator light will stay on for approxi-
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering will be deleted. mately 5 seconds.
column and outside mirrors can be stored . If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
Linking Intelligent Key to a stored the fuse opens, the memory will be
in the automatic drive positioner memory. memory position
Follow these procedures to use the mem- canceled. In this case, reset the desired
ory system. The Intelligent Key can be linked to a position using the previous procedure.
stored memory position with the following . If optional Intelligent Keys are added to
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) procedure.
position. your vehicle, the memory storage pro-
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory cedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Intelligent Key procedure to a stored
position. memory position should be performed
2. While the indicator light for the memory
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col- switch being set is illuminated for 5 again for each Intelligent Key. For
umn and outside mirrors to the desired seconds, push the button on the additional Intelligent Key information,
positions by manually operating each Intelligent Key. If the indicator light see “Keys” earlier in this section.
adjusting switch. For additional infor- blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to
mation, see “Seats” in the “1. Safety — Selecting the memorized position
that memory setting.
seats, seat belts and supplemental 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
restraint system” section and “Tilt/ Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi- position.
telescopic steering” earlier in this tion, and then push the button on the
Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, steering 2. Use one of the following methods to
section and “Outside mirrors” earlier move the driver’s seat, the outside
in this section. wheel and outside mirrors will move to the
memorized position. mirrors and the steering wheel.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 . Push the ignition switch to the ON
seconds, push the memory switch (1 Confirming memory storage position and push the memory
or 2) fully for at least 1 second. . Push the ignition switch to the ON switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1
The indicator light for the pushed position and push the SET switch. If second.
memory switch will stay on for approxi- the main memory has not been stored, . Within 45 seconds of opening the
mately 5 seconds after pushing the the indicator light will come on for driver’s door, push the memory
switch. approximately 0.5 second. When the switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1
If memory is stored in the same memory has stored in position, the second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and screen and the memorized settings are (entry/exit function).)
outside mirrors will move to the mem- available (only when a new Intelligent . When the driver’s door remains open
orized position or to the exit position Key is used). for more than 45 seconds and the
when the entry/exit function is set to ignition switch is not in the ON posi-
active with the indicator light flashing, SYSTEM OPERATION tion.
and then the light will stay on for The automatic drive positioner system will
approximately 5 seconds. not work or will stop operating under the
SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION
. When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH
The status of the following settings can be (7 km/h).
linked to the Intelligent Key and the
. When the adjusting switch for the
memorized settings can be available for
driver’s seat and steering column is
each Intelligent Key.
turned on while the automatic drive
. Air conditioner system positioner is operating.
. Navigation system . When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not
. Audio system pushed for at least 1 second.
To use the memory function, lock the doors . When the seat, steering column and
with the Intelligent Key that is linked to the outside mirrors have already been
settings. moved to the memorized position.
To enable the memorized settings: . When no position is stored in the
memory switch.
1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked
to the settings, and unlock the doors by . When the engine is started while
pushing the driver’s door handle removing the automatic drive positioner.
quest switch or “UNLOCK” button . When the AT shift lever is moved from
on the Intelligent Key. the P (Park) position to any other
position. (However, it will not be
2. Push the ignition switch to the “ON”
canceled if the switch is pushed while
position. “Connection with the key has
the seat and steering column are
been done” will be displayed on the
returning to the previous positions
MEMO

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-
tion systems
Safety note.......................................................... 4-3 Operating tips.............................................. 4-46
Center multi-function control panel ...................... 4-3 Linking Intelligent Key ................................. 4-46
How to use INFINITI controller.......................... 4-4 In-cabin microfilter....................................... 4-46
How to use touch screen ................................. 4-4 Servicing climate control.............................. 4-47
Menu options .................................................. 4-6 Audio system .................................................... 4-47
How to select menus on the screen................. 4-7 Audio operation precautions ........................ 4-47
Vehicle information and settings.......................... 4-7 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc
How to use STATUS button .............................. 4-7 (CD) player................................................... 4-60
How to use brightness control and display DVD (Digital Versatile Disc)
ON/OFF button ................................................ 4-7 player operation .......................................... 4-64
How to use INFO button .................................. 4-7 USB memory operation ................................ 4-67
How to use SETTING button........................... 4-12 Bluetooth® streaming audio ........................ 4-72
Around ViewTM Monitor...................................... 4-21 iPod® player operation ................................ 4-76
How to switch the display ............................. 4-23 Front auxiliary input jacks............................ 4-78
How to see each view.................................... 4-24 CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning...... 4-80
Difference between predicted and Steering-wheel-mounted controls
actual distances ............................................ 4-28 for audio ..................................................... 4-81
Camera aiding corner sonar function ............. 4-30 Antenna....................................................... 4-82
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ..................... 4-32 Dual head restraint DVD system (if
How to adjust the screen view....................... 4-34 so equipped)..................................................... 4-83
Around ViewTM Monitor settings .................... 4-35 System components..................................... 4-83
Operating tips ............................................... 4-37 Before operating dual head restraint
DVD system ................................................. 4-91
Ventilators ......................................................... 4-38
Playing Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)/USB ...... 4-92
Automatic climate control .................................. 4-39
Operating tips.............................................. 4-97
Automatic climate control .............................. 4-41
Care and maintenance................................... 4-97 Receiving a call.......................................... 4-105
Car phone or CB radio ....................................... 4-98 During a call .............................................. 4-106
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ............... 4-98 Phone setting ............................................ 4-106
Regulatory information ................................ 4-100 Troubleshooting guide ............................... 4-108
Voice commands ......................................... 4-100 INFINITI Voice Recognition system ................... 4-109
Control buttons ........................................... 4-100 INFINITI Voice Recognition
Connecting procedure.................................. 4-101 Standard Mode.......................................... 4-109
Phone selection........................................... 4-101 Using the system....................................... 4-112
Quick Dial ................................................... 4-101 INFINITI Voice Recognition Alternate
Making a call .............................................. 4-104 Command Mode......................................... 4-125
Using the system....................................... 4-134
Troubleshooting guide ............................... 4-140
SAFETY NOTE CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL
WARNING
. Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
. In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
SAA3020
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately and 1. “CAMERA” Around View Monitor dis-
contact your nearest INFINITI retailer. play button (P.4-21)
Ignoring such conditions may lead to 2, 6, 7.
accidents, fire, or electric shock. For navigation system control buttons
. Park the vehicle in a safe location and (Refer to the separate Navigation
apply the parking brake to view the System Owner’s Manual.)
images on the front center display 3. INFINITI controller (P.4-4)
screen. 4. “INFO” vehicle and navigation infor-
mation button (P.4-7)
Do not attempt to operate the system in
5. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)
extreme temperature conditions [below
8. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-7)
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi- 9. “ OFF” brightness control and
tions may result in system malfunctions. display ON/OFF button (P.4-7)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

For the VOICE button *
4 functions, refer to
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
the separate Navigation System Owner’s chemical cleaning agent. They will
Manual. scratch or deteriorate the panel.
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN . Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
WARNING malfunction.
. ALWAYS give your full attention to To ensure safe driving, some functions
driving. cannot be operated while driving.
. Avoid using vehicle features that could The on-screen functions that are not
distract you. If distracted, you could lose available while driving will be “grayed
SAA3025 control of your vehicle and cause an out” or muted.
accident.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER
operate the navigation system.
Choose an item on the display by rotating
or pushing the center dial * 1 upward/ CAUTION
downward, and push the ENTER button * 2
for operation. . The glass screen on the liquid crystal
If you push the BACK button *3 before the display may break if it is hit with a hard
setup is completed, the setup will be or sharp object. If the glass screen
canceled and/or the display will return to breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could
the previous screen. This button can also result in an injury.
be used to delete characters that have . To clean the display, use a soft, dry
been input. cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary,
After the setup is completed, push the use a small amount of neutral detergent
BACK button *3 and return to the previous with a soft cloth. Never use a rough
screen. cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2473 SAA2474 SAA2475
Example Example
Inputting characters:
Touch screen operation Adjusting an item:
Touch the + * 1 or − *2 button to adjust
Touch the letter or number *
1 .
With this system, the same operations as There are some options available when
those for the INFINITI controller are possi- the settings.
inputting characters.
ble using the touch screen operation. Touch the *3 or *4 button to
. Uppercase:
Selecting the item: move to the previous or next item.
Shows uppercase characters.
Touch an item to select it. To select the Touch the *5 or *6 button to
. Lowercase:
“Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area move to the previous or next page.
Shows lowercase characters.
*1 on the screen.
. Symbols:
Touch the BACK *
2 key to return to the
Shows symbols such as the question
previous screen.
mark (?).
. Space:
Inserts a space.

. Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Push and hold
the button to delete all of the char-
acters.
. OK:
Completes character inputs.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral
detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray SAA3275 SAA2476
the screen with water or detergent. Dam-
pen the cloth first, and then wipe the MENU OPTIONS Available items
screen.
The start menu can be displayed using the Destination/Route:
menu control switch on the steering-wheel- These items are for the navigation system.
mounted controls. See the separate Navigation System Own-
1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is er’s Manual for details.
displayed, push and hold the menu
Info:
control switch until the “Menu Options”
screen appears. Displays the information screen. It is the
same screen that appears when you push
2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting
the INFO button.
the menu control switch up or down,
and then push the menu control switch Settings:
to select it. Displays the settings screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the
SETTING button.

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS
2. Menu Selections: HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

Shows the options to choose within You can check information related to the
that menu screen. audio, climate control system, fuel con-
3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator: sumption and navigation system by push-
Shows that the INFINITI controller may ing the STATUS button repeatedly.
be used to move UP/DOWN on the HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-
screen and select more options.
TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
4. Menu Items Counter: Push the “ OFF” button to switch the
Shows the total number of items listed display brightness to the daytime mode or
across all pages for the current menu. the nighttime mode, and to adjust the
5. Footer/Information Line: display brightness using the INFINITI con-
SAA2477 troller while the indicator is displayed at
Provides more information (if available)
the bottom of the screen.
about the menu selection currently
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE highlighted. Push and hold the “ OFF” button for
SCREEN more than 2 seconds to turn the display
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display off. Push the button again to turn the
screen in menus. To select each key item, display on.
highlight the preferred item using the
HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
button. The display screen shows vehicle and
navigation information for your conveni-
Whenever a menu selection is made or ence.
menu item is highlighted, different areas
on the screen provide you with important The information shown on the screen
information. See the following for details. should be a guide to determine the
condition of the vehicle. See the following
1. Header: for details.
Shows the path used to get to the
current screen.

. Weather Info
. Map Update
. Navigation Version*
. GPS Position
* When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the “Navigation Version” key is
displayed after selecting the “Others” key.
JVH0256M SAA2479
Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control
panel.
2. Select an item from the INFO menu.
3. After viewing or adjusting the informa-
tion on the following screens, push the
BACK button to return to the INFO
menu.
See the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for the following items:
. Infiniti Connection (if so equipped)
. Where am I? SAA2480
. Traffic Info

Fuel Economy information . Replacing tires with those not originally
The approximate distance to empty, aver- specified by INFINITI could affect the
age fuel economy and current fuel econo- proper operation of the TPMS.
my will be displayed for reference.
To reset the average fuel economy (Avg The tire pressure will be displayed for
Fuel Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” key. reference.
If the “Fuel Eco History” key is selected, The pressure indication “** kPa” or “**
the average fuel consumption history will psi” on the screen means that the pressure
be displayed in graph form along with the is being measured. After a few driving
average for the previous Reset-to-Reset trips, the pressure for each tire will be
period. displayed.
The unit can be converted between “US” To change the measurement units, select
SAA3146 the “Select Units” key with the INFINITI
and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING
button” later in this section.) controller and push the ENTER button.
TIRE PRESSURE information
The fuel economy information may differ In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRES-
from the information displayed on the SURE information will be displayed on the
vehicle information display. This is due to WARNING screen. Check the pressure of all tires.
the timing difference in updating the Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
information and does not indicate a mal- . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel the heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling
function. is replaced, tire pressure will not be condition and the temperature.
indicated, the TPMS will not function
After tire rotation is performed, tire pres-
and the low tire pressure warning light
sure will not be displayed in the actual tire
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
position. Drive the vehicle at over 25 MPH
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
(40 km/h) for approximately 10 minutes to
Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as
reset the display.
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting. For more details about the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS), see “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section. Maintenance information
* When the ignition switch is in the ACC The maintenance intervals can be dis-
position, the “Tire Pressure” key is not played for the engine oil, oil filter, tire
displayed. and other reminders.
To set a maintenance interval, select a
preferred item from the list.
You can also set to display a message to
remind you that the maintenance needs to
be performed.
The following example shows how to set
the engine oil maintenance information.
SAA2481
Use the same steps to set the other
maintenance information.
1. Set the interval (mileage) of the main-
tenance schedule. To determine the
recommended maintenance interval,
refer to your “INFINITI Service and
Maintenance Guide”.
2. To display the reminder automatically
when the desired distance is reached,
select the “Reminder” key.
3. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
4. To return to the previous screen, push
the BACK button.
SAA2482 The unit can be converted between “US”
and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING

button” later in this section.)
SAA3003 JVH0272M
The Reminder will be automatically dis- Others information

played when the specified distance has
been driven and every time the ignition The Others information display will appear
switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position. when pushing the INFO button and select-
The reminder will not appear while driving. ing the “Others” key.
Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder Map Update:
for the rest of the current drive. For the details of this item, see the
To stop the reminder from appearing, separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
perform one of the following actions: ual.
. Select the “Reset Distance”. Navigation Version:
. Deactivate the “Reminder”. For the details of this item, see the
. Increase the “Interval” distance to be separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
more than the current distance being ual.
tracked. When the ignition switch is in the ignition

position, the “Navigation Version” key is
displayed after pushing the INFO button.
GPS Position:
For the details of this item, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
Voice Recognition:
For the details of this item, see “INFINITI
Voice Recognition system” later in this
section.
SAA3159 SAA2485-A
HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON Audio settings

The display as illustrated will appear when The display as illustrated will appear when
the SETTING button is pushed. pushing the SETTING button and selecting
For navigation settings, refer to the sepa- the “Audio” key.
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:
To adjust the speaker tone quality and
sound balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”,
“Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with
the INFINITI controller.
These items can also be adjusted by
pushing and turning the AUDIO knob.

Speed Sensitive Vol. (if so equipped): DivX® Registration Code:
The audio system’s volume is increased The registration code for a device that is
with the vehicle speed. Select the “Speed used to download DivX® files will be
Sensitive Vol.” and adjust the effect level displayed on the screen. If a disc is loaded
with the INFINITI controller. The Speed or a USB memory is connected to the audio
Sensitive Volume function is turned off system, this function will not be activated.
when the level is set to OFF. Increasing the
Display Album Cover Art:
value will cause the volume to increase
faster with vehicle speed. When this item is turned to ON, the album
cover image is displayed when playing
BOSE® Centerpoint® (if so equipped): compressed music files through a CD, DVD,
When this item is turned to ON, an exciting iPod® or MP3 USB memory. When the
surround sound effect is generated from a image is not properly embedded in the file
traditional stereo recording. or device, the image will not be displayed. SAA2554
Surround Effect (if so equipped): Phone settings Volume and Beeps settings
To adjust the surround sound volume, For details of the “Phone” settings, see The display as illustrated will appear when
select “Surround Effect” key and adjust it “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
with the INFINITI controller. later in this section. “Volume & Beeps” key.
Driver’s Audio Stage (if so equipped):
Bluetooth settings Audio Volume:
When this feature is turned to ON, better
For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see To increase or decrease the audio volume,
sound will be provided to the driver’s
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” select the “Audio Volume” and adjust it
position. The driver can enjoy a more crisp
later in this section. with the INFINITI controller. You can also
and clear sound that is specialized for the
adjust the audio volume by turning the
driver’s position. The effect of this feature
VOLUME control knob.
depends on the type of music that is
played. For some music, it may be difficult Guidance Volume:
to realize the effect of this feature. To adjust the guidance voice volume, select
the “Guidance Volume” and adjust it with
the INFINITI controller.
You can also adjust the guidance voice equipped) or “R.AUX” for Source “L” (left)
volume by turning the VOLUME control and “R” (right) and push the ENTER button
knob while voice guidance is being an- to switch each display to the selected
nounced. source.
Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call: Auto Display:
For the details of these items, see “Blue- When an item is turned on and a DVD or
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System” later in USB (movie file only) is played, the rear
this section. display turns on automatically.
Switch Beeps: Rear Speaker:
When this item is turned to ON, you will This item turns the rear speakers on/off.
hear a beep sound when you use a button.
DRIVER ASSISTANCE settings (if so
Guidance Voice: JVH0356M
equipped)
When this item is turned to ON, you will For details of the “Driver Assistance”
hear voice guidance in the navigation REAR DISPLAY settings (if so
settings, refer to the following items:
operation or in other operations. equipped)
. “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Preven-
The “Rear Display” screen will appear
NOTE: tion (LDP) system ” in the “5. Starting
when the SETTING button is pushed, the
When the voice guidance is being an- and driving” section.
“Rear Display” key is selected. (See “Dual
nounced during audio playback, turning head restraint DVD system” later in this . “Blind Spot Warning/Blind Spot Inter-
the volume knob does not adjust the section.) ventionTM/Back-up Collision Interven-
music level; it adjusts the guidance tion systems” in the “5. Starting and
volume level. If voice guidance is not Display Control: driving” section.
being heard, please check the Guidance The rear seat display can be set from the . “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system”
Volume level. front seat using the control panel. Select in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
the “L” (left) or “R” (right) display and push . “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys-
Enter button. When an item is set to ON, tem” in the “5. Starting and driving”
the selected side of the rear display turns section.
on. Select “DVD”, “USB”, “F.AUX” (if so

. “Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) . Image Viewer
system” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section.
SAA3008
Others settings
The Others settings display will appear
when pushing the SETTING button and
selecting the “Others” key.
The following items are available:
. Display
. Comfort
. Clock
. Language & Units
. Voice Recognition
. Infiniti Connection (if so equipped)
. Camera

When any mode button is pushed with the
screen off, the screen turns on for further
operation. The screen will turn off auto-
matically 5 seconds after the operation is
finished.
To turn on the screen, set this item to the
ON position, or push and hold the OFF
button.
. Brightness/Contrast/Background Color
To adjust the brightness and contrast of
the screen, select the “Brightness” or
“Contrast” key.
SAA2486 SAA3151
Then, you can adjust the brightness and
the contrast using the INFINITI controller.
Display settings Comfort settings
For information on the “Background Color”
The display as illustrated will appear when key, refer to the separate Navigation The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button and selecting System Owner’s Manual. pushing the SETTING button and selecting
the “Display” key. the “Others” key, and then selecting the
Color Theme: “Comfort” key. This key does not appear on
Display Adjustment:
Choose the theme color of the menu screen the display until the ignition switch is
To adjust the display settings, select the from “Black”, “Brown” or “Silver”. pushed to the ON position.
“Display Adjustment” key. The following
settings are available. Auto Interior Illumination:
. Display When this item is turned to ON, the interior
lights will illuminate if any door is un-
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER
locked.
button and turn the “Display” indicator off.
The other method is to push and hold the
OFF button for more than 2 seconds.

Light Sensitivity: if the ignition switch is in the LOCK
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic position and the driver’s door is opened.
headlights higher (right) or lower (left). After getting into the vehicle and pushing
the ignition switch to the ACC position, the
Light Off Delay: steering wheel moves to the previous
Choose the duration of the automatic position.
headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90,
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit:
120, 150 and 180 second periods.
When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s
Selective Door Unlock: seat moves backward for easy exit if the
When this item is turned to ON, only the ignition switch is in the OFF position and
driver’s door is unlocked first after the door the driver’s door is opened. After getting
unlock operation. When the door handle into the vehicle and pushing the ignition
request switch on the driver’s or front switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat SAA2487
passenger’s side door is pushed to be moves to the previous position.
unlocked, only the corresponding door is Clock settings
Return All Settings to Default:
unlocked first. All the doors can be
Select this item and then select “YES” to The display as illustrated will appear when
unlocked if the door unlock operation is
return all settings to the default. pushing the SETTING button and selecting
performed again within 60 seconds.
the “Others” key, and then selecting the
When this item is turned to OFF, all the “Clock” key.
doors will be unlocked after the door
The clock settings display cannot be
unlock operation is performed once.
operated while driving. Stop the vehicle
Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock: in a safe place and apply the parking brake
When this item is turned to ON, door lock/ before setting the clock.
unlock function by pushing the door On-screen Clock:
handle request switch will be activated.
When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: always displayed in the upper right corner
When this item is turned to ON, the of the screen.
steering wheel moves upward for easy exit
This clock will indicate the time almost in the “9. Technical and consumer informa-
exactly because it is always adjusted by tion” section.
the GPS system. Select Units:
Clock Format (24h): Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US”
When this item is turned to ON, the 24- (Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100
hour clock is displayed. When this item is km) for your favorite display appearance.
not turned to ON, the 12-hour clock is Select Units (Tire Pressure):
displayed.
Choose the “Select Units (Tire Pressure)”
Offset (hour)/(min): key and push the ENTER button. From the
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing following display, select “kPa” or “psi”.
per hour or per minute. When the ignition switch is in the ACC
position, the “Select Units (Tire Pressure)”
Daylight Saving Time: SAA3007
key is not displayed.
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving
time application. Language & Units settings Voice Recognition settings
Time Zone: The Language & Units settings display will For details about the “Voice Recognition”
appear when pushing the SETTING button. settings, see “INFINITI Voice Recognition
Choose the time zone from the following
Select the “Others” key to show the system” later in this section.
. Pacific “Language & Units” key.
. Mountain Infiniti Connection (if so equipped)
Select Language:
. Central The information feeds history and the UNIT
. Eastern Select the “Select Language” key. Choose ID can be confirmed and Infiniti Connection
“English”, “Français” or “Español” for your history can be deleted. For further details,
. Atlantic
favorite display appearance. see the separate Navigation System Own-
. Newfoundland
If you select the “Français” key, the French er’s Manual.
. Hawaii
language will be displayed, so please use
. Alaska the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a
French Owner’s Manual, see “Owner’s
Manual/Service Manual order information”
CAMERA settings apply the parking brake.
The “CAMERA” screen will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Camera” key with the INFINITI controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
For the details about the camera system
operation, see “Around ViewTM Monitor
settings” later in this section.
SAA2491
Image Viewer
The image files in the USB memory will be
displayed. To display the Image Viewer,
push the SETTING button, select the
“Other” key and then select the “Image
Viewer” key. The image of the selected file
is displayed on the right side of the screen.
When a number of folders are included in
the USB memory, select a folder from the
list to display the file list.
Images will not be shown on the display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to
reduce driver distraction. To view images,
stop the vehicle in a safe location and

file. — Maximum Resolution: 2048 6 1536
. (Previous) pixels
Select the “ ” key to display the — Maximum Size: 2 MB
previous file. — Colors: 32768 (15 bit)
Setting the Image Viewer: — Maximum File Name lengths: 253
Bytes
The Image Viewer setting display will
appear when selecting the “Settings” key — Maximum Folders: 500
on the full screen display. The following — Maximum Images per Folder: 1024
settings are available for the full screen . If an electronic device (such as a digital
display. camera) is directly connected to the
. Slideshow Speed vehicle using a USB cable, no image
will be displayed on the screen.
SAA2492 Select the “Slideshow Speed” key.
From the following display, select the . If the file name is too long, some file
changing time from 5, 10, 30, 60 names may not be entirely displayed.
Full Screen Display:
seconds or “No Auto Change”. . When the total number of characters in
The full screen display will appear when
. Slideshow Order the file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file
selecting the “Full Screen Display” key.
name in a directory exceeds 100
To operate the Image Viewer or to change Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From
characters, all files will show a shor-
the settings, select the desired key using the following display, select “Random”
tened 8-character version. The image
the INFINITI controller. or “Order List”. For “Order List”, the
will still be displayed when selected.
image order is the order of the files as
. (Start) stored on the USB memory.
Select the “ ” key to start playing
the slideshow. Operating tips:
. (Stop) . Only files that meet the following
Select the “ ” key to stop the conditions will be displayed.
slideshow. — Image type: JPEG
. (Next) — File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg
Select the “ ” key to display the next

AROUND VIEWTM MONITOR
When you push the CAMERA button or shift
the shift lever into the R (Reverse) position
monitor *
2 .
while the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Around View Monitor oper- WARNING
ates. The monitor displays various views of
the position of the vehicle. . The Around View Monitor is a convenient
Available views: feature but it is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation because it has
. Bird-Eye View
areas where objects cannot be viewed.
The surrounding view of the vehicle. Always look out the windows and check
. Front-Side View mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move.
The view around and ahead of the front The driver is always responsible for
passenger’s side wheel. safety during parking and other maneu-
. Front View vers.
An approximately 150-degree view of . Do not use the Around View Monitor with
the front of the vehicle. the outside mirror in the stored position,
. Rear view and make sure that the lift gate is
An approximately 150-degree view of securely closed when operating the
the rear of the vehicle. vehicle using the Around View Monitor.
. Rear-Wide View . The distance between objects viewed on
An approximately 180-degree view of the Around View Monitor differs from the
SAA3160 actual distance.
the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the There are some areas where the system . The cameras are installed above the
driver in situations such as slot parking or will not show objects. When in the front or front grille, the outside mirrors and
parallel parking. the rear view display, an object below the above the rear license plate. Do not put
bumper or on the ground may not be anything on the cameras.
viewed * 1 . When in the bird-eye view, a . When washing the vehicle with high-
tall object near the seam of the camera pressure water, be sure not to spray it
viewing areas will not appear in the around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
. Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt
or snow from the front of the camera.
JVH0358X

: Shift the shift lever sonar does not detect any objects, the previous screen.
: Select the “Change View” key on the monitor will display the previous
screen
screen. Starting with the shift lever opera-
: Push the CAMERA button
. When the shift lever is not in the R tion
*
A : Original screen before the Around (Reverse) position and the vehicle . When the shift lever is shifted into the R
View Monitor is operated speed increase above approximately 6 (Reverse) position * 1 while another
*
B : Rear view/bird-eye view screen MPH (10 km/h), the monitor changes screen * A is displayed, Around View
*
C : Rear view/front-side view screen from Around View Monitor screen to the Monitor operates and the rear view and
bird-eye view * B are displayed.
*
D : Rear-wide view screen previous screen.
. The Around View Monitor screen
*
E : Front view/bird-eye view screen With the ignition switch in the ON
position, press the CAMERA button or switches to the previous screen when
*
F : Front view/front-side view screen
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) the shift is shifted out of the R
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY position to operate the Around View (Reverse) position * 2 .
The Around View Monitor display consists Monitor. . The view on the screen on the passen-
of the left and the right screens. You can . When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) ger’s side switches to the front-side
see a combination of different views on the position and the monitor does not view * C when the CAMERA button is
screens as illustrated. display Around View Monitor and the pushed * 3 . When the CAMERA button
sonar detection distance is becoming is pushed again * 5 , the rear-wide view
. With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, push the CAMERA button or
short, the monitor displays Front-view/ *D is displayed. When the CAMERA
bird-eye view. In that case when the button is pushed again * 7 , the rear-
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
CAMERA button is pushed or when the wide view screen switches to the screen
position to operate the Around View
sonar does not detect any objects, the with the bird-eye view * B .
Monitor.
monitor will display the previous The passenger’s side screen returns to
. When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) screen. another by operating the same proce-
position and the monitor does not
. When the shift lever is not in the R dures again.
display Around View Monitor and the
(Reverse) position and the vehicle When selecting the “Change View” key
sonar detection distance is becoming
speed increases above approximately on the screen, the view on the screen
short, the monitor displays Front-view/
6 MPH (10 km/h), the monitor changes will switch between the available views
bird-eye view. In that case when the
CAMERA button is pressed or when the
from Around view monitor screen to the *4 / * 6 / *8 .

. The view on the driver’s side or the wide (Reverse) position *13 /*15 . The view on
. When driving the vehicle up a hill,
view can be changed to the front view the driver’s side or the wide view objects viewed in the monitor are further
by shifting the shift lever out of the R returns to the front view * E /* F when
than they appear. When driving the
(Reverse) position * 12 /*
14 . the shift lever is shifted out of the R vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in
. When the shift lever is moved to any (Reverse) position *12 /*
14 /* 16 .
the monitor are closer than they appear.
other position than R (Reverse) position . Push another button on the control Use the mirrors or actually look to
while the rear-wide view * D is dis- panel to quit the Around View Monitor. properly judge distances to other ob-
played, *E or * F (the view that is set to jects.
a higher priority) will be displayed *16 . HOW TO SEE EACH VIEW
. The vehicle width and predictive course
Starting with the CAMERA button lines are wider than the actual width and
operation WARNING course.
. When the CAMERA button is pushed * 9 . The distance guide line and the vehicle
while another screen * A is displayed, width line should be used as a reference
Around View Monitor operates and the only when the vehicle is on a paved,
front view and bird-eye view * E are level surface. The distance viewed on the
displayed. monitor is for reference only and may be
. The view on the passenger’s side different than the actual distance be-
switches to the front-side view * F when tween the vehicle and displayed objects.
the CAMERA button is pushed * 10 .
. Use the displayed lines and the bird-eye
When the CAMERA button is pushed view as a reference. The lines and the
again *17 , screen *A is displayed.
bird-eye view are greatly affected by the
. When selecting the “Change View” key number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
on the screen, the view on the screen position, road condition and road grade.
will switch between the available views
. If the tires are replaced with different
*11 .
sized tires, the predictive course line
. The view on the driver’s side or the wide and the bird-eye view may be displayed
view switches to the rear view * B /* C
incorrectly.
when the shift lever is shifted into the R

Front and rear view
Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle WARNING
width and distances to objects with re-
ference to the vehicle body line *A , are . The distance between objects viewed in
displayed on the monitor. the rear view differs from actual distance
because a wideangle lens is used.
Distance guide lines: Objects in the RearView will appear
Indicate distances from the vehicle body. visually opposite than when viewed in
. Red line *1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) the rear view and outside mirrors.
. Yellow line *2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . On a snow-covered or slippery road,
. Green line *3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) there may be a difference between the
. Green line *4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) predictive course line and the actual
course line.
Vehicle width guide lines *
SAA1840
5 :
Front view . The displayed lines on the RearView will
Indicate the vehicle width when backing appear slightly off to the right because
up. the RearView camera is not installed in
Predictive course lines *6 : the rear center of the vehicle.
Indicate the predictive course when oper-
ating the vehicle. The predictive course NOTE:
lines will be displayed on the monitor When the monitor displays the front view
when the steering wheel is turned. The and the steering wheel turns about 90
predictive course lines will move depend- degrees or less from the neutral position,
ing on how much the steering wheel is both the right and left predictive course
turned and will not be displayed while the lines * 6 are displayed. When the steering
steering wheel is in the neutral position. wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a
The front view will not be displayed when line is displayed only on the opposite side
the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 of the turn.
SAA1896
km/h).
Rear view

Bird-eye view When the corner of the vehicle moves
closer to an object, the corner sonar
indicators *
3 appears.
WARNING The driver can check the direction and
angle of the tire on the display by tire icon
. Objects in the bird-eye view will appear
further than the actual distance because *4 when driving the vehicle forward or
backward.
the bird-eye view is a pseudo view that
is processed by combining the views Predictive course lines ( * 5 and * 6 )
from the cameras on the outside mirrors, indicate the predictive course when oper-
the front and the rear of the vehicle. ating the vehicle. The predictive course
lines will be displayed on the monitor
. Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
when the steering wheel is turned. The
may be misaligned or not displayed at
JVH0265X predictive course lines will move depend-
the seam of the views.
ing on how much the steering wheel is
. Objects that are above the camera The bird-eye view shows the overhead view turned and will not be displayed while the
cannot be displayed. of the vehicle, which helps confirm the steering wheel is in the neutral position.
. The view for the bird-eye view may be vehicle position and the predicted course
When the monitor displays the front view
misaligned when the camera position to a parking space.
and the steering wheel turns about 90
alters. The vehicle icon *
1 shows the position of degrees or less from the neutral position,
. A line on the ground may be misaligned the vehicle. Note that the size of the the two green predictive course lines * 5
and is not seen as being straight at the vehicle icon on the bird-eye view may are shown in front of the vehicle.
seam of the views. The misalignment will differ somewhat from the actual vehicle.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
increase as the line proceeds away from The areas that the cameras cannot cover *
2 degrees or more, one green predictive
the vehicle. are indicated in black. course line *
6 is shown in front of the
. Tire angle display does not indicate the The non-viewable area * 2 is highlighted in vehicle and the other green predictive
actual tire angle yellow for several seconds after the bird- course line *
6 is shown at side of the
eye view is displayed. It will be shown only vehicle.
the first time after the ignition switch is When the monitor displays the rear view,
placed in the “ON” position.
the predictive course lines are shown at when a corner of the vehicle moves closer
back of the vehicle. to an object.
The corner sonar indicator * 4 can be
turned off. See “Around ViewTM Monitor
settings” later in this section.
CAUTION
The turn signal light may look like the side-
of-vehicle line. This is not a malfunction.
SAA1842
Front-side view
Guiding lines:
Guiding lines that indicate the width and
the front end of the vehicle are displayed
on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line *
1 shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line * 2 shows the
vehicle width including the outside mirror.
The extensions * 3 of both the front *1
and side * 2 lines are shown with a green
dotted line.
The corner sonar indicator *
4 will appear

. Yellow line *
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line *3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line *4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines *5 :

Indicates the vehicle width when backing
up.
Corner sonar indicator *
6 :
The corner sonar indicator *6 will appear
when a corner of the vehicle moves closer
to an object.
JVH0321X
Rear-wide view
The rear-wide view shows a wider area on
the entire screen and allows the checking
of the blind corners on the right and left
sides. The rear-wide view displays an
approximately 180-degree area while the
front view and the rear view display an SAA3044
approximately 150-degree area. The pre-
dictive course lines are not displayed on DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
the rear-wide view. AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
Distance guide lines: Moving to a steep uphill
Indicates distances from the vehicle body. When moving the vehicle up a hill, the
. Red line *
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the

actual distance. For example, the display place *
B . Note that any object on the hill is
shows 3 ft (1 m) to the place * A , but the viewed in the monitor closer than it
actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on the hill is the appears.
place *B . Note that any object on the hill is
viewed in the monitor further than it
appears.
SAA3045
Moving to a steep downhill

When moving the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown further than the
actual distance. For example, the display
shows 3 ft (1 m) to the place * A , but the
actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on the hill is the
actual moving course.
CAMERA AIDING CORNER SONAR
FUNCTION
The parking sonar sounds a tone to inform
the driver of obstacles near the bumper.
WARNING
. The sonar is a convenience feature. It is
not a substitute for proper parking.
. The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneu-
vers.
. Always look around and check that it is
safe to move before parking.
. Read and understand the limitations of
the sonar as contained in this section.
. The colors of the sonar indicators and
SAA1923 SAA3046 the distance guide lines in the front, rear
and rear-wide views indicate different
Moving near a projecting object Moving closer to a projecting object distances to the object.
The predictive course lines * A do not The position *C is shown further than the . Inclement weather or Ultrasonic sources
touch the object in the display. However, position *B in the display. However, the such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
the vehicle may hit the object if it projects position * C is actually at the same compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic
over the actual moving course. distance as the position * A . The vehicle drill may affect the function of the
may hit the object when moving toward the system; this may include reduced per-
position *A if the object projects over the formance or a false activation.
. This function is designed as an aid to cator (green) appears and blinks and the
the driver in detecting large stationary CAUTION tone sounds intermittently. When the
objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
vehicle. . Excessive noise (such as audio system color of the indicator turns yellow and the
volume or an open vehicle window) will rate of the blinking and the rate of the tone
. The system is not designed to prevent increase. When the vehicle is very close to
interfere with the tone and it may not be
contact with small or moving objects. the object, the indicator stops blinking and
heard.
. The system will not detect small objects turns red, and the tone sounds continu-
. Keep the surface of the sonar sensors
below the bumper, and may not detect ously.
(located on the front and rear bumper
objects close to the bumper or on the The intermittent tone will stop after three
fascia) free from accumulations of snow,
ground. seconds when an object is detected by
ice and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of
. The system may not detect the following the sonar sensors when cleaning. If the only the corner sonar and the distance
objects: sensors are covered, the accuracy of the does not change.
— Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, sonar function will be diminished. The tone will stop when the object gets
cotton, glass or wool. away from the vehicle.
— Thin objects such as rope, wire or The system gives the tone for front objects
chain. when the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and both front and rear objects
— Wedge-shaped objects. when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
. If your vehicle sustains damage to the position.
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or When the camera image is shown on the
bent, the sensing zone may be altered display, the system shows the sonar
causing inaccurate measurement of ob- indicator regardless of the shift lever
jects or false alarms. position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 MPH(10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
When the objects are detected, the indi-

view is shown on the display. stopped, the MOD system detects the
. When vehicle speed decreases below moving objects in the bird-eye view.
approximately 6 MPH (10 km/h). The MOD system will not operate if the
. When the ignition switch is placed in outside mirror is moving in or out or if
the “OFF” position and turned back to either door is opened.
the “ON” position again. . When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
. When the switch is selected, the MOD position and the vehicle speed is below
function will also be turned off. approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
To prevent the sonar system from activat-
the front view.
ing altogether, use the “Camera Settings”
menu. For more information, see “Around . When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
ViewTM Monitor settings” later in this position and the vehicle speed is below
JVH0266X section. approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
When the “ ” *1 is selected, the MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) the rear view or rear-wide view. The
indicator *2 will turn off and the sonar The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system MOD system will not operate if the lift
will be turned off temporarily. The Moving can inform the driver of the moving objects gate is open.
Object Detection (MOD) system will also be surrounding the vehicle when driving out The MOD system does not detect moving
turned off at the same time. (See “Moving of garages, maneuvering into parking lots objects in the front-side view. The MOD
Object Detection (MOD)” later in this and in other such instances. icon is not displayed on the screen when in
section.) When the “ ” *1 is selected this view.
The MOD system detects moving objects by
again, the indicator will turn on and the
using image processing technology on the
sonar will turn back on.
image shown on the display. WARNING
In the below cases, the sonar will be
The MOD system operates in the following
turned back on automatically:
conditions when the camera view is . The MOD system is not a substitute for
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) displayed: proper vehicle operation and is not
position. designed to prevent contact with the
. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or
. When the CAMERA button is pressed N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is objects surrounding the vehicle. When
and a screen other than the camera maneuvering, always use the outside
mirror and rear view mirror and turn and
check the surrounding to ensure it is
safe to maneuver.
. The MOD system does not have the
ability to detect the surrounding sta-
tionary objects.
JVH0289X JVH0291X
Bird-eye view Rear-wide view
When the MOD system detects a moving
object surrounding the vehicle, the yellow
frame will be displayed on the view where
the objects are detected and a chime will
sound once. While the MOD system con-
tinues to detect moving objects, the yellow
frame continues to be displayed.
In the bird-eye view, the yellow frame *
1 is
displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where
moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame * 2 is displayed on each
view in the front view, rear view and rear-
JVH0290X
wide view modes.
Front view / rear view

While the sonar or the BCI chime (if so To set the MOD system so that it remains mirror is folded.
equipped) is beeping, the MOD system off at all times, use the camera settings
does not chime. menu. See “Around ViewTM Monitor set- — When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
A blue MOD icon * 3 is displayed in the tings” later in this section for more
view where the MOD system is operative. A information. — When the position of the moving
gray MOD icon *3 is displayed in the view objects in the display is not changed.
where the MOD system is not operative. WARNING . The MOD system might detect some-
When the “ ” key * 4 is selected, the thing like flowing water droplets on the
MOD system will turn off temporarily and . Do not use the MOD system when camera lens, white smoke from the
the indicator *
5 will turn off. At the same towing a trailer. The system may not muffler, moving shadows, etc.
time a camera-aiding sonar will also be function properly. . The MOD system may not function
turned OFF. When the “MOD” key is . Excessive noise (for example, audio properly depending on the speed, direc-
selected again, the indicator will turn on system volume or open vehicle window) tion, distance or shape of the moving
and the MOD system will turn back on. will interfere with the chime sound, and objects.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD it may not be heard. . If your vehicle sustains damage to the
icon * 3 is not displayed.
. The MOD system performance will be parts where the camera is installed,
The MOD system will turn on automatically limited according to environmental con- leaving it misaligned or bent, the sen-
under the following conditions: ditions and surrounding objects such as: sing zone may be altered and the MOD
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) — When there is low contrast between system may not detect objects properly.
position. background and the moving objects.
. When the CAMERA button is pushed to — When there is blinking source of HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW
switch from a different screen to the light. To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
camera view on the display. Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the
. When vehicle speed decreases below — When strong light such as another
Around View Monitor, push the SETTING
approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h). vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
button with the Around View Monitor on,
present.
. When the ignition switch is placed in select the item key and adjust the level
the “OFF” position and then back to the — When camera orientation is not in using the INFINITI controller.
“ON” position. its usual position, such as when

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Non-viewable Area Reminder:
Contrast and Black Level of the Around With this item turned to ON, the non-
View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. viewable area is highlighted in yellow for
Make sure the parking brake is firmly several seconds after the bird-eye view is
applied. displayed. It will be shown only the first
time after the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Buzzer Volume:
Adjust the volume of the buzzer.
Corner Sonar Sensitivity:
Adjust the sensitivity level of the corner
JVH0323M sonar higher (right) or lower (left).
AROUND VIEWTM MONITOR SET-

TINGS
To set up the Around View Monitor to your
preferred settings, push the SETTING but-
ton, select the “Other” key and then select
the “Camera” key.
Predictive Course Lines:
When this item is turned to ON, the
predictive course line is displayed in the
front and the rear view and bird-eye view.
Camera View Priority:
The view shown on the screen at the
beginning of around view monitor opera-
tion can be selected in order of priority.
turned to OFF (indicator turns off), the front
and rear sonar is deactivated. The amber
markers are displayed at the corners of the
vehicle icon and the sonar icon will
disappear on the . The next time the
ignition switch is placed in the “ON”
position, “Sonar is OFF” is displayed
briefly.
Towing Mode:
When this item is turned ON, only the rear
sonar is OFF. The amber markers are
displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle
JVH0269X icon. JVH0270X
Show Camera when Sonar Activate:
Moving Object Detection (MOD): View malfunction
When this item is turned ON, the camera
Activate or deactivate the Moving Object When the “!” icon is displayed on the
view is automatically shown on the display
Detection (MOD) system. screen, there will be abnormal conditions
in the case that the distance to the objects
When this item is set to ON, the MOD is measured by the sonar is becoming short. in the around view monitor. This will not
activated. When this item is turned to OFF hinder normal driving operation but the
Sonar Sensitivity:
(indicator turns off), the MOD system is system should be inspected by an INFINITI
deactivated. “MOD” * 2 will disappear on Adjust the sensitivity level of the corner retailer.
the “ ” key *3 and the MOD icon * 1 sonar higher (right) or lower (left).
will disappear as well. When the sonar is
turned OFF on the setting menu as well, the
*3 will disappear.
Sonar:
When this item is turned ON, the front and
rear sonar is activated. When this item is

. When the view is switched, the display . Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
images on the screen may be displayed to clean the camera. This will cause
with some delay. discoloration. To clean the camera,
. When the temperature is extremely high wipe with a cloth that has been
or low, the screen may not display dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
objects clearly. This is not a malfunc- agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
tion. . Do not damage the camera because the
. When strong light is directly coming on monitor screen may be adversely af-
the camera, objects may not be dis- fected.
played clearly. This is not a malfunc- . Do not use wax on the camera lens.
tion. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that
. The screen may flicker under fluores- has been dampened with a mild
JVH0271X cent light. This is not a malfunction. detergent diluted with water.
. The colors of objects on the Around
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the View Monitor may differ somewhat
screen, the camera image may be receiving from the actual color of objects. This
temporary electronic disturbances from is not a malfunction.
surrounding devices. This will not hinder . Objects on the monitor may not be clear
normal driving operation but the system
and the color of the object may differ in
should be inspected by an INFINITI retailer a dark environment. This is not a
if it occurs frequently. malfunction.
OPERATING TIPS . There may be differences in sharpness
. The screen displayed on the Around between each camera view of the bird-
View Monitor will automatically return eye view.
to the previous screen 3 minutes after . If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
the CAMERA button has been pushed camera, the Around View Monitor may
while the shift lever is in a position not display objects clearly. Clean the
other than the R (Reverse) position. camera.

VENTILATORS
SAA3053 SAA3054 SAA3055

Center ventilators Side ventilators Rear ventilators
Open/close the ventilators by moving the Open/close the ventilators by moving the Open/close the ventilators by moving the
control to either direction. control to either direction. control to either direction.
: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are : This symbol indicates that the ventilators are Adjust the air flow direction of the ventila-
closed. Moving the side control to this closed. Moving the side control to this tors by moving the center knob (up/down,
direction will close the ventilators. direction will close the ventilators. left/right) until the desired position is
: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are : This symbol indicates that the ventilators are achieved.
open. Moving the side control to this direction open. Moving the side control to this direction
will open the ventilators. will open the ventilators.
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventila- Adjust the air flow direction of the ventila-
tors by moving the center knob (up/down, tors by moving the center knob (up/down,
left/right) until the desired position is left/right) until the desired position is
achieved. achieved.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
WARNING
. The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is run-
ning.
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
not be left alone either. On hot, sunny
days, temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to SAA2723
people or animals.
. Do not use the recirculation mode for When the STATUS button is pushed, the
long periods as it may cause the interior automatic climate control status screen
air to become stale and the windows to will appear. (See “How to use STATUS
fog up. button” earlier in this section.)
. Do not adjust the heating and air
conditioning controls while driving so
that full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Start the engine and operate the automatic

climate control system.

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON
button/Temperature control dial (dri-
ver side)
2. “ ” front defroster button
3. “ ” rear window defroster button
(See “Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.)
4. “ ” fan speed decrease button
5. “OFF” button for climate control sys-
tem
6. “ ” fan speed increase button
SAA3059 7. “ ” intake air control button
Without Advanced Climate Control System 8. “ ” air recirculation button
9. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/
Temperature control dial (passenger
side)
10. “MODE” manual air flow control but-
ton
11. “REAR” control button
12. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button
13. “ ” upper vent button
14. “ ” auto-recirculation button
SAA3161
With Advanced Climate Control System
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL “DUAL” button is pushed or the pas- . Do not set the temperature lower than
senger side temperature control button the outside air temperature. Otherwise
Automatic operation is turned, the DUAL indicator will come the system may not work properly.
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating on. To turn off the passenger side . Not recommended if windows fog up.
(AUTO): temperature control, push the “DUAL”
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
This mode may be used all year round. The button.
1. Push the “ ” front defroster button.
system works automatically to control the 4. To turn off the climate control system,
(The indicator light on the button will
inside temperature, air flow distribution push the “OFF” button.
illuminate.)
and fan speed after the preferred tempera- A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ture is set manually. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the
the desired temperature.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate
indicator on the button will illuminate a malfunction. . To quickly remove ice from the outside
and AUTO will be displayed.) of the windows, push the fan speed
Heating (A/C OFF): increase button “ ” and set it to the
2. Turn the temperature control dial (dri- The air conditioner does not activate in this maximum position.
ver side) to set the desired tempera- mode. When you need to heat only, use . As soon as possible after the wind-
ture. this mode.
. The temperature can be set within
shield is clean, push the “AUTO” button
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. to return to the auto mode.
the following range.
2. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C . When the “ ” front defroster button
— For U.S.: 60 to 908F is pushed, the air conditioner will
indicator will turn off.)
— For Canada: 18 to 328C automatically be turned on at outside
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set
. The temperature of the passenger temperatures above 238F (−58C) to
compartment will be maintained defog the windshield, and the air
automatically. Air flow distribution . The temperature of the passenger recirculate mode will automatically be
and fan speed will also be controlled compartment will be maintained auto- turned off.
automatically. matically. Air flow distribution and fan
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
speed are also controlled automati-
3. You can individually set driver and front compartment to improve the defogging
cally.
passenger side temperature using each performance.
temperature control button. When the

Manual operation illuminate. mode, push the “ ” auto-recircula-
The air recirculation mode cannot be tion button. The indicator light on the
Fan speed control:
activated when the air conditioner is in “ ”auto-recirculation button will
Push the fan speed increase “ ” or illuminate.
the front defrosting mode “ ”.
decrease “ ” buttons to manually con-
trol the fan speed. Outside air circulation: Turning the system off
Push the “AUTO” button to return to Push the intake air control button to draw Push the OFF button.
automatic control of the fan speed. outside air into the passenger compart-
ment. The indicator light on the “ ” Upper vent system
Temperature control: When the upper vent “ ” button is
button will turn off and “ ” (if so
Turn the temperature control dial to set the equipped) will illuminate. pushed, the air flow against the driver’s
desired temperature. or passenger’s upper body becomes gen-
Automatic intake air control:
. The temperature can be set within the tle. The indicator light on the button will
following range. In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be illuminate.
controlled automatically.
— For U.S.: 60 to 908F In this mode, air from the upper ventilator
— For Canada: 18 to 328C . Without Advanced Climate Control Sys- flows in order to control the cabin tem-
tem: perature without blowing air directly on the
Air flow control: — When the outside air circulation occupants.
Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow mode is on, push and hold the Push the upper vent “ ” button when
control button selects the air outlet to: “ ” intake air control button. you want the air conditioner to work
: Air flows from center and side ventilators. — When the air recirculation mode is quickly.
: Air flows from center and side ventilators and on, push and hold the “ ” air
foot outlets. To turn the system off, push the upper vent
recirculation button.
: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
“ ” button to turn the indicator light off.
When setting the automatic control
: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. mode, both indicator lights will blink Advanced Climate Control System
twice indicating that the system is in (if so equipped)
Air recirculation:
the automatic control mode.
Push the intake air control button to The Advanced Climate Control System
. With Advanced Climate Control System: keeps the air inside of the vehicle clean,
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
The indicator light on the “ ” button will To return to the automatic control using the ion control and the automatic air

intake control with exhaust gas detecting The amount of Plasmacluster® ions in-
sensor. creases according to the amount of air
flow. When the air flow is high, “ ” is
displayed on the screen and when the air
flow is low, the indication in the screen
changes to “ ”.
Plasmacluster® and Plasmacluster® ion
are registered trademarks of Sharp Cor-
poration.
Exhaust gas/outside odor detection sen-
sor:
This vehicle is equipped with an exhaust
SAA2734 gas detection sensor. When the automatic
intake air control is ON, the sensor detects
Ion control:
industry odors such as pulp or chemicals,
This unit generates highly concentrated and exhaust gas such as gasoline or
Plasmacluster® ions into the air blown diesel. When such odors or gas are
from the ventilators and reduces odor detected, the system automatically
absorbed into the interior trim. changes from the outside air circulation
The high-density Plasmacluster® ions gen- mode to the recirculation mode.
erated in the air conditioner’s air stream When the auto-recirculation button is
not only suppress airborne bacteria and pushed under the following conditions,
reduce the adherence of odors to the the indicator light on the “ ” button will
interior trim, but also have a proven skin illuminate and the exhaust gas detection
moisture preserving effect. sensor will turn on.
When the air conditioner is turned on, the . The air flow control is not in the front
system generates Plasmacluster ® ions defroster mode (the indicator light on
automatically. the “ ” front defroster button is

turned off). To adjust the front air conditioning system,
. The outside temperature is about 328F push the “REAR” button one more time.
(08C) or more. Automatic operation:
When the automatic intake air control is 1. Push the “AUTO” button. (The AUTO
ON, for the first 5 minutes, the recircula- indicator light will illuminate and
tion mode is selected to prevent dust, dirt “AUTO” will appear on the display.)
and pollen from entering the vehicle and
cleans the air inside of the vehicle with 2. Turn the temperature control dial (dri-
positive and negative ions that are emitted ver’s side) to set the desired tempera-
from the ventilator. ture.
After the 5 minutes, the sensor detects Manual operation:
exhaust gas and automatically alternates . Temperature control
between the recirculation mode and out- JVH0357M Turn the temperature control dial to set
side air circulation mode. the desired temperature.
Rear automatic air conditioning . Fan speed control
system Push the fan speed control “ ”
To control the rear automatic air condition- button or “ ” button to manually
ing system with the front air conditioner control the fan speed.
control panel, push the “REAR” button. . Air flow control
When the rear automatic air conditioning Push the “MODE” button to change the
system control is on, the indicator light on air flow mode.
the “REAR” button will illuminate and the
: The air outlet is fixed at foot level.
front display will switch to the rear air
: The air outlet is fixed at both the head and
conditioner screen. foot level.
The rear automatic air conditioning system : The air outlet is fixed at the head level.
can be adjusted with the front air condi-
tioner control panel, when the rear air Pushing the “A/C” button when the rear
conditioner screen is displayed. automatic air conditioning system is
turned on with the rear air conditioner
screen displayed will also turn off the rear Turning the system off:
automatic air conditioning system. Push the OFF button when the rear air
Rear Heating (A/C off): conditioner screen is displayed.
1. Push the “REAR” button to display the
rear air conditioner screen on the front
display when the rear automatic air
conditioning system is on.
2. Switch the air flow mode to by
pushing the “MODE” button.
3. Push the “AUTO” button. (The AUTO
indicator light will illuminate and
“AUTO” will appear on the display.)
4. If the A/C indicator light illuminates,
push the “A/C” button. (The A/C
indicator light will turn off.)
5. Turn the temperature control dial to set
. Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Doing so
may cause the temperature to not be SAA3327
controlled properly. 1. “OFF” button
. To dehumidify the air, push the “A/C” 2. Fan speed control button
button before turning on the heater.
3. “AUTO” button
. Air does not blow out from the vents on
4. Display
the ceiling when the system is used for
5. “MODE” button
heating.
6. “TEMP” button

. Rear control buttons OPERATING TIPS
The rear seat passengers can adjust the When the engine coolant temperature and
rear automatic air conditioning system outside air temperature are low, the air
using the control switches at the rear of flow from the foot outlets may not operate.
the center console. However, this is not a malfunction. After
The rear control buttons do not function the coolant temperature warms up, the air
when the rear air conditioner screen is flow from the foot outlets will operate
shown on the front display. To activate normally.
the rear control buttons, push the The sensors * A and * B located on the
“REAR” button on the front air condi- instrument panel help maintain a constant
tioner control panel and switch the temperature. Do not put anything on or
screen on the front display. around the sensors.
“OFF” button: Rear automatic air con- SAA3088
ditioning system off. LINKING INTELLIGENT KEY
“ ” button: Rear fan speed control The Climate control system settings can be
up/down memorized for each Intelligent Key. For
“AUTO” button: Rear automatic air more details, see “Setting memory func-
conditioning system on, AUTO mode on tion” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
“MODE” button: Rear air flow control adjustments” section.
change IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
“TEMP” button: Rear temperature con-
Models without Advanced Climate Control
trol up/down
System:
The climate control system is equipped
with an in-cabin microfilter which collects
dirt, pollen, dust, etc.
SAA3058 Models with Advanced Climate Control
System:

AUDIO SYSTEM
The climate control system is equipped recommendations.) AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

with a natural grape seed polyphenol filter Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service
which collects and neutralizes dirt, pollen, your environmentally friendly climate con- Radio
dust, etc. trol system. Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
To make sure that the air conditioner position and push the radio band select
heats, defogs and ventilates efficiently, button to turn on the radio. If you listen to
replace the filter in accordance with the WARNING the radio with the engine not running, the
maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Ser- ignition switch should be pushed to the
vice and Maintenance Guide. To replace the The system contains refrigerant under high ACC position.
filter, contact an INFINITI retailer. pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air
Radio reception is affected by station
conditioner service should be done only by
The filter should be replaced if the air flow signal strength, distance from radio trans-
an experienced technician with the proper
decreases significantly or if windows fog mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and
equipment.
up easily when operating the heater or air other external influences. Intermittent
conditioner. changes in reception quality normally are
caused by these external influences.
SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL Using a cellular phone in or near the
The climate control system in your INFINITI vehicle may influence radio reception
is charged with a refrigerant designed with quality.
the environment in mind. This refrigerant
will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Radio reception:
However, special charging equipment and Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with
lubricant are required when servicing your state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-
INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper hance radio reception. These circuits are
refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe designed to extend reception range, and to
damage to your climate control system. enhance the quality of that reception.
(See “Capacities and recommended fuel/ However there are some general character-
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con- istics of both FM and AM radio signals that
sumer information” section for climate can affect radio reception quality in a
control system refrigerant and lubricant moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics from a station transmitter, the signals will
are completely normal in a given reception tend to fade and/or drift.
area, and do not indicate any malfunction Static and flutter: During signal interfer-
in your INFINITI radio system. ence from buildings, large hills or due to
Reception conditions will constantly antenna position, usually in conjunction
change because of vehicle movement. with increased distance from the station
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.
interference from other vehicles can work This can be reduced by lowering the treble
against ideal reception. Described below setting to reduce the treble response.
are some of the factors that can affect your Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-
radio reception. tive characteristics of FM signals, direct
Some cellular phones or other devices may and reflected signals reach the receiver at
cause interference or a buzzing noise to SAA0306 the same time. The signals may cancel
come from the audio system speakers. each other, resulting in momentary flutter
Storing the device in a different location FM radio reception: or loss of sound.
may reduce or eliminate the noise. Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 AM radio reception:
to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
(single station) FM having slightly more
can bend around objects and skip along
range than stereo FM. External influences
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
may sometimes interfere with FM station
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
reception even if the FM station is within
to earth. Because of these characteristics.
25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM
AM signals are also subject to interference
signal is directly related to the distance
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
between the transmitter and receiver. FM
signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibit- Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
ing many of the same characteristics as through freeway underpasses or in areas
light. For example they will reflect off with many tall buildings. It can also occur
objects. for several seconds during ionospheric
turbulence even in areas where no obsta-
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

cles exist. changer.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical . During cold weather or rainy days, the
power lines, electric signs and even traffic player may malfunction due to the
lights. humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
Satellite radio reception:
player completely.
When the satellite radio is used for the first . The player may skip while driving on
time or the battery has been replaced, the rough roads.
satellite radio may not work properly. This
. The CD player sometimes cannot func-
is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10
tion when the passenger compartment
minutes with the satellite radio ON and the
temperature is extremely high. De-
vehicle outside of any metal or large
crease the temperature before use.
building for the satellite radio to receive
all of the necessary data. . Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
The satellite radio mode requires an active disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The packaging.
satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
Hawaii and Guam.
. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
The satellite radio performance may be scratched, covered with fingerprints,
affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks or that have pin holes may not work
the satellite radio signal. SAA0480 properly.
If possible, do not put cargo near the . The following CDs may not work prop-
satellite antenna. Compact Disc (CD) player erly:
A build up of ice on the satellite radio . Do not force a compact disc into the CD — Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
antenna can affect satellite radio perfor- insert slot. This could damage the CD — Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite and/or CD changer/player. — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
radio reception. . Trying to load a CD with the CD door . Do not use the following CDs as they
closed could damage the CD and/or CD may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion. completely.
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs . The player may skip while driving on
— CDs that are not round rough roads.
— CDs with a paper label . The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or function when the passenger compart-
have abnormal edges ment temperature is extremely high.
Decrease the temperature before use.
. This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to . Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
record or burn CDs. round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”
. If the CD cannot be played, one of the
logo on the disc or packaging.
following messages will be displayed.
. Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
CHECK DISC:
sunlight.
— Confirm that the CD is inserted
. CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
correctly (the label side is facing
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or
up, etc.).
that have pinholes may not work
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or
properly.
warped and it is free of scratches.
. The following CD/DVDs are not guaran-
PUSH EJECT:
teed to play:
This is an error due to the temperature LHA0484 — Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
inside the player is too high. Remove
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
the CD by pushing the EJECT button, DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player
and after a short time reinsert the CD. — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
. Do not force a compact disc into the — Recordable DVDs (DVD±R, DVD±R
The CD can be played when the
CD/DVD insert slot. This could damage DL)
temperature of the player returns to
the CD/DVD player.
normal. — Rewritable DVDs (DVD±RW, DVD±RW
. During cold weather or rainy days, the DL)
UNPLAYABLE:
player may malfunction due to humid-
The file is unplayable in this audio . Do not use the following CD/DVDs as
ity. If this occurs, remove the CD/DVD
system (only AAC, MP3 and WMA CD). they may cause the CD/DVD player to
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
malfunction. your local retailership. . Modifying or disassembling is prohib-
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs Unplayable File: ited.
— CD/DVDs that are not round — The file may be copy protected. . Dolby digital is manufactured under
— CD/DVDs with a paper label — The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A license from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
— CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched or DivX® type. . Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are
or have abnormal edges Region Invalid: trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
— This audio system can only play — The DVD is not for region 1 or all . DTS is a registered trademark of DTS,
prerecorded CD/DVDs. It has no regions. Use DVDs with a region Inc. and DTS 2.0 “ ” are registered
capabilities to record or burn CD/ code “1”, “ALL” or “1 included” for trademarks of DTS, Inc.
DVDs. your DVD entertainment system. . DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are
. If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of (The region code * A is displayed registered trademarks of Digital Theater
the following messages will be disas a small symbol printed on the top Systems, Inc.
played. of the DVD * B .) This vehicle-in- Parental level (parental control):
Disc Read Error: stalled DVD player cannot play DVDs
DVDs with the parental control setting can
— Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted with a region code other than “1” or
be played with this system. Please use
correctly (the label side is facing up, “ALL”.
your own judgement to set the parental
etc.). Copyright and trademark: control with the system.
— Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent . The technology protected by the U.S. Disc selection:
or warped and it is free of scratches. patent and other intellectual property
The following disc formats can be played
Please Eject Disc: rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-
with the DVD drive.
— This may be an error due to the tion and other right holders is adopted
for this system. . DVD-VIDEO
temperature inside the player being
too high. Remove the CD/DVD by . This copyright protected technology . VIDEO-CD
pushing the EJECT button, and after cannot be used without a permit from . CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)
a short time reinsert the CD/DVD. Macrovision Corporation. It is limited to . DTS-CD
The CD/DVD can be played when the be personal use, etc., as long as the
temperature of the player returns to permit from Macrovision Corporation is
normal. If the error persists, consult not issued.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) . To avoid damage and loss of function device. USB devices should be purchased
when using a USB device, note the separately as necessary.
following precautions. This system cannot be used to format USB
WARNING devices. To format a USB device, use a
— Do not bend the cable excessively
1.6 in (40 mm) radius minimum. personal computer.
Do not connect or disconnect the USB device
while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. In some states/area, the USB device for the
— Do not twist the cable excessively
If distracted you could lose control of your front seats plays only sound without
(more than 180 degrees).
vehicle and cause an accident or serious images for regulatory reasons, even when
injury. — Do not pull or drop the cable. the vehicle is parked.
— Do not hit or press the USB port or This system supports various USB memory
USB device with hands, feet, or devices, USB hard drives and iPod ®
objects. players. Some USB devices may not be
CAUTION supported by this system.
— Do not store objects with sharp
. Do not force the USB device into the USB edges in the storage area where the . Partitioned USB devices may not play
port. Inserting the USB device tilted or cable is stored. correctly.
up-side-down into the port may damage . Some characters used in other lan-
— Do not leave the USB device and
the USB device and the port. Make sure guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
attached devices in the vehicle com-
that the USB device is connected cor- not appear properly in the display.
partment. When not in use for
rectly into the USB port. Using English language characters with
extended periods of time, store the
. Do not grab the USB port cover (if so a USB device is recommended.
cable and USB device in a clean, dust
equipped) when pulling the USB device free environment at room tempera- General notes for USB use:
out of the port. This could damage the ture and without direct sun exposure. . The USB device may not function when
port and the cover. the passenger compartment tempera-
— Do not use the cable for any other
. Do not leave the USB cable in a place purposes than its intended use in the ture is extremely high. Lower the
where it can be pulled unintentionally. vehicle. temperature before use.
Pulling the cable may break the wire, . During cold weather or rainy days, the
USB device or the port. The vehicle is not equipped with a USB player may malfunction due to humid-
ity. If this occurs, remove the USB
device and dehumidify or ventilate the . Improperly plugging in the iPod® may Compressed Audio Files (MP3/
USB player completely. cause a checkmark to be displayed on WMA/AAC)
. Do not connect a USB device if a and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly. Explanation of terms:
connector, cable or USB port is wet.
Allow the connector, cable, and USB . An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may . MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
port to dry completely before connect- remain in fast forward or rewind mode Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is
ing the USB device. (Wait for 24 hours if it is connected during a seek opera- the most well known compressed
or more until it is dry.) If the connector tion. In this case, please manually reset digital audio file format. This format
and USB port are exposed to fluids the iPod®. allows for near “CD quality” sound, but
at a fraction of the size of normal audio
other than water, evaporative residue . An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will
may cause a short circuit between the files. MP3 conversion of an audio track
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it
connector pins and USB port. In this can reduce the file size by approxi-
is disconnected during a seek opera-
case, replace the cable and USB port. mately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
tion.
Otherwise damage to the USB device kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually
. An incorrect song title may appear when
and a loss of function may occur. no perceptible loss in quality. The
the Play Mode is changed while using
compression reduces certain parts of
. If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, an iPod nano® (2nd Generation)
sound that seem inaudible to most
connectors cracked, contamination . Audiobooks may not play in the same people.
such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the order as they appear on an iPod®.
connectors), do not use the cable. . WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is
. Large video files cause slow responses a compressed audio format created by
Replace the cable with a new one.
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
. Do not put a USB device in a location may momentarily black out, but will WMA codec offers greater file compres-
where static electricity occurs, electrical soon recover. sion than the MP3 codec, enabling
noise is generated or hot air from the
. If an iPod® automatically selects large storage of more digital audio tracks in
air conditioner blows directly on it.
video files while in the shuffle mode, the same amount of space when
Doing so may cause the data stored on
the vehicle center display may momen- compared to MP3s at the same level
the USB device to be corrupted.
tarily black out, but will soon recover. of quality.
Notes for iPod® use: . AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding
iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc., (AAC) is a lossy audio compression
registered in the U.S. and other countries. format. Audio files that have been
encoded with AAC are generally smaller of America and/or other countries.
in size and deliver a higher quality of
sound than MP3.
. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital
music file. The size and quality of a
compressed digital audio file is deter-
mined by the bit rate used when
encoding the file.
. Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-
quency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
. Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
. ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the SAA2494
digital music file such as song title,
artist, album title, encoding bit rate, Playback order:
track time duration, etc. ID3 tag in- . The folder names of folders not contain-
formation is displayed on the Album/ ing compressed audio files are not
Artist/Track title line on the display. shown in the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are . If there is a file in the top level of a disc/
registered trademarks or trademarks of USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.
Microsoft Corporation in the United States

. The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing
software, so the files might not play in
the desired order.
. Music playback order of compressed
audio files is as illustrated.

Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
versions*1
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*4
Version MPEG-AAC
AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz
Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 5000
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
Displayable character codes*3 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the
player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be
played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”, or “.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In
addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the
specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before
If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
Music cuts off or skips
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright
when playing. protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
desired order. Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Compressed Video Files Requirement for Supporting Video Playback:
Explanation of terms: Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
. DivX® - DivX® refers to the DivX® codec CD, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02
owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy CD-R, +ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
compression of video based on MPEG- CD-RW, - ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
DVD, - Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-
4. File Systems DVD±R, based computer) are not supported.
. AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video DVD±RW, - VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
Interleave. It is a standard file format DVD±RW DL
originated by Microsoft Corporation. A USB Memory FAT16, FAT32
“.divx” encoded file can be saved into Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
.divx, .avi
the “.avi” file format for playback on Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
this system if it meets the requirements File Types
Video Codec ISO-MPEG4
stated in the table in this section. .asf
Audio Codec G.726
However, not all the “.avi” files are
Maximum Average 4Mbps
playable on this system since different Bit Rates .divx, .avi
Maximum Peak 8Mbps
encodings can be used than the DivX®
codec. Minimum 32 6 32
.divx, .avi
. ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems Maximum 720 6 480
Resolution
Format. It is a file format owned by Minimum 32 6 32
.asf
Microsoft Corporation. Note: Only “. Maximum 720 6 576
asf” files that meet the requirements
stated in the table in this section can Bluetooth streaming audio . It is necessary to set up the wireless
be played. Bluetooth® is a trademark connection between a compatible Blue-
. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. tooth® audio device and the in-vehicle
and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd. Bluetooth® module before using the
of bits per second used by a digital
video file. The size and quality of a . Some Bluetooth® audio devices may Bluetooth streaming audio.
compressed digital audio file is deter- not be recognized by the in-vehicle . Operating procedure of the Bluetooth
mined by the bit rate used when audio system. streaming audio will vary depending on
encoding the file. the device. Make sure it is understood

how to operate an audio device before Fi) when using the Bluetooth® func-
using it with this system. tions.
. The Bluetooth streaming audio may be
stopped under the following condi-
tions:
— Receiving a hands-free call.
— Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
. Do not place a Bluetooth® audio device
in an area surrounded by metal or far
away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degra-
dation and wireless connection disrup-
tion.
. While an audio device is connected
through a Bluetooth® wireless connec-
tion, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
. This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP,
AVRCP).
. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®
functions share the same frequency
band (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth®
and the wireless LAN functions at the
same time may slow down or discon-
nect the communication and cause
undesired noise. It is recommended
that you turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-

11. Radio station preset buttons
No satellite radio reception is available
unless a SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip-
tion is active.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER
The audio control buttons are also located
on the center multi-function control panel.
For all operation precautions, see “Audio
operation precautions” earlier in this sec-
tion.
The satellite radio mode requires an active
SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The
satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
It may take some time to receive the
activation signal after subscribing the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio. After receiving
the activation signal, an available channel
JVH0254X list will be automatically updated in the
radio. Push the ignition switch from LOCK
1. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob 7. RDM (random)·RPT (repeat) play but- to ACC to update the channel list.
2. DISC·AUX button ton
3. FM·AM band select button 8. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA/AAC folder
4. XM band select button selector / AUDIO control knob
5. SCAN button 9. Disc EJECT button
6. SEEK·CAT/TRACK button 10. CD/DVD slot

Audio main operation . Speed Sensitive Vol. (if so equipped) When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
Head unit: . Driver’s Audio Stage (if so equipped) the radio will automatically change from
For more details, see “Vehicle information stereo to monaural reception.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low
and settings” earlier in this section.
and high frequency ranges automatically in radio (FM·AM) band select:
both radio reception and CD playback. Switching the display:
Pushing the FM·AM radio band select
ON·OFF/Volume control: Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch
button will change the band as follows:
the displays as follows:
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
position, and then push the ON·OFF button iPod®/USB ? CD/DVD ? Bluetooth®
while the system is off to turn on the last streaming audio ? AUX ? iPod®/USB
radio (SiriusXM Satellite Radio) band
audio source, which was playing immedi- Linking Intelligent Key: select:
ately before the system was turned off.
The audio settings can be memorized for Pushing the XM radio band select button
While the system is on, pushing the
each Intelligent Key. For more details, see will change the band as follows:
ON·OFF button turns the system off.
“Setting memory function” in the “3. Pre- XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the driving checks and adjustments” section.
volume. The satellite radio is not available in
FM-AM-SAT radio operation Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-
ance: When the radio band select button is TUNE (Tuning):
pushed while the ignition switch is in the . For AM and FM radio
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade,
ACC or ON position, the radio will come on
push the Audio control knob. When the Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual
at the channel last played.
display shows the setting you want to tuning.
change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade), The last channel played will also come on . For SiriusXM Satellite Radio
rotate the Audio control knob to set the when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.
Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek
desired setting. For the other setting If another audio source is playing when the channels from all of the categories
methods, see “How to use SETTING button” radio band select button is turned to ON, when any category is not selected.
earlier in this section. the audio source will automatically be
This vehicle has some sound effect func- turned off and the last radio channel
tions as follows: played will come on.

low to high frequencies and stop at each manner.
SEEK tuning:
broadcasting station/channel for 5 sec- If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
. For AM and FM radio onds. Pushing the button again during this the fuse opens, the radio memory will be
Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button 10 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning erased. In that case, reset the desired
or to tune from low to high or high and the radio will remain tuned to that stations/channels.
to low frequencies and to stop at the station/channel.
next broadcasting station. Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio):
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed
. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to When the “Menu” key on the display is
Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button the next station/channel. selected while the SiriusXM Satellite Radio
or to tune to the first channel of the is being played, the menu list will be
next or previous category. *1 to * 6 Station memory operations: displayed.
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM The following items are available.
During satellite radio reception, the follow-
band (6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for
ing notices will be displayed under certain . Preset List
SiriusXM Satellite Radio (6 each for XM1,
conditions. Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of
XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations can be set
. NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while for the AM band. the 6 preset stations listed is touched
the SAT tuner is connected.) and held, the current station will be
1. Choose the radio band using the radio
. OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off) stored as the new preset.
band select button.
. CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection . Customize Channel List
2. Tune to the desired station/channel
error) Selects specific channels to skip while
using the SEEK·CAT, TRACK, SCAN
. LOADING (When the initial setting is using the TUNE, SEEK·CAT or Menu-
button or the radio TUNE knob.
performed) Categories feature.
3. Push and hold the desired station . Favorite Artists & Songs
. UPDATING (When the satellite radio
preset button *
1 to *
6 until the radio
subscription is not active) Stores the current artist or song that is
mutes. being played. Touch the “Alert” key to
. INVALID CH (Invalid channel is re-
ceived.) 4. The station indicator will then come on be reminded when the stored artist or
and the sound will resume. Memorizing song is playing on a station while
SCAN tuning: is now complete. listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from 5. Other buttons can be set in the same . Categories

Selecting a category will go to the first the CD loaded and the radio playing, the more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
channel in that category as defined by radio will automatically be turned off and being played, the CD will play while fast
SiriusXM Satellite Radio. the CD will start to play. forwarding or rewinding. When the button
. Direct Tune Menu:
is released, the CD will return to normal
Inputs the channel number by using a play speed.
When the “Menu” key on the display is
keypad. selected while the CD is being played, the When the or button is pushed for
menu screen will be displayed. The follow- less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
Compact Disc (CD) player operation played, the next track or the beginning of
ing menu options are available.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON the current track on the CD will be played.
position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) . Folder List (for CD with compressed
audio files) When the rewind button is pushed for less
into the slot with the label side facing up. than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after
The CD will be guided automatically into Displays the folder list.
the current track starts playing, the pre-
the slot and start playing. . Track List vious track will be played.
After loading the CD, the number of tracks Displays the track list.
on the CD and the play time will appear on . Play Mode REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
the display. Select a play mode from the following When the button is pushed while the
If the radio is already operating, it will items. CD is played, the play pattern can be
automatically turn off and the CD will play. — Normal changed as follows:
If the system has been turned off while the — 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com- (CD)
CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF pressed audio files)
button will start the CD. — 1 Track Repeat
— 1 Disc Random
PLAY: — 1 Folder Random (for CD with
(CD with compressed audio files)
When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is compressed audio files)
pushed with the system off and the CD
loaded, the system will turn on and the CD Next/Previous Track and Fast
will start to play. Forward/Rewind:
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with When the or button is pushed for

CD EJECT: while the vehicle is in motion so that full
attention may be given to vehicle opera-
When the Disc EJECT button is pushed with
tion.
the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
. Do not attempt to modify the system to
When this button is pushed while the CD is
display a movie on the front screen while
being played, the CD will be ejected.
the vehicle is being driven. Doing so may
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it distract the driver and may cause a
will be pulled back into the slot to protect collision and serious personal injury or
it. death.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) PLAYER
OPERATION
CAUTION
Precautions SAA2497
Start the engine when using the DVD . Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
entertainment system. engine is running. Operating the DVD for
Playing a DVD
Movies will not be shown on the front extended periods of time with the Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
display while the vehicle is in any drive engine OFF can discharge the vehicle front seat occupants to operate the DVD
position to reduce driver distraction. Audio battery. drive while watching the images.
is available when a movie is played. To . Do not allow the system to get wet. Inserting/removing disc:
view movies in the front display, stop the Excessive moisture such as spilled Insert a DVD into the CD/DVD slot with the
vehicle in a safe location, move the shift liquids may cause the system to mal- labeled side up. The DVD will be guided
lever to the P (Park) position and apply the function. automatically into the slot. When ejecting
parking brake. . While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD the DVD, push the EJECT button.
player does not guarantee complete DISC·AUX button:
WARNING functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.
When a DVD is loaded, it will begin playing
automatically.
. The driver must not attempt to operate
The operation screen will be turned on
the DVD system or wear the headphones

when the DISC·AUX button located on the DVD.
instrument panel is pushed while a DVD is
being played, and it will turn off auto- / Next/Previous Chapter:
matically after a period of time. To turn it Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip the
on again, push the DISC·AUX button again. chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward.
DVD operation keys: The chapters will advance/go back the
When the DVD is playing without the number of times this key is selected.
operation screen being shown as illu-
strated, you may use the touch screen to / Commercial Skip:
select items from the displayed video. You This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-
may also use the INFINITI controller to VR. Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip
select an item from the displayed video. forward or backwards by the set amount as
When the operation screen is being shown, defined in the DVD Settings menu. SAA2498
use the INFINITI controller or touch screen Example
to select an item from the displayed Top Menu:
menus. When the “Top Menu” key is selected in DVD settings
the screen while a DVD is being played, the Select the “Settings” key to adjust the
PAUSE: top menu specific to each disc will be following settings.
displayed. For details, see the instructions
Select the “ ” key to pause the DVD. To on the disc.
Key (DVD-VIDEO):
resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” Keys for the DVD menu operation are
key. displayed.
: Move the cursor to select a DVD
PLAY: menu.
Select the “ ” key to start playing the Enter: Enter the selected menu.
DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.
Move: Change the display location by
moving the operation key.
STOP:
Back: Return to the previous screen.
Select the “ ” key to stop playing the

Hide: Hide the operation key. Surround Information (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO- CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
CD, CD-DA) (Models equipped with BOSE® Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the
Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO):
Surround Sound System): setting time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by
Some menus specific to each disc will be
Select the “Surround Information” key and selecting the “+” side or “−” side.
shown. For details, see the instructions on
push the ENTER button. The surround DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):
the disc.
information screen will appear.
Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
Push the BACK button to return to the matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
The scene with the specified title will be previous screen. level to maintain a more even sound to the
displayed each time the “+” side or “−”
Angle (DVD-VIDEO): speakers.
side is selected.
If the DVD contains different angles (such DOWN MIX (DVD-VIDEO):
Group Search (VIDEO CD):
as moving images), the current image Convert a multi-channel recording to a
A scene in the specified group will be angle can be switched to another one. traditional two-channel (stereo) recording.
displayed each time the “+” side or “−” Select the “Angle” key. The angle will
side is selected. change each time the “+” side or “−” side DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,CD- is selected. Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
DA, DVD-VR): number entry screen. Input the number
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):
corresponding to the preferred language
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the When this item is turned on, an angle mark and select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu
number entry screen. Input the number to will be shown on the bottom of the screen language will be changed to the one
be searched and select the “OK” key. The if the scene can be seen from a different specified.
specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will angle.
be played. Display:
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
Select No. (VIDEO-CD): To adjust the image quality of the screen,
DVD menus are automatically configured select the preferred adjustment items.
Select the “Select No.” key to open the and the contents will be played directly
number entry screen. Input the number to when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Audio:
be searched and select the “OK” key. The Note that some discs may not be played Select the preferred language for audio.
specified scene will be played. directly even if this item is turned on.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):
Select the preferred language for subtitles. WARNING
Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, DVD-
Do not connect or disconnect the USB device
VR):
while driving. Doing so can be a distraction.
Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or If distracted your could lose control of your
“Cinema” modes. vehicle and cause an accident or serious
Title List (DVD-VR): injury.
Select the preferred title from the list.
Play Mode:
Select the preferred play mode. CAUTION
PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR): SAA3260 . Depending on size and shape of USB
Select the “PG” or “PL” mode. device, the tray lid may not fully close.
USB MEMORY OPERATION Do not force tray lid closed as this may
Display settings damage USB device.
To adjust the front display mode, push the Audio main operation
. Do not force the USB device into the USB
SETTING button while the DVD is being Open the tray lid and connect a USB
port. Inserting the USB device tilted or
played, select the “Others” key and then memory * 1 as illustrated. Then, push the
up-side-down into the port may damage
select the “Display” key. DISC·AUX button repeatedly to switch to
the USB device and the port. Make sure
To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, the USB memory mode.
that the USB device is connected cor-
tint, color and contrast, select the “Display If the system has been turned off while the rectly into the USB port. (Some USB
Adjustment” key and then select each key. USB memory was playing, pushing the devices come with a mark as a
Then you can adjust each item using the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the USB guide. Make sure that the mark is facing
INFINITI controller. After changes have memory. the correct direction before inserting the
been made push the BACK button to save device.)
the setting. . Do not locate objects near the USB
device to prevent the objects from

leaning on the USB device and the port.
Pressure from the objects may damage
the USB device and the port.
Playable files
Only files that meet the following condi-
tions are playable.
Music files:
. File format: MP3 (“.mp3), WMA (“.
wma”), AAC (“.aac”), M4A (“.m4a”)
. File size: 2 gigabytes or less
Video files: SAA2500 SAA2501
. File format DivX (“.divx”), MPEG4 (ASF)

(“.afs”, “.avi”)
File selection Audio file operation
. File size: 2 gigabytes or less When there are both audio and movie files
in the USB memory, the mode select PLAY:
screen is displayed. Select the preferred When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with
contents to play. the system off and the USB memory
When there is only one type of file, the inserted, the system will turn on.
audio or movie operation screen is dis- If another audio source is playing and a
played and starts to play. USB memory is inserted, push the
If a video file restricts the number of DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the cen-
playbacks, a pop-up screen will appear to ter display changes to the USB memory
confirm it is ok to play. Answer yes or no as mode.
requested by the display.

Next/Previous File and Fast REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
Forward/Rewind: When the button is pushed while the
When the or button is pushed for USB memory is played, the play pattern
more than 1.5 seconds while a USB can be change as follows.
memory is being played, the USB memory To change the play mode, push the
will play while forwarding or rewinding. button repeatedly and the mode will
When the button is released, the USB change as follows.
memory will return to normal play speed.
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track
When the or button is pushed for Repeat ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random
less than 1.5 seconds while the USB ? Normal
memory is being played, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the
SAA2502
USB memory will be played.
When the rewind button is pushed for less Menu:
than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after There are some options available during
the current track starts playing, the pre- playback. Select one of the following
vious track will be played. options that are displayed on the screen
The INFINITI controller can also be used to if necessary. Refer to the following infor-
select tracks when the USB memory is mation for each item.
being played. . Movie Playback
Folder selection: Switch to the movie playback mode.
To change to another folder in the USB This item is displayed only when a USB
memory, turn the folder selector or choose memory contains movie files.
a folder displayed on the screen using the . Folder List/Track List
INFINITI controller. Displays the folder or track list. The
“Movie Playback” key is also displayed
in this list screen, and enables switch-

ing to the movie playback mode. Operation keys:
. Play Mode To operate the USB memory, select the
Select the preferred play mode. desired key displayed on the operation
screen using the INFINITI controller.
Pause
Select the “ ” key to pause the movie
file. To resume playing the movie file,
select the “ ” key.
Play
Select the “ ” key to start playing a
SAA2503
movie file, for example, after pausing a
movie file.
Movie file operation
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the STOP
front seat occupants to operate the USB
Select the “ ” key to stop playing a
memory while watching the images.
movie file.
PLAY:
Skip (Next chapter)
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with
Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s)
the system off and the USB memory
of the disc forward. The chapters will
inserted, the system will turn on.
advance the number of times the ENTER
If another audio source is playing and a button is pushed.
USB memory is inserted, push the
DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the cen- Skip (Previous chapter)
ter display changes to the USB memory
mode. Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc backward. The chapters will go
back the number of times the “ ” key is Input the number to be searched and
selected. select the “OK” key.
List: The specified folder/file will be played.
Select the “List” key on the movie file . Display
operation screen to display the file list. To adjust the image quality of the
screen, select the preferred adjustment
items.
. DRC
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression)
automatically adjusts the soundtrack
volume level to maintain a more even
sound to the speakers.
SAA2504 . Audio
Example Select the preferred language for audio.
Settings: . Subtitle
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the Select the preferred language for sub-
following settings. title.
. Audio File Playback . Display Mode
Switch to the audio playback mode. Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema”
This item is displayed only when the or “Full” mode.
USB memory contains the audio files.
. Play Mode
Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Re-
peat” play mode.
. 10 Key Search
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open
the number entry screen.

Bluetooth® STREAMING AUDIO recommended that you turn off the wire- the device.
Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth® less LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® . This Class B digital apparatus meets all
Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible functions. requirements of the Canadian Interfer-
Bluetooth® device with streaming audio ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Regulatory information
(A2DP profile), you can set up the wireless Bluetooth trademark:
connection between your Bluetooth® de- FCC Regulatory information:
Bluetooth® is a trademark
vice and the in-vehicle audio system. This . CAUTION: To maintain compliance with owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
connection allows you to listen to the FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.
audio from the Bluetooth® device using the supplied antenna. Unauthorized
your vehicle speakers. It also may allow antenna, modification, or attachments
basic control of the device for playing and could damage the transmitter and may
skipping audio files using the AVRCP violate FCC regulations.
Bluetooth profile. All Bluetooth® Devices . Operation is subject to the following
do not have the same level of controls for two conditions:
AVRCP. Please consult the manual for your 1) This device may not cause inter-
Bluetooth® Device for more details. ference and
Once your Bluetooth® device is connected 2) This device must accept any inter-
to the in-vehicle audio system, it will ference, including interference that
automatically reconnect whenever the de- may cause undesired operation of
vice is present in the vehicle and you select the device
Bluetooth Audio from your audio system.
IC Regulatory information:
You do not need to manually reconnect for
each usage. . Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®
1) This device may not cause inter-
functions share the same frequency band
ference, and
(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the
wireless LAN functions at the same time 2) This device must accept any inter-
may slow down or disconnect the commu- ference, including interference that
nication and cause undesired noise. It is may cause undesired operation of

SAA3159 SAA2506 SAA2507
Connecting procedure 2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key. 3. A confirmation screen will be dis-
played. Select “No”.
1. Push the SETTING button and select the
“Bluetooth” key. Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect
the hands free phone portion of a
Bluetooth® device.

DISC·AUX button:
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with
the system off and the Bluetooth audio
device connected, the system will turn on.
If another audio source is playing and the
Bluetooth® audio device is connected,
push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until
the display changes to the Bluetooth audio
mode.
Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:
SAA3005 SAA2510
When the or button is pushed for
4. When a passkey appears on the screen, more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth®
Audio main operation audio file is being played, the Bluetooth®
operate the compatible Bluetooth®
audio device to enter the passkey. The Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON audio device will play while forwarding or
pairing procedure of the audio device position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button rewinding. When the button is released,
varies according to each audio device. repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth audio the Bluetooth® audio device will return to
See the Bluetooth® audio Owner’s mode. If the system has been turned off normal play speed.
Manual for details. while the Bluetooth audio device was
playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control
When pairing is completed, the screen less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth®
knob will start the Bluetooth audio device.
will return to the Bluetooth® setup audio file is being played, the next track or
display. The ability to pause, change tracks, fast the beginning of the current track on the
forward, rewind, randomize and repeat Bluetooth audio device will be played.
music may be different between devices.
When the rewind button is pushed for less
Some or all of these functions may not be
than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after
supported on each device.
the current track starts playing, the pre-
vious track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to Play Mode:
select tracks when the Bluetooth® audio The play mode setting display will appear
play mode screen is shown on the display. when the “Menu” key is selected.
(“Bluetooth audio” will be indicated on the
Choose the preferred play mode from the
header of the screen.)
following items.
Play pattern change: . Shuffle
Choose “Shuffle OFF” and “Shuffle All
To change the play mode, push the
Tracks”.
button repeatedly and the mode changes
as follows. . Repeat
Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1
Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Repeat 1
Track” and “Repeat All Tracks”.
Track ? Repeat All Tracks ? Normal
SAA2511
Operation keys:
To operate a Bluetooth® audio device,
Bluetooth® settings
select a key displayed on the operation
screen using the INFINITI controller. To set up the Bluetooth device system to
the preferred settings, push the SETTING
button and select the “Bluetooth” key.
Play
Select the “ ” key to start playing when Bluetooth:
pausing. Select this key again to pause the If this setting is turned off, the connection
audio play. between the Bluetooth devices and the in-
vehicle Bluetooth module will be canceled.
Pause Connect Bluetooth:
Select the “ ” key to pause the Blue- Connects to the Bluetooth device. See
tooth® audio device. Select this key again “Connecting procedure” earlier in this
to resume playing. section. Up to 5 devices can be registered.

Connected Devices: tem” later in this section.
Registered devices are shown on the list.
Select a Bluetooth device from the list, the
following options will be available.
. Select
Select “Select” to connect the selected
device to the vehicle. If there is a
different device currently connected,
the selected device will replace the
current device.
. Edit
Rename the selected Bluetooth device
using the keypad displayed on the SAA3261
screen. (See “How to use touch screen”
earlier in this section.) iPod® PLAYER OPERATION
. Delete Connecting iPod®
Delete the selected Bluetooth device. Open the tray lid and connect the iPod®
Edit Bluetooth Info: cable to the USB connector. If the iPod®
Change the name broadcasted by this supports charging via USB, the battery of
system over Bluetooth. Change the PIN the iPod® will be charged while connected
code that is entered when connecting a to the vehicle.
hands free device to this system. Depending on the version of the iPod®, the
display on the iPod® shows an INFINITI or
Replace Connected Phone:
Accessory Attached screen when the con-
Replace the Bluetooth connection with a nection is completed. When the iPod® is
connected Bluetooth cellular phone. For connected to the vehicle, the iPod® music
details about Hands-Free Phone System, library can only be operated by the vehicle
see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- audio controls.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., . Do not locate objects near the iPod® updated.
registered in the U.S. and other countries. cable to prevent the objects from leaning Audio main operation
on the iPod ® cable and the port.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
WARNING Pressure from the objects may damage
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button
the iPod® cable and the port.
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
Do not connect or disconnect the iPod®
If the system has been turned off while the
cable while driving. Doing so can be a Compatibility iPod® was playing, pushing the ON·OFF
distraction. If distracted your could lose The following models are available: button will start the iPod®.
control of your vehicle and cause an
accident or serious injury. . Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.3 or
later) PLAY:
. iPod Classic® (version 1.1.1 or later) When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with
. First generation iPod touch® (version the system off and the iPod® connected,
CAUTION 2.0.0 or later) the system will turn on. If another audio
. Second generation iPod touch® (version source is playing and the iPod® is con-
. Depending on size and shape of iPod® nected, push the DISC·AUX button repeat-
1.2.3 or later)
and iPod® cable, the tray lid may not edly until the center display changes to the
fully close. Do not force tray lid closed as . First generation iPod nano® (version
1.3.1 or later) iPod® mode.
this may damage iPod® and iPod® cable.
. Second generation iPod nano® (version Interface:
. Do not force the iPod® cable into the
USB port. Inserting the iPod® cable
1.1.3 or later) The interface for iPod® operation shown on
tilted or up-side-down into the port . Third generation iPod nano® (version the vehicle center display is similar to the
may damage the iPod® cable and the 1.1 or later) iPod® interface. Use the INFINITI controller
port. Make sure that the iPod® cable is . Fourth generation iPod nano® (version and the ENTER or BACK button to play the
connected correctly into the USB port. 1.0.2 or later) iPod® with your favorite settings.
(Some iPod® cable come with a This unit may not control/operate correctly The following items can be chosen from the
mark as a guide. Make sure that the when connected to some iPod® versions/ menu list screen. For further information
mark is facing the correct direction firmware and iPhone. about each item, see the iPod® Owner’s
before inserting the iPod® cable.) Make sure that the iPod ® version is Manual.

. Now Playing played.
. Playlists When the rewind button is pushed for less
. Artists than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after
. Albums the current track starts playing, the pre-
. Songs vious track will be played.
. Podcasts The INFINITI controller can also be used to
. Genres select tracks when the iPod® is playing.
. Composers
Play pattern change:
. Audiobooks
. Shuffle Songs When the button is pushed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
The following touch-panel buttons shown
be changed as follows:
on the screen are also available: SAA3162
. : returns to the previous screen.
. : plays/pauses the music selected. FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
The front auxiliary input jacks are located
Next/Previous Track and Fast in the console box. NTSC compatible
Forward/Rewind: devices such as video games, camcorders
When the or button is pushed for and portable video players can be con-
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is nected to the auxiliary jacks. Compatible
playing, the iPod® will play while fast audio devices, such as some MP3 players,
forwarding or rewinding. When the button can also be connected to the system
is released, the iPod® will return to the through the auxiliary jacks. The images
normal play speed. from the connected device can be viewed
on the front and rear displays.
less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is The auxiliary jacks are color coded for
playing, the next track or the beginning of identification purposes.
the current track on the iPod® will be . Yellow - video input

. White - left channel audio input To display the front AUX images on the
. Red - right channel audio input rear displays, push the SOURCE button
Before connecting a device to a jack, turn on the remote controller for the Dual
off the power of the portable device. Head Restraint DVD System. (See “Dual
head restraint DVD system” later in this
With a compatible device connected to the
section.)
jacks, push the DISC·AUX button repeat-
edly until the display switches to the AUX
mode. The output from the device will be
played through the monitor and audio
system.
SAA2597
How to use AUX button

Images being played can be switched to
the center display if a device is connected
to the front auxiliary input jacks in the
console box.
Push the button on the instrument
panel to perform switching. The above
display will appear when the “Menu” key
is selected using the INFINITI controller.
AUX video will not be displayed on the
front display unless the parking brake is
set.
. Models with Dual head restraint DVD
system

. Low
. Medium
. High
Display:
Adjust the image quality of the screen,
select the preferred adjustment items.
SAA2496 SAA0451
AUX Menu CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

When the “Menu” key on the display is CLEANING
selected while in the AUX mode, the menu
CD/DVD
screen will be displayed.
. Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never
Display Mode: touch the surface of the disc. Do not
Choose the display mode from the follow- bend the disc.
ing items. . Always place the discs in the storage
. Normal case when they are not being used.
. Wide . To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
. Cinema the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
Volume Settings: using a circular motion.
Choose the volume setting from the Do not use a conventional record
following items. cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-
trial use. seconds.
. A new disc may be rough on the inner AM and FM radio:
and outer edges. Remove the rough
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
seconds will increase or decrease the
edges with the side of a pen or pencil
preset station.
as illustrated.
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5
USB memory seconds will seek up or down to the
. Do not touch the terminal portion of the next station.
USB memory. . Pushing the menu control switch will
. Do not place heavy objects on the USB show the list of preset stations.
memory. SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
. Do not store the USB memory in highly SAA3156 . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5
humid locations. seconds will increase or decrease the
. Do not expose the USB memory to 1. Audio source switch preset channel.
direct sunlight. 2. Menu control switch . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5
. Do not spill any liquids on the USB 3. Back switch seconds will go to the next or previous
memory. 4. Volume control switch category.
Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON- . Pushing the menu control switch will
for the details. show the XM Menu.
TROLS FOR AUDIO
iPod®:
Menu control switch
While the display is showing a MAP, seconds will increase or decrease the
STATUS or Audio screen, tilt the switch track number.
upward or downward to select a station,
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5
track, CD or folder. For most audio sources,
seconds will skip to the next or
tilting the switch up/down for more than
previous index.
1.5 seconds provides a different function
than tilting up/down for less than 1.5
. Pushing the menu control switch will track number. ANTENNA
show the iPod Menu. . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5
seconds will increase/decrease the Window antenna
CD:
folder number The antenna pattern is printed inside the
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 3rd row seat window.
seconds will increase or decrease the . Pushing the menu control switch will
track number. show the USB Menu.
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 Bluetooth® streaming audio: CAUTION
seconds will increase/decrease the . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5
folder number (if playing compressed seconds will increase or decrease the . Do not place metalized film near the 3rd
audio files). track number. row seat window or attach any metal
. Pushing the menu control switch will parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
show the CD Menu. BACK switch tion or noise.
DVD:
Push this switch to go back to the previous . When cleaning the inside of the 3rd row
screen or cancel the selection if it is not seat window, be careful not to scratch or
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 completed. damage the 3rd row seat window anten-
na. Lightly wipe along the antenna with
track number. Volume control switches a dampened soft cloth.
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch
seconds will increase or decrease the to increase or decrease the volume.
title number.
. Pushing the menu control switch will
Audio source switch
select an item from the DVD display. Push the source select switch to change
. When the transparent operation menu the mode to available audio source.
appears, the switch will control the
menu.
USB:

DUAL HEAD RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Dual
Head Restraint DVD System, you can enjoy
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
playing video files via a DVD, CD or USB CAUTION Rear displays
memory that provides images and sound
both from the front and rear display . Do not attempt to use the system in
screens. extremely high or low temperature con- CAUTION
dition [below −48F (−208C) or above
You can also enjoy compatible auxiliary 1588F (708C)]. . The glass screen on the liquid crystal
devices such as video games, camcorders
or portable video players through the . To avoid draining the vehicle battery, do display may break if hit with a hard or
not operate the system for more than 15 sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
auxiliary jacks.
minutes without starting the engine. touch the liquid crystalline material. In
The front and right/left rear displays can case of contact with skin, wash immedi-
show different sources individually. The The front display is designed not to show ately with soap and water.
maximum of 3 sources, such as an iPod®, the images while driving, as the driver’s . Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning the
DVD and auxiliary device, can be enjoyed attention must be given to vehicle opera- Dual Head Restraint DVD System compo-
at the same time. tion for safety. Sounds are available. To nents. Do not use solvents or cleaning
show the images in the front display, stop solutions.
WARNING the vehicle in a safe location, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position and
The driver must not attempt to operate the apply the parking brake.
Dual Head Restraint DVD System while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply
the parking brake to view the images on the
front center display screen using the DVD
player.

headphones transmitter *
1 .
SAA3329 SAA3330
The rear displays are located on the back of Rear auxiliary input jacks
the front head restraints.
The rear auxiliary input jacks are located at
Use the remote controller to operate the the rear of the center console. NTSC/PAL
rear display screen. compatible devices can be connected to
Select the left or right rear display using the auxiliary jacks. The images from the
the rear display select switch on the connected device can be viewed on the
remote controller and push the power rear displays.
button to activate the corresponding rear The rear auxiliary jacks are color coded for
display. identification purposes.
The rear screens can also be activated . Yellow - video input
using the INFINITI controller. (See “REAR
. White - left channel audio input
DISPLAY settings” earlier in this section.)
. Red - right channel audio input
Do not block the range of the wireless
Before connecting a device to a jack, turn
remote controller receiver and wireless
off the power of the portable device.

To display the AUX screen, select the left or
right rear display using the rear display
select switch on the remote controller, and
select the AUX mode after pushing the
SOURCE button on the remote controller.
The AUX screen cannot be displayed on the
front screen.
The remote controller cannot be used for
the portable device.
SAA3077 SAA3078
Headphones Volume control:

Headphones are a wireless type and no Turn the volume control knob to adjust the
cables are necessary. The headphones can volume.
only be used in the rear seat. The headphones will automatically turn off
Power ON/OFF: in about 4 minutes if there is no sound
during that period. The headphones will
Push the power ON/OFF button to turn the also turn off after approximately 4 hours of
headphones on or off. continuous use. To prevent the battery
from being discharged, keep the power
turned off when not in use.
If the sound from the headphones is not
clear, it may be due to interference from an
infrared communication device or a cellular
phone. If this happens, turn down the
headphone volume or stop using the
headphones.
It is also possible that the headphones
may be too far from the transmitter which
is in the rear display screen. This is not a
malfunction.
The sound may also be interrupted tem-
porarily when there is an obstacle between
the headphones and the transmitter. Re-
move the obstacle, such as opaque materi-
als, hands, hair, etc.
JVH0387X JVH0360X
Channel change: The selected headphone channel (“Left” or

When the rear displays are playing differ- “Right”) * 1 will appear on the menu
ent sources, slide the channel select switch screen on the rear display.
to select the sound.

JVH0238X
Type A

11. Key illumination button
See “Remote controller operation” later in
this section for the function of each button.
JVH0406X
Type B
Remote controller 5. Keypad
1. POWER button 6. Volume control button ( or )
2. SOURCE button 7. Rear display select switch
3. Select button ( , , or ) 8. MENU button
4. BACK button 9. ENTER button
10. SETUP button

Activating rear display:
Select the left or right rear display using
the rear display select switch on the
remote controller and push the Power
button to activate the corresponding rear
display.
JVH0239X JVH0362X
Type A
When the rear display is on, the icon *
1
will be displayed.
JVH0407X
Type B

Remote controller and headphones
battery replacement
CAUTION
. An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
. When changing batteries, do not let dust
or oil get on the components.
JVH0246X
To replace the battery:
1. Open the lid as illustrated.
. For headphones, remove the screw
*1 with a flat-bladed screwdriver
before removing the lid.
2. Replace both batteries with new ones.
. Recommended battery:
Size AA 6 2 (remote controller)
SAA3081
Size AAA 6 2 (headphones)
. Be careful not to touch the battery
terminal.
. Make sure that the + and 7 ends
on the batteries match the markings
inside the compartment.

3. Close the lid securely. BEFORE OPERATING DUAL HEAD . While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD
. If you will not be using the remote RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM player does not guarantee complete
controller for long periods of time, functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.
remove the batteries. Precautions
. Replacement of the batteries is Start the engine when using the Dual Head
needed when the remote controller Restraint DVD System. Parental level (parental control)
only functions at extremely close Video data with the parental control setting
distances to the Dual Head Restraint can be played with this system. Please use
DVD System or when it does not WARNING your own judgement to set the parental
function at all. control with the system.
The driver must not attempt to operate the
FCC Notice: Dual Head Restraint DVD System or wear the Disc selection
Changes or modifications not expressly headphones while the vehicle is in motion You can play the following disc formats
approved by the party responsible for so that full attention may be given to vehicle with the DVD player:
compliance could void the user’s authority operation. . DVD-VIDEO
to operate the equipment. This device
. VIDEO-CD
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera- . DTS-CD
tion is subject to the following two CAUTION Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the
conditions: (1) This device may not cause code applicable to your country. (The
harmful interference, and (2) this device . Only operate the Dual Head Restraint region code is displayed as a small symbol
must accept any interference received, DVD System while the vehicle engine is printed on the top of the DVD.) This
including interference that may cause running. Operating the Dual Head Re- vehicle-installed DVD player can only play
undesired operation of the device. straint DVD System for extended periods DVDs with an applicable region code.
of time with the engine OFF can dis-
charge the vehicle battery. Available sources
. Do not allow the system to get wet. The following sources are available to play
Excessive moisture such as spilled on each display:
liquids may cause the system to mal-
function.

Front display: PLAYING DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC
. Radio (DVD)/USB
. CD/DVD
DISC·AUX button
. USB memory/iPod®
Park the vehicle in a safe location and
. Bluetooth® audio
apply the parking brake to operate the
. AUX (front) DVD player while watching the images.
Rear display: Push the DISC·AUX button on the instru-
. DVD ment panel and turn the display to the DVD
. USB memory with video files or USB mode.
. AUX (front/rear) When a DVD or USB is loaded, it will be
replayed automatically.
JVH0243X
If “Auto Display” is set to ON in the
Front display settings screen for the rear display, a
DVD or USB movie file will be read
automatically when the power is turned
on. (See “REAR DISPLAY settings” later in
this section.)
The operation screen will be turned on
when the DISC·AUX button is pushed while
a DVD or USB movie file is being played,
and it will turn off automatically after a
period of time. To turn it on again, push the
DISC·AUX button again.
DVD/USB operation keys
To operate the DVD/USB movie file, select
JVH0361X
the preferred key displayed on the opera-
Rear display tion screen using the INFINITI controller.
If you perform an operation with the button to stop playing the DVD/USB movie DVD-VR.
remote controller, a symbol will be dis- file. Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip
played on the lower left part of the rear To stop playing the DVD/USB movie file, it forward or backwards by the set amount as
seat screens indicating the function per- is also possible to push the button on defined in the DVD settings menu.
formed. This symbol will automatically turn the keypad of the remote controller. To skip forward or backward, it is also
off if no remote controller operation is
possible to push the or button on
performed for a specified period of time. Skip (FORWARD): the keypad of the remote controller.
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
Pause:
button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER forward. The chapters will advance the
button to pause the DVD/USB movie file. To number of times the ENTER button is
resume playing the DVD/USB movie file, pushed.
use the “PLAY” key.
To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also
To pause the DVD/USB movie file, it is also possible to push the button on the
possible to push the “ ” button on the keypad of the remote controller.
keypad of the remote controller.
Skip (REWIND):
Play:
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc
button to start playing the DVD/USB movie backward. The chapters will go back the
file, for example, after pausing the DVD/ number of times the ENTER button is
USB movie file. pushed.
To start playing the DVD/USB movie file, it To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also
is also possible to push the button on possible to push the button on the
the keypad of the remote controller. keypad of the remote controller.
Stop: / Commercial Skip:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and

Setting menu For details, see the instructions attached to
Select the “Settings” key on the display the disc.
with the INFINITI controller and push the Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO):
ENTER button to adjust the following A scene that belongs to a specified title will
settings. be displayed each time the “+” side or “−”
The items indicated with “ * ” can also be side is selected.
set from the rear display. Push the SOURCE 10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,
button on the remote and select “DVD”/ CD-DA):
“USB” shown on the rear screen while a
DVD/USB movie file is being played. Select Select the “10 Key Search” key and push
the preferred item using the select button the ENTER button to open the number entry
on the remote controller screen.
SAA2498 and push the ENTER button. Input the number you want to search for
Front screen and select the “OK” key with the INFINITI
controller. Then push the ENTER button.
Key (DVD-VIDEO): The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track
Keys for the DVD menu operation are will be played.
displayed. Angle* (DVD-VIDEO):
: Move the cursor to select a DVD If the DVD contains different angles (such
menu.
as moving images), the current image
Enter: Enter the selected menu.
angle can be switched to another one.
Move: Change the display location by
moving the operation key. Select the “Angle” key and push the ENTER
Back: Return to the previous screen. button. When the “+” side or “−” side is
Hide: Hide the operation key. selected, the angle will change.
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):
Title Menu (front)/Menu (rear)* (DVD-
VIDEO): When this item is turned on, an angle mark
JVH0361X will be shown on the bottom of the screen
Menus specific to each disc will be shown.
Rear display if the scene can be seen from a different
angle. Display: Remote controller operation
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO): Adjust the image quality of the screen, Use the remote controller to adjust the
select the preferred adjustment items and following items.
DVD menus are automatically configured
push the ENTER button.
and the contents will be played directly Rear display select switch:
when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Audio*: To activate the left screen or right screen,
Note that some discs may not be played Choose the preferred language using the move the rear display select switch on the
directly even if this item is turned on. INFINITI controller and push the ENTER remote controller to the side correspond-
CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO): button. ing to the screen you want to activate (L or
The amount of seconds for CM Skip can be Subtitle* (DVD-VIDEO): R).
set to 15, 30 or 60 seconds. Choose the preferred language using the POWER button:
DRC (DVD-VIDEO): INFINITI controller and push the ENTER The rear displays can be activated or
button. deactivated individually.
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows
tuning of the dynamic range of sound To turn off the subtitles, push and hold the To activate or deactivate the rear displays,
recorded in the Dolby Digital format. ENTER button until a beep sounds. push the button on the remote con-
DOWN MIX (DVD-VIDEO) (if so equipped): Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD): troller.
Convert a multi-channel recording to a Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” SOURCE button:
traditional two-channel (stereo) recording. or “Cinema” mode using the INFINITI The media available for playback will be
controller and push the ENTER button displayed when the SOURCE button is
DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
again. pushed.
Select the “DVD Language” key and push
the ENTER button to open the number entry Play Mode: MENU button:
screen. Choose the preferred play mode using the Push the MENU button to display the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER operation screen for the source that is
Input the number corresponding to the
button. being played.
preferred language and select the “OK” key
with the INFINITI controller. Then push the Surround Information* (if so equipped): Select button:
ENTER button. The DVD top menu language Display surround sound information. Push the select button , to
will be changed to the one selected. select the items displayed on the rear

screen. : REWIND button for commercial skip (for the remote controller.
DVD-VIDEO and DVD-VR)
ENTER button: To adjust tint, color or contrast, select a
Key illumination button: key using the select button ( or ),
Push the ENTER button to confirm the
setting for the selected item. If the key illumination button is pushed, push ENTER on the remote controller.
the buttons on the remote controller will be Push the BACK button on the remote
SETUP button: lit up. controller to apply the settings and return
Push the SETUP button to display the rear to the previous display.
seat display settings. (See “Rear display Rear display settings
To return the adjustment levels to the
settings” later in this section.) Display mode adjustment of the rear seat
default value, select “Execute” next to
displays can be performed while a DVD or
BACK button: “Initialization” push the select button
USB movie is being played. Set the rear
Push to go back to the previous screen or ( , ) on the remote controller and
display select switch on the remote con-
cancel the selection. push the ENTER button. The “Execute” key
troller to either L or R according to the
is deactivated when the picture mode
Volume: display you want to set, and then push the
settings are already in the default value.
To adjust the speaker volume push or SETUP button. It is not possible to make
on the volume control button. display mode adjustments to the left and Color System:
right displays at the same time. To choose the color system, select from
This button is used to control the volume
from the vehicle speakers. To adjust the Aspect: “NTSC”, “PAL”, “PAL-60”, “PAL-M”, “PAL-N”
or “AUTO” .
volume of the headphones, use the volume Select the display size from “FULL”,
knob that is attached to the headphones. “NORMAL”, “CINEMA” or “WIDE”. 3D Y/C filter:
Keypad: Picture Mode: Set to ON/OFF push the select button
( or ) and push ENTER button on
: PLAY/PAUSE button Select the Picture Mode from “NORMAL”,
the remote controller. When turned on,
: STOP button “DYNAMIC”, “CINEMA”, “GAME” .
small characters and an outline of the
: FORWARD button To adjust the display brightness automati- shapes will be displayed more clearly than
: REWIND button cally, select the “Brightness” key and then when turned off.
: FORWARD button for commercial skip (for select from “DARKER”, “NORMAL” or
DVD-VIDEO and DVD-VR) “BRIGHTER”. When adjusting manually,
select “OFF” and push ENTER button on

AUX Volume Setting: push the POWER button. The left rear 7. Turn on the other pair of headphones. If
This is only active when in the Rear AUX display will turn on and the DVD screen the sound from the headphones is not
mode. To set the AUX volume, select from will be displayed. from the AUX jacks, switch the channel
“HIGH”, “LOW” or “MIDDLE” . (If “Auto Display” is set to ON, the with the channel select switch on the
display will turn on automatically.) headphones.
OPERATING TIPS
. The images from a device that is
3. Set the rear display select switch on the CARE AND MAINTENANCE
remote controller to the R side and Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to
connected to the rear auxiliary input
push the POWER button. The right rear clean the surfaces of your Dual Head
jacks cannot be viewed on the front
display will turn on and the DVD screen Restraint DVD System (DVD player face,
displays.
will be displayed. screen, remote controller, etc.).
. It is not possible to display different
video files, such as DVD or video files in (If “Auto Display” is set to ON, the
the USB memory, on the front and rear display will turn on automatically.)
4. Switch the source on the front display
CAUTION
displays at the same time.
. It is not possible to play an audio file to an audio source. The sound from the
. Do not use any solvents or cleaning
and a video file in the same USB speakers switches according to the
solutions when cleaning the video sys-
memory at the same time. front display. The rear display con-
tem.
tinues to display the DVD.
Multiple source display . Do not use excessive force on the
5. Turn on a pair of headphones and listen
It is possible to play different sources on monitor screen.
to the DVD on the rear displays using
each display. The following example shows the headphones. . Avoid touching or scratching the monitor
how to operate multiple sources. screen as it may become dirty or
6. Connect an auxiliary device to the AUX
It is also possible to set in the front damaged.
jack, set the rear display select switch
display. For more details, see “REAR DIS- to the L or R side and push the SOURCE . Do not attempt to operate the system in
PLAY settings” earlier in this section. button to select “Rear AUX”. The extreme temperature conditions [below
1. Display a video file in the front display selected side of the rear display will −48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
by selecting the DVD mode. switch to the AUX mode. The other rear . Do not attempt to operate the system in
display will continue to display the extreme humidity conditions (less than
2. Set the rear display select switch on the
DVD. 10% or more than 75%).
remote controller to the L side and
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
When installing a car phone or a CB radio

in your vehicle, be sure to observe the CAUTION WARNING
following cautions, otherwise the new
equipment may adversely affect the elec- . Keep the antenna as far away as . Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
tronic control modules and electronic con- possible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a
trol system harness. modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
be given to vehicle operation.
WARNING (20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harness. Do not route the anten- . If you find yourself unable to devote full
. A cellular phone should not be used for na wire next to any harness. attention to vehicle operation while
any purpose while driving so full atten- talking on the phone, pull off the road
. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
tion may be given to vehicle operation. to a safe location and stop your vehicle
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of before doing so.
. Connect the ground wire from the CB
cellular phones while driving.
radio chassis to the body.
. If you must make a call while your
. For details, consult an INFINITI retailer.
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free CAUTION
cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a
ercise extreme caution at all times so full phone after starting the engine.
attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion. Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth®
. If a conversation in a moving vehicle Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an
requires you to take notes, pull off the owner of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
road to a safe location and stop your cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
vehicle before doing so. connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a telephone call with your
cellular phone in your pocket.

Once a cellular phone is connected to the tions. . Do not place the cellular phone in an
in-vehicle phone module, no phone con- . Set up the wireless connection between area surrounded by metal or far away
necting procedure is required anymore. a compatible cellular phone and the in- from the in-vehicle phone module to
Your phone is automatically connected vehicle phone module before using the prevent tone quality degradation and
with the in-vehicle phone module when Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. wireless connection disruption.
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON . Some Bluetooth ® enabled cellular . While a cellular phone is connected
position with the registered cellular phone phones may not be recognized by the through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
turned on and carried in the vehicle. in-vehicle phone module. Please visit nection, the battery power of the
You can register up to 5 different Blue- www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth for a cellular phone may discharge quicker
tooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle recommended phone list. than usual.
phone module. However, you can talk on . You will not be able to use a hands-free . If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
only one cellular phone at a time. phone under the following conditions: System seems to be malfunctioning,
please visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/blue-
The INFINITI Voice Recognition system — Your vehicle is outside of the tele-
supports the phone commands, so dialing tooth for troubleshooting help.
phone service area.
a phone number using your voice is . Some cellular phones or other devices
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
possible. For more details, see “INFINITI difficult to receive radio waves; such
may cause interference or a buzzing
Voice Recognition system” later in this noise to come from the audio system
as in a tunnel, in an underground
section; page 4-109. speakers. Storing the device in a
parking garage, behind a tall build-
different location may reduce or elim-
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free ing or in a mountainous area.
inate the noise.
Phone System, refer to the following notes. — Your cellular phone is locked in
. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® order not to be dialed.
Manual regarding the telephone pairing
functions share the same frequency . When the radio wave condition is not
procedure specific to your phone,
band (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
battery charging, cellular phone anten-
and the wireless LAN functions at the may be difficult to hear the other
na, etc.
same time may slow down or discon- person’s voice during a call.
. The antenna display on the monitor will
nect the communication and cause . Immediately after the ignition switch is
not coincide with the antenna display
undesired noise. It is recommended pushed to the ON position, it may be
of some cellular phones.
that you turn off the wireless LAN (Wi- impossible to receive a call for a short
Fi) when using the Bluetooth® func- period of time.
. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet must accept any interference, including
as possible to hear the caller’s voice interference that may cause undesired
clearly as well as to minimize its operation of the device.
echoes. . This Class B digital apparatus meets all
. If reception between callers is unclear, requirements of the Canadian Interfer-
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.
volume may improve the clarity. Bluetooth trademark:
REGULATORY INFORMATION Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
FCC Regulatory information and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.
. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with VOICE COMMANDS

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
You can use voice commands to operate
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized SAA3163
various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
antenna, modification, or attachments
tem features using the INFINITI Voice 1) PHONE SEND button
could damage the transmitter and may
Recognition system.
violate FCC regulations. CONTROL BUTTONS
. Operation is subject to the following For more details, see “INFINITI Voice
two conditions: Recognition system” later in this section;
page 4-109.
1. this device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice
IC Regulatory information
. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
Phone menu display.
PHONE SELECTION
Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered
to the system. To switch to connect another
cellular phone, push PHONE button and
select the “Connected Phones” key. The
registered cellular phones are shown on
the list. If you select a cellular phone that
is different from the one currently con-
nected, the newly selected phone will be
connected to the system.
JVH0473X SAA2520 QUICK DIAL

This vehicle has two phonebooks available
CONNECTING PROCEDURE 2. When a PIN code appears on the
for hands-free use. Depending on the
screen, operate the compatible Blue-
1. Push the button, and select the phone, the system may automatically
tooth® cellular phone to enter the PIN
“Connect Phone” key. code.
download the entire cell phone’s phone-
book into the “Phonebook”. For the details
The connecting procedure of the cellu- about downloading a phonebook, see
lar phone varies according to each “Phone setting” later in this section. If a
cellular phone. See the cellular phone phonebook does not automatically down-
Owner’s Manual for the details. You can load, the Quick Dial may be set for up to 40
also visit entries. This phonebook allows the record-
www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth or call ing of a name to speak while using voice
INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department recognition.
for instructions on pairing INFINITI
recommended cellular phones.
When the connection process is com-
pleted, the screen will return to the
JVH0474X JVH0475X JVH0476X
1. Push the button and select the 3. Choose the method for entering the 5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a
“Quick Dial” key. phonebook entry. For this example, name to speak when using the INFINITI
2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of select “Enter Number by Keypad”. Voice Recognition system.
the screen. 4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” 6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to
key. (See “How to use touch screen” speak the name after the tone.
earlier in this section.) 7. When the voicetag is successfully
saved, select the “OK” key to save the
phonebook entry.
8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it
will show a screen that is ready to call
the number. Push the BACK button to
return to the Quick Dial.
There are different methods to input a
phone number. Select one of the following

options instead of “Enter Number by Key-
pad” in step 3.
. Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were
downloaded from the connected cellu-
lar phone (depending on the phone’s
compatibility). Select one of these
entries to save in the Quick Dial.
. Copy from the Handset
The system will show the connected
cellular phone’s phonebook that was
downloaded (depending on the JVH0477X JVH0478X
phone’s compatibility). Select one of
Editing the Quick Dial The following editing items are available:
these entries to save in the Quick Dial.
1. Push the button and select the . Entry #
“Quick Dial” key. Changes the displayed number of the
selected entry.
2. Select the desired entry from the
displayed list. . Name
Edit the name of the entry using the
3. Select the “Edit” key.
keypad displayed on the screen.
4. Select the desired item to change. . Number
Edit the phone number using the key-
pad displayed on the screen.
. Type
Select an icon from the icon list.
. Voicetag
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voice-

tags allow easy dialing using the
INFINITI Voice Recognition system.
(See “INFINITI Voice Recognition sys-
tem” later in this section.)
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key
at step 3.
JVH0479X JVH0495X
MAKING A CALL 5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the

number.
To make a call, follow this procedure.
There are different methods to make a call.
1. Push the button on the steering Select one of the following options instead
wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear of “Phonebook” in step 2 above.
on the display.
. Quick Dial
2. Select the “Phonebook” key on the
Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s
“PHONE” menu.
Phonebook.
3. Select the desired entry from the list. . Call History
4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting Select an outgoing, incoming or missed
for the correct number from the list. call downloaded from your cell phone
(depending on your phone’s compat-
ibility).

. Dial Number . Hold Call
Input the phone number manually Put an incoming call on hold.
using the keypad displayed on the . Reject Call
screen. (See “How to use touch screen” Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, perform one of the
following procedures listed below.
1. Select the “Hang up” key.
2. Push the button on the steering
wheel.
SAA2525
RECEIVING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display
will change to the incoming call mode. To
receive a call, perform one of the following
procedures listed below.
1. Select the “Answer” key.
2. Push the button on the steering
wheel.
There are some options available when
receiving a call. Select one of the following
displayed on the screen.
. Answer
Accept an incoming call to talk.

. Cancel Mute
This will appear after “Mute” is se-
lected. Mute will be canceled.
. Switch Call*
Select “Switch Call” to answer another
incoming call. By selecting “Hang up”,
you can end a call and can speak to a
caller who is on hold again.
* This function may not be usable,
depending on the model of phone.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, push the volume control switch (+
SAA3587 or −) on the steering wheel or turn the JVH0480X
volume control knob on the instrument
DURING A CALL panel while talking on the phone. This PHONE SETTING
There are some options available during a adjustment is also available in the SETTING To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
call. Select one of the following displayed mode. Phone System to your preferred settings,
on the screen if necessary. push the SETTING button on the instrument
. Hang up panel and select the “PHONE” key.
Finish the call. Edit Quick Dial
. Use Handset To edit the Quick Dial, use the same
Transfer the call to the cellular phone. procedure as described in “Quick Dial”
. Mute earlier in this section.
Mute your voice to the person.
Delete Quick Dial
. Keypad
The Quick Dial entries can be deleted all at
Using the touch tone, send digits to the
the same time or one by one.
connected party for using services such
as voicemail.
Download Phonebook . Vehicle Ringtone
Download the contacts registered in a When this function is activated, a
Bluetooth® cellular phone. Availability of specific ringtone that is different from
this function depends on each cellular the cellular phone will sound when
phone. The memory downloading proce- receiving a call.
dure from the cellular phone also varies
Auto Downloaded
according to each cellular phone. See
cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. When this item is activated and supported
by a compatible phone, the phonebook of
When “Auto Downloaded” is active, the the hands-free phone is automatically
system will automatically re-download the downloaded at the same time that the
entries registered in the phone every time hands-free phone is connected.
it is paired with the vehicle, even after you
delete the entries from your vehicle’s When this item is active, the system will
Handset Memory. automatically re-download the entries re-
gistered in the connected phone even after
Volume & Ringtone you delete the entries from your vehicle’s
The following kinds of phone volume can Handset Memory.
be set. Pushing the PHONE button and
selecting the “Volume & Ringtone” key can
also operate the same settings.
. Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call
To increase or decrease the volume,
select the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call”
or “Outgoing Call” key and adjust it
with the INFINITI controller.
. Automatic Hold
When this function is activated, an
incoming phone call is automatically
held.
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “INFINITI Voice Recognition system” later in this section; page 4-109.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
The system fails to interpret the com- 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
mand correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Quick Dial” earlier in this section.)
wrong voicetag. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands- when Alternate Command Mode is active,
free operation of the Phone, Navigation, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function
Information and Audio systems in one of available in that mode. Otherwise, it is
two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate recommended that Alternate Command
Command Mode. Mode be turned off and Standard Mode
In Standard Mode, commands that are be used for the best recognition perfor-
available are always shown on the display mance.
and announced by the system. You can For the voice commands for the navigation
complete your desired operation by simply system, refer to the Navigation System
following the prompts given by the system. Owner’s Manual of your vehicle.
(See “INFINITI Voice Recognition Standard
Mode” later in this section for details.) INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION STAN-
For advanced operation, you can use the DARD MODE
SAA2529
Alternate Command Mode. (See “INFINITI The following section is applicable when
Voice Recognition Alternate Command the Standard Mode is activated. Activating Standard Mode
Mode” later in this section for details.) The Standard Mode enables you to com- When the Alternate Command Mode is
When this mode is active, an expanded list plete the desired operation by simply active, perform the following steps to
of commands can be spoken after pushing following the prompts that appear on the switch to the Standard Mode.
the TALK switch, and the voice display and also are announced by the
command menu prompts are turned off. system. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-
Review the expanded command list, which ment panel.
is available when this mode is active. Note 2. Select the “Others” key.
that in this mode the recognition success 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased.
To switch one mode to another, see each
mode description later in this section.
To improve the recognition success rate

. Let’s Practice
Mode that allows practicing by follow-
ing the instructions of the system voice.
. Using the Address Book
Tutorial for entering a destination by
using the Address Book.
. Finding a Street Address (if so
equipped)
Tutorial for entering a destination by
street address.
. Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by
SAA2530 SAA2531
voice command operation.
4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument . Help on Speaking
key. panel. Displays useful tips of speaking for
5. The indicator turns off and the Stan- 2. Select the “Others” key. correct command recognition by the
dard Mode activates. system.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
Note that the Command List feature is only
Displaying user guide 4. Select the “User Guide” key. available when Alternate Command Mode
If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition 5. Select a preferred item. is active.
system for the first time or you do not You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say
know how to operate it, you can display “Help”.
the User Guide for confirmation.
Available items:
You can confirm how to use voice com-
. Getting Started
mands by accessing a simplified User
Guide, which contains basic instructions Describes the basics of how to operate
and tutorials for several voice commands. the INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

Voice Recognition.
SAA2532 SAA2534
Getting Started Let’s Practice

Before using the INFINITI Voice Recognition This mode helps learn how to use the
system for the first time, you can confirm INFINITI Voice Recognition system.
how to use commands by viewing the 1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.
Getting Started section of the User Guide.
2. After the message screen appears,
1. Select the “Getting Started” key. push the TALK switch on the
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling steering wheel.
the screen using the INFINITI controller. 3. Speak the displayed number after the
Tutorials on the operation of the INFINITI tone. The evaluation screen will be
Voice Recognition system displayed and the result can be con-
If you choose “Using the Address Book”, firmed.
“Finding a Street Address” or “Placing
Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to
perform these operations using INFINITI
USING THE SYSTEM . If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”,
the fan speed is automatically lowered
Initialization so that your commands can be recog-
When the ignition switch is pushed to the nized more easily.
ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is
initialized, which may take up to one
minute. When completed, the system is
ready to accept voice commands. If the
TALK switch is pushed before the
initialization completes, the display will
show the message: “System not ready.” or
a beep sounds.
SAA2533 Before starting
To get the best recognition performance
Useful tips for correct operation from INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe
You can display useful speaking tips to the following:
help the system recognize your voice . The interior of the vehicle should be as
commands correctly. quiet as possible. Close the windows to
Select “Help on Speaking” to start display. eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-
fic noise and vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from
correctly recognizing the voice com-
mands.
. Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command.
. Speak in a natural conversational voice
without pausing between words.

Selecting the “Help” key can display
the detailed information of the each
command.
Operating tips:
. Say a command after the tone.
. Commands that are available are al-
ways shown on the display and spoken
through voice menu prompts. Com-
mands other than those that are dis-
played are not accepted. Please follow
the prompts given by the system.
. If the command is not recognized, the
SAA3164 SAA2535 system announces, “Please say again”.
2. A list of commands appears on the Repeat the command in a clear voice.
Giving voice commands . Push the BACK button once to return to
screen, and the system announces,
1. Push the TALK switch located on “Would you like to access Phone, the previous screen.
the steering wheel. Navigation, Information, Audio or . To exit the voice recognition system,
Help?”. push and hold the TALK switch. The
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on message, “Voice canceled” will be
the screen changes from to , announced.
speak a command. . To skip the voice guidance function and
give the command immediately, push
Selecting the “Practice” key will start
the TALK switch to interrupt the
the practice mode. See “Let’s Practice”
system. Remember to speak after the
tone.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu . If you want to adjust the volume of the
prompts and speak after the tone system feedback, push the volume
sounds until your desired operation is control buttons [+] or [−] on the
completed.
steering switch or use the audio system of phone digit entry can improve recogni-
volume knob while the system is tion performance.
making an announcement. When speaking a house number, speak the
How to speak numbers: number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)”
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer- is included in the house number, it will not
tain way to speak numbers when giving be recognized as the number “0 (zero)”
voice commands. Refer to the following even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”.
examples. Please speak “zero” for the number “0
(zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o (oh)”.
General rule
Send digits using dial tone:
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
(For example, if you would like to say 500, . Press the TALK switch during a
“five zero zero” can be used, but “five phone call.
hundred” cannot.) . The menu will be launched and you will
be provided with the following gui-
Examples
dance: "Please say the digits to dial".
. 1-800-662-6200
. After guidance, say the digits of the
— “One eight zero zero six six two six number you want to send. After this,
two zero zero” the digits that have been recognized
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers will be read out.
You can improve the recognition of phone . If you press the ENTER button on the
numbers by saying the phone number in steering wheel or on the INFINITI con-
three groups of numbers. For example, troller, the selected digits will be sent.
when you try to call 800-662-6200, say
“eight zero zero” first, and the system will
then ask you for the next three digits. Then,
say “six six two”. After recognition, the
system will then ask for the last four digits.
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method

Command List
Category Command:
Command Action
Phone Operates the Phone function
Navigation Operates the Navigation function
Information Displays the vehicle Information function
Audio Operates the Audio function.
Help Displays User Guide

Phone Command:
Command Action
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.
Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.
Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.
Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

Navigation Command:
Command Action
Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Information Command:
Command Action
Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.
Maintenance Displays maintenance information.
Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Where am I? Displays your current location.
Tire Pressure Displays tire pressure information

Audio Command:
Command Action
AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.
CD Starts to play a CD.

General Commands:
Command Action
Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen
Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Voice command examples
To use the INFINITI Voice Recognition
function, speaking one command is some-
times sufficient, but at other times it is
necessary to speak two or more com-
mands. As examples, some additional
basic operations by voice commands are
described here.
For navigation system commands, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
SAA3164 SAA2535
Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone 2. The system announces, “Would you like
number 800-662-6200: to access Phone, Navigation, Informa-
1. Push the TALK switch located on tion, Audio or Help?”
the steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.

JVH0481X SAA2537 SAA2538
4. Speak “Dial Number”. 5. Speak “8 0 0”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the
Selecting the “Manual Controls” key next three digits or dial, or say change
switches the screen to the keypad to number.”
input the phone number manually. 7. Speak “6 6 2”.

. You can only say a phone number using
the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10
digits using this command. Please use
the “International Call” command for
all other formats.
. If you say “Change Number” during
phone number entry, the system will
automatically request that you repeat
the number using the 3-3-4 format. In
this case please say the area code first
and then follow the prompts.
. Do not add a “1” in front of the area
SAA2539 SAA2540
code when speaking phone numbers.
. If the system does not recognize your
8. The system announces, “Please say the 10. The system announces, “Dial or Change command, please try repeating the
last four digits” or say change number. Number?” command using a natural voice. Speak-
9. Speak “6 2 0 0”. 11. Speak “Dial”. ing too slow or too loudly may further
decrease recognition performance.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662-
6200.
Note:
. You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7
continuous digits), if the area code is
not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit
grouping is recommended for improved
recognition. (See “How to speak num-
bers” earlier in this section.)

SAA3164 SAA2535 JVH0481X
Example 2 - Placing an international call to 2. The system announces, “Would you like 4. Speak “International Call”.
the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333: to access Phone, Navigation, Informa-
1. Push the TALK switch located on tion, Audio or Help?”
the steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION AL-
TERNATE COMMAND MODE
The following section is applicable when
Alternate Command Mode is activated.
When Alternate Command Mode is acti-
vated, an expanded list of commands can
be used after pushing the TALK switch.
In this mode, available commands are not
fully shown on the display or prompted.
Review the expanded command list when
this mode is active. See examples of
Alternate Command Mode screens.
SAA2541 SAA2542
Please note that in this mode the recogni-
5. Speak “011811112223333”. 6. Speak “Dial”. tion success rate may be affected as the
number of available commands and ways
7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-
of speaking each command are increased.
222-3333.
To improve the recognition success rate,
Note: try using the Speaker Adaptation Function
Any digit input format is available in the available in that mode. (See “Speaker
International Number input process. adaptation function (for Alternate Com-
mand Mode)” later in this section.) Other-
wise it is recommended that Alternate
Command Mode be turned OFF and Stan-
dard Mode be used for the best recognition
performance.

SAA2529 SAA2543 SAA2544
Activating Alternate Command 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
Mode” key. panel.
Mode
5. The confirmation message is displayed 2. Select the “Others” key.
When the Standard Mode is active, perform
on the screen. Push the “OK” key to 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
the following steps to switch to the
activate the Alternate Command Mode.
Alternate Command Mode. 4. Select the “Command List” key.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- Displaying command list
ment panel. If you are controlling the system by voice
2. Highlight the “Others” key. commands for the first time or do not know
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key. the appropriate voice command, perform
the following procedure for displaying the
voice command list (available only in
Alternate Command Mode).

SAA2545 JVH0483X
5. Select a category from the list. 6. Select an item.

7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
INFINITI controller to view the entire list.
8. Push the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.

Command list
Phone Commands:
Command Action
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number.
Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.
Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.
Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.
Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either Quick Dial or Phonebook.
Call <name> Please say “Call” followed by a stored name.
Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

Navigation Commands:
Command Action
Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
Previous Start Point Sets a route to a previous starting point.
Delete Destination Deletes a destination.

Information Commands:
Command Action
Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.
Maintenance Displays maintenance information.
Tire Pressure Displays tire pressure information
Where am I? Displays your current location.
Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Weather Information Displays weather information.
Weather Map Displays a weather map.

Audio Commands:
Command Action
CD Starts to play a CD.
FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the station last played.
USB Turns on the USB memory.
Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® audio player.
AUX Turns on the AUX.

Help Commands:
Command Action
Command List Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list.
Phone Commands Displays the phone command list.
Audio Commands Displays the audio command list.
Information Commands Displays the information command list.
Help Commands Displays the help command list.
User Guide Displays the User Guide.
Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

General Commands:
Command Action
Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen
Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using . Voice Recognition Settings
the INFINITI controller and push the Describes the available voice recogni-
ENTER button. tion settings.
5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI . Adapting the System to Your Voice
controller and push the ENTER button. Tutorial adapting the system to your
Available items: voice.
. Getting Started USING THE SYSTEM
Describe the basics of how to operate
the INFINITI Voice Recognition system. Initialization
. Let’s Practice When the ignition switch is pushed to the
Mode that allows practicing by follow- ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is
ing the instructions of the system voice. initialized, which may take up to one
SAA2547 minute. When completed, the system is
. Using the Address Book
ready to accept voice commands. If the
Displaying user guide Refer to Navigation System Owner’s TALK switch is pushed before the
You can confirm how to use voice com- Manual. initialization completes the display will
mands by accessing a simplified User . Finding a Street Address (if so show the message: “System not ready.”
Guide, which contains basic instructions equipped) or a beep sounds.
and tutorials for several voice commands. Refer to Navigation System Owner’s
Manual. Before starting
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
panel. . Placing Calls To get the best performance from INFINITI
Tutorial for making a phone call by Voice Recognition, observe the following.
2. Select the “Others” key using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER voice command operation. . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
button. . Help on Speaking as possible. Close the windows to
Displays useful tips for how to correctly eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
using the INFINITI controller and push speak commands in order for them to
be properly recognized by the system. which may prevent the system from
the ENTER button. recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
. When the air conditioner is in the
“AUTO” mode, the fan speed decreases
automatically for easy recognition.
. Wait until a tone sounds before speak-
ing a command.
. Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
SAA3164 SAA2548
Giving voice command 2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system announces,
1. Push and release the TALK switch “Please say a command”.
located on the steering wheel.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on
the screen changes from to ,
speak a command.
Operating tips:
. Voice commands cannot be accepted
when the icon is .
. The list displayed can be scrolled by
tilting the menu control switch on the
steering wheel.
. If the command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice. Phone numbers the digits that have been recognized
. Push the BACK button once to return to Speak phone numbers according to the will be read out.
the previous screen. following examples: . If you press the ENTER button on the
. If you want to cancel the command, . 1-800-662-6200
steering wheel or on the INFINITI con-
push and hold the TALK switch for troller, the selected digits will be sent.
— “Dial one eight zero zero six six two
1 second. The message “Voice can- six two zero zero.”
celed” will be announced.
Note 1: For the best voice recognition
. To skip the voice guidance function and phone dialing results, say phone numbers
give the command immediately, push as single digits.
the TALK switch to interrupt the
system. Remember to speak after the Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five
tone. five five six thousands”.
. If you want to adjust the volume of the Note 3: When speaking a house number,
system feedback, push the volume speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the
control switch (+ or −) on the steering letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house
wheel or use the audio system volume number, it will not be recognized as the
knob while the system is making an number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh”
announcement. instead of “zero”. Please speak “zero” for
the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter
How to speak numbers: “o (oh)”.
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-
tain way to speak numbers when giving Send digits using dial tone:
voice commands. Refer to the following . Press the TALK switch during a
examples. phone call.
General rule . The menu will be launched and you will
be provided with the following gui-
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
dance: "Please say the digits to dial".
(For example, if you would like to say 500,
. After guidance, say the digits of the
“five zero zero” can be used, but “five
number you want to send. After this,
hundred” cannot.

SAA2549 SAA2550 SAA2551
Speaker adaptation function (for 4. Select the user whose voice is memor- 6. Select a category to be learned by the
ized by the system. system from the following list.
Alternate Command Mode) . Phone Commands
5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation
The voice recognition system has a func- . Navigation Commands
Learning” key.
tion to learn the user’s voice for better . Information Commands
voice recognition performance. The system . Audio Commands
can memorize the voices of up to three . Help Commands
persons.
The voice commands in the category
Having the system learn the user’s voice: are displayed.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- 7. Select a voice command and then push
ment panel and select the “Others” the ENTER button.
key.
The voice recognition system starts.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

“None” to “Stored”.
SAA2552 SAA2553
8. The system requests that you repeat a Speaker Adaptation function settings:
command after a tone. Edit User Name
9. After the tone sounds and the icon on Edit the user name using the keypad
the screen changes from to , displayed on the screen.
speak the command that the system
requested. Delete Voice Data
10. When the system has recognized the Resets the user’s voice that the voice
voice command, the voice of the user is recognition system has learned.
learned. Continuous Learning
Push the switch or BACK button to When this item is turned to ON, you can
return to the previous screen. have the system learn the voice commands
If the system has learned the command in succession, without selecting com-
correctly, the voice command status on the mands one by one.
right side of the command turns from

Minimize voice feedback (for Alter-
nate Command Mode)
To minimize the voice feedback from the
system, perform the following steps.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Others” key.
4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback”
key.
5. The setting is turned to ON and the
voice guidance will now be reduced
when using the Voice Recognition
system.

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in
this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
The system fails to interpret the command correctly. 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
the phonebook. System” earlier in this section; page 4-98.)
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ................. 5-3 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Prevention (LDP)
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)....................... 5-3 system (if so equipped) ................................... 5-21
Three-way catalyst........................................... 5-3 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system......... 5-22
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......... 5-4 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system ...... 5-26
Avoiding collision and rollover......................... 5-7 Blind Spot Warning/Blind Spot InterventionTM/
On-pavement and off-road Back-up Collision Intervention systems
driving precautions.......................................... 5-8 (if so equipped) ................................................ 5-31
Off-road recovery............................................. 5-8 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind Spot
InterventionTM systems ................................ 5-31
Rapid air pressure loss ................................... 5-8
BSW system operation................................. 5-33
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................. 5-9
Blind Spot InterventionTM
Driving safety precautions ............................... 5-9
system operation ......................................... 5-36
Push-button ignition switch ............................... 5-11
BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM
Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-12 driving situations......................................... 5-39
Push-button ignition switch positions............ 5-13 Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) system
Emergency engine shut off ............................ 5-13 (if so equipped) ........................................... 5-45
Intelligent Key battery discharge ................... 5-13 BCI system operation (if so equipped) ......... 5-47
Before starting the engine ................................. 5-14 System maintenance.................................... 5-53
Starting the engine............................................ 5-14 Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................... 5-54
Remote start (if so equipped) ........................ 5-15 Precautions on cruise control....................... 5-54
Driving the vehicle............................................. 5-16 Cruise control operations............................. 5-55
Engine protection mode................................. 5-16 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if
Automatic transmission ................................. 5-17 so equipped)..................................................... 5-56
Parking brake .................................................... 5-21 Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode ............................................... 5-57
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode...... 5-57
Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance Hill Start Assist system ................................... 5-107
control mode................................................. 5-58 Parking/parking on hills.................................. 5-108
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Tow mode ....................................................... 5-109
mode operation............................................. 5-59 SNOW mode.................................................... 5-109
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Power steering ................................................ 5-110
control mode................................................. 5-74
Brake system .................................................. 5-110
Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise Control
Braking precautions................................... 5-110
(ICC) system equipped model) ....................... 5-77
Parking brake break-in............................... 5-110
Distance Control Assist (DCA) system (if
so equipped) ..................................................... 5-78 Brake assist .................................................... 5-111
Precautions on distance control Brake assist............................................... 5-111
assist system ................................................ 5-78 Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Control
Distance control assist operation................... 5-80 system equipped models) .......................... 5-111
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system (if Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................. 5-113
so equipped) ..................................................... 5-90 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ............ 5-115
Precautions on FCW system........................... 5-91 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system (if OFF switch ................................................. 5-116
so equipped) ..................................................... 5-94 Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-117
Precautions on IBA system ............................ 5-95 Freeing a frozen door lock ......................... 5-117
Break-in schedule .............................................. 5-98 Antifreeze .................................................. 5-117
Fuel efficient driving tips ................................... 5-98 Battery....................................................... 5-117
Increasing fuel economy .................................. 5-100 Draining of coolant water........................... 5-117
INFINITI all-mode 4WD® (if so equipped).......... 5-100 Tire equipment .......................................... 5-117
INFINITI all-mode 4WD® system ................... 5-101 Special winter equipment .......................... 5-118
4WD shift switch ......................................... 5-104 Driving on snow or ice ............................... 5-118
4WD shift indicator...................................... 5-105 Engine block heater (if so equipped).......... 5-118
4WD warning light....................................... 5-105
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
death. — The vehicle is raised for service.

WARNING . If you suspect that exhaust fumes are — You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all entering into the passenger compart-
. Do not leave children or adults who windows fully open, and have the ment.
would normally require the support of vehicle inspected immediately.
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should — You notice a change in the sound of
not be left alone either. They could . Do not run the engine in closed spaces the exhaust system.
accidentally injure themselves or others such as a garage.
— You have had an accident involving
through inadvertent operation of the . Do not park the vehicle with the engine
damage to the exhaust system,
vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, running for any extended length of time.
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could . Keep the lift gate closed while driving,
quickly become high enough to cause otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn
severe or possibly fatal injuries to into the passenger compartment. If you THREE-WAY CATALYST
people or animals. must drive with the lift gate open, follow The three-way catalyst is an emission
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent these precautions: control device installed in the exhaust
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place 1) Open all the windows. system. Exhaust gases in the three-way
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a catalyst are burned at high temperatures to
2) Set the air recirculation to off help reduce pollutants.
sudden stop or collision, unsecured
and the fan control to high to
cargo could cause personal injury.
circulate the air.
. If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the lift gate or the body, . The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
follow the manufacturer’s recommenda- are very hot. Keep people, animals or
WARNING flammable materials away from the
tion to prevent carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle. exhaust system components.
. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon . The exhaust system and body should be . Do not stop or park the vehicle over
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- inspected by a qualified mechanic when- flammable materials such as dry grass,
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or ever: waste paper or rags. They may ignite and
Starting and driving 5-3

cause a fire. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- and it is the driver’s responsibility to
TEM (TPMS) maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
CAUTION should be checked monthly when cold and
pressure telltale.
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
. Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
from leaded gasoline seriously reduce
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different when the system is not operating properly.
the three-way catalyst’s ability to help
size than the size indicated on the vehicle The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
reduce exhaust pollutants.
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions When the system detects a malfunction,
should determine the proper tire inflation
in the ignition, fuel injection, or elec- the telltale will flash for approximately one
pressure for those tires.)
trical systems can cause overrich fuel minute and then remain continuously
flow into the three-way catalyst, causing As an added safety feature, your vehicle
illuminated. This sequence will continue
it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
performance or other unusual operating a low tire pressure telltale when one or
function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
conditions are detected. Have the vehicle more of your tires is significantly under-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low
inspected promptly by an INFINITI retai- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
ler. pressure telltale illuminates, you should
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
stop and check your tires as soon as
. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel including the installation of replacement or
possible, and inflate them to the proper
level. Running out of fuel could cause alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
the engine to misfire, damaging the prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
three-way catalyst. erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
. Do not race the engine while warming it telltale after replacing one or more tires or
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
up. wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start stopping ability.
allow the TPMS to continue to function
the engine. Please note that the TPMS is not a properly.
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
5-4 Starting and driving
Additional information the low tire pressure warning light Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” in
. The TPMS does not monitor the tire remains illuminated. the “6. In case of emergency” section.
pressure of the spare tire. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
. The TPMS will activate only when the does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
WARNING
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16
TPMS malfunction.
MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may . If the low tire pressure warning light
not detect a sudden drop in tire . Tire pressure rises and falls depending illuminates or LOW PRESSURE informa-
pressure (for example, a flat tire while on the heat caused by the vehicle’s tion is displayed on the monitor screen
driving). operation and the outside temperature. while driving, avoid sudden steering
. The low tire pressure warning light does Low outside temperature can lower the maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce
not automatically turn off when the tire temperature of the air inside the tire vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is which can cause a lower tire inflation location and stop the vehicle as soon as
inflated to the recommended pressure, pressure. This may cause the low tire possible. Driving with under-inflated
the vehicle must be driven at speeds pressure warning light to illuminate. If tires may permanently damage the tires
above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the the warning light illuminates in low and increase the likelihood of tire fail-
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure ambient temperature, check the tire ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge pressure for all four tires. and may lead to an accident and could
to check the tire pressure. . You can also check the pressure of all result in serious personal injury. Check
. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning tires (except the spare tire) on the the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display screen. The order of the tire the tire pressure to the recommended
display when the low tire pressure pressure figures displayed on the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
warning light is illuminated and low screen does not correspond with the and Loading Information label to turn
tire pressure is detected. The CHECK actual order of the tire position. See the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when “TIRE PRESSURE information” in the “4. the light still illuminates while driving
the low tire pressure warning light Monitor, climate, audio, phone and after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
turns off. voice recognition systems” section. may be flat. If you have a flat tire,
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning For additional information, see “Low tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as
appears each time the ignition switch pressure warning light” in the “2. Instru- possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In
is placed in the ON position as long as ments and controls” section and “Tire case of emergency” section for changing

a flat tire.) and the TPMS will not function properly. Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible
. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel for compliance could void the user’s
is replaced, the TPMS will not function Some devices and transmitters may tem-
porarily interfere with the operation of the authority to operate the equipment.
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute. TPMS and cause the low tire pressure For Canada:
The light will remain on after 1 minute. warning light to illuminate. Some exam- This device complies with RSS-210 of
Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as ples are: Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
possible for tire replacement and/or . Facilities or electric devices using simi- the following two conditions: (1) this
system resetting. lar radio frequencies are near the device may not cause interference, and
. Replacing tires with those not originally vehicle. (2) this device must accept any interfer-
specified by INFINITI could affect the . If a transmitter set to similar frequen- ence, including interference that may
proper operation of the TPMS. cies is being used in or near the cause undesired operation of the device.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol vehicle. TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator
tire sealant into the tires, as this may . If a computer (or similar equipment) or
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure a DC/AC converter is being used in or
the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator
sensors. near the vehicle.
provides visual and audible signals out-
FCC Notice: side the vehicle to help you inflate the tires
For USA: to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
CAUTION This device complies with Part 15 of the Vehicle set-up:
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level
. The TPMS may not function properly following two conditions: (1) This device
place.
when the wheels are equipped with tire may not cause harmful interference, and
chains or the wheels are buried in snow. (2) this device must accept any interfer- 2. Apply the parking brake and place the
ence received, including interference that shift lever in the P (Park) position.
. Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. may cause undesired operation. 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON
This may cause poor reception of the position. Do not start the engine.
signals from the tire pressure sensors,

Operation: socket is not sufficient to inflate the these driving practices could cause you to
1. Add air to the tire. tire lose control of your vehicle. As with any
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- — If an electrical equipment is being vehicle, a loss of control could result in a
used in or near the vehicle collision with other vehicles or objects, or
tors will start flashing.
— There is a malfunction in the TPMS cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if
3. When the designated pressure is the loss of control causes the vehicle to
system
reached, the horn beeps once and the slide sideways. Be attentive at all times,
hazard indicators stop flashing. — There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
4. Perform the above steps for each tire. when under the influence of alcohol or
. If the Tire Inflation Indicator does not
. If the tire is over-inflated more than drugs (including prescription or over-the-
operate due to TPMS interference,
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn counter drugs which may cause drowsi-
move the vehicle about 3 ft (1m)
beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 ness). Always wear your seat belt as
backward or forward and try again.
times. To correct the pressure, push the outlined in the “Seat belts” in the “1.
If the Tire Inflation Indicator is not working, Safety — seats, seat belts and supple-
core of the valve stem on the tire briefly use a tire pressure gauge.
to release pressure. When the pressure mental restraint system” section of this
reaches the designated pressure, the AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL- manual, and also instruct your passengers
horn beeps once. to do so.
OVER
. If the hazard indicator does not flash Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
within approximately 15 seconds after collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates WARNING an unbelted or improperly belted person is
that the Tire Inflation Indicator is not significantly more likely to be injured or
operating. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and killed than a person properly wearing a
prudent manner may result in loss of control seat belt.
. The TPMS will not activate the Tire
or an accident.
Inflation Indicator under the following
conditions:
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
— If there is interference from an
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-
external device or transmitter
sive speed, high speed cornering, or
— The air pressure from the inflation sudden steering maneuvers, because
device such as those using a power

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD OFF-ROAD RECOVERY driving lane.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS . If you decide that it is not safe to
While driving, the right side or left side
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher wheels may unintentionally leave the road return the vehicle to the road surface
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. surface. If this occurs, maintain control of based on vehicle, road or traffic
the vehicle by following the procedure conditions, gradually slow the vehi-
They have higher ground clearance than cle to a stop in a safe place off the
passenger cars to make them capable of below. Please note that this procedure is
only a general guide. The vehicle must be road.
performing in a variety of on-pavement and
off-road applications. This gives them a driven as appropriate based on the condi- RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. tions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
An advantage of higher ground clearance is 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
a better view of the road, allowing you to 2. Do not apply the brakes. due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
anticipate problems. However, they are not pressure loss can also be caused by
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
designed for cornering at the same speeds driving on under-inflated tires.
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
as conventional passenger cars any more
straight course. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
4. When appropriate, slowly release the handling and stability of the vehicle,
perform satisfactorily under off-road con-
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the especially at highway speeds.
ditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns
or abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high vehicle. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the maintaining the correct air pressure and
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may vehicle to follow the road while the visually inspect the tires for wear and
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. vehicle speed is reduced. Do not damage. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in attempt to drive the vehicle back onto Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, the road surface until vehicle speed is this manual.
an unbelted or improperly belted person is reduced. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or
significantly more likely to be injured or 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn “blows-out” while driving maintain control
killed than a person properly wearing a the steering wheel until both tires of the vehicle by following the procedure
seat belt. return to the road surface. When all below. Please note that this procedure is
Be sure to read “Driving safety precau- tires are on the road surface, steer the only a general guide. The vehicle must be
tions” later in this section. vehicle to stay in the appropriate driven as appropriate based on the condi-

tions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- local laws vary on what is considered to
ally stop the vehicle. be legally intoxicated, the fact is that
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers alcohol affects all people differently and
WARNING most people underestimate the effects of
and either contact a roadside emer-
gency service to change the tire or see alcohol.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if “Changing a flat tire” in the “6. In case Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. of emergency” section of this Owner’s And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a Manual. counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).
collision and result in personal injury. Don’t drive if your ability to operate your
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or
. The vehicle generally moves or pulls in DRIVING some other physical condition.
the direction of the flat tire.
. Do not rapidly apply the brakes. DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING Your INFINITI is designed for both normal
. Do not rapidly release the accelerator
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
pedal. Never drive under the influence of alcohol or
deep water or mud as your INFINITI is
. Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces
mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
coordination, delays reaction time and im-
conventional off-road vehicle.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact. pairs judgement. Driving after drinking
alcohol increases the likelihood of being Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering models are less capable than Four-Wheel
involved in an accident injuring yourself and
wheel with both hands and try to hold a Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving
others. Additionally, if you are injured in an
straight course. and extrication when stuck in deep snow,
accident, alcohol can increase the severity
3. When appropriate, slowly release the of the injury. mud, or the like.
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the Please observe the following precautions:
vehicle. INFINITI is committed to safe driving.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe However, you must choose not to drive
location off the road and away from under the influence of alcohol. Every year
traffic if possible. thousands of people are injured or killed in
alcohol-related accidents. Although the

. If your engine stalls or you cannot make The steering wheel could move suddenly
WARNING it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt and injure your hands. Instead drive with
to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or your fingers and thumbs on the outside
. Drive carefully when off the road and roll over. Always back straight down in R of the rim.
avoid dangerous areas. Every person (Reverse) range. Never back down in N . Before operating the vehicle, ensure that
who drives or rides in this vehicle should (Neutral), using only the brake, as this the driver and all passengers have their
be seated with their seat belt fastened. could cause loss of control. seat belts fastened.
This will keep you and your passengers
. Heavy braking going down a hill could . Always drive with the floor mats in place
in position when driving over rough
cause your brakes to overheat and fade, as the floor may became hot.
terrain.
resulting in loss of control and an
. Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead . Lower your speed when encountering
accident. Apply brakes lightly and use
drive either straight up or straight down strong crosswinds. With a higher center
a low range to control your speed.
the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over of gravity, your INFINITI is more affected
. Unsecured cargo can be thrown around by strong side winds. Slower speeds
sideways much more easily than they
when driving over rough terrain. Prop- ensure better vehicle control.
can forward or backward.
erly secure all cargo so it will not be
. Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. . Do not drive beyond the performance
thrown forward and cause injury to you
If you drive up them, you may stall. If capability of the tires, even with 4WD
or your passengers.
you drive down them, you may not be engaged.
. To avoid raising the center of gravity
able to control your speed. If you drive . For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not
excessively, do not exceed the rated
across them, you may roll over. attempt to raise two wheels off the
capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped)
. Do not shift ranges while driving on ground and shift the transmission to
and evenly distribute the load. Secure
downhill grades as this could cause loss any drive or reverse position with the
heavy loads in the cargo area as far
of control of the vehicle. engine running. Doing so may result in
forward and as low as possible. Do not
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
. Stay alert when driving to the top of a equip the vehicle with tires larger than
movement which could result in serious
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off specified in this manual. This could
vehicle damage or personal injury.
or other hazard that could cause an cause your vehicle to roll over.
accident. . Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
steering wheel when driving off-road.
as the dynamometers used by some

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
states for emissions testing), or similar brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

equipment even if the other two wheels radial), and tread pattern on all four WARNING
are raised off the ground. Make sure you wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
inform test facility personnel that your wheels when driving on slippery roads Do not operate the push-button ignition
vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is and drive carefully. switch while driving the vehicle except in an
placed on a dynamometer. Using the . Be sure to check the brakes immediately emergency. (The engine will stop when the
wrong test equipment may result in after driving in mud or water. See “Brake ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle system” later in this section for wet times or the ignition switch is pushed and
movement which could result in serious brakes. held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine
vehicle damage or personal injury (4WD stops while the vehicle is being driven, this
. Avoid parking your vehicle on steep could lead to a crash and serious injury.
models).
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and
. When a wheel is off the ground due to an it rolls forward, backward or sideways,
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel Before operating the push-button ignition
you could be injured.
excessively. switch, be sure to move the shift lever to
. Whenever you drive off-road through the P (Park) position.
. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering sand, mud or water as deep as the
maneuvers or sudden braking may cause wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
loss of control. may be required. See the maintenance
. If at all possible, avoid sharp turning information in the “INFINITI Service and
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Maintenance Guide”.
Your vehicle has a higher center of . Spinning the rear wheels on slippery
gravity than a conventional passenger surfaces may cause the 4WD warning
car. The vehicle is not designed for light to flash. The 4WD system may also
cornering at the same speeds as con- automatically switch from the 4WD
ventional passenger cars. Failure to mode to the 2WD mode. This could
operate this vehicle correctly could reduce traction. Be especially careful
result in loss of control and/or a rollover when towing a trailer (4WD models).
accident.
. Always use tires of the same type, size,

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the LOCK position, proceed as
follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF
position. The ignition switch position
indicator will not illuminate.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
change to the LOCK position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
SSD0436 SSD1021
the ON position and the brake pedal is
When the ignition switch is pushed without depressed.
OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
START FUNCTION switch position will change as follows: the push-button ignition switch cannot be
The operating range for starting the engine
. Push center once to change to ACC. turned from the LOCK position.
inside the vehicle * 1 is shown in the
illustration. . Push center two times to change to ON. Some indicators and warnings for opera-
. Push center three times to change to tion are displayed on the dot matrix liquid
. If the Intelligent Key is on the instru- crystal display between the speedometer
OFF. (No position illuminates.)
ment panel, cargo area, inside the and tachometer. (See “Dot matrix liquid
glove box or door pocket, or the corner . Push center four times to return to ACC.
crystal display” in the “2. Instruments and
of interior compartment, it may not be . Open or close any door to return to
controls” section.)
possible to start the engine. LOCK during the OFF position.
. If the Intelligent Key is near the door or The ignition lock is designed so that the
door glass outside the vehicle, it may ignition switch position cannot be switched
be possible to start the engine. to LOCK until the shift lever is moved to the
P (Park) position.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS CAUTION
LOCK (Normal parking position) Do not leave the vehicle with the push-
The ignition switch can only be locked in button ignition switch in ACC or ON posi-
this position. tions when the engine is not running for an
The ignition switch will be unlocked when extended period. This can discharge the
it is pushed to the ACC position while battery.
carrying the Intelligent Key.
ACC (Accessories) EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
This position activates electrical acces- To shut off the engine in an emergency
sories such as the radio, when the engine situation while driving, perform the follow-
SSD0944
is not running. ing procedure:
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-
ON (Normal operating position) switch 3 consecutive times in less than
This position turns on the ignition system 1.5 seconds, or
CHARGE
and electrical accessories. . Push and hold the push-button ignition If the battery of the Intelligent Key is
switch for more than 2 seconds. discharged, or environmental conditions
OFF interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
The engine can be turned off in the start the engine according to the following
position. procedure:
The ignition lock is designed so that the 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
ignition switch cannot be switched to the position.
LOCK position until the shift lever is moved 2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
to the P (Park) position.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the
Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime
will sound.)

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
. Make sure the area around the vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake.
4. Push the ignition switch while depres-
is clear. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N
sing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will . Check fluid levels such as engine oil, (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
start. coolant, brake fluid and window The starter is designed not to operate
washer fluid as frequently as possible, unless the shift lever is in either of the
After step 3 is performed, when the
or at least whenever you refuel. above positions.
ignition switch is pushed without depres-
. Check that all windows and lights are
sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON
clean.
position will change to ACC. position. Depress the brake pedal and
. Visually inspect tires for their appear- push the ignition switch to start the
NOTE: ance and condition. Also check tires for engine.
. When the ignition switch is pushed to proper inflation.
the ACC or ON position or the engine is To start the engine immediately, push
. Lock all doors.
started by the above procedures, the and release the ignition switch while
. Position seat and adjust head re- depressing the brake pedal with the
Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-
straints/headrests. ignition switch in any position.
cator appears on the dot matrix liquid
. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. . If the engine is very hard to start in
crystal display even if the Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a . Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- extremely cold weather or when
malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent gers to do likewise. restarting, depress the accelerator
Key battery discharge indicator, touch . Check the operation of warning lights pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to
the ignition switch with the Intelligent when the ignition switch is pushed to the floor) and while holding, crank
Key again. the ON position. (See “Warning/indica- the engine. Release the accelerator
. If the Intelligent Key battery discharge tor lights and audible reminders” in the pedal when the engine starts.
indicator appears, replace the battery “2. Instruments and controls” section.) . If the engine is very hard to start
as soon as possible. (See “Battery” in because it is flooded, depress the
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your- accelerator pedal all the way to the
self” section.) floor and hold it. Push the ignition
switch to the ON position to start
cranking the engine. After 5 or 6
seconds, stop cranking by pushing
the ignition switch to OFF. After

cranking the engine, release the When racing the engine up to 4,000 ON position, perform the following steps:
accelerator pedal. Crank the engine rpm or more under the no load condi- 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
with your foot off the accelerator tion, the engine will enter the fuel cut you.
pedal by depressing the brake pedal mode.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
and pushing the push-button igni- 5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever
tion switch to start the engine. If the 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
to the P (Park) position and push the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat position.
ignition switch to the OFF position.
the above procedure. For additional information about the re-
NOTE: mote engine start function, see “Remote
Care should be taken to avoid situations keyless entry system” in the “3. Pre-driving
CAUTION that can lead to potential battery dis- checks and adjustments” section.
charge and potential no-start conditions
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 such as:
seconds at a time. If the engine does not 1. Installation or extended use of electro-
start, push the ignition switch to OFF and nic accessories that consume battery
wait 10 seconds before cranking again, power when the engine is not running
otherwise the starter could be damaged. (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.)
4. Warm-up
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 only driven short distances.
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at In these cases, the battery may need to be
moderate speed for a short distance charged to maintain battery health.
first, especially in cold weather. In cold REMOTE START (if so equipped)
weather, keep the engine running for a Vehicles started with the remote engine
minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before start function require the ignition switch to
shutting it off. Starting and stopping be placed in the ON position before the
the engine over a short period of time shift lever can be moved from the P (Park)
may make the vehicle more difficult to position. To place the ignition switch in the
start.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
ENGINE PROTECTION MODE function will automatically be turned back

The engine has an engine protection mode ON. WARNING
to reduce the chance of damage if the If:
coolant temperature becomes too high (for Overheating can result in reduced engine
1. The engine coolant temperature is not
example, when climbing steep grades in power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed
reduced.
high temperature with heavy loads, such may be lower than other traffic, which could
as when towing a trailer). 2. The air conditioning cooling function increase the chance of a collision. Be
does not turn back ON. especially careful when driving. If the
When the engine temperature reaches a
certain level: 3. The engine oil pressure warning light vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving
illuminates or engine coolant speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe
. The engine coolant temperature gauge temperature gauge does not return to area. Allow the engine to cool and return to
will move toward the H position. the normal range from the H position, normal operation. See “If your vehicle over-
. Engine power may be reduced. this may indicate a malfunction. Move heats” in the “6. In case of emergency”
. The air conditioning cooling function the vehicle off the road to a safe area section.
may be automatically turned OFF for a and allow the engine to cool. If after
short time (the blower will continue to checking the oil and coolant, the
operate). remains on or engine coolant tempera-
Engine power and, under some conditions, ture does not return to the normal CAUTION
vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed range, do not continue to drive and
contact an INFINITI retailer. Running the engine with the engine oil
can be controlled with the accelerator
pressure warning light on could cause
pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) serious damage to the engine almost
at the desired speed. The transmission will may also come ON. You do not need to immediately. Such damage is not covered
downshift or upshift as it reaches pre- have your vehicle towed, unless it remains by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
scribed shift points. You can also shift on, but have it inspected soon by an it is safe to do so.
manually. INFINITI retailer. See “Warning/indicator
As driving conditions change and engine lights and audible reminders” in the “2.
coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle Instruments and controls” section.
speed can be increased using the accel-
erator pedal, and air conditioning cooling

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The shift lever cannot be moved out of the Failure to do so could cause you to lose
P (Park) position and into any of the other control and have an accident.
7 speed automatic transmission gear positions if the ignition switch is
The automatic transmission in your vehicle pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
is electronically controlled by a transmis- 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
sion control module to produce maximum and push the shift lever button to shift
CAUTION
efficiency and smooth operation. into a driving gear.
. Except in an emergency, do not shift to
Shown on the following pages are the 2. Release the parking brake and foot the N (Neutral) position while driving.
recommended operating procedures for brake, then gradually start the vehicle Coasting with the transmission in the N
this transmission. Follow these procedures in motion. (Neutral) position may cause serious
for maximum vehicle performance and
damage to the transmission.
driving enjoyment.
WARNING . When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
Starting the vehicle grade, do not hold the vehicle by
After starting the engine, fully depress the . Do not depress the accelerator pedal depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake pedal and push the shift lever while shifting from P (Park) or N foot brake should be used for this
button before shifting the shift lever to the (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or purpose.
R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or manual shift mode. Always depress the . Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
Manual shift mode position. Be sure the brake pedal until shifting is completed. roads. This may cause a loss of control.
vehicle is fully stopped before attempting Failure to do so could cause you to lose
to shift the shift lever. control and have an accident.
This automatic transmission model is . Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
designed so that the foot brake pedal caution when shifting into a forward or
must be depressed before shifting from P reverse gear before the engine has
(Park) to any drive position while the warmed up.
ignition switch position is ON. . Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while vehicle is moving forward. Never
shift to P (Park), D (Drive) or manual shift
mode while vehicle is moving rearward.

(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) shift lever from the N (Neutral) position or
or Manual shift mode position. any drive position to the P (Park) position.
Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R Apply the parking brake. When parking on
(Reverse). All other positions can be a hill, apply the parking brake first, then
selected without pushing the button. move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
CAUTION
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not Use this position only when the vehicle is
running. Failure to do so could cause the completely stopped.
vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away
SSD0945 and result in serious personal injury or R (Reverse):
Shift lever property damage. Use this position to back up. Always be
To move the shift lever,
sure the vehicle is completely stopped
: Push the button while depressing the before selecting the R (Reverse) position.
brake pedal,
CAUTION The brake pedal must be depressed and
: Push the button, the shift lever button pushed in to move
: Just move the shift lever. the shift lever from the P (Park) position,
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped
Shifting and the transmission is in the P (Park) the N (Neutral) position or any drive
position. position to the R (Reverse) position.
The shift lever position indicator light (next
to the shift lever) will be illuminated for N (Neutral):
approximately 30 minutes after the ignition P (Park) position: Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
switch is turned off. The indicator light may Use this position when the vehicle is gaged. The engine can be started in this
also illuminate when the vehicle receives parked or when starting the engine. Make position. You may shift to the N (Neutral)
radio waves. This is not a malfunction. sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The position and restart a stalled engine while
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal must be depressed and the the vehicle is moving.
brake pedal and shift the shift lever from P shift lever button pushed in to move the
M
D (Drive): 7 (7th): vehicle damage or loss of control.
Use this position for all normal forward Use this position for all normal forward . When the transmission does not shift
driving. driving at highway speeds. to the selected gear, the Automatic
M Transmission (AT) position indicator
Manual shift mode 6 (6th) and M5 (5th):
light (in the vehicle information dis-
When the shift lever is in the manual shift Use this position when driving up long play) will blink and the buzzer will
gate, the transmission is ready for the slopes, or for engine braking when driving sound.
down long slopes.
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be . In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
M
selected manually by moving the shift lever 4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd): sion automatically shifts down to 1st
up or down. Use these positions for hill climbing or gear before the vehicle comes to a
When shifting up, move the shift lever to engine braking on downhill grades. stop. When accelerating again, it is
the + (up) side. The transmission shifts to M necessary to shift up to the desired
1 (1st): range.
the higher range.
Use this position when climbing steep hills
When shifting down, move the shift lever to
slowly or driving slowly through deep Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive)
the − (down) side. The transmission shifts position —
snow, or for maximum engine braking on
to the lower range.
steep downhill grades. For passing or hill climbing, fully depress
When canceling the manual shift mode,
. Remember not to drive at high speeds the accelerator pedal to the floor. This
return the shift lever to the D (Drive) shifts the transmission down into the lower
for extended periods of time in lower
position. The transmission returns to the gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
than 7th gear. This reduces fuel econ-
normal driving mode.
omy.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is Fail-safe
. Moving the shift lever rapidly to the
displayed on the position indicator in the same side twice will shift the ranges in When the fail-safe operation occurs, note
meter. succession. that the transmission will be locked in any
of the forward gears according to the
Shift ranges up or down one by one as . In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
follows: condition.
sion may not shift to the selected gear
M ? M ? M ? M ? M ? M ? M or may automatically shift to the other
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
/ / / / / / gear. This helps maintain driving per-
formance and reduces the chance of

If the vehicle is driven under extreme 4. Push down the shift lock *
B as
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin- illustrated.
ning and subsequent hard braking, the 5. Push the shift lever button * C and
fail-safe system may be activated. This will move the shift lever to N (Neutral)
occur even if all electrical circuits are position * D while holding down the
functioning properly. In this case, push shift lock.
the switch to the OFF position and wait for
The vehicle may be moved to the desired
3 seconds. Then push the ignition switch
location.
back to the ON position. The vehicle
should return to its normal operating If the lever cannot be moved out of P
condition. If it does not return to its (Park), have an INFINITI retailer check the
normal operating condition, have an automatic transmission system as soon as
INFINITI retailer check the transmission possible.
SSD0946
and repair if necessary.
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the shift lever may not be moved from the P
(Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the shift lever button
pushed.
To move the shift lever, perform the
following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock cover *
A using a
suitable tool.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/
PARKING BRAKE PREVENTION (LDP) SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-
WARNING tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys-
tem will operate when the vehicle is driven
. Be sure the parking brake is fully at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70
released before driving. Failure to do so km/h) and above, and when it is traveling
can cause brake failure and lead to an close to either the left or the right of a
accident. traveling lane.
. Do not release the parking brake from Each system functions as follows:
outside the vehicle. . Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
. Do not use the gear shift in place of the — warns the driver by a warning light
parking brake. When parking, be sure and chime.
the parking brake is fully engaged. . Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system
— warns the driver by a warning light
. Do not leave children unattended in a SPA2331
and chime, and helps assist the driver
vehicle. They could release the parking
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake to return the vehicle to the center
brake and cause an accident.
pedal *1 . direction of the traveling lane by
To release: applying brake control to the left or
right wheels individually (for a short
1. Firmly apply the foot brake *
2 .
period of time).
2. Depress the parking brake pedal * 1
and the parking brake will be released.
3. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.

The LDW and LDP systems monitor the lane LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
markers on the traveling lane using the SYSTEM
camera unit * 1 located inside the front
map light cover. When the camera unit Precautions on LDW system
detects that the vehicle is traveling close to
either the left or the right of the traveling
lane, the lane departure warning light on
WARNING
the instrument panel blinks in orange and
. This system is only a warning device to
a warning chime sounds. When the LDP
inform the driver of a potential unin-
system is on, it will automatically apply the
tended lane departure. It will not steer
brakes for a short period of time, using the
the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It
function of the Vehicle Dynamic Control
is the driver’s responsibility to stay
(VDC) system.
SSD1045 alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in
the traveling lane, and be in control of
the vehicle at all times.
. The system will not operate at speeds
below approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h)
or if it cannot detect lane markers.
. If the LDW system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically, and the lane de-
parture warning light (orange) will illu-
minate.
. If the lane departure warning light
(orange) illuminates, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle.
Turn the engine off and restart the
SSD0672 engine. If the lane departure warning
Lane departure warning light (orange) light (orange) continues to illuminate,

have the system checked by an INFINITI . When traveling close to the vehicle in
retailer. front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
. Excessive noise will interfere with the
. When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
warning chime sound, and the chime
windshield in front of the lane camera
may not be heard.
unit.
The system may not function properly . When the headlights are not bright due
under the following conditions: to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not
adjusted properly.
. On roads where there are multiple
. When strong light enters the lane
parallel lane markers; lane markers
camera unit. (For example, the light
that are faded or not painted clearly;
directly shines on the front of the
yellow painted lane markers; non-stan-
vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) SSD0672
dard lane markers; or lane markers
covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. . When a sudden change in brightness Lane departure warning light (orange)
occurs. (For example, when the vehicle
. On roads where the discontinued lane LDW system operation
enters or exits a tunnel or under a
markers are still detectable. The LDW system provides a lane departure
bridge.)
. On roads where there are sharp curves. warning function when the vehicle is driven
. On roads where there are sharply at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70
contrasting objects, such as shadows, km/h) and above. When the vehicle
snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines approaches either the left or the right side
remaining after road repairs. (The LDW of the traveling lane, a warning chime will
system could detect these items as sound and the lane departure warning light
lane markers.) (orange) on the instrument panel will blink
. On roads where the traveling lane to alert the driver.
merges or separates. The warning function will stop when the
. When the vehicle’s traveling direction vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
does not align with the lane marker. The LDW system is not designed to warn
under the following conditions.
. When you operate the lane change Spot Warning/Blind Spot InterventionTM/
signal and change traveling lanes in Back-up Collision Intervention systems”
the direction of the signal. (The LDW later in this section and “Forward Collision
system will become operable again Warning (FCW) system” later in this sec-
approximately 2 seconds after the lane tion.
change signal is turned off.)
. When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).
. When the Blind Spot InterventionTM
system activates an audible warning
or brake control.
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions are SSD0956
satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. Warning systems switch
Turning on or off the LDW system :
The warning systems switch is used to turn
on and off the LDW system when it is
activated using the settings menu on the
center display. See “How to enable/disable
the LDW system using the settings menu”
When the warning systems switch is turned
off, the indicator * 1 on the switch is off.
The indicator will also be off if the LDW, the
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and the Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) systems are deac-
tivated.
For the BSW and FCW systems, see “Blind

How to enable/disable the LDW
system using the settings menu
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the LDW system.
1. Push the SETTING * 1 button and high-
light the “Driver Assistance” key on the
display using the INFINITI controller.
Then push the ENTER * 2 button.
2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn-

ings” key, and push the ENTER * 2
button.
SSD0939 JVS0080X
3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Warning”

key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis-
abled) and push the ENTER * 2 button.
Temporary disabled status at high

temperature
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 1048F (408C) and then
started, the LDW system may be deacti-
vated automatically. The lane departure
warning light (orange) will flash.
When the interior temperature is reduced,
SSD1102 the LDW system will resume operating
automatically and the lane departure

warning light (orange) will stop flashing. . When the LDP system is operating, avoid low tire pressure, installation of
LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION excessive or sudden steering maneu- spare tire, tire chains, non-standard
vers. Otherwise, you could lose control wheels).
(LDP) SYSTEM
of the vehicle.
— When the vehicle is equipped with
Precautions on LDP system . The LDP system will not operate at non-original brake parts or suspen-
speeds below approximately 45 MPH sion parts.
(70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
WARNING markers.
— When towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
. The LDP system will not steer the vehicle . The LDP system may not function
properly under the following conditions, . If the LDP system malfunctions, it will
or prevent loss of control. It is the
and do not use the LDP system: cancel automatically. The lane departure
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
warning light (orange) on the instrument
safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
panel will illuminate.
lane, and be in control of vehicle at all wind, etc.).
times. . If the lane departure warning light
— When driving on slippery roads, (orange) illuminates, pull off the road
. The LDP system is primarily intended for such as on ice or snow, etc. to a safe location and stop the vehicle.
use on well-developed freeways or high-
ways. It may not detect the lane markers — When driving off-road such as on Turn the engine off and restart the
sand or rock, etc. engine. If the warning light (orange)
in certain roads, weather or driving
continues to illuminate, have the LDP
conditions. — When driving on winding or uneven
system checked by an INFINITI retailer.
. Using the LDP system under some roads.
conditions of road, lane marker or — When there is a lane closure due to warning chime sound, and the chime
weather, or when you change lanes road repairs. may not be heard.
without using the lane change signal
could lead to an unexpected system — When driving in a makeshift lane.
The functions of the LDP system (warning
operation. In such conditions, you need — When driving on roads where the
to correct the vehicle’s direction with and brake control assist) may or may not
lane width is too narrow.
your steering operation to avoid acci- operate properly under the following con-
— When driving without normal tire ditions:
dents.
conditions (for example, tire wear,
. On roads where there are multiple . When strong light enters the lane
parallel lane markers; lane markers camera unit. (For example, the light
that are faded or not painted clearly; directly shines on the front of the
yellow painted lane markers; non-stan- vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
dard lane markers; or lane markers . When a sudden change in brightness
covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. occurs. (For example, when the vehicle
. On roads where discontinued lane enters or exits a tunnel or under a
markers are still detectable. bridge.)
. On roads where there are sharp curves. While the LDP system is operating, you
. On roads where there are sharply may hear a sound of brake operation. This
contrasting objects, such as shadows, is normal and indicates that the LDP
snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines system is operating properly.
remaining after road repairs. (The LDP SSD0672
system could detect these items as LDP ON indicator light (green)/ Warning
lane markers.) light (orange)
. On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
LDP system operation
. When the vehicle’s traveling direction The LDP system provides a lane departure
does not align with the lane marker. warning and brake control assistance when
the vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-
. When traveling close to the vehicle in
mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above.
front of you, which obstructs the lane
When the vehicle approaches either the left
camera unit detection range.
or the right side of the traveling lane, a
. When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the warning chime will sound and the lane
windshield in front of the lane camera departure warning light (orange) on the
unit. instrument panel will blink to alert the
. When the headlights are not bright due driver. Then, the LDP system will automa-
to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not tically apply the brakes for a short period
adjusted properly. of time to help assist the driver to return

the vehicle to the center of the traveling
lane.
The warning and assist functions will stop
when the vehicle returns to a position
inside of the lane marker.
SSD0957 SSD0959
Dynamic driver assistance switch
The LDP system turns on when the dynamic
driver assistance switch on the steering
wheel is pushed when the “Lane Departure
Prevention” is enabled in the settings
menu on the center display. The LDP ON
indicator light (green) on the instrument
panel illuminates when the LDP system is
turned on.
SSD1102

How to enable/disable the LDP the following conditions:
system using the settings menu . When you operate the lane change
Perform the following steps to enable or signal and change the traveling lanes
disable the LDP system. in the direction of the signal. (The LDP
system will be deactivated for approxi-
mately 2 seconds after the lane change
signal is turned off.)
. When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).
2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set-
. When the Blind Spot InterventionTM
tings” key, and push the ENTER * 2
system activates an audible warning
button.
or brake control.
SSD1002 After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions are
3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Preven-
satisfied, the warning and assist functions
tion” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF
will resume.
(disabled) and push the ENTER * 2
button. Condition B:
For the Blind Spot InterventionTM and DCA The assist function of the LDP system is not
systems, see “Blind Spot Warning/Blind designed to work under the following
Spot InterventionTM/Back-up Collision In- conditions (warning is still functional):
tervention systems” later in this section . When the brake pedal is depressed.
and “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system” . When the steering wheel is turned as
later in this section. far as necessary for the vehicle to
change lanes.
Automatic deactivation
. When the accelerator pedal is de-
Condition A: pressed while the brake control assist
The warning and assist functions of the is provided.
LDP system are not designed to work under

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Temporary disabled status at high tem-
approach warning occurs. perature:
. When the hazard warning flashers are If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
operated. under high temperature conditions (over
. When driving on a curve at high speed. approximately 1048F (408C)) and then the
After the above conditions have finished LDP system is turned on, the LDP system
and the necessary operating conditions are may be deactivated automatically. The lane
satisfied, the LDP brake control assist departure warning light (orange) will blink.
function will resume. When the interior temperature is reduced,
Condition C: turn off the LDP system by pushing the
dynamic driver assistance switch. Push the
Under the following conditions, a beep will
dynamic driver assistance switch again to
sound and the LDP system will be canceled
turn the LDP system back on. SSD0453
automatically. The LDP ON indicator light
will blink in green, and the LDP system
cannot be activated: Lane camera unit maintenance
The lane camera unit * 1 for the LDW/LDP
. When the VDC system (except TCS
system is located inside the map light
function) or ABS operates.
cover. To keep the proper operation of the
. When the VDC system is turned off.
LDW/LDP systems and prevent a system
. When the SNOW mode switch is turned malfunction, be sure to observe the follow-
on. ing:
. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H
. Always keep the windshield clean.
or 4L position (for 4WD models).
. Do not attach a sticker (including
Action to take:
transparent material) or install an
When the above conditions no longer exist, accessory near the camera unit.
turn off the LDP system by pushing the . Do not place reflective materials, such
dynamic driver assistance switch. Push the as white paper or a mirror, on the
dynamic driver assistance switch again to instrument panel. The reflection of
turn the LDP system back on.
BLIND SPOT WARNING/BLIND SPOT
INTERVENTIONTM/BACK-UP COLLISION
INTERVENTION SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
This section contains the information
sunlight may adversely affect the cam-
about the following systems:
era unit’s capability of detecting the
lane markers. . Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system
. Do not strike or damage the areas . Blind Spot InterventionTM system
around the camera unit. Do not touch . Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)
the camera lens or remove the screw system (if so equipped)
located on the camera unit. If the
camera unit is damaged due to an BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) AND
accident, contact an INFINITI retailer. BLIND SPOT INTERVENTIONTM SYS-
TEMS
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind
Spot InterventionTM systems can help alert
the driver of other vehicles in adjacent JVS0098X
lanes when changing lanes.
The BSW system uses radar sensors * 1
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles beside your vehicle in an
adjacent lane. In addition to the radar
sensors, the Blind Spot Intervention sys-
tem uses a camera * 2 installed behind the
windshield to monitor the lane markers of
your traveling lane.

The Blind Spot Intervention TM system . Using the Blind Spot Intervention TM
operates above approximately 37 MPH system under some road, lane marker
(60 km/h). If the system detects a vehicle or weather conditions could lead to
in the detection zone and your vehicle is improper system operation. Always rely
approaching the lane marker, the Blind on your own steering and braking
Spot InterventionTM system provides an operation to avoid accidents.
audible warning (three times), flashes the
Blind spot warning indicator light and . The BSW and Blind Spot InterventionTM
slightly applies the brakes for a short systems may not provide a warning or
period of time on one side to help return brake control for vehicles that pass
the vehicle back to the traveling lane. The through the detection zone quickly.
Blind Spot InterventionTM system provides
an audible warning and turns on or flashes
SSD1030
the Blind spot warning indicator light even
Detection zone if the BSW system is off.
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the
detection zone shown as illustrated. This WARNING
detection zone starts from the outside
mirror of your vehicle and extends approxi- . The BSW and Blind Spot InterventionTM
mately 10 ft (3 m) behind the rear bumper, systems are not a replacement for proper
and approximately 10 ft (3 m) sideways. driving procedure and are not designed
The BSW system operates above approxi- to prevent contact with vehicles or
mately 20 MPH (32 km/h). If the radar objects. When changing lanes, always
sensors detect a vehicle in the detection use the side and rear mirrors and turn
zone, the the Blind spot warning indicator and look in the direction you will move
light illuminates. If the driver then acti- to ensure it is safe to change lanes.
vates the turn signal, a chime will sound Never rely solely on the BSW or Blind
twice and the Blind spot warning indicator Spot InterventionTM system.
light will flash.
The brightness of the Blind spot warning
indicator lights is adjusted automatically
depending on the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
A chime sounds if the radar sensors have
already detected vehicles when the driver
activates the turn signal. If a vehicle comes
into the detection zone after the driver
activates the turn signal, then only the
Blind spot warning indicator light flashes
and no chime sounds. (See “BSW/Blind
Spot Intervention TM driving situations”
SSD1086 later in this section.) SIC4335
Blind spot warning indicator light Warning systems switch
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION Turning on or off the BSW system
If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the The warning systems switch is used to turn
detection zone, the Blind spot warning on and off the BSW system when it is
indicator light located inside the outside activated using the settings menu on the
mirrors illuminates. If the turn signal is center display. See “How to enable/disable
then activated, the Blind spot warning the BSW system using the settings menu”
indicator light flashes and a chime sounds later in this section.
twice. The indicator light continues to flash When the warning systems switch is turned
until the detected vehicles leave the off, the indicator * 1 on the switch is off.
detection zone. The indicator will also be off if the BSW, the
The Blind spot warning indicator lights Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and the
illuminate for a few seconds when the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systems
ignition switch is pushed to the ON are deactivated.
position.

For the LDW and FCW systems, see “Lane How to enable/disable the BSW
Departure Warning (LDW)/Prevention (LDP) system using the settings menu
system ” earlier in this section and
“Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system”
disable the BSW system.
2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn-

ings” key, and push the ENTER * 2
button.
SSD0959
SSD1102

JVS0080X SSD1086 SSD1029
Blind spot warning indicator light Blind Spot InterventionTM ON indicator
3. Highlight the “Blind Spot Warning” key, light (green)
select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled)
and push the ENTER * 2 button.

usage. the indicator light when Blind Spot Inter-
ventionTM is activated even if the BSW
NOTE:
system is off.
. Warning and brake control will only be
activated if the Blind spot warning
indicator light is already illuminated
when your vehicle approaches a lane
marker. If another vehicle comes into
the detection zone after your vehicle
has crossed a lane marker, no warning
or brake control will be activated. (See
“BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM driv-
ing situations” later in this section.)
SSD0957 . The Blind Spot InterventionTM system is
Dynamic driver assistance switch typically activated earlier than the
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys-
BLIND SPOT INTERVENTIONTM SYS- tem when your vehicle is approaching
TEM OPERATION a lane marker.
If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the
detection zone, the Blind spot warning The Blind Spot InterventionTM system turns
indicator light located inside the outside on when the dynamic driver assistance
mirrors illuminates. If your vehicle is switch on the steering wheel is pushed
approaching a lane marker, the Blind spot when the “Blind Spot Intervention” is
warning indicator light flashes and an enabled in the settings menu on the center
audible warning will sound three times. display. The Blind Spot InterventionTM ON
Then the system applies the brakes on one indicator light (green) on the instrument
side of the vehicle for a short period of panel illuminates when the Blind Spot
time to help return the vehicle back to the InterventionTM system is turned on.
center of the lane. Blind Spot Interven- The Blind Spot Intervention TM system
tionTM operates regardless of turn signal provides an audible warning and flashes

How to enable/disable the Blind
Spot InterventionTM system using
the setting menu
disable the Blind Spot Intervention TM
system.

SSD0959 SSD1002
button.
3. Highlight the “Blind Spot Intervention”
key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis-
abled) and push the ENTER * 2 button.
For the LDP and DCA systems, see “Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier
in this section and “Distance Control Assist
(DCA) system” later in this section.
SSD1102

Precautions on BSW/Blind Spot — When the vehicle is equipped with same as your vehicle
InterventionTM system non-original brake parts or suspen- (See “BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM
sion parts. driving situations” later in this sec-
WARNING . Do not use the BSW or Blind Spot tion)
InterventionTM systems when towing a — A vehicle approaching rapidly from
. Do not use the Blind Spot InterventionTM trailer. behind.
system under the following conditions . Excessive noise (for example, audio (See “BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM
because the system may not function system volume, open vehicle window) driving situations” later in this sec-
properly. will interfere with the chime sound, and tion)
— During bad weather (for example, it may not be heard.
— A vehicle which your vehicle over-
rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.) . The radar sensors may not be able to
takes rapidly.
— When driving on slippery roads, detect and activate Blind Spot Interven-
tionTM/BSW when certain objects are (See “BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM
such as on ice or snow, etc.
present such as: driving situations” later in this sec-
— When driving on winding or uneven tion)
roads. — Pedestrians, bicycles, animals
. Severe weather or road spray conditions
— When there is a lane closure due to — Several types of vehicles such as
may reduce the ability of the radar to
road repairs. motorcycles
detect other vehicles.
— When driving in a makeshift lane. — Oncoming vehicles . The radar sensors detection zone is
— When driving on roads where the — Vehicles remaining in the detection designed based on a standard lane
zone when you accelerate from a width. When driving in a wider lane,
lane width is too narrow.
stop the radar sensors may not detect vehi-
— When driving with a tire that is not cles in an adjacent lane. When driving in
(See “BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM
within normal tire conditions (for a narrow lane, the radar sensors may
driving situations” later in this sec-
example, tire wear, low tire pressure, detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
tion)
installation of spare tire, tire chains, . The radar sensors are designed to ignore
non-standard wheels). — A vehicle merging into an adjacent
most stationary objects, however ob-
lane at a speed approximately the
jects such as guardrails, walls, foliage

and parked vehicles may occasionally be — When traveling close to the vehicle
detected. This is a normal operating in front of you, which obstructs the
condition. lane camera unit detection range.
. The camera may not detect lane markers — When rain, snow or dirt adheres to
in the following situations and the Blind the windshield in front of a lane
Spot InterventionTM system may not camera unit.
operate properly.
— When the headlights are not bright
— On roads where there are multiple due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is
parallel lane markers; lane markers not adjusted properly.
that are faded or not painted clearly;
yellow painted lane markers; non- — When strong light enters a lane
standard lane markers; lane markers camera unit. (For example, light
covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. directly shines on the front of the SSD1026
vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
— On roads where discontinued lane BSW/BLIND SPOT INTERVENTIONTM
markers are still detectable. — When a sudden change in bright-
ness occurs. (For example, when the DRIVING SITUATIONS
— On roads where there are sharp vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or
curves. Another vehicle approaching from
under a bridge.)
behind
— On roads where there are sharply
contrasting objects, such as sha- The Blind spot warning indicator light
dows, snow, water, wheel ruts, illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection
seams or lines remaining after road zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
repairs. However, if the overtaking vehicle is
traveling much faster than your vehicle,
— On roads where the traveling lane
the indicator light may not illuminate
merges or separates.
before the detected vehicle is beside your
— When the vehicle’s traveling direc- vehicle. Always use the side and rear
tion does not align with the lane mirrors and turn and look in the direction
markers. your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe
to change lanes.
SSD1031 SSD1044
TM
If the driver activates the turn signal, then If the Blind Spot Intervention system is
the Blind spot warning indicator light on and your vehicle is approaching a lane
flashes and a chime will sound twice. marker, the Blind spot warning indicator
light flashes and a chime will sound three
NOTE:
times. Then the Blind Spot InterventionTM
If the driver activates the turn signal system slightly applies the brakes on one
before a vehicle enters the detection zone, side to help return the vehicle back to the
the Blind spot warning indicator light will center of the driving lane.
flash but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

SSD1032 SSD1033 SSD1034
NOTE: Overtaking other vehicles If the driver activates the turn signal while
another vehicle is in the detection zone,
If you accelerate from a stop with a vehicle The Blind spot warning indicator light then the Blind spot warning indicator light
in the detection zone, the other vehicle illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and flashes and a chime will sound twice.
may not be detected. that vehicle stays in the detection zone for
approximately 3 seconds.
The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

SSD1093 SSD1036
TM
If the Blind Spot Intervention system is
on and your vehicle approaches a lane NOTE:
marker while another vehicle is in the When overtaking several vehicles in a row,
detection zone, the Blind spot warning the vehicles after the first vehicle may not
indicator light flashes and a chime will be detected if they are traveling close
sound three times. Then, the Blind Spot together.
InterventionTM system slightly applies the
brakes on one side to help return the
vehicle back to the center of the driving
lane.

SSD1037 SSD1038 SSD1094
TM
Entering from the side If the driver activates the turn signal, then If the Blind Spot Intervention system is
the Blind spot warning indicator light on and your vehicle approaches the lane
The Blind spot warning indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice. marker while another vehicle is in the
illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection detection zone, the Blind spot warning
zone from either side. NOTE:
indicator light flashes and a chime will
NOTE: If the driver activates the turn signal sound three times. Then, the Blind Spot
before a vehicle enters the detection zone, InterventionTM system slightly applies the
The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle the Blind spot warning indicator light will brakes on one side to help return the
which is traveling at about the same speed flash but no chime will sound when vehicle back to the center of the driving
as your vehicle when it enters the detec- another vehicle is detected. lane.
tion zone.

— When steering quickly . Under the following conditions, the
— When the ICC, DCA, FCW or IBA BSW and Blind Spot Intervention TM
warnings sound. systems will be turned off automati-
— When the hazard warning flashers cally, a beep will sound and the BSW/
are operated. Blind Spot InterventionTM system warn-
ing light (orange) will blink. The BSW
— When driving on a curve at a high
and Blind Spot InterventionTM systems
speed.
are not available until the conditions no
BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM longer exist.
temporarily not available — When the camera detects that the
. Under the following conditions, the interior temperature is high (over
Blind Spot InterventionTM system will approximately 1048F (408C)).
SSD1040 be turned off automatically, a beep will — When radar blockage is detected.
sound and the Blind Spot Interven- The radar sensors may be blocked by
NOTE: tionTM ON indicator light (green) will temporary ambient conditions such as
. The Blind Spot InterventionTM system blink. The BSW system is still available, splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked
will not operate if your vehicle is on a but the Blind Spot InterventionTM sys- condition may also be caused by objects
lane marker when another vehicle tem will not be available until the such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
enters the detection zone. In this case conditions no longer exist. radar sensors.
only the BSW system operates. — When the VDC system (except TCS Action to take:
. Blind Spot InterventionTM braking will function) or ABS operates. When the above conditions no longer exist,
not operate or will stop operating and — When the VDC system is turned off. the BSW system will resume automatically.
only a warning chime will sound under — When the drive mode select switch For the Blind Spot InterventionTM system,
the following conditions. is turned to the SNOW mode. turn it off and turn it on again. If the BSW/
— When the brake pedal is depressed. Action to take: Blind Spot InterventionTM warning light
— When the accelerator pedal is de- Turn off the Blind Spot Intervention TM (orange) continues to blink even after the
pressed while brake control assist system and turn it on again when the Blind Spot InterventionTM system is turned
is provided. above conditions no longer exist. on again, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and turn the engine off. Check for and

remove objects obscuring the radar sen- BACK-UP COLLISION INTERVENTION
sors on the rear bumper, and restart the (BCI) SYSTEM (if so equipped)
engine.
The Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI)
If the warning light (orange) continues to system can help alert the driver of
blink, have the BSW/Blind Spot Interven- approaching vehicles or rear objects when
tionTM systems checked by an INFINITI the driver is backing out of a parking
retailer. space.
BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
malfunction position and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the BCI
When the BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM
system operates.
systems malfunction, they will be turned
off automatically, a beep will sound and JVS0168X
the BSW/Blind Spot InterventionTM system
warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the
engine off and restart the engine.
If the warning light (orange) continues to
illuminate, have the BSW/Blind Spot Inter-
ventionTM systems checked by an INFINITI
retailer.
JVS0173X

and audible warnings, and applies the operation to avoid accidents.
brake for a moment when the vehicle is
moving backwards. After the automatic
brake application, the driver must depress
the brake pedal to maintain brake pres-
sure. If the driver’s foot is on the accel-
erator pedal, the system pushes the
accelerator upward before applying the
brake. If you continue to press the accel-
erator, the system will not engage the
brake.
JVS0169X WARNING
The BCI system uses radar sensors * 1
. The BCI system is not a replacement for
installed on both sides near the rear proper driving procedure and is not
bumper to detect an approaching vehicles designed to prevent contact with vehi-
and sonar sensors *2 to detect objects in
cles or objects. When backing out of
the rear. parking space, always use the inside
The radar sensors * 1 detect the approach- and outside rearview mirrors and turn
ing vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft and look in the direction you will move.
(15 m) away. The sonar sensors * 2 detect Never rely solely on the BCI system.
a rear obstacle at up to approximately 4.9 . There is a limitation to the detection
ft (1.5 m) from the bumper. Refer to the capability of the radar or the sonar.
illustration for approximate zone coverage Using the BCI system under some road,
areas * 3 .
ground, lane marker, traffic or weather
If the radar detects a vehicle approaching conditions could lead to improper sys-
from the side or the sonar detects close tem operation. Always rely on your own
objects in the rear, the system gives visual

The BCI system operates by detecting
vehicles and/or objects using either the
radar or sonar sensors.
An approaching vehicle from the side:
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from the side, the system chimes a sound
(single beep), the Blind spot warning
indicator light on the side the approaching
vehicle flashes and a yellow rectangular
frame * A appears on the center display.
JVS0197X SSD1086
BCI ON indicator Blind spot warning indicator light
BCI SYSTEM OPERATION (if so
equipped)
When the shift lever is placed in the R
(Reverse) position, the BCI ON indicator
appears in the vehicle information display.
JVS0171X
Vehicle center display

NOTE: A close object behind the vehicle:
. In the case of several vehicles ap- If the sonar detects a close object behind
proaching in a row or from the opposite the vehicle when your vehicle is backing
direction, a chime may not be output to up, the system chimes a sound (three
the BCI system after the first vehicle times) and a red rectangular frame * A
passes the sensors. appears on the center display. The system
. When the parking sensor of the Around applies the brake for a moment. After the
View Monitor sounds a tone, the BCI automatic brake application, the driver
system does not chime a sound (single must depress the brake pedal to maintain
beep). brake pressure.
If the detected vehicle approaches closer If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator
and your vehicle is backing up toward the pedal, the system pushes the accelerator
JVS0172X
detected vehicle, the system chimes a pedal upward before applying the brake. If
sound (three times) and a red rectangular you continue to press the accelerator
frame * A appears on the center display.
pedal, the system will not engage the
brake.
The system applies the brake for a
moment. After the automatic brake appli- NOTE:
cation, the driver must depress the brake
The BCI system does not operate if the
pedal to maintain brake pressure.
object is very close to the bumper.
If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator
pedal, the system pushes the accelerator
pedal upward before applying the brake. If
you continue to press the accelerator
pedal, the system will not engage the
brake.
JVS0173X

The BCI system is turned off temporarily by
pushing the BCI switch. The BCI OFF
indicator appears on the vehicle informa-
tion display.
When the shift lever is placed in the R
(Reverse) position again, the BCI system is
turned on.
The BCI system automatically turns on
every time the engine is started.
How to enable/disable the BCI
system using the settings menu
JVS0174X The BCI system can be turned off perma- SSD0959
BCI switch nently by setting on the center display.
SSD1102
JVS0182X
Example
BCI OFF indicator

disable the BCI system.
JVS0198X
2. Highlight the “Back-up Collision Inter-

vention” key, select ON (enabled) or
OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER * 2
button.

approaching vehicles in certain situa-
tions.
— When the vehicle parked aside
obstruct the beam of the radar
sensor.
— When the vehicle is parked in an
angled parking space.
— When the vehicle is parked on the
inclined ground.
— When the vehicle turns around into
your vehicle’s aisle.
— When the angle formed by your
vehicle and approaching vehicle is
small
. Severe weather or road spray conditions
may reduce the ability of the radar to
detect other vehicles.
. The sonar sensor may not detect:
JVS0170X — Small or moving objects
Precautions on BCI system — Wedge-shaped objects

— Pedestrians, bicycles or animals
— Object close to the bumper (less
— A vehicle that passing at speeds than approximately 1 ft (30 cm)) -
WARNING greater than approximately 15 MPH Thin objects such as rope, wire and
(24 km/h) chain, etc.
. When the radar sensors may not be able
to detect certain objects such as: . The radar sensors may not detect

. The brake engagement by the BCI when the above conditions no longer exist.
system is not as effective on a slope as
it is on flat ground. When on a steep
slope the system may not function
properly.
. Do not use the BCI systems under the
following conditions because the system
may not function properly.
— When driving with a tire that is not
within normal tire conditions (for
example, tire wear, low tire pressure,
installation of spare tire, tire chains,
non-standard wheels). JVS0183X
— When the vehicle is equipped with BCI temporarily not available

non-original brake parts or suspen-
sion parts. Under the following conditions, the BCI
system will be turned off automatically, a
— When towing a trailer. beep will sound and “BCI NOT AVAILABLE”
. Excessive noise (for example, audio warning will appear in the vehicle informa-
system volume, open vehicle window) tion display.
will interfere with the chime sound, and . When the accelerator pedal actuator
it may not be heard. detects that the internal motor tem-
perature is high (over approximately
(2128F) 1008C).
. When side radar blockage is detected.
The BCI system is not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
Turn off the BCI system and turn it on again

— Consult an INFINITI retailer if the
area around the radar sensors is
damaged due to a collision.
. The Blind Spot InterventionTM system
uses the same camera * 2 that is used
by the LDW/LDP system located in front
of the inside mirror.
For maintenance of the camera, see “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW)/Prevention (LDP)
system ” earlier in this section.
Radio frequency statement
This device complies with part 15 of the
JVS0184X JVS0098X
FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Canada.
BCI malfunction SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
When the BCI system malfunctions, it will . The two radar sensor units * 1 for the
be turned off automatically, a beep will BSW, Blind Spot InterventionTM and BCI 1. This device may not cause harmful
sound and “BCI MALFUNCTION” warning (if so equipped) systems are located interference.
will appear in the vehicle information near the rear bumper. 2. This device must accept any interfer-
display. — Always keep the area near the radar ence received, including interference
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the sensors clean. that may cause undesired operation.
engine off and restart the engine. If the — Do not attach stickers (including Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz —
warning message continues to appear, transparent material), install acces- 24.25GHz
have the system checked by an INFINITI sories or apply additional paint near Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m
retailer. the radar sensors. peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3
— Do not strike or damage the area m
around the radar sensors.
The manufacturer is not responsible for
any radio or TV interference caused by

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
unauthorized modifications to this equip- PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL . in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
ment. Such modifications could void the . If the cruise control system malfunc- speed
user’s authority to operate the equipment. tions, it will cancel automatically. The . on winding or hilly roads
CRUISE indicator light on the meter
panel will then blink to warn the driver. . on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
. If the engine coolant temperature be- . in very windy areas
comes excessively high, the cruise Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control system will be canceled auto- control and result in an accident.
matically.
. If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn
the cruise control main switch off and
have the system checked by your
INFINITI retailer.
. The CRUISE indicator light may some-
times blink when the cruise control
main switch is turned ON while pushing
the ACCELERATE/RESUME, COAST/SET
or CANCEL switch. To properly set the
cruise control system, perform the
steps below in the order indicated.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
. when it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed

COAST/SET switch and release it. Take your . If you move the shift lever to N (Neutral)
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle position, the cruise control will be
will maintain the set speed. canceled.
. To pass another vehicle, depress the To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
accelerator pedal. When you release of the following methods:
the pedal, the vehicle will return to the . Depress the accelerator pedal. When
previously set speed. the vehicle attains the desired speed,
. The vehicle may not maintain the set push and release the COAST/SET
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this switch.
happens, drive without the cruise con- . Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-
trol. SUME switch. When the vehicle attains
To cancel the preset speed, follow any of the speed you desire, release the
JVS0090X these methods: switch.
1. Push the CANCEL switch. . Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-
1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch
ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you
2. COAST/SET switch 2. Tap the brake pedal.
do this, the set speed will increase by
3. CANCEL switch 3. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
4. Cruise control MAIN switch position.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
4. Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE one of the following methods:
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
indicator light will turn off.
The cruise control allows driving at a speed . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) . If you depress the brake pedal while vehicle attains the desired speed, push
without keeping your foot on the accel- pushing the ACCELERATE/RESUME or the COAST/SET switch and release it.
erator pedal. COAST/SET switch and reset at the . Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
cruising speed, the cruise control will Release the switch when the vehicle
To turn on the cruise control, push the disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off
MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator will slows down to the desired speed.
once and then turn it on again.
come on. . Push, then quickly release the COAST/
. The cruise control will automatically SET switch. Each time you do this, the
To set cruising speed, accelerate your cancel if the vehicle slows more than set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH
vehicle to the desired speed, push the 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed.
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
(1.6 km/h). . In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
automatically maintains a selected dis-
To resume the preset speed, push and control mode, a warning chime will not
tance from the vehicle traveling in front of
release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch. sound to warn you if you are too close to
you according to that vehicle’s speed (up
The vehicle will resume the last set the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention
to the set speed), or at the set speed when
cruising speed when the vehicle speed is to the distance between your vehicle and
the road ahead is clear.
over 25 MPH (40 km/h). the vehicle ahead of you or a collision
The ICC function can be set to one of two
could occur.
cruise control modes:
. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode:
For maintaining a selected distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you up to the preset speed.
. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode:
For cruising at a preset speed.
WARNING
. Always drive carefully and attentively
when using either cruise control mode.
Read and understand the Owner’s Man-
ual thoroughly before using the ICC
system. To avoid serious injury or death,
do not rely on the system to prevent
accidents or to control the vehicle’s
speed in emergency situations. Do not
use the ICC system except in appropriate
road and traffic conditions.
trol mode, see “Conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode” later in this section.
SELECTING VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE
DISTANCE CONTROL MODE
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode *1 , quickly push and release
the MAIN switch * A .
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
SSD1051 system automatically maintains a selected
distance from the vehicle traveling in front
1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control *A for longer than approximately 1.5
of you according to that vehicle’s speed
mode seconds.
(up to the set speed), or at the set speed
2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- Once a control mode is activated, it cannot when the road ahead is clear.
trol mode be changed to the other cruise control
With ICC, the driver can maintain the same
Push the MAIN switch * A to choose the mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN
speed as other vehicles without the con-
cruise control mode between the vehicle- switch once to turn the system off. Then
stant need to adjust the set speed as you
to-vehicle distance control mode * 1 and push the MAIN switch again to turn the
would with a normal cruise control system.
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- system back on and select the desired
trol mode * 2 . cruise control mode.
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Always confirm the setting in the ICC
control mode * 1 , quickly push and release system display.
the MAIN switch * A . To choose the For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see the following description. For
mode * 2 , push and hold the MAIN switch the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

sary. . Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
The detection range of the sensor is . Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead. lane
WARNING WARNING
. This system is only an aid to assist the . As there is a performance limit to the
driver and is not a collision warning or distance control function, never rely
avoidance device. It is the driver’s solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely (ICC) system. This system does not
and be in control of the vehicle at all correct careless, inattentive or absent-
times. minded driving, or overcome poor visi-
JVS0227X bility in rain, fog, or other bad weather.
. The system is primarily intended for use
Decelerate the vehicle speed by depres-
on straight, dry, open roads with light
PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE-TO-VE- sing the brake pedal, depending on the
traffic. It is not advisable to use the
HICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE system in city traffic or congested areas.
distance to the vehicle ahead and the
The system is intended to enhance the surrounding circumstances in order to
. This system will not adapt automatically maintain a safe distance between vehi-
operation of the vehicle when following a
to road conditions. This system should cles.
vehicle traveling in the same lane and
be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not
direction. . If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
use the system on roads with sharp
If the distance sensor *
A detects a slower curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
moving vehicle ahead, the system will the limitations of the system. The
in fog.
reduce the vehicle speed so that your system will cancel once it judges that
vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the the vehicle has come to a standstill and
The distance sensor will not detect the
selected distance. sound a warning chime. To prevent the
following objects:
vehicle from moving, the driver must
The system automatically controls the . Stationary and slow moving vehicles depress the brake pedal.
throttle and applies the brakes (up to . Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
25% of vehicle braking power) if neces- . The system may not function properly

under the following conditions. To avoid — When traffic conditions make it
accidents, never use the ICC system difficult to keep a proper distance
under the following conditions: between vehicles because of fre-
— On roads where the traffic is heavy quent acceleration or deceleration
or there are sharp curves — When towing a trailer or other
— On slippery road surfaces such as vehicle
on ice or snow, etc. . In some road or traffic conditions, a
— On off-road surfaces such as on vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
sand or rock, etc. into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. You may need to
— During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, control the distance from other vehicles
etc.) using the accelerator pedal. Always stay
JVS0227X
— When the windshield wipers are alert and avoid using the ICC system
operating at high speed. The system when it is not recommended in this
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
may cancel when the wipers are set section.
to the AUTO position.
CONTROL MODE OPERATION
Always pay attention to the operation of
— When strong light (for example, at the vehicle and be ready to manually
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining control the proper following distance. The
on the front of the vehicle vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
the system sensor may not be able to maintain the selected
distance between vehicles (following dis-
— On steep downhill roads (the vehi-
tance) or selected vehicle speed under
cle may go beyond the set vehicle
some circumstances.
speed and frequent braking may
result in overheating the brakes) The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode uses a sensor * A located on the
— On repeated uphill and downhill front of the vehicle to detect vehicles
roads

traveling ahead. The sensor generally cally check the sensor’s operation within cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly en-
detects the signals returned from the the limitation of the system. When the ough. If this occurs, the ICC system will
reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if sensor is covered with dirt or obstructs, the sound a warning chime and blink the
the sensor cannot detect the reflector on system will automatically be canceled. If system display to notify the driver to take
the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not the sensor is covered with ice, a transpar- necessary action.
maintain the selected distance. ent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC The system will cancel and a warning
The following are some conditions in which system may not detect them. In these chime will sound if the speed falls below
the sensor cannot detect the signals: instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a
control mode may not cancel and may not vehicle is not detected ahead. The system
. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead
be able to maintain the selected following will also disengage when the vehicle goes
is positioned high on the vehicle
distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to above the maximum set speed.
(trailer, etc.)
check and clean the sensor regularly.
. When the reflector on the vehicle ahead See “Approach warning” later in this
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control section.
is missing, damaged or covered
mode is designed to maintain a selected
. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead The following items are controlled in the
distance and reduce the speed to match
is covered with dirt, snow and road vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
the slower vehicle ahead; the system will
spray . When there are no vehicles traveling
decelerate the vehicle as necessary, and if
. When the snow or road spray from the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s vehicle decelerates to a standstill. How- control mode maintains the speed set
visibility ever, the ICC system can only apply up to by the driver. The set speed range is
. When dense exhaust or other smoke 25% of the vehicles total braking power. between approximately 20 and 90 MPH
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces This system should only be used when (32 and 144 km/h).
the sensor’s visibility traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to . When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
. When excessively heavy baggage is remain fairly constant or when vehicle the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
loaded in the rear seat or the luggage speeds change gradually. If a vehicle mode adjusts the speed to maintain the
area of your vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if distance, selected by driver, from the
. When your vehicle is towing a trailer, a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decele- vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed
etc. rates, the distance between vehicles may range is up to the set speed. If the
The ICC system is designed to automati- become closer because the ICC system vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill with-
in the limitations of the system. The
system will cancel once it judges that
the vehicle has come to a standstill
with a warning chime.
. When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode accelerates and maintains vehi-
cle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
SSD0252
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or The detection zone of the ICC sensor is and sounding the chime. The driver may
traffic congestion. limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the have to manually control the proper
detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance away from vehicle traveling
distance detection mode to maintain the ahead.
selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may
warn you by blinking the system indicator

SSD0253 SSD0254
When driving on some roads, such as control the proper distance away from the When driving on the freeway at a set speed
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or vehicle traveling ahead. and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
roads which are under construction, the ahead, the ICC system will adjust the
ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a speed to maintain the distance, selected
different lane, or may temporarily not by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the
detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the
cause the ICC system to decelerate or freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and
accelerate the vehicle. maintain the speed up to the set speed.
Pay attention to the driving operation to
The detection of vehicles may also be maintain control of the vehicle as it
affected by vehicle operation (steering accelerates to the set speed.
maneuver or traveling position in the lane,
etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
ICC system may warn you by blinking the on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs,
system indicator and sounding the chime you will have to manually control the
unexpectedly. You will have to manually vehicle speed.

the set speed.
4. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following dis-
tance:
. Long
. Middle
. Short
5. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system
SSD0964 SSD1104
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys- Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-
tem switch tem display and indicators
The system is operated by a MAIN switch The display is located between the speed-
and four control switches, all mounted on ometer and tachometer.
the steering wheel. 1. MAIN switch indicator:
1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch: Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
Resumes set speed or increases speed 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
incrementally.
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
2. COAST/SET switch: front of you.
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces 3. Set distance indicator:
speed incrementally.
Displays the selected distance between
3. CANCEL switch: vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.
Deactivates the system without erasing

4. Indicates your vehicle
5. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is
displayed in km/h.
6. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
warning light (orange):
The light comes on if there is a
malfunction in the ICC system.
SSD0979 SSD1052
When the ignition switch is pushed to the Operating vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

ON position, the indicators come on as
illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb,
tance control mode
and it turns off when the engine is started. To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
and release the MAIN switch * A on. The
MAIN switch indicator, set distance indica-
tor and set vehicle speed indicator come
on and in a standby state for setting.

. When the brakes are operated by the
driver
. When the parking brake is applied
SSD1053 SSD1105
To set cruising speed, accelerate your When the COAST/SET switch is pushed
vehicle to the desired speed, push the under the following conditions, the system
COAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicle cannot be set and the set vehicle speed
ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator will blink for approximately 2
indicator and set vehicle speed indicator seconds:
come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator . When traveling below 20 MPH (32
pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not
speed. detected
. When the shift lever is not in the D or
Manual mode
. When the windshield wipers are operat-
ing at high speed. The system may
cancel when the wipers are set to the
AUTO position.

or 4L position. (To use the ICC system,
place the 4WD shift switch in the AUTO
position, push the MAIN switch to turn
off the ICC system and reset the ICC
switch by pushing the MAIN switch
again (for 4WD models).
For details about the 4WD shift switch,
see “INFINITI all-mode 4WD®” earlier in
this section.
. When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
SSD1106 Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC
system and reset the ICC switch by
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed pushing the MAIN switch again.)
under the following conditions, the system For details about the VDC system, see
cannot be set. “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-
A warning chime will sound and the set tem” later in this section.
vehicle speed indicator will blink. . When ABS or VDC (including the trac-
. When the SNOW mode is pushed tion control system) is operating
(SNOW mode switch) (To use the ICC . When driving into a strong light (for
system, turn off the SNOW mode example, sunlight)
switch, push the MAIN switch to turn . When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
off the ICC and reset the ICC switch by system, make sure the wheels are no
pushing the MAIN switch again.) longer slipping. Push the MAIN switch
For details about the SNOW mode to turn off the ICC, and reset the ICC
switch, see “SNOW mode” later in this system by pushing the MAIN switch
section. again.)

Vehicle detected ahead:
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the
vehicle by controlling the throttle and
applying the brakes to match the speed
of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the
driver selected distance.
The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
SSD1107 When the brake operates, a noise may be
heard and/or vibration may be felt. This is
1. System set display with vehicle ahead not a malfunction.
brake pedal when deceleration is required to
2. System set display without vehicle maintain a safe distance to the vehicle When a vehicle ahead is detected, the
ahead ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle ahead detection indicator comes
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when on. The ICC system will also display the set
System operation speed and selected distance.
using the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system. Vehicle ahead not detected:
WARNING When a vehicle is no longer detected
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-
Normally when controlling the distance to a based on the road conditions. The ICC ates your vehicle to resume the previously
vehicle ahead, this system automatically system maintains the set vehicle speed, set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle similar to standard cruise control, as long maintains the set speed.
according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accel- When a vehicle is no longer detected the
The ICC system displays the set speed. vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
erate your vehicle when acceleration is
required for a lane change. Depress the
If a vehicle ahead appears during accel- . Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
eration to the set vehicle speed or any time speed indicator will go out.
the ICC system is in operation, the system . Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
controls the distance to that vehicle. speed indicator will go out.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under . Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN
approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the switch indicator and set vehicle speed
system will be cancelled. indicator will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
. Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
SSD1108 switch.
. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-
When passing another vehicle, the set
SUME switch. The set vehicle speed
vehicle speed indicator will flash when the
will increase by approximately 5 MPH
vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The
or 5 km/h.
vehicle detect indicator will turn off when
the area ahead of the vehicle is open. . Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you
return to the previously set speed. do this, the set speed will increase by
approximately 1 MPH or 1 km/h.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
the ICC system, you can depress the
one of the following methods:
accelerator pedal when it is necessary to
accelerate your vehicle rapidly. . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
How to change set vehicle speed the COAST/SET switch and release it.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of . Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
these methods: The set vehicle speed will decrease by

approximately 5 MPH or 5 km/h.
. Push, then quickly release the COAST/
SET switch. Each time you do this, the
set speed will decrease by approxi-
mately 1 MPH or 1 km/h.
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set
cruising speed when the vehicle speed is
over 20 MPH (32 km/h).
SSD0967
How to change set distance to

vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the
traffic conditions.
Each time the DISTANCE switch * A is
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again
in that sequence.

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that
vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the
system warns the driver with the chime
and Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
display. Decelerate by depressing the
brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle
distance if:
. The chime sounds.
. The vehicle ahead detection and set
distance indicator blink.
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
. When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing
. When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehi-
SSD1109 cles is increasing
. The distance to the vehicle ahead will becomes “long”.) . When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
change according to the vehicle speed. The warning chime will not sound in the
The higher the vehicle speed, the following cases:
longer the distance. . When your vehicle approaches vehicles
. If the engine is stopped, the set that are parked or moving slowly
distance becomes “long”. (Each time . When the accelerator pedal is de-
the engine is started, the initial setting pressed, overriding the system
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected . When driving into a strong light (for
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or example, sunlight)
driving position in the lane) or traffic or . When distance measurement becomes
vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle impaired due to adhesion of dirt or
is being driven with some damage). obstruction to the sensor
Automatic cancellation . When a wheel slips
A chime sounds under the following con-
ditions and the control is automatically
canceled.
. When the vehicle speed falls below
approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h)
SSD0284A . When the system judges the vehicle is
at a standstill
NOTE: . When the shift lever is shifted to the N
The approach warning chime may sound (Neutral) position
and the system display may blink when . When the windshield wipers are operat-
the ICC sensor detects some reflectors * A ing at high speed. The system may
which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes cancel when the wipers are set to the
or on the side of the road. This may cause AUTO position.
the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate . When the VDC is turned off
the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect . When the ABS or VDC operates
these reflectors when the vehicle is driven . When the parking brake is applied
on winding roads, hilly roads or when . When the SNOW mode switch is pushed
entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor on.
may also detect reflectors on narrow roads
or in road construction zones. In these
or 4L position (for 4WD models)
cases you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the ICC MAIN switch. Turn the ICC system
back on to use the system.
SSD1110 SSD0989
Warning light and display Condition B:

Condition A: When the sensor window is dirty, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
The chime sounds and the Intelligent ICC system is automatically canceled.
Cruise Control (ICC) system is canceled
automatically in the conditions described The chime sounds and the ICC system
below. Part of the system display will come warning light (orange) will come on and the
on or blink, making it impossible to set. CLEAN SENSOR indicator will appear.
. When the VDC is turned off Action to take:
. When the ABS or VDC operates If the warning light comes on, park the
. When a tire slips vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off.
. When driving into a strong light (for Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth
example, sunlight) and then perform the settings again.
. When the SNOW mode switch is pushed
on
INFINITI retailer.
SSD0979 JVS0227X
Condition C: Sensor maintenance

When the ICC system is not operating The sensor for the Intelligent Cruise Control
properly, the chime sounds and the system (ICC) system *A is located below the front
warning light (orange) will come on. bumper.
Action to take: To keep the ICC system operating properly,
If the warning light comes on, park the be sure to observe the following:
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, . Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe
restart the engine, resume driving and set with a soft cloth carefully so as not to
the ICC system again. damage the sensor.
If it is not possible to set the system or the . Do not strike or damage the areas
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the around the sensor. Do not touch or
ICC system is malfunctioning. Although remove the screw located on the
the vehicle is still driveable under normal sensor. Doing so could cause failure
conditions, have the vehicle checked at an or malfunction. If the sensor is da-

maged due to an accident, contact an . Do not use the conventional (fixed
INFINITI retailer. speed) cruise control mode when driving
. Do not attach a sticker (including under the following conditions.
— when it is not possible to keep the
accessory near the sensor. This could
vehicle at a set speed
cause failure or malfunction.
— in heavy traffic or in traffic that
CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) varies in speed
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
— on winding or hilly roads
This mode allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) — on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
without keeping your foot on the accel- etc.)
erator pedal. — in very windy areas SSD0968
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
WARNING control and result in an accident. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switch
. In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise 1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:
control mode, a warning chime does not
Resumes set speed or increases speed
sound to warn you if you are too close to
incrementally.
the vehicle ahead, as neither the pre-
sence of the vehicle ahead nor the 2. COAST/SET switch:
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces
. Pay special attention to the distance speed incrementally.
between your vehicle and the vehicle 3. CANCEL switch:
ahead of you or a collision could occur. Deactivates the system without erasing
. Always confirm the setting in the In- the set speed.
telligent Cruise Control (ICC) system 4. MAIN switch:
display.
Master switch to activate the system.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system.
3. Cruise system warning light:
Comes on if there is a malfunction in
the cruise control system.
SSD1013 SSD0969
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Operating conventional (fixed

control mode display and indica- speed) cruise control mode
tors To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
The display is on the dot matrix liquid cruise control mode, push and hold the
crystal display (in the vehicle information MAIN switch * A for longer than about 1.5
display) located between the speedometer seconds.
and tachometer. When pushing the MAIN switch on, the
1. MAIN switch indicator: Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system dis-
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. play and the main switch indicator are
displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal
2. Cruise set switch indicator: display. After you hold the MAIN switch on
Displays while the vehicle speed is for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC
controlled by the conventional (fixed system display turns off. The main switch
speed) cruise control mode of the indicator stays lit. You can now set your

desired cruising speed. Pushing the MAIN following methods:
switch again will turn the system comple- 1. Push the CANCEL button. The SET
tely off. indicator will turn off.
When the Distance Control Assist (DCA) 2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
system is on, the conventional (fixed will turn off.
speed) cruise control mode cannot be
3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN
turned on even though the MAIN switch is
switch and SET indicator will turn off.
pushed and held.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
of the following three methods:
cruise control mode, turn off the DCA
system. See “Distance Control Assist 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When
(DCA) system” later in this section. the vehicle attains the desired speed,
SSD0970 push and release the COAST/SET
switch.
OFF position, the system is also automati-
To set cruising speed, accelerate your 2. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-
cally turned off. To use the ICC system
vehicle to the desired speed, push the SUME set switch. When the vehicle
again, quickly push and release the MAIN
COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET attains the desired speed, release the
switch (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
indicator will come on in the display.) Take switch.
mode) or push and hold it (conventional
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
cruise control mode) again to turn it on. 3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-
vehicle will maintain the set speed.
ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you
. To pass another vehicle, depress the do this, the set speed will increase by
CAUTION accelerator pedal. When you release about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
the pedal, the vehicle will return to the
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con- previously set speed. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
trol, make sure to turn the MAIN switch off . The vehicle may not maintain the set
when not using the ICC system. speed when going up or down steep 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
hills. If this happens, manually main- vehicle attains the desired speed, push
tain vehicle speed. the COAST/SET switch and release it.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. retailer.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed. PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent
3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/
Cruise Control (ICC) system
SET switch. Each time you do this, the equipped model)
set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
(1.6 km/h). with the preview function identifies the
To resume the preset speed, push and need to apply emergency braking by
release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch. sensing the vehicle ahead in the same
The vehicle will resume the last set lane and the distance to the vehicle ahead
cruising speed when the vehicle speed is and relative speed from it, it applies the
over 25 MPH (40 km/h). brake pre-pressure before the driver de-
presses the brake pedal and helps improve
SSD0979
Automatic cancellation brake response by reducing pedal free
A chime sounds under the following con- play.
Warning light
ditions and the control is automatically For more details, see “Brake assist” later in
When the system is not operating properly,
canceled. this section.
the chime sounds and the system warning
. When the vehicle slows down more light (orange) will come on.
than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set
Action to take:
speed
. When the shift lever is shifted to the N If the warning light comes on, park the
(Neutral) position vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine, resume driving and then
. When the parking brake is applied
perform the setting again.
. When the VDC (including the traction
control system) operates. If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system is
. When a wheel slips
malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system
brakes and moves the accelerator pedal . The DCA system will not apply brake
upward according to the distance from and control while the driver’s foot is on the
the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to accelerator pedal.
help assist the driver to maintain a
following distance.
WARNING
. Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the Distance Control Assist
system. Read and understand the Own-
er’s Manual thoroughly before using the JVS0227X
DCA system. To avoid serious injury or
death, do not rely on the system to
PRECAUTIONS ON DISTANCE CON-
prevent accidents or to control the
vehicle’s speed in emergency situations.
TROL ASSIST SYSTEM
Do not use the Distance Control Assist The system is intended to assist the driver
system except in appropriate road and to keep a following distance from the
traffic conditions. vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane
and direction.
. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within If the distance sensor *A detects a slower
the limitations of the system. The moving vehicle ahead, the system will
system will cancel once it judges that reduce the vehicle speed to help assist
the vehicle has come to a standstill with the driver to maintain a following distance.
a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle The system automatically controls the
from moving, the driver must depress throttle and applies the brakes (up to
the brake pedal. 25% of vehicle braking power) if neces-
sary.

The detection range of the sensor is — When strong light (for example, at
approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead. WARNING sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle
. As there is a performance limit to the
WARNING distance control function, never rely — When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
solely on the Distance Control Assist the system sensor
. This system is only an aid to assist the
system. This system does not correct — On steep downhill roads (frequent
driver and is not a collision warning or
careless, inattentive or absent-minded braking may result in overheating
avoidance device. It is the driver’s
driving, or overcome poor visibility in the brakes)
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decele-
and be in control of the vehicle at all — On repeated uphill and downhill
rate the vehicle speed by depressing the
times. roads
brake pedal, depending on the distance
. This system will not adapt automatically to the vehicle ahead and the surround- — When towing a trailer or other
to road conditions. Do not use the ing circumstances in order to maintain a vehicle
system on roads with sharp curves, or safe distance between vehicles. . In some road or traffic conditions, a
on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
. The system may not function properly vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
under the following conditions. To avoid into the sensor detection zone and cause
The distance sensor will not detect the accidents, never use the Distance Con- automatic braking. You may need to
following objects:
trol Assist system under the following control the distance from other vehicles
. Stationary and slow moving vehicles conditions: using the accelerator pedal. Always stay
. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway — On roads with sharp curves alert and avoid using the DCA system
. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane when it is not recommended in this
— On slippery road surfaces such as section.
. Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
on ice or snow, etc.
lane
— On off-road surfaces such as on
sand or rock, etc.
— During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)

the vehicle ahead, the DCA system may not In these instances, the Distance Control
operate. Assist (DCA) system may not be able to
The following are some conditions in which decelerate the vehicle properly. Be sure to
the sensor cannot detect the signals: check and clean the sensor regularly.
. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead The DCA system is designed to help assist
is positioned high on the vehicle the driver to maintain a following distance
(trailer, etc.) from the vehicle ahead. The system will
decelerate as necessary and if the vehicle
. When the reflector on the vehicle ahead
ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
is missing, damaged or covered
decelerates to a standstill. However, the
. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead
DCA system can only apply up to 25% of
is covered with dirt, snow and road
the vehicles total braking power. If a
spray
JVS0227X
vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead
. When the snow or road spray from or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly
traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s decelerates, the distance between vehicles
DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST OP- visibility may become closer because the DCA
ERATION . When dense exhaust or other smoke system cannot decelerate the vehicle
Always pay attention to the operation of (black smoke) from vehicles reduces quickly enough. If this occurs, the DCA
the vehicle and be ready to manually the sensor’s visibility system will sound a warning chime and
decelerate to maintain the proper following . When excessively heavy baggage is blink the system display to notify the driver
distance. The Distance Control Assist (DCA) loaded in the rear seat or the luggage to take necessary action.
system may not be able to decelerate the room of your vehicle See “Approach warning” later in this
vehicle under some circumstances. The DCA system is designed to automati- section.
The DCA system uses a sensor * A located cally check the sensor’s operation. When
This system only brakes and moves the
on the front of the vehicle to detect the sensor is covered with dirt or is
accelerator pedal upward to help assist the
vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor gen- obstructed, the system will automatically
driver to maintain a following distance
erally detects the signals returned from the be canceled. If the sensor is covered with
from the vehicle ahead. Acceleration
reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,
should be operated by the driver.
the sensor cannot detect the reflector on etc., the DCA system may not detect them.

The DCA system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead.
SSD0252
The detection zone of the sensor is limited. away from vehicle traveling ahead.
A vehicle ahead must be in the detection
zone for the system to operate.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane. If this occurs, the system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may have
to manually control the proper distance

SSD0253 SSD0994
When driving on some roads, such as vehicle traveling ahead. Distance Control Assist system
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or display and indicators
roads which are under construction, the The display is located between the speed-
sensor may detect vehicles in a different ometer and tachometer.
lane, or may temporarily not detect a
vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause 1. Distance Control Assist (DCA) system
the system to work inappropriately. switch indicator:
The detection of vehicles may also be Indicates that the dynamic driver assis-
affected by vehicle operation (steering tance switch is ON.
maneuver or traveling position in the lane, 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
system may warn you by blinking the front of you.
system indicator and sounding the chime
3. Distance Control Assist system warning
unexpectedly. You will have to manually
light (orange):
control the proper distance away from the

The light comes on if there is a
malfunction in the DCA system. WARNING
When the DCA system is not necessary, be
sure to turn off the dynamic driver assis-
tance switch. Using the system when it is
not necessary may result in an accident.
SSD1049
Operating Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system
The DCA system turns on when the
dynamic driver assistance switch on the
steering wheel is pushed when “Distance
Control Assist” is enabled in the settings
menu in the center display. The DCA
system switch indicator on the dot matrix
liquid crystal display will illuminate.
The system will start to operate after the
vehicle speed becomes above approxi-
mately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

How to enable/disable the DCA system
using the settings menu:
disable the DCA system.
display using the multi-function con-
troller. Then push the ENTER * 2 button.

button.
SSD0959 SSD1002
3. Highlight the “Distance Control Assist”

key, select ON or OFF and push the
ENTER * 2 button.
For the LDP and BSI systems, see “Lane

system ” earlier in this section and “Blind
Spot Warning/Blind Spot InterventionTM/
Back-up Collision Intervention systems”
SSD1102

switch in the AUTO position, then turn is automatically turned off.
on the dynamic driver assistance
switch)
For details about the 4WD shift switch,
see “INFINITI all-mode 4WD®” earlier in
this section.
. When the VDC system is off (To use the
DCA system, turn on the VDC, then
push the dynamic driver assistance
switch.)
For details about the VDC system, see
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-
SSD0996 tem” later in this section.
. When ABS or VDC (including the trac-
Under the following conditions, the Dis- tion control system) is operating
tance Control Assist system will not oper- . When driving into a strong light (for
ate and the Distance Control Assist (DCA) example, sunlight)
system switch indicator will blink:
When the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
. When the SNOW mode is pushed control mode is operating, the DCA system
(SNOW mode switch) (To use the DCA will not operate. (To use the DCA system,
system, turn off the SNOW mode turn the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
switch, then turn on the dynamic driver control mode off, then push the dynamic
assistance switch.) driver assistance switch.)
For details about the SNOW mode
For details about the Conventional (fixed
switch, see “SNOW mode” later in this
speed) cruise control mode, see “Intelli-
section.
gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in
. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H this section.
or 4L position (for 4WD models) (To use
When the engine is turned off, the system
the DCA system, place the 4WD shift

When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead:
. If the driver’s foot is not on the
accelerator pedal, the system activates
the brakes to decelerate smoothly as
necessary. If the vehicle ahead comes
to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a
standstill within the limitations of the
system.
. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator
pedal, the system moves the accelera-
tor pedal upward to assist the driver to
release the accelerator pedal.
SSD0997 When brake operation by driver is re-
quired:
1. System set display with vehicle ahead
vehicle suddenly appears in front of you. The system alerts the driver by a warning
2. System set display without vehicle chime and blinking the vehicle ahead
ahead Always stay alert when using the DCA
system. detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is
System operation on the accelerator pedal after the warning,
the system moves the accelerator pedal
The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system
upward to assist the driver to switch to the
helps assist the driver to keep a following
WARNING distance to the vehicle ahead by braking
brake pedal.
and moving the accelerator pedal upward The stoplights of the vehicle come on
The Distance Control Assist system auto- when braking is performed by the DCA
in the normal driving condition.
matically decelerates your vehicle to help system.
assist the driver to maintain a following When a vehicle is detected ahead:
distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually When the brake operates, a noise may be
The vehicle ahead detection indicator
brake when deceleration is required to heard and/or vibration may be felt. This is
comes on.
maintain a safe distance upon sudden not a malfunction.
braking by the vehicle ahead or when a

accelerator pedal is canceled. . When the vehicle ahead is traveling
WARNING . When the driver’s foot is on the accel- faster and the distance between vehi-
erator pedal, the brake control by the cles is increasing
. When the vehicle ahead detection in- system is not operated. . When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
dicator is not illuminated, system will . When the driver’s foot is on the brake The warning chime will not sound when
not control or warn the driver. pedal, neither the brake control nor the your vehicle approaches vehicles that are
. Depending on the position of the accel- alert by the system operates. parked or moving slowly.
erator pedal, the system may not be able . When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
to assist the driver to release the system is set, the DCA system will be
accelerator pedal appropriately. cancelled.
. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stand- Approach warning
still, the vehicle decelerates to a stand-
still within the limitations of the system. If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
The system will release brake control ahead due to rapid deceleration of that
with a warning chime once it judges the vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the
vehicle is at a standstill. To prevent the system warns the driver with the chime
vehicle from moving, the driver must and DCA system display. Decelerate by
depress the brake pedal. (The system depressing the brake pedal to maintain a
will resume control automatically once safe vehicle distance if:
the system reaches 3 MPH (5 km/h). . The chime sounds.
. The vehicle ahead detection indicator
Overriding the system: blinks.
The following driver’s operation overrides The warning chime may not sound in some
the system operation. cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
. When the driver depresses the accel-
erator pedal even further while the . When the vehicles are traveling at the
system is moving the accelerator pedal same speed and the distance between
upward, the DCA system control of the vehicles is not changing

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or
vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle
is being driven with some damage).
SSD0284A SSD0996
NOTE: Automatic cancellation

The approach warning chime may sound Condition A:
and the system display may blink when Under the following conditions, the Dis-
the sensor detects some reflectors * A
tance Control Assist system is automati-
which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes
cally canceled. The chime will sound and
or on the side of the road. This may cause the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system
the DCA system to operate inappropriately. switch indicator will blink. The system will
The sensor may detect these reflectors not be able to be set.
when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, hilly roads or when entering or . When the VDC system is turned off
exiting a curve. The sensor may also detect . When the VDC or ABS (including the
reflectors on narrow roads or in road traction control system) operates
construction zones. In these cases you . When the SNOW mode switch is turned
will have to manually control the proper on.
distance ahead of your vehicle.

. When driving into a strong light (for
example, sunlight)
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off with the
dynamic driver assistance switch. Turn the
DCA system back on to use the system.
SSD0998 SSD0999
Condition B: Condition C:
When the sensor window is dirty, making it When the DCA system is not operating
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the properly, the chime sounds and the system
DCA system is automatically canceled. warning light (“CRUISE” orange) will come
The chime sounds and the system warning on.
light (orange) will come on and the “CLEAN Action to take:
SENSOR” indicator will appear. If the warning light comes on, park the
Action to take: vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
If the warning light comes on, park the restart the engine, and turn on the DCA
vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off. system again.
Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth If it is not possible to set the system or the
and then perform the settings again. indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the
vehicle is still driveable under normal

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys-
conditions, have the vehicle checked at an
tem will warn the driver by a warning light
INFINITI retailer.
and chime when your vehicle is getting
Sensor maintenance close to the vehicle ahead in the traveling
lane.
How to handle the sensor:
The sensor for the DCA system is common The FCW system will function when your
with Intelligent Cruise Control and is vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-
located below the front bumper. mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above.
To handle the sensor, see “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in this
section.
JVS0227X
SSD0749
Vehicle ahead detection indicator

The FCW system uses the distance sensor — When the sensor gets dirty and it is — When snow or road spray from
*A located below the front bumper to impossible to detect the distance traveling vehicles is splashed.
measure the distance to the vehicle ahead. from the vehicle ahead.
When the system judges that your vehicle — When dense exhaust or other smoke
is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the — When driving into a strong light (for (black smoke) from vehicles reduces
travel lane, the vehicle ahead detection example, sunlight) the visibility of the sensor.
indicator blinks and a warning chime . The sensor generally detects the signals — When excessively heavy baggage is
sounds. returned from the reflectors on a vehicle loaded in the rear seat or the
ahead. Therefore, the system may not luggage room of your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS ON FCW SYSTEM function properly under the following
— When abruptly accelerating or de-
conditions:
celerating.
WARNING — When the reflectors of the vehicle
— On a steep downhill slope or on
ahead are positioned high or close to
. The FCW system is intended to warn you roads with sharp curves.
each other (including a small vehicle
before a collision but will not avoid a such as motorcycles). — When there is a highly reflective
collision. It is the driver’s responsibility object near the vehicle ahead (for
to stay alert, drive safely and be in — When the sensor gets dirty or it is
example, being very close to another
control of the vehicle at all times. impossible to detect the distance
vehicle, signboard, etc.).
from the vehicle ahead.
. As there is a performance limit, the — When you are towing a trailer.
system may not provide a warning in — When the reflectors on the vehicle
certain conditions. ahead are missing, damaged or . Depending on certain road conditions
covered. (curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle
. The system will not detect the following
conditions (steering position or vehicle
objects: — When the reflectors of the vehicle
position), or the preceding vehicle’s
— Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in ahead are covered with dirt, snow or
conditions (position in lane, etc.), the
the roadway road spray.
system may not function properly. The
— Oncoming vehicles in the same lane — When visibility is low (such as rain, system may detect highly reflective
fog, snow, etc.). objects such as reflectors, signs, white
. The system will not detect another markers, and other stationary objects on
vehicle under the following conditions: the road or near the traveling lane and
provide unnecessary warning. — When the system malfunctions
. The system may not function in offset
conditions.
. The system may not function when the
distance to the vehicle ahead is extre-
mely close.
. The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality. If the
sensor is covered with ice, a transparent
or translucent plastic bag, etc., the
system may not detect them. In these
instances the system may not be able to
SSD1050
warn the driver properly. Be sure to
check and clean the sensor regularly. If the IBA OFF indicator light *A illuminates
. Excessive noise will interfere with the with a beep sound, pull off the road to a
warning chime sound, and the chime safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the
may not be heard. engine off. Check to see if the sensor
window is dirty. If the sensor window is
. A sudden appearance of a vehicle in
dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart
front (for example, it abruptly cuts in)
the engine. If the sensor window is not
may not be detected and the system may
dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF
not warn the driver soon enough.
indicator light continues to illuminate even
. The system will be cancelled automati- if the IBA system is turned on with the IBA
cally with a beep sound and the IBA OFF OFF switch * B , have the system checked
indicator light will illuminate under the by an INFINITI retailer.
To turn on the IBA system, see “Intelligent
— When the sensor window is dirty Cruise Control (ICC) system” later in this
section.

system ” earlier in this section and “Blind
Spot Warning/Blind Spot InterventionTM/
Back-up Collision Intervention systems”
For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli-
this section.
SSD0956 SSD0939
FCW system operation

The warning systems switch is used to turn
on and off the FCW system when it is
activated using the settings menu on the
center display. See “How to enable/disable
the FCW system using the settings menu”
When the warning systems switch is turned
off, the indicator * 1 on the switch is off.
The indicator will also be off if the FCW, the
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and the
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) systems are
deactivated. SSD1102
For the LDW and BSW systems, see “Lane

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system
How to enable/disable the FCW warns the driver by a warning light and
system using the settings menu chime when there is a risk of a collision
Perform the following steps to enable or with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane
disable the FCW system. and the driver must take avoidance action
1. Push the SETTING * 1 button and high- immediately. The system helps reduce the
light the “Driver Assistance” key on the rear-end collision speed by applying the
display using the INFINITI controller. brakes when the system judges that the
Then push the ENTER * 2 button. collision cannot be prevented.
2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn- The IBA system will function when your
ings” key, and push the ENTER * 2 vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-
button. mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above, and
when your vehicle is driven at speeds
JVS0080X approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster
than the vehicle ahead.
3. Highlight the “Forward Collision Warn-
ing” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled) and push the ENTER * 2
button.
For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli-
this section.

The IBA system uses a distance sensor * A
the roadway
located below the front bumper to measure
the distance to the vehicle ahead. When — Motorcycles traveling offset in the
the system judges that your vehicle is traveling lane
getting close to the vehicle ahead in the — Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
traveling lane, the vehicle ahead detection
indicator on the instrument panel blinks . The system will not detect another
and a warning chime sounds. vehicle under the following conditions:
The IBA system will be turned on/off by — When the sensor gets dirty and it is
pushing the IBA OFF switch. The IBA OFF impossible to detect the distance
indicator light will illuminate when the from the vehicle ahead.
system is turned off. — When driving into a strong light (for
JVS0227X example, sunlight).
PRECAUTIONS ON IBA SYSTEM
. The sensor generally detects the signals
returned from the reflectors on a vehicle
WARNING ahead. Therefore, the system may not
function properly under the following
. The IBA system is not a collision conditions:
avoidance system. It is the driver’s
— When the reflectors of the vehicle
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
ahead are positioned high or close to
and be in control of the vehicle at all
each other (including a small vehicle
times.
such as motorcycles).
. As there is a performance limit, the
— When the sensor gets dirty and it is
system may not provide a warning or
impossible to detect the distance
braking in certain conditions.
from the vehicle ahead.
. The system will not detect the following
objects: — When the reflectors on the vehicle
SSD0749
ahead are missing, damaged or
Vehicle ahead detection indicator — Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in
covered.

— When the reflectors of the vehicle position), or the preceding vehicle’s
ahead are covered with dirt, snow or conditions (position in lane, etc.), the
road spray. system may not function properly.
— When visibility is low (such as rain, . The system may not function in offset
fog, snow, etc.). conditions.
— When snow or road spray from . The system may not function when the
traveling vehicles is splashed. distance to the vehicle ahead is extre-
mely close.
— When dense exhaust or other smoke
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces
the visibility of the sensor.
— When excessively heavy baggage is
SSD0782
loaded in the rear seat or the
luggage room of your vehicle. Reflectors on the road
— When abruptly accelerating or de-
celerating. WARNING
— On a steep downhill slope or on . The system may detect highly reflective
roads with sharp curves. objects such as reflectors, signs, white
— When there is a highly reflective markers and other stationary objects on
object near the vehicle ahead (for the road or near the traveling lane.
example, being very close to another
In extreme conditions, detection of these
vehicle, signboard, etc.).
objects may cause the system to func-
— When towing a trailer or other tion.
vehicle. . The system is designed to automatically
. Depending on certain road conditions check the sensor’s functionality. If the
(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle sensor is covered with ice, a transparent
conditions (steering position or vehicle or translucent plastic bag, etc., the
system may not detect them. In these system checked by an INFINITI retailer.
instances the system may not be able to
warn the driver properly. Be sure to
check and clean the sensor regularly.
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
. A sudden appearance of a vehicle in
front (for example, it abruptly cuts in)
may not be detected and the system may
not warn the driver soon enough.
. The system will be cancelled automati-
SSD1050
cally with a beep sound and the IBA
warning light will illuminate under the
IBA system operation
The IBA system will function when your
— When the sensor window is dirty
vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-
— When the system malfunctions mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) or above, and
when the vehicle’s speed is approximately
If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster than that of the
with a beep sound, pull off the road to a vehicle ahead.
safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the To turn the system off or on, push and hold
engine off. Check to see if the sensor the IBA OFF switch * B (located on the
window is dirty. If the sensor window is lower side of the instrument panel) for
dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart more than 1 second after starting the
the engine. If the sensor window is not engine. When the IBA OFF indicator light
dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF *A on the instrument panel turns off and
indicator light continues to illuminate even the IBA OFF switch is pushed, the system
if the IBA system is turned on, have the will turn off and the IBA OFF indicator light
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
will illuminate. When the IBA OFF switch is
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
pushed again, the system will turn on and CAUTION fuel economy from your vehicle.
the IBA OFF indicator light will turn off.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), 1. Use smooth accelerator and brake
The IBA system will remain in the last ON
follow these recommendations to obtain pedal application.
or OFF state it was left in until it is
maximum engine performance and ensure . Avoid rapid starts and stops.
manually changed by pressing the IBA
the future reliability and economy of your . Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
OFF switch.
new vehicle. brake application whenever possi-
Illumination of the IBA OFF indicator light
ble.
without a beep sound is an indication that Failure to follow these recommendations
. Maintain constant speed while com-
the IBA system is temporarily unavailable. may result in shortened engine life and
reduced engine performance. muting and coast whenever possi-
It will occur under the following conditions:
ble.
. When driving into a strong light (for
. Avoid driving for long periods at con- 2. Maintain constant speed.
example, sunlight)
stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not . Look ahead to try and anticipate and
run the engine over 4,000 rpm. minimize stops.
. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any . Synchronizing your speed with traf-
The IBA OFF indicator light will turn off
gear. fic lights allows you to reduce your
when the system returns to its normal
. Avoid quick starts. number of stops.
operating conditions.
. Maintaining a steady speed can
For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli- . Avoid hard braking as much as possi-
ble. minimize red light stops and im-
gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in prove fuel efficiency.
this section. . Do not tow a trailer for the first 500
miles (805 km). 3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher
vehicle speeds.
. Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
. Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the
vehicle due to increased aerody-
. When entering a hot vehicle, open-
namic drag. 6. Plan for the shortest route.
. Recirculating the cool air in the cabin . Utilize a map or navigation system to ing the windows will help to reduce
when the A/C is on reduces cooling determine the best route to save the inside temperature faster, result-
load. time. ing in reduced demand on your A/C
system.
4. Drive at economical speeds and dis- 7. Avoid idling.
tances. . Shutting off your engine when safe
. Observing the speed limit and not for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds
exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where saves fuel and reduces emissions.
legally allowed) can improve fuel 8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.
efficiency due to reduced aerody- . Automated passes permit drivers to
namic drag. use special lanes to maintain cruis-
. Maintaining a safe following dis-
ing speed through the toll and avoid
tance behind other vehicles reduces stopping and starting.
unnecessary braking.
. Safely monitoring traffic to antici-
9. Winter warm up.
. Limit idling time to minimize impact
pate changes in speed permits
to fuel economy.
reduced braking and smooth accel-
. Vehicles typically need no more than
eration changes.
. Select a gear range suitable to road 30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil
conditions.
before driving.
5. Use cruise control. . Your vehicle will reach its ideal
. Using cruise control during highway
operating temperature more quickly
driving helps maintain a steady while driving versus idling.
speed.
. Cruise control is particularly effec-
10. Keeping your vehicle cool.
. Park your vehicle in a covered
tive in providing fuel savings when
parking area or in the shade when-
driving on flat terrains.
ever possible.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD® (if so equipped)
. Keep your engine tuned up.
. Follow the recommended scheduled 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire
WARNING wear and increased fuel consumption.
maintenance.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Do not attempt to raise two wheels off If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning
pressure. Low tire pressure increases the ground and shift the transmission to light turns on when driving on dry hard
tire wear and lowers fuel economy. any drive or reverse position with the surface roads:
. Keep the wheels in correct alignment. engine running. Doing so may result in — in the 4HI position, shift the 4WD
Improper alignment increases tire wear drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle shift switch to AUTO.
and lowers fuel economy. movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury. — in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle
. Use the recommended viscosity engine
and shift the transmission lever to
oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter . Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped the N (Neutral) position with the
recommendation” in the “9. Technical vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer or brake pedal depressed and shift the
and consumer information” section.) similar equipment even if the other two 4WD shift switch to AUTO.
wheels are raised off the ground. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel If the 4WD warning light is still on
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD after the above operation, have your
before it is placed on a dynamometer. vehicle checked by an INFINITI retai-
Using the wrong test equipment may ler as soon as possible.
result in drivetrain damage or unex- . The transfer case may be damaged if you
pected vehicle movement which could continue driving with the 4WD warning
result in serious vehicle damage or light blinking.
personal injury.
See “On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions” earlier in this section for
CAUTION other precautions for offroad driving.
. Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads.
Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4HI or

INFINITI ALL-MODE 4WD® SYSTEM
The all mode 4WD system provides 3 positions (AUTO, 4HI and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving
conditions.
4WD shift procedure:
SSD1100
*1: The 4LO and 4HI indicator may flash alternately. Stop the vehicle and be sure to turn the 4WD shift switch after the transmission shift

lever has been shifted to the N (Neutral) position. If the indicator keeps flashing after the 4WD shift procedure, drive slowly without
abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the indicator will illuminate or turn off.
· Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to the 4LO position. Otherwise the gears may grind, damaging the drive system.
*2: While changing in and out of the 4LO position, the engine must be running. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and the 4LO
indicator will not be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure that the 4LO indicator turns on when shifting the 4WD shift switch to the 4L position. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicator light will also turn on when 4L is selected. (See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section.)

The 4WD shift switch is used to select the the N (Neutral) position to any other gear engine brake and low automatic trans-
4WD mode depending on the driving while the 4LO and 4HI indicators are mission gears for engine braking.
conditions. There are 3 types of drive blinking alternately, the vehicle may
modes available, AUTO, 4HI and 4LO. . Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
move unexpectedly. (between AUTO and 4H) with the rear
The 4WD shift switch electronically con- wheels spinning.
trols the transfer case operation. Rotate
the switch to move between each mode, . Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in
AUTO, 4H and 4L.
CAUTION the 4HI or 4LO position. Driving on dry
hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause
You must depress the 4WD shift switch to . Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- unnecessary noise and tire wear.
select 4L, and the vehicle MUST be tween 4L and 4H while driving. INFINITI recommends driving in the
stationary and the shift lever in the N AUTO position under these conditions.
. The 4HI position provides greater trac-
(Neutral) position when changing into or
out of 4L.
tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will . The 4WD transfer case may not be
cause increased fuel consumption and shifted between 4HI and 4LO at low
higher oil temperatures, and could da- ambient temperatures and the 4LO and
WARNING mage drivetrain component. Speeds over 4HI indicators may blink even when the
62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4HI is not 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving
. When parking, apply the parking brake recommended. for a while you can change the 4WD shift
before stopping the engine and make . The 4LO position provides maximum switch between 4H and 4L.
sure that the 4WD shift indicator is on traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed
and the ATP warning light turns off. excessively, as the maximum speed is When driving on rough roads,
Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect- approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h). . Drive carefully according to the road
edly move even if the automatic trans-
. When driving straight, shift the 4WD surface conditions.
mission is in the P (Park) position.
shift switch to the AUTO or 4H position. When the vehicle is stuck,
. The 4LO and 4HI indicators must stop Do not move the 4WD shift switch when . Place stones or wooden blocks under
blinking and the 4LO or 4HI indicator making a turn or reversing. the tires to free the vehicle.
must remain illuminated or turn off
. Do not shift the 4WD shift switch . Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4L.
before shifting the transmission into
(between AUTO and 4H) while driving . If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat
gear. If the shift lever is shifted from
on steep downhill grades. Use the forward and backward movement to
increase the movement. AUTO, 4H or 4L, you may feel a jolt.
. If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire This is not abnormal.
chains may be effective. . When the vehicle is stopped after
making a turn, you may feel a slight
jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N
CAUTION (Neutral) or P (Park) position. This
occurs because the transfer clutch is
. Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires released and not because of a malfunc-
will sink deep into the mud, making it tion.
difficult to free the vehicle.
. Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may CAUTION
cause malfunction.
SSD1048 . When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the AUTO or 4H position.
4WD SHIFT SWITCH Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
. Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the making a turn or reversing.
AUTO, 4H or 4L position, depending on . Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while
driving conditions. driving on steep downhill grades. Use
. With the switch set to the AUTO posi- the engine brake and low automatic
tion, distribution of torque to the front transmission gears for engine braking.
and rear wheels changes automatically, . Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with
depending on road conditions encoun- the rear wheels spinning.
tered [ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) ? 50 : 50
(4WD)]. This results in improved driving . Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
stability. the 4H position from AUTO, ensure the
vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100
. If the 4WD shift switch is operated
km/h). Failure to do so can damage the
while making a turn, accelerating or
4WD system.
decelerating or if the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position while in the
. Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- shifting from one drive mode to the
tween 4L and 4H while driving. other. When the shifting is completed,
the 4WD shift indicator will come on. If
. Engine idling speed is high while warm- the indicator does not come on im-
ing up the engine. Be especially careful mediately, make sure the area around
when starting or driving on slippery the vehicle is safe, and drive the
surfaces with the 4WD shift switch in vehicle straight, accelerate or decele-
AUTO. rate or move the vehicle in reverse,
then shift the 4WD shift switch.
. If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD shift indicator turns off.
4WD WARNING LIGHT
SSD1058
Comes on or blinks
4WD shift indicator Warning light
when:
4WD SHIFT INDICATOR There is a mal-
Illuminates function in the
The 4WD shift indicator is displayed in the 4WD system
vehicle information display.
The transfer case
The indicator should turn off within 1 Blinks rapidly oil temperature is
second after placing the ignition switch in abnormally high
the ON position. The difference in
Blinks slowly wheel rotation is
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift large
indicator will illuminate the position se-
lected by the 4WD shift switch. (See the The 4WD warning light is located in the
4WD shift procedure list shown in the meter.
“INFINITI all-mode 4WD® system” earlier in The 4WD warning light comes on when the
this section.) ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
. The 4WD shift indicator may blink while tion. It turns off soon after the engine is
started.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD light turns on. blinking.
system when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position, the 4WD warning light . When the 4WD warning light comes on,
will either remain illuminated or blink. the 2WD mode may be engaged even if
the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the Be especially careful when driving. If
4WD shift indicator turns off. corresponding parts are malfunctioning,
High-temperature transfer case oil makes the 4WD mode will not be engaged even
the 4WD warning light blink rapidly (about if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.
twice per second). If the warning light . Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI or 4LO
blinks rapidly during operation, stop the position on dry hard surface roads.
vehicle in a safe place immediately. Then if Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4HI or
the light turns off after a while, you can 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire
continue driving. wear and increased fuel consumption.
A large difference between the diameters
of front and rear wheels will make the 4WD If the 4WD warning light turns on when
warning light blink slowly (about once per driving on dry hard surface roads:
two seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch — in the AUTO or 4HI position, shift
to AUTO and do not drive fast. the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.
— in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle
and shift the transmission shift lever
CAUTION to the N (Neutral) position and shift
. If the 4WD warning light comes on or the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.
blinks slowly during operation or rapidly . If the 4WD warning light is still on after
after stopping the vehicle for a while, the above operation, have your vehicle
have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon
retailer as soon as possible. as possible.
. Shifting between 4HI and 4LO is not . The transfer case may be damaged if you
recommended when the 4WD warning continue driving with the warning light

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
The hill start assist system automatically

WARNING keeps the brakes applied to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards in the
. Never rely solely on the hill start assist time it takes the driver to release the brake
system to prevent the vehicle from pedal and apply the accelerator when the
moving backward on a hill. Always drive vehicle is stopped on a hill.
carefully and attentively. Depress the The hill start assist system will operate
brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped automatically under the following condi-
on a steep hill. Be especially careful tions:
when stopped on a hill on frozen or
muddy roads. Failure to prevent the . The transmission is shifted to a forward
vehicle from rolling backwards may or reverse gear.
result in a loss of control of the vehicle . The vehicle is stopped completely on a
and possible serious injury or death. hill by applying the brake.
. The hill start assist system is not The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
designed to hold the vehicle at a After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to
standstill on a hill. Depress the brake roll back and the hill start assist system
pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a will stop operating completely.
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the The hill start assist system will not operate
vehicle to roll backwards and may result when the transmission is shifted to the N
in a collision or serious personal injury. (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat
. The hill start assist system may not and level road.
prevent the vehicle from rolling back- When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
wards on a hill under all load or road warning light illuminates in the meter, the
conditions. Always be prepared to de- hill start assist system will not operate.
press the brake pedal to prevent the (See “Warning/indicator lights and audible
vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to reminders” in the “2. Instruments and
do so may result in a collision or serious controls” section.)
personal injury.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into the street when parked on a
sloping drive way, it is a good practice
to turn the wheels as illustrated.
. HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: * 1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: * 2
SD1006MA Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
. Safe parking procedures require that
. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
WARNING both the parking brake be applied and
the transmission be placed in the P CURB: * 3
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over (Park) position. Failure to do so could Turn the wheels toward the side of the
flammable materials such as dry grass, cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly road so the vehicle will move away from
waste paper or rags. They may ignite and or roll away and result in an accident. the center of the road if it moves.
cause a fire.
. Make sure the automatic transmission 4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF
. Never leave the engine running while the shift lever has been pushed as far position.
vehicle is unattended. forward as it can go and cannot be
. Do not leave children unattended inside moved without depressing the foot
the vehicle. They could unknowingly brake pedal.
activate switches or controls. Unat-
tended children could become involved
TOW MODE SNOW MODE
position.
SIC4474 SIC4454
The TOW MODE should be used when For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy
pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy roads or slippery areas, turn the SNOW
load. Driving the vehicle in the TOW MODE mode on.
with no trailer/load or light trailer/light To turn the SNOW mode on, push the
load will not cause any damage. However, SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode
fuel economy may be reduced, and the indicator light on the meter panel will
transmission/engine driving characteris- illuminate. When the SNOW mode is
tics may feel unusual. activated, engine output is controlled to
Push the TOW MODE switch to activate avoid wheel spin.
TOW MODE. The indicator light on the TOW To turn the SNOW mode off, push the
MODE switch illuminates when the TOW switch and the indicator on the meter
MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE panel will turn off. Turn the SNOW mode off
switch again to turn the TOW MODE OFF. for normal driving and fuel economy.
TOW MODE is automatically canceled when
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the

WARNING The brake system has two separate hy- brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
If the engine is not running or is turned off you will still have braking ability at two function correctly.
while driving, the power assist for the wheels.
PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
steering will not work. Steering will be You may feel a small click and hear a sound
harder to operate. Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
when the brake pedal is fully depressed
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
slowly. This is not a malfunction and
weakened or whenever the parking brake
The power assisted steering uses a hy- indicates that the brake assist mechanism
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
draulic pump, driven by the engine, to is operating properly.
in order to assure the best braking
assist steering.
Hydraulically-assisted brakes performance.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,
The hydraulically-assisted brake system is This procedure is described in the vehicle
you will still have control of the vehicle.
designed to use a hydraulic pump driven service manual and can be performed by
However, much greater steering effort is
electrically, to assist braking. If the engine an INFINITI retailer.
needed, especially in sharp turns and at
stops, you can stop the vehicle by depres-
low speeds. Using the brakes
sing the foot brake pedal. However, greater
foot pressure on the foot brake pedal will Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
be required to stop the vehicle. The while driving. This will cause overheating
stopping distance will be longer. of the brakes, wearing out the brake and
pads faster and reduce gas mileage.
Wet brakes To help save the brakes and to prevent the
When the vehicle is washed or driven brakes from overheating, reduce speed
through water, the brakes may get wet. and downshift to a lower gear before going
As a result, your braking distance will be down a slope or long grade. Overheated
longer and the vehicle may pull to one side brakes may reduce braking performance
during braking. and could result in loss of vehicle control.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal

BRAKE ASSIST
BRAKE ASSIST . This system will not operate when the

WARNING When the force applied to the brake pedal
vehicle is moving at approximately 20
MPH (32 km/h) or less.
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
. While driving on a slippery surface, be activated generating greater braking force . The pre-pressure function ceases when
careful when braking, accelerating or than a conventional brake booster even the following conditions are met:
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- with light pedal force. 1) When the driver depresses the
erating could cause the wheels to skid accelerator pedal or the brake
and result in an accident. pedal.
. If the engine is not running or is turned WARNING 2) If the driver does not operate the
off while driving, the power assist for accelerator or brake pedal within
the brakes will not work. Braking will be The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist approximately 1 second.
harder. braking operation and is not a collision
3) When the 4WD shift switch is in the
warning or avoidance device. It is the
4H or 4L position (for 4WD models).
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent

Cruise Control system equipped
models)
When the Preview Function identifies the
need to apply emergency braking by
sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane
and the distance and relative speed from
it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before
the driver depresses the brake pedal and
helps improve brake response by reducing
pedal free play.

all times. — Vehicle position in the lane may
. As there is a performance limit to the cause the sensor to temporarily not
Preview Function, never rely solely on detect a vehicle in the same lane or
this system. This system does not may detect objects or vehicles in
correct careless inattentive or absent- other lanes.
minded driving, or overcome poor visi-
bility in rain, fog, or other bad weather.
Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the
brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe
distance between vehicles.
. The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
SSD0338 conditions. The Preview Function may
. The sensor will not detect: not operate properly under the following
conditions. The vehicle is still driveable
1) Pedestrians or objects in the road-
under normal conditions and the Brake
way
Assist will operate.
2) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
3) Motorcycles traveling offset in the
the system sensor
travel lane as illustrated
— When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
WARNING on the front of the vehicle
. This system is only an aid to assist — Winding or hilly roads may cause
braking operation and is not a collision the sensor to temporarily not detect
warning or avoidance device. It is the a vehicle in the same lane or may
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive detect objects or vehicles in other
safely and be in control of the vehicle at lanes.

How to handle the sensor ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
The sensor for the Preview Function is
common with Intelligent Cruise Control and WARNING
is located below the front bumper.
To keep the Preview Function operating . The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
properly, be sure to observe the following: sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
. Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe vent accidents resulting from careless or
with a soft cloth carefully so as not to dangerous driving techniques. It can
damage the sensor. help maintain vehicle control during
. Do not strike or damage the areas braking on slippery surfaces. Remember
around the sensor. Do not touch or that stopping distances on slippery
remove the screw located on the surfaces will be longer than on normal
SSD0471 surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
sensor. Doing so could cause failure
or malfunction. If the sensor is da- tances may also be longer on rough,
Warning light and display maged due to an accident, contact an gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
When the Preview Function is not operating INFINITI retailer. are using tire chains. Always maintain a
properly, the chime sounds and the system safe distance from the vehicle in front of
. Do not attach a sticker (including
warning light (orange) will come on. you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.
Action to take: accessory near the sensor. This could
cause failure or malfunction. . Tire type and condition may also affect
If the warning light comes on, park the
braking effectiveness.
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine and resume driving. — When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate
wheels.
that the Preview Function is malfunction-
ing (the brake is operative). Although the — When installing a spare tire, make
Vehicle is still driveable under normal sure that it is the proper size and
conditions, have the vehicle checked at type as specified on the Tire and
an INFINITI retailer. Loading Information label. See “Tire

and loading information label” in the Normal operation
“9. Technical and consumer informa- WARNING The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6
tion” section of this manual. MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may according to road conditions.
— For detailed information, see result in increased stopping distances.
“Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main- When the ABS senses that one or more
tenance and do-it-yourself” section wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
of this manual. Self-test feature rapidly applies and releases hydraulic
The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec- pressure. This action is similar to pumping
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con- tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a the brakes very quickly. You may feel a
trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock computer. The computer has a built-in pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
during hard braking or when braking on diagnostic feature that tests the system noise from under the hood or feel a
slippery surfaces. The system detects the each time you start the engine and move vibration from the actuator when it is
rotation speed at each wheel and varies the vehicle at a low speed in forward or operating. This is normal and indicates
the brake fluid pressure to prevent each reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may that the ABS is operating properly. How-
wheel from locking and sliding. By pre- hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsa- ever, the pulsation may indicate that road
venting each wheel from locking, the tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and conditions are hazardous and extra care is
system helps the driver maintain steering does not indicate a malfunction. If the required while driving.
control and helps to minimize swerving computer senses a malfunction, it switches
and spinning on slippery surfaces. the ABS off and illuminates the ABS
warning light on the instrument panel.
Using the system The brake system then operates normally,
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. but without anti-lock assistance.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady If the ABS warning light illuminates during
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The the self-test or while driving, have the
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.
from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid
obstacles.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
flashes so note the following: on position.
uses various sensors to monitor driver
inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain . The road may be slippery or the system When the 4L position is selected with the
driving conditions, the VDC system helps may determine some action is required 4WD shift switch, the VDC system is
to perform the following functions. to help keep the vehicle on the steered disabled and the VDC off indicator light
path. illuminates (for 4WD models).
. Controls brake pressure to reduce
. You may feel a pulsation in the brake See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a non
pedal and hear a noise or vibration ing light” in the “2. Instruments and
slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
from under the hood. This is normal controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic
and indicates that the VDC system is Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.
. Controls brake pressure and engine
working properly. Instruments and controls” section.
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
. Adjust your speed and driving to the The computer has a built-in diagnostic
on vehicle speed (traction control func-
road conditions. feature that tests the system each time you
tion).
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the start the engine and move the vehicle
. Controls brake pressure at individual
VDC warning light illuminates in the forward or in reverse at a slow speed.
wheels and engine output to help the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto- When the self-test occurs, you may hear a
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
matically turns off. “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
— understeer (vehicle tends to not
VDC system. The VDC off indicator indication of a malfunction.
follow the steered path despite
increased steering input) illuminates to indicate the VDC system is
off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due WARNING
the system, the VDC system still operates
to certain road or driving condi-
to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
tions). . The VDC system is designed to help
transferring power to a non slipping drive
The VDC system can help the driver to improve driving stability but does not
wheel. The VDC warning light flashes if
maintain control of the vehicle, but it prevent accidents due to abrupt steering
this occurs. All other VDC functions are off,
cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in operation at high speeds or by careless
and the VDC warning light will not
all driving situations. or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce
flash. The VDC system is automatically
When the VDC system operates, the VDC vehicle speed and be especially careful
reset to on when the ignition switch is
warning light in the instrument panel when driving and cornering on slippery
placed in the off position then back to the

surfaces and always drive carefully. . When driving on an unstable surface
. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
If suspension parts such as shock ramp, the VDC warning light may
absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer illuminate. This is not a malfunction.
bars, bushings and wheels are not Restart the engine after driving onto a
INFINITI recommended for your vehicle stable surface.
or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC . If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI
system may not operate properly. This recommended ones are used, the VDC
could adversely affect vehicle handling system may not operate properly and
performance, and the VDC warning light the VDC warning light may illumi-
may illuminate. nate.
. If brake related parts such as brake . The VDC system is not a substitute for
pads, rotors and calipers are not INFINITI winter tires or tire chains on a snow SIC4455
recommended or are extremely deterio- covered road.
rated, the VDC system may not operate VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
properly and the VDC warning light OFF SWITCH
may illuminate. The vehicle should be driven with the
. If engine control related parts are not Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON
INFINITI recommended or are extremely for most driving conditions.
deteriorated, the VDC warning light When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
may illuminate. the VDC system reduces the engine output
. When driving on extremely inclined to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed
surfaces such as higher banked corners, will be reduced even if the accelerator is
the VDC system may not operate prop- depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
erly and the VDC warning light may power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
illuminate. Do not drive on these types turn the VDC system off.
of roads. To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
The VDC off indicator light will FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
illuminate. To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply If the vehicle is to be left outside without
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart deicer through the key hole. If the lock antifreeze, drain the cooling system, in-
the engine to turn ON the system. becomes frozen, heat the key before cluding the engine block. Refill before
inserting it into the key hole or use the operating the vehicle. For details, see
Intelligent Key system. “Engine cooling system” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the TIRE EQUIPMENT
outside temperature will drop below 328F SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
(08C), check antifreeze to assure proper provide superior performance on dry pave-
winter protection. For additional informa- ment. However, the performance of these
tion, see “Engine cooling system” in the tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- and icy conditions. If you operate your
tion. vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI
recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or
BATTERY
ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
If the battery is not fully charged during Consult an INFINITI retailer for the tire
extremely cold weather conditions, the type, size, speed rating and availability
battery fluid may freeze and damage the information.
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
For additional traction on icy roads,
the battery should be checked regularly.
studded tires may be used. However, some
For additional information, see “Battery” in
U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohi-
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
bit their use. Check local, state and
section.
provincial laws before installing studded
tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE . Do not use the cruise control on slippery
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be roads.
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires. WARNING . Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
Tire chains may be used. For details, see
. Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain), the exhaust pipe and from around your
“Tire chains” in the “8. Maintenance and vehicle.
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
For four-wheel drive have much less traction or “grip” under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
If you install snow tires, they must also be equipped)
wet ice until the road is salted or
the same size, brand, construction and Engine block heaters are used to assist in
sanded.
tread pattern on all four wheels. cold temperature starting.
. Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT tion. Accelerate and slow down with The engine block heater should be used
It is recommended that the following items care. If accelerating or downshifting too when the outside temperature is 208F
be carried in the vehicle during winter: fast, the drive wheels will lose even (−78C) or lower.
. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to more traction. To use the engine block heater
remove ice and snow from the windows . Allow more stopping distance under 1. Turn the engine off.
and wiper blades. these conditions. Braking should be
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under started sooner than on dry pavement.
block heater cord.
the jack to give it firm support. . Allow greater following distances on
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of slippery roads.
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
snowdrifts. . Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). cord.
. Extra window washer fluid to refill the These may appear on an otherwise clear
reservoir tank. road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
not to brake while on the ice, and avoid
any sudden steering maneuvers. 5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours,

depending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.
WARNING
. Do not use your engine block heater with
an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-
pronged adapter. You can be seriously
injured by an electrical shock if you use
an ungrounded connection.
. Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper
extension cord or a grounded outlet can
result in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.

MEMO

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ............................. 6-2 Jump starting .................................................... 6-11
Roadside assistance program .............................. 6-2 Push starting .................................................... 6-13
Emergency engine shut off .................................. 6-3 If your vehicle overheats ................................... 6-14
Flat tire................................................................ 6-3 Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-15
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........ 6-3 Towing recommended by INFINITI................. 6-16
Changing a flat tire ......................................... 6-4 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ..... 6-18
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
In the event of a roadside emergency,
. Turn signals do not work when the Roadside Assistance Service is available to
hazard warning flasher lights are on. you. Please refer to your Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside
The flasher can be actuated with the Assistance Information Booklet (Canada)
ignition switch in any position. for details.
When an impact that could activate the
supplemental air bags is detected, the
hazard warning flasher lights blink auto-
matically. If the hazard warning flasher
switch is pushed twice, the hazard warning
flashers will turn off.
SIC2574
WARNING
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under Do not turn the hazard warning flasher
emergency conditions. All turn signal lights switch to off until you can make sure that it
will flash. is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher
warning may not blink automatically de-
pending on the force of impact.
WARNING
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
. If stopping for an emergency, be sure to the hazard warning flasher switch while
move the vehicle well off the road. driving.
. Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to drive
so slowly that your vehicle might be-
come a hazard to other traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE
To shut off the engine in an emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
situation while driving, perform the follow- tion is displayed on the monitor screen
ing procedure:
TEM (TPMS) while driving, avoid sudden steering
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe
switch 3 consecutive times in less than
monitors tire pressure of all tires except location and stop the vehicle as soon as
1.5 seconds, or
the spare. When the low tire pressure possible. Driving with under-inflated
. Push and hold the push-button ignition warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE tires may permanently damage the tires
switch for more than 2 seconds. PRESSURE warning appears in the dot and increase the likelihood of tire fail-
matrix liquid crystal display, one or more ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. and may lead to an accident and could
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire result in serious personal injury. Check
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
you of it by the low tire pressure warning the tire pressure to the recommended
light. This system will activate only when COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 and Loading Information label to turn
MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
“Warning/indicator lights and audible re- the light still illuminates while driving
minders” in the “2. Instruments and after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
controls” section, “TIRE PRESSURE infor- may be flat. If you have a flat tire,
mation” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, replace it with a spare tire as soon as
phone and voice recognition systems” possible.
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and is replaced, the TPMS will not function
driving” section. and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
WARNING The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as
. If the low tire pressure warning light possible for tire replacement and/or
illuminates or LOW PRESSURE informa- system resetting.
In case of emergency 6-3

. Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the WARNING
proper operation of the TPMS.
. Make sure the parking brake is securely
. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
applied and the automatic transmission
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
is in the P (Park) position.
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. . Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc- close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
tions below. sional road assistance.
Stopping the vehicle MCE0001A
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road

Blocking wheels
and away from traffic.
Place suitable blocks *1 at both the front
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
and back of the wheel diagonally opposite
3. Park on a level surface and apply the the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from
parking brake. Move the shift lever to moving when it is jacked up.
the P (Park) position.
4. Turn off the engine.
WARNING
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
and to signal professional road assis- Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
tance personnel that you need assis- may move and result in personal injury.
tance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

If rubber sound suppressor remains on jack
when vehicle is being jacked up, the vehicle
will be unstable and may fall off jack stand
causing serious injury of death.
3. Remove the cargo floor cover.

4. Remove the jacking tools.
JVE0023X
Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the lift gate.
2. Raise the cargo floor board using the
handle *A .
JVE0091X
WARNING
When removing jacking tools, be sure the
rubber sound suppressor * 1 , used to
control jack stand from rattling against
metal, is not attached to the jacking tool.

7. Locate the oval opening above the
middle of the rear bumper.
8. Place the T-shaped end of the jack rod
through the opening and direct it
towards the spare wheel winch assem-
bly, located directly above the spare
wheel.
SCE0916
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.
SCE0915
9. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod
5. Securely screw to connect the T-shaped into the T-shaped opening of the spare
end of the jack rod and two extension wheel winch. Apply pressure to keep
bars *
1 as illustrated.
the jack rod engaged in the spare
6. Fit the square end of the jack rod into wheel winch and turn the jack rod
the square hole of the wheel nut counterclockwise to lower the spare
wrench to form a handle * 2 . wheel.

CAUTION
When storing the wheel, make sure that the
hanging plate is in the center of the wheel
and then lift it up into the storage area.
SCE0377
10. Once the spare wheel is completely

lowered, remove the jack rod and reach
under the vehicle to remove the hang-
ing plate.
11. Carefully slide the spare wheel from
under the rear of the vehicle.
After preparing the spare tire, to remove SCE0917
the rod, pull out the rod while moving the
rod to the right and left with the screw of
the extension facing the side. CAUTION
When storing the wheel, be sure to mount
the wheel horizontally. Securing the wheel
that is in a tilted position as illustrated may
cause looseness and dropping of the wheel

while driving. Lower the wheel on the . Do not start or run the engine while
ground again, and make sure that the vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause
hanging plate is properly set. Hang the the vehicle to move. This is especially
wheel again and make sure that the wheel is true for vehicles with limited slip differ-
held horizontally, then store the wheel. entials.
. Do not allow passengers to stay in the
Jacking up the vehicle and remov- vehicle while it is on the jack.
ing the damaged tire
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
WARNING tions.
. Never get under the vehicle while it is SCE0875

supported only by the jack. If it is Jack-up point
necessary to work under the vehicle, 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
support it with safety stands. points as illustrated.
. Use only the jack provided with your The jack should be used on level firm
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the ground.
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
. Use the correct jack-up points. Never use
any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
. Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
. Never use blocks on or under the jack.

NCE130
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the

jack as shown.
4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
clearance between the tire and ground
is achieved.
5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the
SCE0876
jack lever and rod with both hands and
turn the jack lever.
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns
NOTE:
by turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the Before jacking up the vehicle, make sure
wheel nuts until the tire is off the the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
ground. position. If the vehicle is lifted up with the
engine running, the auto-leveling suspen-
sion will become disabled after 120

seconds. To reset the auto-leveling sus- 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
pension, cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF touches the ground. Then, with the
one time. wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence as
illustrated. Lower the vehicle comple-
tely.
WARNING
. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tigh-
tened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to
become loose or come off. This could
SCE0910 cause an accident.
. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
Installing the spare tire studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
The full-size temporary use only spare tire to become loose.
(if so equipped) is designed for emergency
. Retighten the wheel nuts when the
use. (See specific instructions under the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
etc.).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub. . As soon as possible, tighten the
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and wheel nuts to the specified torque
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. with a torque wrench.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten Wheel nut tightening torque:
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
sequence as illustrated (* 1 , *2 , * 3 ,
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-
*4 , *
5 , *
6 ) until they are tight.
tened to specification at all times. It
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery,
is recommended that wheel nuts be Stowing the damaged tire and tools the instructions and precautions below
tightened to specifications at each 1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack must be followed.
lubrication interval. and tools in the storage area.
. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD 2. Close the cargo floor cover.
pressure. WARNING
3. Replace the cargo floor board.
COLD pressure:
4. Close the lift gate. . If done incorrectly, jump starting can
After the vehicle has been parked lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
for three hours or more or driven severe injury or death. It could also
less than 1 mile (1.6 km). WARNING damage your vehicle.
COLD tire pressures are shown on
. Always make sure that the spare tire and . Explosive hydrogen gas is always pre-
the Tire and Loading Information sent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep
jacking equipment are properly secured
label affixed to the driver side center all sparks and flames away from the
after use. Such items can become
pillar. battery.
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD sudden stop. . Do not allow battery fluid to come into
tire pressure, the display of the tire . The full-size temporary use only spare contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
pressure information may show higher tire (if so equipped) is designed for painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
pressure than the COLD tire pressure after emergency use. (See specific instruc- corrosive sulphuric acid solution which
the vehicle has been driven more than 1 tions under the heading “Wheels and can cause severe burns. If the fluid
mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- should come into contact with anything,
pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. yourself” section.) immediately flush the contacted area
This does not indicate a system malfunc- with water.
tion. . Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
. The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.

. Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
. Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any time.
Keep hands and other objects away from
it. SCE0920
into close proximity to each other.

WARNING Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
3. Apply parking brake. Move the shift
Always follow the instructions below. Failure lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off
to do so could result in damage to the all unnecessary electrical systems
charging system and cause personal injury. (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
1. Remove the engine compartment cover, equipped). Cover the battery with a
if necessary. See “Engine compartment firmly wrung out moist cloth * C to
check locations” in the “8. Mainte- reduce explosion hazard.
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
5. Connect jumper cables in the sequence
2. If the booster battery is in another as illustrated (*
1 ? *2 ? * 3 ? * 4 ).
vehicle *
A , position the two vehicles
(*A and *B ) to bring their batteries

PUSH STARTING
the positive cable (* *

3 ? *
4 ? 2 ?
Do not attempt to start the engine by
CAUTION *1 ).
pushing.
9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

. Always connect positive (+) to positive Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to CAUTION
(+) and negative (−) to body ground (as cover the vent holes as it may be
illustrated) — not to the battery. contaminated with corrosive acid. . Automatic transmission models cannot
. Make sure the jumper cables do not 10. Put the battery cover on. be push-started or tow-started. Attempt-
touch moving parts in the engine coming to do so may cause transmission
partment and that clamps do not contact damage.
any other metal. . Three way catalyst equipped models
should not be started by pushing since
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle the three way catalyst may be damaged.
*A and let it run for a few minutes. . Never try to start the vehicle by towing
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster it; when the engine starts, the forward
vehicle *A at about 2,000 rpm, and surge could cause the vehicle to collide
start the engine of the vehicle being with the tow vehicle.
jump started *B .
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, push the ignition
switch to the OFF position and wait 10
seconds before trying again.
8. After starting your engine, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and then

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
maximum hot and fan control to high

CAUTION speed. WARNING
3. If engine overheating is caused by
. Do not continue to drive if your vehicle climbing a long hill on a hot day, run Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
overheats. Doing so could cause engine the engine at a fast idle (approximately jewelry or clothing to come into contact
damage or a vehicle fire. 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
. To avoid the danger of being scalded, indication returns to normal. engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
never remove the radiator cap or coolant can start at any time.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
reservoir cap while the engine is still for steam or coolant escaping from the
hot. When the radiator cap or coolant radiator before opening the hood. (If 7. After the engine cools down, check the
reservoir cap is removed, pressurized steam or coolant is escaping, turn off coolant level in the reservoir tank with
hot water will spurt out, possibly caus- the engine.) Do not open the hood the engine running. Add coolant to the
ing serious injury. further until no steam or coolant can be reservoir tank if necessary. Have your
. Do not open the hood if steam is coming seen. vehicle repaired at the nearest INFINITI
out. retailer.
5. Open the engine hood.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge WARNING
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take If steam or water is coming from the engine,
the following steps: stand clear to prevent getting burned.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the 6. Visually check drive belts for damage or
shift lever to the P (Park) position. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan
is running. The radiator hoses and
Do not stop the engine.
radiator should not leak water. If cool-
2. Turn off the climate control. Open all ant is leaking or the cooling fan does
the windows, move the heater or air not run, stop the engine.
conditioner temperature control to

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-
vincial in Canada) and local regulations for a flatbed tow truck must be used.
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing . Always attach safety chains before tow-
equipment could damage your vehicle. ing.
Towing instructions are available from an
INFINITI retailer. Local service operators are For information about towing your vehicle
familiar with the applicable laws and behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see
procedures for towing. To assure proper “Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and
towing and to prevent accidental damage consumer information” section of this
to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that manual.
you have a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following pre-
cautions.
WARNING
. Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
. Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or

SCE0925
Two-wheel drive models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models and expensive damage to the transmis-
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be sion. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the with the front wheels raised, always use
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed towing dollies under the rear wheels.
truck as illustrated. . When towing rear wheel drive models
with the front wheels on the ground or
on towing dollies: Place the ignition in
CAUTION the ACC or ON position, and secure the
steering wheel in a straight-ahead posi-
. Never tow automatic transmission mod- tion with a rope or similar device.
els with the rear wheels on the ground
or four wheels on the ground (forward or
backward), as this may cause serious

powertrain.
SCE0907
Four-wheel drive models
Four-wheel Drive (4WD) models
INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be CAUTION
used when towing your vehicle or the
vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as Never tow 4WD models with any of the
illustrated. wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck Never tow the vehicle for a long distance
vehicle) using only the towing hook.
. The towing hook is under tremendous
WARNING force when used to free a stuck vehicle.
Never pull the hook at an angle.
. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. . Always pull the cable straight out from
. Do not spin your tires at high speed. This the front or rear of the vehicle.
could cause them to explode and result . Pulling devices should be routed so they
in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle do not touch any part of the suspension,
could also overheat and be damaged. steering, brake or cooling systems.
. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
SCE0921 Pulling a stuck vehicle straps are not recommended for use in
Front If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, vehicle towing or recovery.
etc., use a tow strap or other device
designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Rocking a stuck vehicle
Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc- If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
tions for the recovery device. etc., use the following procedure:
Attach the tow strap to the towing hook. 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
CAUTION 2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
. Tow chains or cables must be attached 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
only to the main structural members of clear an area around the front tires.
the vehicle or the towing hooks. Other-
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
wise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
backward.
SCE0922
. Use the towing hook only to free a
Rear vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.
. Shift back and forth between R
(Reverse) and D (Drive).
. Apply the accelerator as little as
possible to maintain the rocking
motion.
. Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
. Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.

MEMO

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ................................................. 7-2 Cleaning interior ................................................. 7-4

Washing .......................................................... 7-2 Air fresheners ................................................ 7-5
Waxing ............................................................ 7-3 Floor mats ..................................................... 7-5
Removing spots............................................... 7-3 Seat belts ...................................................... 7-6
Underbody ...................................................... 7-3 Corrosion protection............................................ 7-7
Glass............................................................... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Wheels ............................................................ 7-3 vehicle corrosion ........................................... 7-7
Chrome parts .................................................. 7-4 Environmental factors influence the rate
Tire dressing ................................................... 7-4 of corrosion ................................................... 7-7
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........... 7-7
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING must be taken when removing caked-on
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge dirt or other foreign substances so the
care of it.
and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle paint surface is not scratched or da-
To protect the paint surface, wash your thoroughly using a mild soap, a special maged.
vehicle as soon as you can: vehicle soap or general purpose dishwash- . Lock all doors before going through
. after a rainfall to prevent possible ing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm automatic car wash. Locking doors helps
damage from acid rain (never hot) water. prevent fuel-filler door from opening and
. after driving on coastal roads becoming damaged.
. when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
CAUTION Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean
bugs get on the paint surface . Do not use car washes that use acid in water.
. when dust or mud builds up on the the detergent. Some car washes, espe- Inside flanges, seams and folds on the
surface cially brushless ones, use some acid for doors, hatches and hood are particularly
Whenever possible, store or park your cleaning. The acid may react with some vulnerable to the effects of road salt.
vehicle inside a garage or in a covered plastic vehicle components, causing Therefore, these areas must be regularly
area. them to crack. This could affect their cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in
When it is necessary to park outside, park appearance, and also could cause them the lower edge of the door are open. Spray
in a shady area or protect the vehicle with not to function properly. Always check water under the body and in the wheel
a body cover. with your car wash to confirm that acid wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
is not used. road salt.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body . Do not wash the vehicle with strong Avoid leaving water spots on the paint
cover. household soap, strong chemical deter- surface by using a damp chamois to dry
gents, gasoline or solvents. the vehicle.
. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
. Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
7-2 Appearance and care

WAXING UNDERBODY WHEELS
Regular waxing protects the paint surface In areas where road salt is used in winter, Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
and helps retain new vehicle appearance. the underbody must be cleaned regularly. to maintain their appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove built- This will prevent dirt and salt from building . Clean the inner side of the wheels when
up wax residue and to avoid a weathered up and causing the acceleration of corro- the wheel is changed or the underside
appearance before reapplying wax. sion on the underbody and suspension. of the vehicle is washed.
Before the winter period and again in the
An INFINITI retailer can assist you in . Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
choosing the proper product. spring, the underseal must be checked
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
and, if necessary, re-treated.
. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
washing. Follow the instructions sup- GLASS bead.
plied with the wax. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and . INFINITI recommends that the road
. Do not use a wax containing any dust film from the glass surfaces. It is wheels be waxed to protect against
abrasives, cutting compounds or clea- normal for glass to become coated with a road salt in areas where it is used
ners that may damage the vehicle film after the vehicle is parked in the hot during winter.
finish. sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
Machine compound or aggressive polish- easily remove this film.
ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish
CAUTION
may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
REMOVING SPOTS the wheels.
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, When cleaning the inside of the windows,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive Aluminum alloy wheels
from the paint surface to avoid lasting cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant clea-
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in
damage or staining. Special cleaning ners. They could damage the electrical
a mild soap solution, especially during
products are available at an INFINITI conductors, radio antenna elements or rear
winter months in areas where road salt is
retailer or any automotive accessory window defroster elements.
used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not
stores. removed.
Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
pound may come off the tire while driving
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using
CAUTION and stain the vehicle paint.
a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a
Follow the directions below to avoid stain- the following precautions: clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
ing or discoloring the wheels: . Use a water-based tire dressing. The solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft
. Do not use a cleaner that uses strong coating on the tire dissolves more cloth.
acid or alkali contents to clean the easily with an oil-based tire dressing. Regular care and cleaning is required in
wheels. . Apply a light coat of tire dressing to order to maintain the appearance of the
. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the help prevent it from entering the tire leather.
wheels when they are hot. The wheel tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-
Before using any fabric protector, read the
temperature should be the same as cult to remove).
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
ambient temperature. . Wipe off excess tire dressing using a fabric protectors contain chemicals that
. Rinse the wheel to completely remove dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing may stain or bleach the seat material.
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the is completely removed from the tire
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to
cleaner is applied. tread/grooves.
clean the meter and gauge lens.
. Allow the tire dressing to dry as
recommended by tire dressing manu-
CHROME PARTS facturer. WARNING
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
finish. steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification
TIRE DRESSING
sensors. This can also affect the operation
INFINITI does not recommend the use of of the air bag system and result in serious
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a personal injury.
coating to the tires to help reduce dis-
coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is
applied to the tires, it may react with the
coating and form a compound. This com-

AIR FRESHENERS . Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
CAUTION Most air fresheners use a solvent that specifically designed for use in your
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use vehicle model. See your INFINITI retailer
. Never use benzine, thinner, or any an air freshener, take the following pre- for more information.
similar material. cautions: . Properly position the mats in the floor-
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened . Hanging-type air fresheners can cause well using the floor mat positioning aid.
with water. Never use a rough cloth, permanent discoloration when they See “Floor mat positioning aid” later in
alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place this section.
solvent or paper towel with a chemical the air freshener in a location that
cleaning agent. They will scratch or allows it to hang free and not contact The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can
cause discoloration to the lens. an interior surface. extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
. Do not spray any liquid such as water on . Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
the meter lens. Spraying liquid may on the vents. These products can cause should be maintained with regular clean-
cause the system to malfunction. immediate damage and discoloration ing and replaced if they become exces-
. Small dirt particles can be abrasive and when spilled on interior surfaces. sively worn.
damaging to the leather surfaces and Carefully read and follow the manufac-
should be removed promptly. Do not use turer’s instructions before using air fresh-
saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, eners.
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or
ammonia-based cleaners as they may FLOOR MATS
damage the leather’s natural finish.
. Only use fabric protectors approved by WARNING
INFINITI.
. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on To avoid potential pedal interference that
meter or gauge lens covers. It may may result in a collision or injury:
damage the lens cover. . NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front
position.

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemi-
cal solvents to clean the seat belts, since
these materials may severely weaken the
seat belt webbing.
SAI0038 SAI0052
Front (example) Bracket positions
The illustration shows the location of the
Floor mat positioning aid floor mat brackets.
This model includes front floor mat brack-
ets to act as floor mat positioning aid. SEAT BELTS
NISSAN floor mats have been specially The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
designed for your vehicle model. The floor them with a sponge dampened in a mild
mats have grommet holes in them. To soap solution. Allow the belts to dry
install, simply position the mat by placing completely before using them.
the floor mat bracket through the floor mat
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — seats,
grommet hole while centering the mat in
seat belts and supplemental restraint
the floorwell.
system” section.
Periodically check to make certain that the
mats are properly positioned.

CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI- Temperature

BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION A temperature increase will accelerate the CAUTION
. The accumulation of moisture-retaining rate of corrosion to those parts which are
dirt and debris in body panel sections, not well ventilated. . NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
cavities, and other areas. from the passenger compartment by
. Damage to paint and other protective
Air pollution washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
coatings caused by gravel and stone Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in with a vacuum cleaner.
chips or minor traffic accidents. the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt . Never allow water or other liquids to
use will accelerate the corrosion process. come in contact with electronic compo-
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU- Road salt will also accelerate the disinte- nents inside the vehicle as this may
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION gration of paint surfaces. damage them.
Moisture TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
Chemicals used for road surface deicing
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on CORROSION are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
the vehicle body underside can accelerate . Wash and wax your vehicle often to corrosion and deterioration of underbody
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry keep the vehicle clean. components such as the exhaust system,
completely inside the vehicle, and should . Always check for minor damage to the fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel paint and repair it as soon as possible. pan and fenders.
corrosion.
. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
Relative humidity doors open to avoid water accumula- periodically.
tion.
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of For additional protection against rust and
high relative humidity, especially those . Check the underbody for accumulation corrosion, which may be required in some
areas where the temperatures stay above of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash areas, consult an INFINITI retailer.
freezing where atmospheric pollution ex- with water as soon as possible.
ists, or where road salt is used.

MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement .................................... 8-2 Spark plugs ...................................................... 8-18

Scheduled maintenance .................................. 8-2 Replacing spark plugs ................................. 8-19
General maintenance....................................... 8-2 Air cleaner ........................................................ 8-19
Where to go for service ................................... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ................................... 8-20
General maintenance ........................................... 8-2 Cleaning ...................................................... 8-20
Explanation of maintenance items ................... 8-2 Replacing..................................................... 8-21
Maintenance precautions..................................... 8-5 Rear window wiper blades ................................ 8-22
Engine compartment check locations ................... 8-7 Brakes .............................................................. 8-22
VK56VD engine model..................................... 8-7 Self-adjusting brakes ................................... 8-22
Engine cooling system ......................................... 8-8 Brake pad wear warning .............................. 8-22
Checking engine coolant level ......................... 8-9 Brake booster .............................................. 8-22
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-9 Fuses ................................................................ 8-23
Engine oil .......................................................... 8-10 Engine compartment .................................... 8-23
Checking engine oil level............................... 8-10 Passenger compartment............................... 8-24
Changing engine oil and filter ....................... 8-10 Intelligent Key battery replacement ................... 8-25
Automatic transmission fluid ............................. 8-12 Lights................................................................ 8-28
Power steering fluid........................................... 8-13 Headlights ................................................... 8-29
Brake fluid......................................................... 8-13 Exterior and interior lights ........................... 8-29
Brake fluid .................................................... 8-14 Wheels and tires ............................................... 8-31
Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-15 Tire pressure ............................................... 8-31
Battery .............................................................. 8-16 Tire labeling ................................................ 8-35
Jump starting ................................................ 8-17 Types of tires............................................... 8-37
Variable voltage control system ......................... 8-17 Tire chains................................................... 8-38
Drive belts......................................................... 8-18 Changing wheels and tires........................... 8-38
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance During the normal day-to-day operation of
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
is essential to maintain your vehicle’s good the vehicle, general maintenance should
a few general automotive tools.
mechanical condition, as well as its emis- be performed regularly as prescribed in
These checks or inspections can be done this section. If you detect any unusual
sion and engine performance.
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
It is the owner’s responsibility to make prefer, an INFINITI retailer. check for the cause or have an INFINITI
sure that the scheduled maintenance, as
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE retailer do it promptly. In addition, you
well as general maintenance, is performed.
should notify an INFINITI retailer if you
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one If maintenance service is required or your think that repairs are required.
who can ensure that your vehicle receives vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced by an When performing any checks or mainte-
the proper maintenance. You are a vital link
INFINITI retailer. nance work, see “Maintenance precau-
in the maintenance chain.
tions” later in this section.
INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE cialists and are kept up to date with the EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, both required and latest service information through techni- ITEMS
optional scheduled maintenance items are cal bulletins, service tips, and in-retailer-
Additional information on the following
described and listed in your “INFINITI ship information systems. They are
items with “*” is found later in this
Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must completely qualified to work on INFINITI
section.
refer to that guide to ensure that necessary vehicles before work begins.
maintenance is performed on your vehicle Outside the vehicle
You can be confident that an INFINITI
at regular intervals.
retailer’s service department performs the The maintenance items listed here should
GENERAL MAINTENANCE best job to meet the maintenance require- be performed from time to time, unless
ments on your vehicle. otherwise specified.
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal Doors and engine hood: Check that all
day-to-day operation. They are essential for doors and the engine hood, operate
proper vehicle operation. It is your respon- properly. Also ensure that all latches lock
sibility to perform these procedures reg- securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch
ularly as prescribed. pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make
sure that the secondary latch keeps the
Performing general maintenance checks
hood from opening when the primary latch
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
is released. wear or age. smooth operation and make sure the pedal
When driving in areas using road salt or Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the does not catch or require uneven effort.
other corrosive materials, check lubrication vehicle should pull to either side while Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
frequently. driving on a straight and level road, or if Automatic transmission P (Park) mechan-
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, ism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop there may be a need for wheel alignment. vehicle is held securely with the shift lever
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at in the P (Park) position without applying
other lights are all operating properly and normal highway speeds, wheel balancing any brakes.
installed securely. Also check headlight may be needed. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
aim. For additional information regarding tires, operation. If the brake pedal suddenly
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” goes down further than normal, the pedal
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take
missing, and check for any loose wheel in the INFINITI Warranty Information Book- longer to stop, see an INFINITI retailer
nuts. Tighten if necessary. let. immediately. Keep the floor mat away from
the pedal.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated in Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
accordance with the maintenance log regular basis. Check the windshield at Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
shown in the “INFINITI Service and Main- least every six months for cracks or other the vehicle to one side when applied.
tenance Guide”. damage. Have a damaged windshield Parking brake: Check the parking brake
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge repaired by a qualified repair facility. operation regularly. The vehicle should be
often and always prior to long distance Windshield wiper blades*: Check for securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. the parking brake applied. If the parking
all tires, including the spare, to the brake needs adjusted, see an INFINITI
pressure specified. Check carefully for Inside the vehicle retailer.
damage, cuts or excessive wear. The maintenance items listed here should Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) be checked on a regular basis, such as belt system (for example, buckles, an-
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS when performing periodic maintenance, chors, adjuster and retractors) operate
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cleaning the vehicle, etc. properly and smoothly, and are installed
cap when the tires are replaced due to Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

fraying, wear or damage. It should be between the MAX and MIN turning off the engine. Wait more than 15
Seats: Check seat position controls such as lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera- minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to tures or under severe condition require pan.
ensure they operate smoothly and that all frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
latches lock securely in every position. NOTE: loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
Check that the head restraints/headrests sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
Care should be taken to avoid situations
move up and down smoothly and that the there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im-
that can lead to potential battery dis-
locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all mediately have the exhaust system in-
charge and potential no-start conditions
latched positions. spected by an INFINITI retailer. (See
such as:
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the “Precautions when starting and driving”
1. Installation or extended use of electro-
steering conditions, such as excessive free in the “5. Starting and driving” section for
nic accessories that consume battery
play, hard steering or strange noises. exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
power when the engine is not running
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
all warning lights and chimes are operating etc.) fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
properly. vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
dripping from the air conditioner after use
Windshield defroster: Check that the air only driven short distances.
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
In these cases, the battery may need to be if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the
and in sufficient quantity when operating
charged to maintain battery health. cause and have it corrected immediately.
the heater or air conditioner.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
brake fluid level is between the MAX and Check the level when the fluid is cold,
the wipers and washer operate properly
MIN lines on the reservoir. with the engine off. Check the lines for
and that the wipers do not streak.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Under the hood and vehicle level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
The maintenance items listed here should Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
be checked periodically (for example, each is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
time you check the engine oil or refuel). Make sure the hoses have no cracks,
Engine oil level*: Check the level after deformation, rot or loose connections.
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. parking the vehicle on a level spot and

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or main-
Underbody: The underbody is frequently . It is advisable to secure or remove any
tenance work on your vehicle, always take
exposed to corrosive substances such as loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
those used on icy roads or to control dust. such as rings, watches, etc. before
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The
It is very important to remove these working on your vehicle.
following are general precautions which
substances, otherwise rust will form on
the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around
should be closely observed. . Always wear eye protection whenever
the exhaust system. At the end of winter, you work on your vehicle.
the underbody should be thoroughly WARNING . If you must run the engine in an
flushed with plain water, being careful to enclosed space such as a garage, be
clean those areas where mud and dirt may . Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply sure there is proper ventilation for
accumulate. For additional information, the parking brake securely and block the exhaust gases to escape.
see “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appear- wheels to prevent the vehicle from . Never get under the vehicle while it is
ance and care” section. moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park). supported only by a jack. If it is
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there . Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF necessary to work under the vehicle,
is adequate fluid in the reservoir. or LOCK position when performing any support it with safety stands.
parts replacement or repairs. . Keep smoking materials, flame and
. Never connect or disconnect the battery sparks away from fuel tank and the
or any transistorized component while battery.
the ignition switch is in the ON position. . Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
. Never leave the engine or automatic matic engine cooling fan. It may come on
transmission related component har- at any time without warning, even if the
nesses disconnected while the ignition ignition key is in the OFF position and
switch is in the ON position. the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
. If you must work with the engine battery cable before working near the
running, keep your hands, clothing, hair fan.
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts. . On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
an INFINITI retailer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the could affect your warranty coverage. If in
engine is off. doubt about any servicing, we recommend
that it be done by an INFINITI retailer.
CAUTION
. Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil
and coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids
can damage the environment. Always
conform to local regulations for disposal
of vehicle fluid.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section gives instructions regarding only
those items which are relatively easy for an
owner to perform.
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also
available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service
Manual order information” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion.)
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
12. Air cleaner
SDI2585
VK56VD ENGINE MODEL 6. Brake fluid reservoir

1. Window washer fluid reservoir 7. Fuse/fusible link holder
2. Fuse/fusible link holder 8. Battery
3. Engine oil dipstick 9. Radiator filler cap
4. Power steering fluid reservoir 10. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Engine oil filler cap 11. Drive belts

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the

. The life expectancy of the factory-fill
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% CAUTION coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
ant (blue) and 50% water to provide year- . Never use any cooling system additives coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
round anti-freeze and coolant protection. such as radiator sealer. Additives may Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including
The antifreeze solution contains rust and clog the cooling system and cause Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine damage to the engine, transmission Coolant (green), or the use of non-
cooling system additives are not neces- and/or cooling system. distilled water will reduce the life
sary.
. When adding or replacing coolant, be expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Refer to the INFINITI Service and Main-
WARNING Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva- tenance Guide for more details.
lent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
. Never remove the radiator or coolant freeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to
reservoir cap when the engine is hot. provide antifreeze protection to −348F
Wait until the engine and radiator cool (−378C). If additional freeze protection is
down. Serious burns could be caused by needed due to weather where you
high pressure fluid escaping from the operate your vehicle, add Genuine
radiator. See precautions in “If your NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case of (blue) concentrate following the direc-
emergency” section of this manual. tions on the container. If an equivalent
. The radiator is equipped with a pressure coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
type radiator cap. To prevent engine Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used,
damage, use only a genuine NISSAN follow the coolant manufacturer’s in-
radiator cap. structions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to −348F (−378C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling system.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life Serious burns could be caused by high
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is pressure fluid escaping from the radia-
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. tor.
Mixing any other type of coolant or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the life . Avoid direct skin contact with used
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
to the INFINITI Service and Maintenance thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
Guide for more details. soon as possible.
If the cooling system requires coolant . Keep coolant out of reach of children and
frequently, have it checked by an INFINITI pets.
retailer.
Engine coolant must be disposed of
SDI2511 CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT properly. Check your local regulations.
Major cooling system repairs should be
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
performed by an INFINITI retailer. The
Check the coolant level in the reservoir service procedures can be found in the
when the engine is cold. If the coolant appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.
level is below MIN * 2 , open the reservoir
Improper servicing can result in reduced
tank cap and add coolant up to the MAX * 1
heater performance and engine overheat-
level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check
ing.
the coolant level in the radiator when the
engine is cold. If there is insufficient
coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator WARNING
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir tank up to the . To avoid the danger of being scalded,
MAX level * 1 . never change the coolant when the
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine is hot.
engine coolant. . Never remove the radiator cap or coolant

ENGINE OIL
recommended oil through the opening. CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Do not overfill *
3 .
Vehicle set-up
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
It is normal to add some oil between oil
apply the parking brake.
maintenance intervals or during the break-
in period, depending on the severity of 2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-
operating conditions. ing temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than
15 minutes.
CAUTION 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack
Oil level should be checked regularly.
stands.
Operating the engine with an insufficient
SDI2531 . Place the safety jack stands under
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty. the vehicle jack-up points.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL . A suitable adapter should be at-
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and tached to the jack stand saddle.
apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the engine undercover.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operat- . Remove the bolts that hold the
ing temperature. undercover in place.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
CAUTION
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Make sure the correct lifting and support
Reinsert it all the way. points are used to avoid vehicle damage.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be within the
range * 1 . If the oil level is below * 2 ,
remove the oil filler cap and pour
. Check your local regulations.
Drain plug tightening torque:
4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the 22 to 29 ft-lb
engine oil filter change is needed.) (29 to 39 N·m)
Loosen the oil filter *
2 with an oil filter
Do not use excessive force.
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning
it by hand. 9. Refill engine with recommended oil and
install the oil filler cap securely.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting
surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
CAUTION The dipstick must be inserted in place to
prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole
SDI2528
Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket while filling the engine with oil.
remaining on the mounting surface of the
Engine oil and filter engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine
See “Capacities and recommended
damage.
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical
plug. and consumer information” section for
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with drain and refill capacity. The drain and
2. Remove the oil filler cap. clean engine oil. refill capacity depends on the oil
3. Remove the drain plug * 1 with a 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a temperature and drain time. Use these
wrench and completely drain the oil. slight resistance is felt, then tighten specifications for reference only. Al-
additionally more than 2/3 turn. ways use the dipstick to determine the
CAUTION Oil filter tightening torque: proper amount of oil in the engine.
11 to 15 ft-lb 10. Start the engine and check for leakage
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the (15 to 21 N·m) around the drain plug and the oil filter.
engine oil is hot. 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with Correct as required.
a new washer. Securely tighten the 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than
. Waste oil must be disposed of 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the
drain plug with a wrench.
properly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
Contact an INFINITI retailer if replacement
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner is required.
After the operation as soon as possible.
1. Install the engine undercover into . Keep used engine oil out of reach of
position as the following steps. children. CAUTION
a. Pull the center of the small plastic . Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF.
clip out. Do not mix with other fluids.
b. Hold the engine undercover into . Using automatic transmission fluid other
position. than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will
c. Insert the clip through the under- cause deterioration in driveability and
cover into the hole in the frame, then automatic transmission durability, and
push the center of the clip in to lock may damage the automatic transmis-
the clip in place. sion, which is not covered by the INFINITI
new vehicle limited warranty.
d. Install the other bolts that hold the
undercover in place. Be careful not
to strip the bolts or over-tighten
them.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
ground.
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
WARNING
. Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used
oil. If skin contact is made, wash

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID
For further brake fluid specification infor-
mation, see “Capacities and recommended
CAUTION fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of this
. Do not overfill. manual.
. Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system. The
use of improper fluids can damage the
SDI1765A
brake system and affect the vehicle’s
stopping ability.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. . Be sure to clean the filler cap before
The fluid level should be checked using the removing.
HOT range (* 1 : HOT MAX., * 2 : HOT MIN.) . Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
at fluid temperatures of 122 to 1768F (50 stored carefully in marked containers out
to 808C) or using the COLD range (* 3 : of the reach of children.
COLD MAX., * 4 : COLD MIN.) at fluid
temperatures of 32 to 868F (0 to 308C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Re-
CAUTION
move the cap and fill through the opening.
. Do not add brake fluid with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position or the
engine running. Doing so could make
the brake fluid overfill when the ignition
switch is turned off.

. Do not spill the fluid on painted “Capacities and recommended fuel/
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If lubricants” in the “9. Technical and
fluid is spilled, wash the surface with consumer information” section for the
water. recommended types of brake fluid.)
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is placed in the
“ON” position after adding brake fluid up
to the MAX line * 2 in the reservoir, the
brake fluid decreases below the MAX line
*2 . This is normal.
If fluid must be added frequently, the

system should be checked by an INFINITI
SDI2513
retailer.
BRAKE FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid is below the MIN line *1 or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine
NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
*2 .
To add brake fluid:

1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position.
2. Depress and release the foot brake
pedal more than 40 times.
3. Open the reservoir filler cap and add
brake fluid up to the MAX line *
2 . (See

WINDOW WASHER FLUID
Add a washer solvent to the washer for Do not use the window washer reservoir
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the and water.
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture
ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of window washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
SDI2517
CAUTION
WARNING . Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution. This
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be may result in damage to the paint.
stored carefully in marked containers out . Do not fill the window washer reservoir
of the reach of children. tank with washer fluid concentrates at
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir based washer fluid concentrates may
periodically. Add window washer fluid permanently stain the grille if spilled
when the low window washer fluid warning while filling the window washer reser-
illuminates. voir tank.
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, . Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour water to the manufacturer’s recom-
the window washer fluid into the tank mended levels before pouring the fluid
opening. into the window washer reservoir tank.

BATTERY
. Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of ated by the battery is explosive. Do not
baking soda and water. allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
. Make certain the terminal connections eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After
are clean and securely tightened. touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30
your hands. If the acid contacts your
days or longer, disconnect the negative
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush
(−) battery terminal cable to prevent
with water for at least 15 minutes and
discharging it.
seek medical attention.
NOTE: . Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
Care should be taken to avoid situations the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
that can lead to potential battery dis- cause a higher load on the battery which
charge and potential no-start conditions can generate heat, reduce battery life, DI0137MA
such as: and in some cases lead to an explosion.
1. Installation or extended use of electro- Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove
. When working on or near a battery, the battery cover if it is necessary). It
nic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
always wear suitable eye protection and should be between the UPPER LEVEL * 1
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

remove all jewelry. and LOWER LEVEL * 2 lines.
. Battery posts, terminals and related If it is necessary to add fluid, add only
etc.)
accessories contain lead and lead com- distilled water to bring the level to the
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or pounds. Wash hands after handling.
only driven short distances. indicator in each filler opening. Do not
. Keep the battery out of the reach of overfill.
In these cases, the battery may need to be children.
charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
. Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump CAUTION
starting” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by . Do not ground accessories directly to the
jump starting, the battery may have to be battery terminal. Doing so will bypass
replaced. Contact an INFINITI retailer. the variable voltage control system and
the vehicle battery may not charge
completely.
. Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
SDI1480C The variable voltage control system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge
1. Remove the cell plugs *
A . from the battery and controls voltage
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER generated by the generator.
LEVEL *
1 line.
If the side of the battery is not clear,

check the distilled water level by
looking directly above the cell; the
condition * 1 indicates OK and the
conditions *2 needs more to be added.
3. Tighten cell plugs *

A .
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS
ess. If the belt is in poor condition or

loose, have it replaced or adjusted by WARNING
an INFINITI retailer.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for Be sure the engine and the ignition switch
condition and tension in accordance are off and that the parking brake is
with the maintenance schedule in your engaged securely.
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
SDI2533 damage the spark plugs.
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Water pump
3. Alternator
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Air conditioner compressor
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belts.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loosen-

AIR CLEANER
Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.
SDI2020 SDI2515
To remove the filter, release the lock pins

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI
*1 and pull the unit upward * 2 .
retailer for servicing. The filter element should not be cleaned

and reused. Replace it according to the
Iridium-tipped spark plugs maintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Ser-
It is not necessary to replace the iridium- vice and Maintenance Guide” for mainte-
tipped spark plugs as frequently as the nance intervals. When replacing the filter,
conventional type spark plugs since they wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing
will last much longer. Follow the main- and the cover with a damp cloth.
tenance schedule in “INFINITI Service and
Maintenance Guide”, but do not reuse WARNING
them by cleaning or regapping.
. Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
cleans the air, it stops flame if the CLEANING

engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the If your windshield is not clear after using
engine backfires, you could be burned. the windshield washer or if a wiper blade
Do not drive with the air cleaner chatters when running, wax or other
removed, and be careful when working material may be on the blade or wind-
on the engine with the air cleaner shield.
removed.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
attempt to start the engine with the air windshield is clean if beads do not form
cleaner removed. Doing so could result when rinsing with clear water.
in serious injury.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild
detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage
the windshield and impair driver vision.

SDI2048
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION
1. Pull the wiper arm.
. After wiper blade replacement, return
2. Push the release tab * A , and then
the wiper arm to its original position;
move the wiper blade down the wiper
arm * 1 while pushing the release tab otherwise it may be damaged when the SDI2516
to remove. hood is opened.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the . Make sure the wiper blades contact the Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle
wiper arm until a click sounds. glass; otherwise the arm may be da- *A . This may cause improper windshield
maged from wind pressure. washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged,

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is
remove any objects with a needle or small
in the groove.
pin * B . Be careful not to damage the
nozzle.

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES BRAKES
Contact an INFINITI retailer if checking or If the brakes do not operate properly, have occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
replacement is required. the brakes checked by an INFINITI retailer. noise may be heard. Occasional brake
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES noise during light to moderate stops is
normal and does not affect the function or
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjust-
performance of the brake system.
ing brakes.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time
be followed. For additional information,
the brake pedal is applied.
see the maintenance log section of your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”
WARNING for maintenance intervals.
See an INFINITI retailer for a brake system

BRAKE BOOSTER
check if the brake pedal height does not Check the brake booster function as
return to normal. follows:
1. With the engine off, depress and
release the foot brake pedal more than
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING 20 times. When the foot brake pedal
The disc brake pads have audible wear movement (distance of travel) remains
warnings. When a brake pad requires the same from one pedal application to
replacement, it will make a high pitched the next, continue on to the next step.
scraping sound when the vehicle is in
2. While depressing the foot brake pedal,
motion. This scraping sound will first occur
start the engine.
only when the brake pedal is depressed.
After more wear of the brake pad, the 3. With the foot brake pedal depressed,
sound will always be heard even if the stop the engine. Keep the pedal de-
brake pedal is not depressed. Have the pressed for about 30 seconds.
brakes checked as soon as possible if the 4. Run the engine for 1 minute without
wear warning sound is heard. depressing the foot brake pedal, then
Under some driving or climate conditions, turn it off. Depress the foot brake pedal

FUSES
several times. The pedal travel distance ENGINE COMPARTMENT

will decrease gradually with each de-
pression as the hydraulic pressure
decreases. CAUTION
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
the brakes checked by an INFINITI retailer.
amperage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not

operate, check for an open fuse.
SDI2518 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to
the OFF or LOCK position and the
headlight switch is turned to OFF.
2. Open the engine hood and remove the
cover on the battery.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder
cover *
1 , *
2 or *
3 .
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
SDI2532

SDI1754 JVM0200X
5. If the fuse is open *A , replace it with a
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 2. Open the fuse box lid.
new fuse * B . Spare fuses are stored in
the passenger compartment fuse box. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the CAUTION *A .
electrical system checked and repaired 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new
by an INFINITI retailer. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower fuse.
amperage rating than that specified on the 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the
Fusible links fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system checked and repaired
If any electrical equipment does not electrical system or cause a fire. by an INFINITI retailer. Spare fuses are
operate and fuses are in good condition, stored in the fuse box.
check the fusible links. If any of these If any electrical equipment does not
fusible links are melted, replace only with operate, check for an open fuse.
genuine INFINITI parts.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to
the OFF or LOCK position and the
headlight switch is turned to OFF.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If any electrical equipment does not

operate, remove the extended storage fuse CAUTION
switch and check for an open fuse.
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
NOTE:
the battery and removed parts.
If the extended storage fuse switch mal-
functions or if the fuse is open, it is not
necessary to replace the switch. In this
case, remove the extended storage fuse
switch and replace it with a new fuse of
the same rating.
How to remove the extended storage fuse
switch:
SDI2704
1. To remove the extended storage fuse
switch, be sure the ignition switch is in
Extended storage fuse switch (if so
the OFF or LOCK position.
equipped)
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the
To reduce battery drain, the extended
OFF position.
storage fuse switch comes from the factory
switched off. Prior to delivery of your 3. Remove the fuse box cover.
vehicle, the switch is pushed in (switched 4. Pinch the locking tabs * 1 found on
on) and should always remain on. each side of the storage fuse switch.
If the extended storage fuse switch is not 5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight out
pushed in (switched on), the “SHIPPING from the fuse box * 2 .
MODE ON, PUSH STORAGE FUSE” warning
may appear on the dot matrix liquid crystal
display (if so equipped). See “Dot matrix
liquid crystal display” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.

a cloth to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or
equivalent.
. Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as it could cause a
malfunction.
. Hold the battery by the edges.
Holding the battery across the con-
tact points will seriously deplete the
storage capacity.
. Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case. SDI2452
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts * 1 , and then push them together
until it is securely closed *
2 .
5. Push the buttons two or three times to

check its operation.
See an INFINITI retailer if you need any
SDI2451 assistance for replacement.
FCC Notice:
Replace the battery as follows:
For USA:
1. Release the lock knob at the back of the
Intelligent Key and remove the mechan- This device complies with Part 15 of the
ical key. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit
may not cause harmful interference, and
of the corner and twist it to separate
the upper part from the lower part. Use
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and
cause undesired operation of the device.

LIGHTS
13. Rear armrest light

14. Rear personal light
15. Rear combination light (tail/stop/turn
signal/side marker light)
16. Tail light
17. Back-up light
18. License plate light
SDI2606
1. Map light 7. Puddle light

2. Front parking light 8. Step light
3. Front side marker light 9. Side turn signal light
4. Front turn signal light 10. Cargo light
5. Fog light 11. High-mounted stop light
6. Headlight (high-beam, low-beam) 12. Front armrest light

HEADLIGHTS EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Replacing Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of Headlight*
the exterior lights in the rain or in a car High/Low beams (Xenon) 35 D2S
wash. A temperature difference between Front turn signal light* 21 WY21W
the inside and the outside of the lens Fog light* 35 H8
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If Front parking light* 5 W5W
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
Front side marker light* 5 W5W
contact an INFINITI retailer. Rear combination light*
Xenon headlight bulb: tail 5 W5W
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI back-up 16 W16W
retailer. stop/tail LED —
side marker LED —
WARNING turn signal 21 WY21W
License plate light 5 W5W
HIGH VOLTAGE Puddle light* LED —
Front and rear armrest light* LED —
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-
Map light 8 —
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
Rear personal light 8 —
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-
Cargo light 8 —
semble. Always have your xenon headlights
replaced at an INFINITI retailer. For addi- Vanity mirror light 2 —
tional information, see “Headlight and turn Step light* 8 —
signal switch” in the “2. Instruments and High-mounted stop light* LED —
controls” section. *: See an INFINITI retailer for replacement.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI retailer for the latest
information about parts.

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E
or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove
the lens and/or cover.
SDI2030
Map light
SDI1679
SDI2031
Rear personal light

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the Tire inflation pressure
“6. In case of emergency” section.
Check the pressure of the tires
TIRE PRESSURE (including the spare) often and al-
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ways prior to long distance trips. The
(TPMS) recommended tire pressure specifi-
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire cations are shown on the Tire and
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It Loading Information label under the
monitors tire pressure of all tires except “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The
the spare. When the low tire pressure Tire and Loading Information label is
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE affixed to the driver side center pillar.
PRESSURE warning appears in the dot
matrix liquid crystal display, one or more Tire pressures should be checked
SDI1729
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. regularly because:
Cargo light
The TPMS will activate only when the . Most tires naturally lose air over
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH time.
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not
. Tires can lose air suddenly when
detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a flat tire while driving). driven over potholes or other
objects or if the vehicle strikes a
For more details, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “2. Instruments and curb while parking.
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor- The tire pressures should be checked
ing System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and when the tires are cold. The tires are
driving” section and “Tire Pressure Mon- considered COLD after the vehicle
itoring System (TPMS) ” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section.
has been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at
SDI2032 moderate speeds.
Vanity mirror light

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator operating conditions due to pre-
provides visual and audible signals mature tire failure, or unfavorable
outside the vehicle for inflating the handling characteristics and could
tires to the recommended COLD tire also lead to a serious accident.
pressure. (See “TPMS with Tire Infla- Loading beyond the specified ca-
tion Indicator” in the “5. Starting and pacity may also result in failure of
driving” section about the TPMS with other vehicle components.
Tire Inflation Indicator.)
. Before taking a long trip, or
Incorrect tire pressure, including whenever you heavily load your
under inflation, may adversely affect vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
tire life and vehicle handling. to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
WARNING . For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
. Improperly inflated tires can fail Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
suddenly and cause an accident. Safety Information” (Canada) in
. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating the Warranty Information Booklet.
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.
S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The vehicle weight capacity is
indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label. Do not load
your vehicle beyond this capacity.
Overloading your vehicle may re-
sult in reduced tire life, unsafe
*
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are consid-
ered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation
is set by the manufacturer to
provide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-
ity, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
*
5 Tire size — see “Tire labeling”
*
6 Spare tire size or compact spare
tire size (if so equipped)
SDI2496
Tire and Loading Information label Technical and consumer informa-

*1 Seating capacity: The maximum tion” section.
number of occupants that can be *
3 Original size: The size of the tires
seated in the vehicle. originally installed on the vehicle
*2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle at the factory.
loading information”in the “9.
3. Remove the gauge. COLD TIRE
4. Read the tire pressure on the SIZE INFLATION
PRESSURE
gauge stem and compare it to
the specification shown on the P275/50R22 240 kPa,
FRONT 111H 35 PSI
Tire and Loading Information la- ORIGINAL
bel. TIRE P275/60R20 240 kPa,
114H 35 PSI
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the P275/50R22 240 kPa,
core of the valve stem briefly with REAR ORI- 111H 35 PSI
GINAL TIRE P275/60R20 240 kPa,
the tip of the gauge stem to
114H 35 PSI
SDI1949 release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air 275/60R20 240 kPa,
Checking the tire pressure as needed. 115M 35 PSI
SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the valve stem cap from P275/60R20 240 kPa,
6. Install the valve stem cap. 35 PSI
the tire. 114H
7. Check the pressure of all other
2. P r e s s t h e p r e s s u r e g a u g e tires, including the spare.
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, re-
position the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.

gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (16): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94):
This number is the tire’s load
index. It is a measurement of
how much weight each tire can
SDI1575 SDI1606 support. You may not find this
Example Example information on all tires because it
*
1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16
is not required by law.
TIRE LABELING
94H)
Federal law requires tire manufac- 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is
turers to place standardized informa- not drive the vehicle faster than
designed for passenger vehicles.
tion on the sidewall of all tires. This the tire speed rating.
(Not all tires have this informa-
information identifies and describes
tion.)
the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides the tire 2. Three-digit number (215): This
identification number (TIN) for safety number gives the width in milli-
standard certification. The TIN can be meters of the tire from sidewall
used to identify the tire in case of a edge to sidewall edge.
recall. 3. Two-digit number (60): This num-
ber, known as the aspect ratio,

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code missible inflation pressure.
(Optional) *
5 Maximum load rating
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manu- This number indicates the max-
facture imum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by
6. Four numbers represent the week
the tire. When replacing the tires
and year the tire was built. For
on the vehicle, always use a tire
example, the numbers 3103
that has the same load rating as
means the 31st week of 2003. If
the factory installed tire.
these numbers are missing, then
look on the other sidewall of the
*
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube
type”
SDI1607 tire.
Indicates whether the tire re-
Example *3 Tire ply composition and materi-
*
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) al
quires an inner tube (“tube
for a new tire (example: DOT XX type”) or not (“tubeless”).
The number of layers or plies of
XX XXX XXXX) rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
*
7 The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown, if
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- Tire manufacturers also must
the tire has radial structure.
ment of Transportation”. The sym- indicate the materials in the tire,
*
8 Manufacturer or brand name
bol can be placed above, below or which include steel, nylon, Manufacturer or brand name is
to the left or right of the Tire polyester, and others. shown.
Identification Number. *4 Maximum permissible inflation
pressure Other tire-related terminology:
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark This number is the greatest In addition to the many terms that
amount of air pressure that are defined throughout this section,
3. Two-digit code: Tire size Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum per- sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears manu- specified by INFINITI could affect the all four wheels.
facturer, brand and/or model name proper operation of the TPMS. Snow tires
molding that is higher or deeper than . For additional information regarding If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
the same molding on the other side- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety select tires equivalent in size and load
wall of the tire, or (2) the outward Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- rating to the original equipment tires. If
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- you do not, it can adversely affect the
facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
mation Booklet. safety and handling of your vehicle.
tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
All season tires ratings than factory equipped tires and
mounted on a vehicle.
INFINITI specifies all season tires on some may not match the potential maximum
TYPES OF TIRES models to provide good performance all vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum
year, including snowy and icy road condi- speed rating of the tire.
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL If you install snow tires, they must be the
WARNING SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on same size, brand, construction and tread
the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better pattern on all four wheels.
. When changing or replacing tires, be snow traction than All Season tires and
sure all four tires are of the same type For additional traction on icy roads,
may be more appropriate in some areas.
(Example: Summer, All Season or Snow) studded tires may be used. However, some
and construction. An INFINITI retailer Summer tires U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohi-
may be able to help you with information bit their use. Check local, state and
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
about tire type, size, speed rating and provincial laws before installing studded
models to provide superior performance on
availability. tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
dry roads. Summer tire performance is
studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces,
. Replacement tires may have a lower substantially reduced in snow and ice.
may be poorer than that of non-studded
speed rating than the factory equipped Summer tires do not have the tire traction
snow tires.
tires, and may not match the potential rating M&S on the tire sidewall.
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
the maximum speed rating of the tire. or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the
. Replacing tires with those not originally use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on

TIRE CHAINS and performance may be adversely af-
Use of tire chains may be prohibited fected.
according to location. Check the local laws Tire chains must be installed only on the
before installing tire chains. When instal- rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
ling tire chains, make sure they are the Never install tire chains on the full-size
proper size for the tires on your vehicle and temporary use only spare tire (if so
are installed according to the chain man- equipped).
ufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used
with tire chains in such conditions can
on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle
cause damage to the various mechanisms
clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”
of the vehicle due to some overstress.
chains are designed to meet the SAE
standard minimum clearances between SDI1662
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension
or body component required to accommo- CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
date the use of a winter traction device (tire
chains or cables). The minimum clearances Tire rotation
are determined using the factory equipped INFINITI recommends rotating the
tire size. Other types may damage your
tires in accordance with the main-
vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom-
mended by the tire chain manufacturer to tenance log shown in the “INFINITI
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the Service and Maintenance Guide”.
tire chain must be secured or removed to (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of
prevent the possibility of whipping action emergency” section for tire replacing
damage to the fenders or underbody. If procedures.)
possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle
when using tire chains. In addition, drive at As soon as possible, tighten the
a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle wheel nuts to the specified torque
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque: the Warranty Information Booklet.
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-
tened to the specification at all
times. It is recommended that wheel
nuts be tightened to the specifica-
tion at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
. After rotating the tires, check and SDI1663
adjust the tire pressure. 1. Wear indicator
. Retighten the wheel nuts when 2. Wear indicator location mark
the vehicle has been driven for Tire wear and damage
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
WARNING
. Do not include the full-size tem-
porary use only spare tire (if so . Tires should be periodically in-
equipped) in the tire rotation. spected for wear, cracking, bul-
. For additional information regard- ging or objects caught in the
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire bulging or deep cuts are found,
Safety Information” (Canada) in the tire(s) should be replaced.

. The original tires have built-in Replacing wheels and tires may cause loss of vehicle control in
tread wear indicators. When wear When replacing a tire, use the same size, some driving conditions and cause an
tread design, speed rating and load carry- accident and personal injury.
indicators are visible, the tire(s)
ing capacity as originally equipped. (See . If the wheels are changed for any
should be replaced. “Specifications” in the “9. Technical and reason, always replace with wheels
. Tires degrade with age and use. consumer information” section for recom- which have the same off-set dimension.
Have tires, including the spare, mended types and sizes of tires and Wheels of a different off-set could cause
wheels.) premature tire wear, degrade vehicle
over 6 years old checked by a
handling characteristics and/or interfer-
qualified technician, because
ence with the brake discs/drums. Such
some tire damage may not be WARNING interference can lead to decreased brak-
obvious. Replace the tires as ing efficiency and/or early brake pad/
. The use of tires other than those
necessary to prevent tire failure recommended or the mixed use of tires shoe wear. See “Wheels and tires” in the
and possible personal injury. “9. Technical and consumer information”
of different brands, construction (bias,
section of this manual for wheel off-set
. Improper service of the spare tire bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
dimensions.
may result in serious personal can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
injury. If it is necessary to repair clearance, tire chain clearance, speed- is replaced, the TPMS will not function
the spare tire, contact an INFINITI ometer calibration, headlight aim and and the low tire pressure warning light
retailer. bumper height. Some of these effects will flash for approximately 1 minute.
may lead to accidents and could result in The light will remain on after 1 minute.
. For additional information regard-
serious personal injury. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire possible for tire replacement and/or
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire . For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models, if
your vehicle was originally equipped system resetting.
Safety Information” (Canada) in with 4 tires that were the same size . Replacing tires with those not originally
the Warranty Information Booklet. and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 specified by INFINITI could affect the
tires, install the new tires on the rear proper operation of the TPMS.
axle. Placing new tires on the front axle . Do not install a damaged or deformed

If excessive tire wear is found, it is Spare tire
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired.
recommended that all four tires be re-
Such wheels or tires could have struc- When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY
placed with tires of the same size, brand,
tural damage and could fail without USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will
construction and tread pattern. The tire
warning. not function.
pressure and wheel alignment should also
. The use of retread tire is not recom- be checked and corrected as necessary. Spare tire (FULL-SIZE TEMPORARY USE
mended. Contact an INFINITI retailer. ONLY spare tire) (Applies ONLY to vehicles
. For additional information regarding equipped with P275/50R22 tires):
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Wheel balance
Observe the following precautions if the
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle full-size temporary use only spare tire must
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- handling and tire life. Even with regular be used, otherwise your vehicle could be
mation Booklet. use, wheels can get out of balance. There- damaged or involved in an accident.
fore, they should be balanced as required.
Four-wheel Drive (4WD) models Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle. WARNING
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
CAUTION could lead to mechanical damage. . The full-size temporary use only spare
tire should be used for emergency use. It
For additional information regarding tires, should be replaced with the standard
. Always use tires of the same type, size, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or tire at the first opportunity to avoid
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) possible tire or differential damage
radial), and tread pattern on all four in the INFINITI Warranty Information Book-
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a let. . Drive carefully while the spare tire is
circumference difference between tires installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
on the front and rear axles which will Care of wheels braking while driving. The vehicle driv-
cause excessive tire wear and may See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appear- ing performance may be affected when
damage the transmission, transfer case ance and care” section for details about driving on wet or snow covered roads.
and differential gears. care of the wheels. . When the spare tire is installed, the
. ONLY use spare tires specified for the following systems may not work cor-
4WD model. rectly.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) CAUTION
— Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Sys-
Do not use tire chains on the spare tire. Tire
tem
chains will not fit properly and may cause
. Periodically check spare tire inflation damage to the vehicle.
pressure. Always keep the spare tire
inflated to the pressure specification
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label. For Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label location, see “Tire and Loading
Information label” in the index of this
manual.
. With the spare tire installed do not drive
your vehicle at speeds faster than 50
MPH (80 km/h).
. When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the spare tire should be
used on the front wheels and original
tire used on the rear wheels (drive
wheels). Use tire chains only on the
two rear original tires.
. Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
. Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.

9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants....... 9-2 Vehicle loading information............................... 9-14

Fuel information .............................................. 9-4 Terms .......................................................... 9-14
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ......... 9-6 Vehicle load capacity ................................... 9-15
Air conditioning system refrigerant and Securing the load ........................................ 9-16
lubricant recommendations ............................. 9-7 Loading tips................................................. 9-17
Specifications ...................................................... 9-8 Measurement of weights.............................. 9-17
Engine............................................................. 9-8 Towing a trailer ................................................. 9-18
Wheels and tires ............................................. 9-9 Maximum load limits ................................... 9-18
Dimensions ................................................... 9-10 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/
When traveling or registering your vehicle in maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) ............. 9-20
another country ................................................. 9-11 Towing load/specification ............................ 9-22
Vehicle identification ......................................... 9-11 Towing safety............................................... 9-22
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate....... 9-11 Flat towing................................................... 9-29
Vehicle identification number Uniform tire quality grading .............................. 9-30
(chassis number)........................................... 9-11 Treadwear.................................................... 9-30
Engine serial number .................................... 9-12 Traction AA, A, B and C................................ 9-30
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......... 9-12 Temperature A, B and C ............................... 9-30
Emission control information label ................ 9-12 Emission control system warranty ..................... 9-31
Tire and loading information label................. 9-13 Reporting safety defects.................................... 9-31
Air conditioner specification label.................. 9-13 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
Installing front license plate .............................. 9-13 (I/M) test .......................................................... 9-32
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................... 9-33
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information .............................................. 9-34
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/
LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended specifications
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 26 gal 21-5/8 gal 98.4 See “Fuel information” later in this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
With oil filter change 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt 6.5 . Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent*2
6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2 . Engine oil with API Certification Mark*3
Without oil filter change
. Viscosity SAE 5W-30*3
Cooling system
With reservoir 15-3/4 qt 13-1/8 qt 14.9 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*4
Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid for ATX90A transfer*5
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-
Front differential gear oil — — — 90*6
Rear differential gear oil — — — API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90*7
Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8. Maintenance Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*8
Brake fluid and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*9 or equivalent DOT 3
Suspension fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Hydraulic Suspension Fluid*10
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*11
Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent
Window washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*2: INFINITI recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at INFINITI retailers.
*3: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.
*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*5: Using transfer fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid will damage the transfer, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*6: For hot climates, Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F (08C).
*7: See an INFINITI retailer for service for synthetic oil.
*8: DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used.
9-2 Technical and consumer information

*9: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI retailer.
*10: Using Hydraulic Suspension fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Hydraulic Suspension fluid will damage the Hydraulic Suspension, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
See an INFINITI retailer for recommended hydraulic suspension fluid.
*11: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
Technical and consumer information 9-3

FUEL INFORMATION adversely affect the emission control use reformulated gasoline when available.
devices and systems of the vehicle. Gasoline containing oxygenates
VK56VD engine
Damage caused by such fuel is not
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
covered by the INFINITI new vehicle
premium gasoline with an octane rating of ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and
limited warranty.
at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number methanol with or without advertising their
(Research octane number 96). . U.S. government regulations require presence. INFINITI does not recommend the
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- use of fuels of which the oxygenate content
If unleaded premium gasoline is not fied by a small, square, orange and black
available, you may use unleaded regular and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI
label with the common abbreviation or cannot be readily determined. If in doubt,
gasoline with an octane rating of at least the appropriate percentage for that
87 AKI number (Research octane number ask your service station manager.
region.
91), but you may notice a decrease in If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
performance. please take the following precautions as
Gasoline specifications the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
INFINITI recommends using gasoline that performance problems and/or fuel system
CAUTION meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) damage.
specifications where it is available. Many . The fuel should be unleaded and have
. Using a fuel other than that specified of the automobile manufacturers devel- an octane rating no lower than that
could adversely affect the emission oped this specification to improve emis- recommended for unleaded gasoline.
control system, and may also affect sion system and vehicle performance. Ask
warranty coverage. . If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a
your service station manager if the gaso- methanol blend, is used, it should
. Under no circumstances should a leaded line meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
gasoline be used, because this will (WWFC) specifications. (MTBE may, however, be added up to
damage the three-way catalyst. 15%.)
Reformulated gasoline
. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your . E-15 fuel contains more than 10%
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to Some fuel suppliers are now producing
oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E- reformulated gasolines. These gasolines
affect the emission control devices
85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically are specially designed to reduce vehicle
and systems of the vehicle and should
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can emissions. INFINITI supports efforts to-
not be used. Damage caused by such
wards cleaner air and suggests that you
fuel is not covered by the INFINITI new gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles the fuel system and engine.
vehicle limited warranty. designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-
. If a methanol blend is used, it should 15 in your vehicle. U.S. government Octane rating tips
contain no more than 5% methanol regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It pumps to be identified with small, square, rating lower than recommended above can
should also contain a suitable amount orange and black label with the common cause persistent, heavy spark knock.
of appropriate cosolvents and corro- abbreviation or the appropriate percentage (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- for that region. If severe, this can lead to engine damage.
lated with appropriate cosolvents and If you detect a persistent heavy spark
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
E-85 fuel knock even when using gasoline of the
blends may cause fuel system damage E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately stated octane rating, or if you hear steady
and/or vehicle performance problems. 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded spark knock while holding a steady speed
At this time, sufficient data is not gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a on level roads, have an INFINITI retailer
available to ensure that all methanol Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E- correct the condition. Failure to correct the
blends are suitable for use in INFINITI 85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
vehicles. regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing which INFINITI is not responsible.
If any undesirable driveability problems pumps to be identified by a small, square, Incorrect ignition timing will result in
such as engine stalling or hard hot starting orange and black label with the common knocking, after-run or overheating. This in
are experienced after using oxygenate- abbreviation or the appropriate percentage turn may cause excessive fuel consumption
blend fuels, immediately change to a for that region. or damage to the engine. If any of the
non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low Aftermarket fuel additives above symptoms are encountered, have
blend of MTBE. your vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer
INFINITI does not recommend the use of or other competent service facility.
Take care not to spill gasoline during any aftermarket fuel additives (Example:
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake However, now and then you may notice
can cause paint damage. valve deposit removers, etc.) which are light spark knock for a short time while
sold commercially. Many of these additives accelerating or driving up hills. This is no
E-15 fuel cause for concern, because you get the
intended for gum, varnish or deposit
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately removal may contain active solvent or greatest fuel benefit when there is light
15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded similar ingredients that can be harmful to spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.
JVT0159X
1. API certification mark American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

2. API service symbol cation or International Lubricant Standar-
dization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE- certification and SAE viscosity standard.
COMMENDATION These oils have the API certification mark
Selecting the correct oil on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
It is essential to choose the correct grade, not be used as they could cause engine
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure damage.
satisfactory engine life and performance,
see “Capacities and recommended fuel/ Oil additives
lubricants” earlier in this section. INFINITI INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil
recommends the use of an energy conser- additives. The use of an oil additive is not
ving oil in order to improve fuel economy. necessary when the proper oil type is used
Select only engine oils that meet the and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-
has been previously used should not be by the new INFINITI vehicle limited warran- FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
used. ties. COMMENDATIONS
Oil viscosity Your engine was filled with a high quality The air conditioning system in your
engine oil when it was built. You do not INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the
The engine oil viscosity or thickness have to change the oil before the first
changes with temperature. Because of this, refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the
recommended change interval. Oil and lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S
it is important that the engine oil viscosity filter change intervals depend upon how
be selected based on the temperatures at or the exact equivalents.
you use your vehicle. Operation under the
which the vehicle will be operated before following conditions may require more
the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended
frequent oil and filter changes. CAUTION
could cause serious engine damage. . repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures, The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant
Selecting the correct oil filter . driving in dusty conditions, will cause severe damage to the air con-
ditioning system and will require the repla-
Your new vehicle is equipped with a high- . extensive idling,
cement of all air conditioner system
quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When . towing a trailer, components.
replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its . stop and go “rush hour” traffic,
equivalent for the reason described in
Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Main- The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
change intervals.
tenance Guide” for the maintenance sche- INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s
Change intervals dule. ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
The oil and oil filter change intervals for not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
your engine are based on the use of the governmental regulations require the re-
specified quality oils and filters. Oil and covery and recycling of any refrigerant
filter other than the specified quality, or oil during automotive air conditioning system
and filter change intervals longer than service. Your INFINITI retailer has the
recommended could reduce engine life. trained technicians and equipment needed
Damage to engines caused by improper to recover and recycle your air conditioning
maintenance or use of incorrect oil and system refrigerant.

SPECIFICATIONS
Contact an INFINITI retailer when servicing ENGINE

your air conditioning system. Model VK56VD
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-slanted at 908
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.858 6 3.622 (98 6 92)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)
Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Idle speed rpm See the emission control information label on
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm the underside of the hood.
Spark plug Standard DILKAR7B11
Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES
Road wheel
Type Size Offset in (mm)
20 6 8J
Conventional
22 6 8J 1.18 (30)
Spare 20 6 8J
Tire
Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]
P275/60R20 114H
Conventional
P275/50R22 111H
STI0397B 35 (240)
275/60R20 115M
Spare
P275/60R20 114H

DIMENSIONS
Overall length in (mm) 208.3 (5,290)
Overall width in (mm) 79.9 (2,030)
Overall height in (mm) 75.8 (1,925)
Front tread in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)
Rear tread in (mm) 67.9 (1,725)
Wheelbase in (mm) 121.1 (3,075)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
If you plan to travel in another country,
you should first find out if the fuel
available is suitable for your vehicle’s
engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating
may cause engine damage. All gasoline
vehicles must be operated with unleaded
gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your
vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is
not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify STI0708
STI0431
the vehicle to meet local laws and regula-
tions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE (chassis number)
emission control and safety standards vary The number is stamped as shown.
The vehicle identification number plate is
according to the country, state, province or
attached as shown. This number is the
district; therefore, vehicle specifications
identification for your vehicle and is used
may differ.
in the vehicle registration.
When any vehicle is to be taken into
another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation, and registration are the respon-
sibility of the user. INFINITI is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

STI0709 STI0448 STI0738
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICA- EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

The number is stamped on the engine as TION LABEL LABEL
shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety The emission control information label is
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifica- attached as shown.
tion label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month
and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it care-
fully.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
To install the front license plate bracket to
your vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer.
STI0494 STI0739
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is
and Loading Information label affixed to attached as shown.
the pillar as illustrated.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
weight does not include passen- of the load (passengers and car-
WARNING gers and cargo. go) for the vehicle. This is the
. It is extremely dangerous to ride . GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb maximum combined weight of
in a cargo area inside the vehicle. weight plus the combined weight occupants and cargo that can be
In a collision, people riding in of passengers and cargo. loaded into the vehicle. If the
these areas are more likely to be . GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- vehicle is used to tow a trailer,
seriously injured or killed. ing) - maximum total combined the trailer tongue weight must be
weight of the unloaded vehicle, included as part of the cargo load.
. Do not allow people to ride in any
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer This information is located on the
area of vehicle that is not
tongue load and any other op- Tire and Loading Information la-
equipped with seats and seat
tional equipment. This informa- bel.
belts.
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./ . Cargo capacity - permissible
. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
C.M.V.S.S. label. weight of cargo, the weight of
in a seat and using a seat belt
. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - total occupants weight subtracted
properly.
maximum weight (load) limit spe- from the load limit.
TERMS cified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
It is important to familiarize yourself
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle: . GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - The maximum total
. Curb Weight (actual weight of your weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
vehicle) - vehicle weight includ- sengers, cargo, and trailer.
ing: standard and optional equip-
. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
ment, fluids, emergency tools,
limit, Total load capacity - max-
and spare tire assembly. This
imum total weight limit specified
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capa-
city” on the Tire and Loading In-
formation label.
To get “the combined weight of
occupants and cargo”, add the
weight of all occupants, then add
the total luggage weight. Examples
are shown in the illustration.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
STI0445
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs. Before driving a loaded vehicle,
4. The resulting figure equals the confirm that you do not exceed the
available amount of cargo and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
luggage load capacity. For exam- or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
ple, if the XXX amount equals (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See “Mea-
1400 lbs. and there will be five surement of weights” later in this
150 lb. passengers in your vehi- section.)
cle, the amount of available cargo Also check tires for proper inflation
and luggage load capacity is 650 pressures. See the Tire and Loading SIC4446
lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 Information label.
lbs) or (640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 SECURING THE LOAD
kg.) There are tie down hooks located in the
5. Determine the combined weight of cargo area as shown. The tie down hooks
can be used to secure cargo with ropes or
luggage and cargo being loaded
other types of straps.
on the vehicle. That weight may
Do not apply a total load of more than 22
not safely exceed the available lb (10 kg) to a single hook *
A or 7 lb (3 kg)
cargo and luggage load capacity to a single hook * B when securing cargo.
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a WARNING
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. . Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
Consult this manual to determine straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
how this reduces the available
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or jury. Failures caused by overload-
collision, unsecured cargo could cause WARNING ing are not covered by the
personal injury.
. Properly secure all cargo to help vehicle’s warranty.
. The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in the prevent it from sliding or shifting.
cargo area. Secure any items in the Do not place cargo higher than the MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
cargo area. Your child could be seriously seatbacks. In a sudden stop or Secure loose items to prevent weight
injured or killed in a collision if the top collision, unsecured cargo could shifts that could affect the balance of
tether strap is damaged.
cause personal injury. your vehicle. When the vehicle is
. Do not load your vehicle any heavier loaded, drive to a scale and weigh
than the GVWR or the maximum front . Do not load your vehicle any
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your heavier than the GVWR or the the front and the rear wheels sepa-
vehicle can break, tire damage could maximum front and rear GAWRs. rately to determine axle loads. In-
occur, or it can change the way your If you do, parts of your vehicle can dividual axle loads should not
vehicle handles. This could result in loss
break, tire damage could occur, or exceed either of the gross axle
of control and cause personal injury. weight ratings (GAWR). The total of
it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss the axle loads should not exceed the
LOADING TIPS gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
of control and cause personal
. The GVW must not exceed GVWR These ratings are given on the
injury.
or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V. vehicle certification label. If weight
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . Overloading not only can shorten
ratings are exceeded, move or re-
. Do not load the front and rear axle
the life of your vehicle and the
move items to bring all weights
to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed tire, but can cause unsafe vehicle
below the ratings.
the GVWR. handling and long braking dis-
tance. This may cause a premature
tire failure, which could result in a
serious accident and personal in-

TOWING A TRAILER
An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is

WARNING available on the website at
www.InfinitiUSA.com. This guide includes
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer information on trailer towing capability and
and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle the special equipment required for proper
handling, braking and performance and may towing.
lead to accidents.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
CAUTION Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the “Towing load/
. Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load specification” later in this section. The total
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your trailer load equals trailer weight plus its STI0541
engine, axle or other parts could be cargo weight.
damaged. The GCWR equals the combined weight of
. When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs the towing vehicle (including passengers
. For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a and cargo) plus the total trailer load.
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 MPH brake system MUST be used. Towing loads greater than these or using
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full The maximum Gross Combined Weight improper towing equipment could ad-
throttle. This helps the engine and other Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value versely affect vehicle handling, braking
parts of your vehicle wear in at the specified in the following “Towing Load/ and performance.
heavier loads. Specification” chart. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
Your new vehicle was designed to be used not only related to the maximum trailer
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Remember that towing a trailer places Tow weights appropriate for level highway
additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, driving may have to be reduced on very
drivetrain, steering, braking and other steep grades or for low traction situations
systems. (for example, on slippery boat ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect

towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
in high outside temperatures on graded CAUTION
roads can affect engine performance and
cause overheating. The transmission high Vehicle damage resulting from improper
fluid temperature and engine protection towing procedures is not covered by INFINITI
mode, which helps reduce the chance of warranties.
transmission and engine damage, could
activate and automatically decrease engine
power. Vehicle speed may decrease under
high load. Plan your trip carefully to
account for trailer and vehicle load, weath-
er and road conditions.
STI0542
WARNING
Tongue load
Overheating can result in reduced engine When using a weight carrying or a weight
power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed distributing hitch, keep the tongue load
may be lower than other traffic, which could between 10 to 15% of the total trailer load
increase the chance of a collision. Be or use the trailer tongue load specified by
especially careful when driving. If the the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving must be within the maximum tongue load
speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe limits shown in the following “Towing
area. Allow the engine to cool and return to Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue
normal operation. See “If your vehicle overload becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
heats” in the “6. In case of emergency” to allow for proper tongue load.
section of this manual.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming available maximum tongue/king pin
a base vehicle with driver and any options load.
required to achieve the rating. Additional To determine the available towing capacity,
passengers, cargo and/or optional equip- use the following procedure.
ment, such as the trailer hitch, will add
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
weight to the vehicle and reduce your
“Towing Load/Specification” chart
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and
found later in this section.
trailer tongue load.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
the GCWR. The remaining amount is the
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
available maximum towing capacity.
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
weigh your trailer on a scale with all
TI1012M All vehicle and trailer weights can be
equipment and cargo, that are normally
measured using platform type scales com-
in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure
MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT monly found at truck stops, highway weigh
the Gross trailer weight is not more than
(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE stations, building supply centers or sal-
the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on
WEIGHT (GAW) vage yards.
the trailer and is not more than the
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not To determine the available payload capa- calculated available maximum towing ca-
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating city for tongue/king pin load, use the pacity.
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. following procedure.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
certification label. The GVW equals the 1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M. scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, V.S.S. certification label. Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue 2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all more than Front Gross Axle Weight and
load and any other optional equipment. In of the passengers and cargo that are Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.
addition, front or rear GAW must not normally in the vehicle when towing a M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating trailer. trailer and vehicle may need to be moved
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S. or removed to meet the specified ratings.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
S. certification label.
the GVWR. The remaining amount is the Example:

. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
on a scale - including passengers, between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or
cargo and hitch - 6,450 lb. (2,926 kg). within the trailer tongue load specification
. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification If the tongue load becomes excessive,
label - 7,300 lb. (3,311 kg). rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper
. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum
from “Towing Load/Specification” chart tongue weight specification shown in the
- 14,300 lb. (6,486 kg). “Towing load/specification” chart even if
the calculated available tongue weight is
. Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue
“Towing Load/Specification” chart -
weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
8,500 lb. (3,856 kg).
trailer weight to match the available
7,300 lb. (3,311 kg) GVWR tongue weight.
− 6,450 lb. (2,926 kg) GVW
Always verify that available capacities are
Available for tongue
= 850 lb. (385 kg) weight
within the required ratings.
14,300 lb. (6,486 kg) GCWR

− 6,450 lb. (2,926 kg) GVW
Capacity available for
= 7,850 lb. (3,560 kg) towing
850 lb. (385 kg) / Available tongue weight

7,850 lb. (3,560 kg) Available capacity
= 11 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less

than the maximum towing capacity due to
the passenger and cargo load in the
vehicle.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION TOWING SAFETY
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Trailer hitch
Unit: lb (kg)
Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow
US Canada package. The trailer tow package includes a
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) Four-Wheel Drive Four-Wheel Drive receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This
model (4WD) model (4WD) model hitch is rated for the maximum towing
MAXIMUM TOWING CAPACITY*1, *2 8,500 (3,856) 8,500 (3,856) capacity of this vehicle when the proper
MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 850 (385) 850 (385) towing equipment is used. Choose a
GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING 14,300 (6,486) 14,480 (6,568) 14,480 (6,568) proper ball mount and hitch ball that is
rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine
1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and
INFINITI ball mounts and hitch balls are
any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or
available from an INFINITI retailer.
optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s
maximum towing capacity.
2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lb
(2,267 kg).

backward to remove the inner side and . The threaded shank of the hitch ball
upper clips. must be long enough to be properly
secured to the ball mount. There should
be at least 2 threads showing beyond
WARNING the lock washer and nut.
Trailer hitch components have specific Ball mount
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
of towing a trailer heavier than the weight and the ball mount is inserted into the
rating of the hitch components. Never hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball
exceed the weight rating of the hitch mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-
components. Doing so can cause serious tionally, the ball mount should be chosen
personal injury or property damage. to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
Hitch ball Weight carrying hitches
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
weight rating for your trailer: mount is one that is designed to carry the
. The required hitch ball size is stamped whole amount of tongue weight and gross
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch weight directly on the ball mount and on
balls also have the size printed on top the receiver.
STI0804 of the ball.
. Choose the proper class hitch ball
Weight distribution hitch
To access the trailer hitch * A , remove the
based on the trailer weight. This type of hitch is also called a “load-
trailer hitch cover located on the lower part
. The diameter of the threaded shank of leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of
of the rear bumper. bars attach to the ball mount and to the
the hitch ball must be matched to the
To remove the trailer hitch cover: ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball trailer to distribute the tongue weight
1. Remove the 2 clips. shank should be no more than 1/16 (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles
smaller than the hole in the ball mount. cannot carry the full tongue weight of a
2. Pull the bottom of the cover straight given trailer, and need some of the tongue

weight transferred through the frame and 2. Measure the height of a reference point choose to use one, contact a reputable
pushing down on the front wheels. This on the front and rear bumpers at the trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway
gives stability to the tow vehicle. center of the vehicle. control device will work with the vehicle,
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.
IV) is recommended if you plan to tow adjust the hitch equalizers so that the Follow the instructions provided by the
trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 front bumper height is within 0 - .5 manufacturer for installing and using the
lbs (2,267 kg). Check with the trailer and inches (0 - 13 mm) of the reference sway control device.
towing equipment manufacturers to deter- height measured in step 2. The rear Class I hitch
mine if they recommend the use of a bumper should be no higher than the
weight-distributing hitch system. reference height measured in step 2. Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
NOTE: tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000
A weight-distributing hitch system may WARNING lb (907 kg).
affect the operation of trailer surge brakes.
Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch Class II hitch
If you are considering use of a weight-
distributing hitch system with a surge so the rear of the bumper is no higher than Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
brake-equipped trailer, check with the the measured reference height when the ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500
to determine if and how this can be done. higher than the measured reference height lb (1,588 kg).
when loaded, the vehicle may handle
Follow the instructions provided by the
unpredictably which could cause a loss of
Class III hitch
manufacturer for installing and using the Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
vehicle control and cause serious personal
weight-distributing hitch system. ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
injury or property damage.
General set-up instructions are as follows: tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur- lb (2,267 kg).
face. With the ignition switch in the ON
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buffet- Class IV hitch
position and the doors closed, allow
the vehicle to stand for several minutes ing caused by other vehicles can affect Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
so that it can level. trailer handling. Sway control devices may ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
be used to help control these affects. If you tow trailers of a maximum weight of

10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A weight distributing . Trailer tire condition, size, load
hitch should be used to tow trailers that rating and proper inflation pres-
weigh over 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).
sure should be in accordance with
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV
the trailer and tire manufacturers’
trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000
lb (4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but specifications.
your vehicle is only capable of towing the Safety chains
maximum trailer weights shown in the
Always use a suitable chain between your
“Towing Load/Specification” chart earlier
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains
in this section.
should be crossed and should be attached
to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or
CAUTION axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners. STI0745
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
Trailer lights
. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. Your vehicle is equipped with a towing
package, which also includes the 7-pin
. Do not attach any additional hitches to trailer harness connector located under the
your vehicle because a hitch is already trailer hitch cover on the rear bumper.
mounted to your vehicle frame.
Tire pressures CAUTION

. When towing a trailer, inflate the . When splicing into the vehicle electrical
vehicle tires to the recommended system, a commercially available power-
cold tire pressure indicated on the type module/converter must be used to
Tire and Loading Information la- provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
bel.
power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and available. Pre-towing tips
turn signal circuits as a signal source. Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is . Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
The module/converter must draw no mounted on the trailer tongue with a position when a loaded or unloaded
more than 15 milliamps from the stop hydraulic line running to each trailer trailer is hitched. Do not drive the
and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/ wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up
converter that exceeds these power trailer pushing against the hitch ball when or nose-down condition; check for
requirements may damage the vehicle’s the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge improper tongue load, overload, worn
electrical system. See a reputable trailer brakes are common on rental trailers and suspension or other possible causes of
retailer to obtain the proper equipment some boat trailers. In this type of system, either condition.
and to have it installed. there is no hydraulic or electric connection . Always secure items in the trailer to
. Do not connect electrical devices that for brake operation between the tow prevent load shift while driving.
draw more than 40 amps to the vehicle. vehicle and the trailer. . Keep the cargo load as low as possible
The fusible link may melt. Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking in the trailer to keep the trailer center of
systems are activated by an electronic gravity low.
Trailer lights should comply with federal signal sent from a trailer brake controller . Load the trailer so approximately 60%
and/or local regulations. For assistance in (special brake sensing module). of the trailer load is in the front half and
hooking up trailer lights, contact an Have a professional supplier of towing 40% is in the back half. Also make sure
INFINITI retailer or reputable trailer retailer. equipment make sure the trailer brakes are the load is balanced side to side.
Trailer brakes properly installed and demonstrate proper . Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
brake function testing. vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
system MUST be used. However, most WARNING . Be certain your rearview mirrors con-
states require a separate braking system
Never connect a trailer brake system directly form to all federal, state or local
on trailers with a loaded weight above a
to the vehicle brake system. regulations. If not, install any mirrors
specific amount. Make sure the trailer
required for towing before driving the
meets the local regulations and the regula-
vehicle.
tions where you plan to tow.
. Determine the overall height of the
Several types of braking systems are vehicle and trailer so the required
clearance is known. when you are backing up. off.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle 7. Turn off the engine.
Trailer towing tips and trailer when parking. Parking on a
In order to gain skill and an understanding To drive away:
slope is not recommended; however, if you
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should must do so: 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
practice turning, stopping and backing up 2. Start the engine.
in an area which is free from traffic.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
Steering stability, and braking perfor- CAUTION
mance will be somewhat different than 4. Release the parking brake.
under normal driving conditions. If you move the shift lever to the P (Park) 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
. Always secure items in the trailer to position before blocking the wheels and are clear from the blocks.
prevent load shift while driving. applying the parking brake, transmission 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
damage could occur.
. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin 7. Have someone retrieve and store the
or lock to prevent the coupler from blocks.
inadvertently becoming unlatched. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
. While going downhill, the weight of the
. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or 2. Have someone place blocks on the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
stops. downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. wheels.
maintain adequate control, reduce your
. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
speed. Some states or provinces have slowly release the brake pedal until the long or repeated use of the brakes
specific speed limits for vehicles that blocks absorb the vehicle load. when descending a hill, as this reduces
are towing trailers. Obey the local 4. Apply the parking brake. their effectiveness and could cause
speed limits. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). overheating. Shifting to a lower gear
. When backing up, hold the bottom of instead provides “engine braking” and
6. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models: reduces the need to brake as fre-
the steering wheel with one hand.
Move your hand in the direction in Make sure that the 4WD shift switch is quently.
which you want the trailer to go. Make engaged in the AUTO, 4HI or 4LO . If the engine coolant temperature rises
small corrections and back up slowly. If position and the Automatic Transmis- to a high temperature, see “If your
possible, have someone guide you sion (AT) park warning light is turned vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case of

. Do not correct trailer sway by steer-
emergency” section. . INFINITI recommends that the cruise
. Trailer towing requires more fuel than ing or applying the brakes. control not be used while towing a
normal circumstances. 2. When the trailer sway stops, gently trailer.
. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s apply the brakes and pull to the side of . While towing a trailer, do not use the
first 500 miles (800 km). the road in a safe area. following systems (if so equipped):
. Have your vehicle serviced more often 3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is — the Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
than at intervals specified in the balanced as described earlier in this system
recommended maintenance schedule section. — the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sys-
in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance . Be careful when passing other vehicles. tem
Guide. Passing while towing a trailer requires — the Blind Spot Intervention system
. When making a turn, your trailer wheels considerably more distance than nor- — the Back-up Collision Intervention
will be closer to the inside of the turn mal passing. Remember the length of (BCI) system (if so equipped)
than your vehicle wheels. To compen- the trailer must also pass the other — the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
sate for this, make a larger than normal vehicle before you can safely change system
turning radius during the turn. lanes. — the Distance Control Assist (DCA)
. Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- . Use the Tow mode or downshift the system
versely affect vehicle/trailer handling, transmission to a lower gear for engine — the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
possibly causing vehicle sway. When braking when driving down steep or system
being passed by larger vehicles, be long hills. This will help slow the
. Some states or provinces have specific
prepared for possible changes in cross- vehicle without applying the brakes.
regulations and speed limits for vehi-
winds that could affect vehicle hand- . Avoid holding the brake pedal down too cles that are towing trailers. Obey the
ling. long or too frequently. This could cause local speed limits.
Do the following if the trailer begins to the brakes to overheat, resulting in
. Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
sway: reduced braking efficiency.
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal . Increase your following distance to after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer allow for greater stopping distances every break.
as straight ahead as the road condi- while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
. When launching a boat, do not allow
tions allow. This combination will help and brake gradually.
the water level to go over the exhaust
stabilize the vehicle.
tail pipe or rear bumper. Driving the vehicle in the TOW mode with due to lack of transmission lubrication.
. Make sure you disconnect the trailer no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will
not cause any damage. However, fuel . DO NOT tow an Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
lights before backing the trailer into the
economy may be reduced and the trans- vehicle with any of the wheels on the
water or the trailer lights may burn out.
mission/engine driving characteristics may ground. Doing so may cause serious and
When towing a trailer, the transmission expensive damage to the powertrain.
fluid should be changed more frequently. feel unusual.
For additional information, see the INFINITI When towing a trailer, the transmission . For emergency towing procedures refer
Service and Maintenance Guide. fluid should be changed more frequently. to “Towing recommended by INFINITI” in
For additional information, see the INFINITI the “6. In case of emergency” section of
TOW mode Service and Maintenance Guide. this manual.
Using TOW mode is recommended when
pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy FLAT TOWING Automatic Transmission
load. Push the TOW MODE switch to Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models:
activate tow mode. The TOW MODE indi- the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
cator light in the meter illuminates when This method is sometimes used when Do not tow a 4WD vehicle with any of the
TOW mode is selected. Push the TOW towing a vehicle behind a recreational wheels on the ground.
MODE switch again to turn TOW mode off. vehicle, such as a motor home. Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:
TOW mode is automatically cancelled when To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF matic transmission, an appropriate vehicle
position. CAUTION
dolly MUST be placed under the towed
TOW mode includes the following features: vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the
. Failure to follow these guidelines can
. Grade logic — Adjusts transmission result in severe transmission damage. dolly manufacturer’s recommendations
shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling when using their product.
. Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
a load up a grade.
ways tow forward, never backward.
. Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-
. DO NOT tow any automatic transmission
matically downshifts when driving
vehicle with all four wheels on the
down a grade with a trailer or heavy
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
load to help control vehicle speed.
DAMAGE internal transmission parts

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-
ity Grades: All passenger car tires must
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
The traction grades, from highest to low- level of performance which all passenger
conform to federal safety requirements in
est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades car tires must meet under the Federal
addition to these grades.
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Quality grades can be found where applic- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
pavement as measured under controlled
able on the tire sidewall between tread performance on the laboratory test wheel
conditions on specified government test
shoulder and maximum section width. For than the minimum required by law.
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
example:
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A mance. WARNING
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is
rating based on the wear rate of the tire established for a tire that is properly
when tested under controlled conditions The traction grade assigned to this tire is inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
on a specified government test course. For based on straight-ahead braking traction speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one tests, and does not include acceleration, either separately or in combination, can
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.
government course as a tire graded 100. characteristics.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
norm due to variations in driving habits, The temperature grades A (the highest), B,
service practices and differences in road and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
characteristics and climate. the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Your INFINITI is covered by the following For USA
For Canada:
emission warranties.
Emission Control System Warranty If you believe that your vehicle has a
For USA:
Details of these warranties may be found defect which could cause a crash or
. Emission Defects Warranty could cause injury or death, you
with other vehicle warranties in your
. Emissions Performance Warranty Warranty and Roadside Assistance Infor- should immediately inform the Na-
Details of these warranties may be found mation that comes with your INFINITI. If you tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
with other vehicle warranties in your did not receive a Warranty and Roadside
Warranty Information Booklet that comes istration (NHTSA) in addition to
Assistance Information, or it has become
with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a lost, you may obtain a replacement by notifying INFINITI.
Warranty Information Booklet, or it has writing to: If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
become lost, you may obtain a replace-
. Nissan Canada Inc. it may open an investigation, and if it
ment by writing to:
5290 Orbitor Drive finds that a safety defect exists in a
. INFINITI Division
Mississauga, Ontario, group of vehicles, it may order a
Nissan North America, Inc.
L4W 4Z5 recall and remedy campaign. How-
Consumer Affairs Department
ever, NHTSA cannot become involved
P.O. Box 685003
in individual problems between you,
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
your retailer, or INFINITI.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.
gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
www.safercar.gov. online at:

WARNING
You may notify INFINITI by contacting https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-
our Consumer Affairs Department, Sur/7/ PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx. A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive
toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200. Additional information concerning (4WD) should never be tested using a two
wheel dynamometer (such as the dynam-
For Canada motor vehicle safety may be obtained
ometers used by some states for emissions
If you believe that your vehicle has a from Transport Canada’s Road Safety testing), or similar equipment. Make sure
defect which could cause a crash or Information Centre at 1-800-333- you inform test facility personnel that your
could cause injury or death, you 0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/road- vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is
safety (English speakers) or www.tc. placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
should immediately inform Transport
gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speak- test equipment may result in transmission
Canada in addition to notifying damage or unexpected vehicle movement
INFINITI. ers). which could result in serious vehicle da-
If Transport Canada receives com- To notify INFINITI of any safety con- mage or personal injury.
plaints, it may open an investigation, cerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800- Due to legal requirements in some states
and if it finds that a safety defect
361-4792. and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
exists in a group of vehicles, it may be required to be in what is called the
request that INFINITI conduct a recall “ready condition” for an Inspection/Main-
campaign. However, Transport Cana- tenance (I/M) test of the emission control
da cannot become involved in indivi- system.
dual problems between you, your The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
retailer, or INFINITI. when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”
You may contact Transport Canada’s can be obtained by ordinary usage of the
Defect Investigations and Recalls vehicle.
Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. If a powertrain system component is
You may also report safety defects repaired or the battery is disconnected,

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready crash location) are recorded. However,
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an other parties, such as law enforcement,
condition”. Before taking the I/M test,
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near could combine the EDR data with the type
check the vehicle’s inspection/mainte-
crash-like situations, such as an air bag of personally identifying data routinely
nance test readiness condition. Place the
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data acquired during a crash investigation.
ignition switch in the ON position without
that will assist in understanding how a
starting the engine. If the Malfunction To read data recorded by an EDR, special
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for equipment is required and access to the
designed to record data related to vehicle
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
dynamics and safety systems for a short
seconds, the I/M test condition is “not the vehicle manufacturer and INFINITI
period of time, typically 30 seconds or
ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 retailer, other parties, such as law enforce-
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. ment, that have the special equipment, can
record such data as:
Contact an INFINITI retailer to set “ready read the information if they have access to
. How various systems in your vehicle the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
condition” or to prepare the vehicle for
were operating; be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
testing.
. Whether or not the driver and passen- owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; permitted by law.
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
. Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL
ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine INFINITI Service Manual for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at INFINITI retailerships. Genuine
INFINITI Owner’s Manual can also be
purchased.
For USA:
For current pricing and availability of
genuine INFINITI Service Manuals, contact:
1-800-450-9491
www.infiniti-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of

genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, con-
tact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this
model year and prior, please contact an
INFINITI retailer. For the phone number and
location of an INFINITI retailer in your area,
call the INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-
800-361-4792 and a bilingual INFINITI
representative will assist you.

10 Index
A Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light .... 2-12 Variable voltage control system ................... 8-17
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....................... 5-113 Appearance care BCI system operation ........................................ 5-47
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS).................. 2-41 Exterior appearance care................................ 7-2 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-14
Advanced air bag system .................................. 1-61 Interior appearance care ................................ 7-4 Belts (See drive belts)....................................... 8-18
Aiming control Armrest............................................................. 1-18 Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)............. 2-41 Around ViewTM Monitor ..................................... 4-21 indicator light ................................................... 2-19
Headlights ................................................... 2-41 Audible reminders ............................................ 2-21 Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) system ................. 5-31
Air bag system Audio operation precautions ............................. 4-47 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system..................... 5-31
Advanced air bag system ............................. 1-61 Audio system .................................................... 4-47 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Intervention
Front passenger air bag and status light ...... 1-63 Steering wheel audio controls...................... 4-81 (BSI) system warning light ................................ 2-13
Front-seat mounted side-impact supplemental Auto closure ..................................................... 3-24 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System .............. 4-98
air bag system ............................................. 1-67 Autolight system ............................................... 2-39 Bluetooth® streaming audio ............................. 4-72
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover Automatic Booster seats.................................................... 1-51
supplemental air bag system ....................... 1-67 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............... 8-12 Brake
Air bag warning labels ...................................... 1-69 Climate control .................................. 4-39, 4-41 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................. 5-113
Air bag warning light ............................... 1-70, 2-17 Door locks ..................................................... 3-6 Brake booster .............................................. 8-22
Air cleaner housing filter................................... 8-19 Drive positioner ........................................... 3-33 Brake fluid ......................................... 8-13, 8-14
Air conditioner Driving with automatic transmission ............ 5-17 Brake system ............................................. 5-110
Advanced Climate Control System ............... 4-42 Moonroof ..................................................... 2-64 Parking brake operation............................... 5-21
Air conditioner service ................................. 4-47 Seat positioner ............................................ 3-33 Warning light ............................................... 2-13
Air conditioner specification label ................ 9-13 Average fuel consumption and speed................ 2-29 Break-in schedule ............................................. 5-98
Air conditioning system refrigerant and Avoiding collision and rollover ............................ 5-7 Brightness control
lubricant recommendations .................. 4-47, 9-7 Display ON/OFF button .................................. 4-7
B Instrument panel ......................................... 2-43
Automatic climate control .................. 4-39, 4-41
In-cabin microfilter ....................................... 4-46 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-12
Back door (See lift gate) ................................... 3-20
Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle Bulb replacement.............................................. 8-28
Back-up Collision Intervention (BCI) system....... 5-31
security system)................................................ 2-32 Battery.............................................................. 8-16
Alcohol, drugs and driving .................................. 5-9 Battery saver system ......................... 2-40, 2-65
Antenna ............................................................ 4-82 Intelligent Key.............................................. 8-25
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....................... 5-113
C Controls DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation ..... 4-64
Control panel button ...................................... 4-3
Cabin air filter................................................... 4-46 INFINITI Controller .......................................... 4-4 E
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Coolant
Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-98 Economy, Fuel................................................. 5-100
Capacities and
Cargo floor box ................................................. 2-60 Elapsed time..................................................... 2-29
recommended fuel/lubricants ........................ 9-2
Cargo light ........................................................ 2-68 Emission control information label .................... 9-12
Changing engine coolant ............................... 8-9
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ................ 5-3 Emission control system warranty ..................... 9-31
Checking engine coolant level ........................ 8-9
CD/CF/USB memory care and cleaning ............. 4-80 Engine
Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-7
Center multi-function control panel ..................... 4-3 Before starting the engine ........................... 5-14
Cruise control ................................................... 5-54
Child restraints ................................................. 1-34 Break-in schedule ........................................ 5-98
Fixed speed cruise control (on ICC system) ... 5-74
Booster seats............................................... 1-51 Capacities and
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system .......... 5-56
LATCH system .............................................. 1-36 recommended fuel/lubricants ........................ 9-2
Cup holders ...................................................... 2-54
Precautions on child restraints..................... 1-34 Changing engine coolant ............................... 8-9
Top tether strap ........................................... 1-39 D Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-10
Child safety ...................................................... 1-32 Checking engine coolant level ........................ 8-9
Child safety rear door lock .................................. 3-6 Daytime running light system ........................... 2-41 Checking engine oil level ............................. 8-10
Chimes Dimensions....................................................... 9-10 Coolant temperature gauge ............................ 2-8
Audible reminders ....................................... 2-21 Distance Control Assist (DCA) system ................ 5-78 Emergency engine shut off........................... 5-13
Seat belt warning light and chime ............... 2-17 Distance Control Assist (DCA) system Engine block heater ................................... 5-118
Circuit breaker, Fusible link............................... 8-24 warning light .................................................... 2-14 Engine compartment check locations ............. 8-7
Cleaning exterior and interior....................... 7-2, 7-4 Dot matrix liquid crystal display ....................... 2-22 Engine cooling system ................................... 8-8
Climate control Drive belts ........................................................ 8-18 Engine oil .................................................... 8-10
Automatic climate control .................. 4-39, 4-41 Drive positioner ................................................ 3-33 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ........ 9-6
Clock ................................................................ 2-51 Driving Engine oil replacement indicator .................. 2-27
Coat hooks ....................................................... 2-59 Cold weather driving .................................. 5-117 Engine oil viscosity ........................................ 9-7
Cockpit ............................................................... 2-3 Driving with automatic transmission ............ 5-17 Engine serial number ................................... 9-12
Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-117 On-pavement and off-road driving .................. 5-8 Engine specifications ..................................... 9-8
Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio system) ... 4-63 Precautions when starting and driving ........... 5-3 Engine start operation indicator ................... 2-24
Console box...................................................... 2-57 Safety precautions ......................................... 5-9 If your vehicle overheats .............................. 6-14
Controller, Center multi-function control panel .... 4-4 Dual head restraint DVD system........................ 4-83 Oil pressure gauge ........................................ 2-9
Protection mode .......................................... 5-16
10-2
Remote engine start operation indicator ...... 2-24 Front auxiliary input jacks ................................. 4-78 Tachometer .................................................... 2-8
Starting the engine ...................................... 5-14 Front passenger air bag and status light ........... 1-63 Trip computer .............................................. 2-28
Entry/exit function, Automatic drive positioner ... 3-33 Front power seat adjustment............................... 1-4 General maintenance .......................................... 8-2
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................... 9-33 Front seat Glove box ......................................................... 2-57
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .......................... 5-3 Front seat adjustment .......................... 1-4, 1-18
Extended storage fuse warning ......................... 2-25 Front-seat active head restraint ......................... 1-16 H
Extended storage switch ................................... 8-25 Fuel
Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth® ............. 4-98
Capacities and
F Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2
recommended fuel/lubricants ........................ 9-2
Head restraints ................................................. 1-10
Fuel economy............................................. 5-100
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............. 9-12 Headlight washer .............................................. 2-42
Fuel economy information (display) ................ 4-9
Filter Headlights
Fuel information............................................. 9-4
Air cleaner housing filter.............................. 8-19 Aiming control ............................................. 2-41
Fuel octane rating .......................................... 9-4
Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-10 Aiming control (See adaptive front lighting
Fuel-filler cap ............................................... 3-25
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ...... 6-2 system (AFS)) ............................................... 2-41
Fuel-filler door ............................................. 3-25
Flat tire ............................................................... 6-3 Bulb replacement......................................... 8-29
Gauge ............................................................ 2-9
Flat towing........................................................ 9-29 Headlight switch .......................................... 2-38
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ............................. 3-27
Flexible seating................................................. 1-18 Xenon headlights ......................................... 2-38
Fuel efficient driving tips................................... 5-98
Floor mat cleaning .............................................. 7-5 Heated seats .................................................... 2-45
Fuses ................................................................ 8-23
Fluid Heated steering wheel ...................................... 2-44
Fusible links ..................................................... 8-24
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............... 8-12 Heater
Brake fluid ......................................... 8-13, 8-14 G Automatic climate control .................. 4-39, 4-41
Capacities and Engine block heater ................................... 5-118
recommended fuel/lubricants ........................ 9-2 Garage door opener Hill start assist system ................................... 5-107
Engine coolant ............................................... 8-8 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ................. 2-68 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...................... 2-68
Engine oil .................................................... 8-10 Gas cap ............................................................ 3-25 Hood release .................................................... 3-20
Power steering fluid ..................................... 8-13 Gauge ................................................................. 2-6 Hook
Window washer fluid ................................... 8-15 Engine coolant temperature gauge ................. 2-8 Coat hooks .................................................. 2-59
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc Engine oil pressure gauge.............................. 2-9 Luggage hook .............................................. 2-59
(CD) player........................................................ 4-60 Fuel gauge ..................................................... 2-9 Horn ................................................................. 2-45
Fog light switch ................................................ 2-44 Odometer....................................................... 2-7
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system ........... 5-90 Speedometer ................................................. 2-7
10-3
I Interior lights .................................................... 2-66 LATCH system ................................................... 1-36
iPod® player operation ..................................... 4-76 License plate, Installing front license plate ....... 9-13
Ignition switch (Push-button) ............................ 5-11 ISOFIX child restraint ........................................ 1-36 Lift gate ............................................................ 3-20
Immobilizer system ........................................... 2-32 Light
In-cabin microfilter ............................................ 4-46 J Air bag warning light ................................... 1-70
Indicator Bulb replacement......................................... 8-28
Dot matrix display ....................................... 2-22 Jump starting .................................................... 6-11
Cargo light ................................................... 2-68
Lights .......................................................... 2-18 Fog light switch ........................................... 2-44
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .................. 2-32
K
Headlight switch .......................................... 2-38
INFINITI voice recognition system .................... 4-109 Keyless entry (See remote keyless Headlights bulb replacement ....................... 8-29
INFO button ........................................................ 4-7 entry system) .................................................... 3-15 Indicator lights ............................................ 2-18
Inside mirror ..................................................... 3-30 Keys ................................................................... 3-2 Interior light control switch .......................... 2-66
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .................... 9-32 For Intelligent Key system .............................. 3-7 Interior lights ............................................... 2-66
Instrument brightness control ........................... 2-43 Map lights ................................................... 2-66
Instrument panel ................................................ 2-5 L Replacement ................................................ 8-28
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator light ... 2-19 Vanity mirror lights ...................................... 2-67
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system ................. 5-94 Labels Warning/indicator lights and
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system ............... 5-56 Air bag warning labels ................................. 1-69 audible reminders........................................ 2-12
Main switch indicator................................... 2-26 Air conditioner specification label ................ 9-13 Xenon headlights ......................................... 2-38
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system Emission control information label ............... 9-12 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-29
warning light .................................................... 2-15 Engine serial number ................................... 9-12 Linking Intelligent Key....................................... 4-46
Intelligent Key..................................................... 3-2 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........ 9-12 Loading information (See vehicle
Intelligent Key system ......................................... 3-7 Tire and Loading information label...... 8-33, 9-13 loading information) ......................................... 9-14
Battery replacement ..................................... 8-25 Vehicle identification number (VIN) .............. 9-11 Lock
Key operating range....................................... 3-9 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON Automatic door locks ..................................... 3-6
Key operation .............................................. 3-10 indicator light ................................................... 2-20 Door locks ..................................................... 3-4
Warning light ............................................... 2-15 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system ........... 5-26 Lift gate lock................................................ 3-20
Warning signals ........................................... 3-12 Lane departure warning (LDW) system .............. 5-22 Power door lock ............................................. 3-4
Intelligent Key warning light ............................. 2-15 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Prevention Locking with mechanical key............................... 3-4
Interior light control switch ............................... 2-66 (LDP) system..................................................... 5-23 Loose fuel cap warning ..................................... 3-25
Interior light replacement.................................. 8-29 Lane departure warning light ............................ 2-15 Low outside temperature warning ..................... 2-26
10-4
Low tire pressure warning light ......................... 2-15 Phone
Low tire pressure warning system N Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ......... 4-98
(See tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) ..... 5-4 Car phone or CB radio ................................. 4-98
Luggage hooks ................................................. 2-59 New vehicle break-in......................................... 5-98 Pocket .............................................................. 2-58
Power
M O
Front seat adjustment .................................... 1-4
Odometer............................................................ 2-7 Power door lock ............................................. 3-4
Maintenance
Off-road recovery ................................................ 5-8 Power outlet ................................................ 2-52
Battery......................................................... 8-16
Oil Power steering fluid ..................................... 8-13
General maintenance ..................................... 8-2
Capacities and Power steering system ............................... 5-110
Inside the vehicle .......................................... 8-3
recommended fuel/lubricants ........................ 9-2 Power windows ............................................ 2-61
Maintenance indicators ................................ 2-27
Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-10 Precautions
Maintenance precautions ............................... 8-5
Checking engine oil level ............................. 8-10 Audio operation ........................................... 4-47
Maintenance requirements ............................. 8-2
Engine oil .................................................... 8-10 Braking precautions ................................... 5-110
Outside the vehicle ........................................ 8-2
Engine oil pressure gauge.............................. 2-9 Child restraints ............................................ 1-34
Seat belt maintenance ................................. 1-31
Engine oil viscosity ........................................ 9-7 Cruise control .............................................. 5-54
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) ....................... 2-20
Oil filter replacement indicator ..................... 2-27 Driving safety................................................. 5-9
Map lights ........................................................ 2-66
Operation, operational indicators ...................... 2-24 Lane departure warning (LDW) system ......... 5-22
Master warning light ......................................... 2-17
Outside air temperature .................................... 2-29 Maintenance .................................................. 8-5
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) .............. 3-3
Outside mirrors................................................. 3-30 On-pavement and off-road driving .................. 5-8
Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner ..... 3-34
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ................... 6-14 Precautions on BCI system........................... 5-51
Meter
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Precautions on Blind Spot
Trip computer .............................................. 2-28
order information .............................................. 9-34 Intervention system ..................................... 5-38
Meters and gauges ............................................. 2-6
Seat belt usage ........................................... 1-21
Instrument brightness control ...................... 2-43
P Supplemental restraint system..................... 1-55
Mirror
When starting and driving.............................. 5-3
Inside mirror ................................................ 3-30 Panic alarm ...................................................... 3-17 Preview function ............................................. 5-111
Outside mirrors............................................ 3-30 Parking Preview Function warning light.......................... 2-17
Vanity mirror ................................................ 3-32 Brake break-in ........................................... 5-110 Push starting .................................................... 6-13
Moonroof .......................................................... 2-63 Parking brake operation............................... 5-21 Push-button ignition switch .............................. 5-11
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........................ 4-32 Parking on hills ......................................... 5-108
10-5
R Seat adjustment Shift lock release
Front power seat adjustment.......................... 1-4 Transmission ............................................... 5-20
Radio ................................................................ 4-47 Front seats........................................... 1-4, 1-18 Shifting, Automatic transmission....................... 5-17
Car phone or CB radio ................................. 4-98 Seat belt(s) SNOW mode ................................................... 5-109
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc Child safety ................................................. 1-32 Snow mode switch............................................ 2-49
(CD) player................................................... 4-60 Infants ......................................................... 1-33 Spare tire .................................................. 8-41, 9-9
Rain-sensing auto wiper system........................ 2-35 Injured persons ........................................... 1-24 Spark plugs ...................................................... 8-18
Rapid air pressure loss ....................................... 5-8 Larger children............................................. 1-33 Speedometer ...................................................... 2-7
Readiness for inspection/maintenance Precautions on seat belt usage .................... 1-21 Starting
(I/M) test .......................................................... 9-32 Pregnant women .......................................... 1-24 Before starting the engine ........................... 5-14
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ......... 3-6 Seat belt cleaning .......................................... 7-6 Jump starting ............................................... 6-11
Rear personal lights.......................................... 2-66 Seat belt extenders...................................... 1-31 Precautions when starting and driving ........... 5-3
Rear window wiper and washer switch.............. 2-36 Seat belt maintenance ................................. 1-31 Push starting ............................................... 6-13
Rear window wiper blades ................................ 8-22 Seat belt warning light and chime ............... 2-17 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-14
Recorders, Event data ....................................... 9-33 Seat belts .................................................... 1-21 STATUS button .................................................... 4-7
Registering your vehicle in another country ...... 9-11 Seat belts with pretensioners ...................... 1-68 Status light, Front passenger air bag ................ 1-63
Remote controller (DVD) .................................... 4-95 Small children ............................................. 1-33 Steering
Remote engine start.......................................... 3-17 Three-point type .......................................... 1-24 Heated steering wheel ................................. 2-44
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 3-15 Seat(s) Power steering fluid ..................................... 8-13
Reporting safety defects ................................... 9-31 Climate controlled seats .............................. 2-47 Power steering system ............................... 5-110
Roadside assistance program ............................. 6-2 Driver-side memory ...................................... 3-33 Steering-wheel-mounted controls
Rollover .............................................................. 5-7 Heated seats ............................................... 2-45 for audio...................................................... 4-81
Roof Seats ............................................................. 1-3 Tilt/telescopic steering................................. 3-28
Moonroof ..................................................... 2-64 Security system (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Storage............................................................. 2-54
Roof rack ..................................................... 2-60 System), Engine start ........................................ 2-32 Sun visors ........................................................ 3-29
Security system, Vehicle security system .......... 2-31 Sunglasses holder ............................................ 2-56
S Servicing climate control ................................... 4-47 Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-69
SETTING button ................................................. 4-12 Supplemental air bag warning light ......... 1-70, 2-17
Safety
Setting memory function, Automatic Supplemental restraint system.......................... 1-55
Child seat belts ........................................... 1-32
drive positioner................................................. 3-35 Precautions on supplemental
Towing safety............................................... 9-22
Shift lever, Shift lock release ............................ 5-20 restraint system ........................................... 1-55
Satellite radio operation ................................... 4-61
10-6
Switch Tire pressure information (display) ................. 4-9 Trip computer ................................................... 2-28
Autolight switch ........................................... 2-39 Tire pressure monitoring Trip odometer ................................................... 2-29
Fog light switch ........................................... 2-44 system (TPMS) ....................................... 5-4, 6-3 Turn signal switch............................................. 2-43
Hazard warning flasher switch ....................... 6-2 Tire rotation ................................................. 8-38
Headlight aiming control .............................. 2-41 Types of tires ............................................... 8-37 U
Headlight switch .......................................... 2-38 Uniform tire quality grading ......................... 9-30
Underbody cleaning ............................................ 7-3
Ignition switch ............................................. 5-17 Wheel/tire size .............................................. 9-9
Uniform tire quality grading .............................. 9-30
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch ...... 2-50 Wheels and tires .......................................... 8-31
USB memory operation ..................................... 4-67
Power door lock switch .................................. 3-5 Top
Snow mode switch....................................... 2-49 Tether strap child restraints ......................... 1-39
V
Turn signal switch........................................ 2-43 Touch screen ...................................................... 4-4
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch...... 2-50 Tow mode ....................................................... 5-109 Vanity mirror..................................................... 3-32
Tow mode switch .............................................. 2-49 Vanity mirror lights ........................................... 2-67
T Towing Variable voltage control system ........................ 8-17
Flat towing................................................... 9-29 Vehicle
Tachometer ......................................................... 2-8
Tow truck towing.......................................... 6-15 Dimensions.................................................. 9-10
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
Towing a trailer ............................................ 9-18 Identification number (VIN) .......................... 9-11
temperature gauge.............................................. 2-8
Towing safety............................................... 9-22 Loading information ..................................... 9-14
Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System),
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system .............. 5-4 Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ................ 6-18
Engine start ...................................................... 2-32
TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator................... 5-6 Security system ........................................... 2-31
Three-way catalyst .............................................. 5-3
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system ................... 6-3 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch...... 2-50
Tilt/telescopic steering...................................... 3-28
Trailer towing.................................................... 9-18 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ........ 5-115
Tire
Transceiver Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light .... 2-15
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ................. 2-68 warning light ............................................... 2-18
Tire replacement indicator............................ 2-27
Transmission Vehicle information and settings (display)...... 4-7
Tires
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............... 8-12 Ventilators ........................................................ 4-38
Flat tire .......................................................... 6-3
Driving with automatic transmission ............ 5-17 Voice command (INFINITI voice
Low tire pressure warning system .................. 5-4
Transmission shift lever lock release ............ 5-20 recognition system) ............................. 4-115, 4-128
Tire and Loading information label...... 8-33, 9-13
Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system) ... 3-15 Voice recognition system ................................ 4-109
Tire chains ................................................... 8-38
Traveling or registering your vehicle in Voice recognition, Alternate command mode ... 4-125
Tire dressing .................................................. 7-4
another country ................................................ 9-11
Tire pressure................................................ 8-31
10-7
Voltmeter .......................................................... 2-10 Welcome light ................................................... 2-65
Wheel/tire size ................................................... 9-9
W Wheels and tires ............................................... 8-31
Care of wheels ............................................... 7-3
Warning
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels .................... 7-3
Check tire pressure warning......................... 2-25
Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-15
Dot matrix display ....................................... 2-22
Window(s)
Hazard warning flasher switch ....................... 6-2
Cleaning ........................................................ 7-3
Lane departure warning (LDW) system ......... 5-22
Power windows ............................................ 2-61
Lights .......................................................... 2-12
Windshield wiper and washer switch ................ 2-34
Loose fuel cap warning ................................ 2-25
Wiper
Tire pressure monitoring
Rain-sensing auto wiper system................... 2-35
system (TPMS) ....................................... 5-4, 6-3
Rear window wiper and washer switch......... 2-36
Warning/indicator lights and
Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-34
audible reminders........................................ 2-11
Wiper blades ............................................... 8-20
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ............. 1-69
Warning light X
4WD warning light ..................................... 5-105
Air bag warning light ......................... 1-70, 2-17 Xenon headlights .............................................. 2-38
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
warning light ............................................... 2-12
Brake warning light...................................... 2-13
Intelligent Key warning light ........................ 2-15
Lane departure warning light ....................... 2-15
Low tire pressure warning light .................... 2-15
Seat belt warning light and chime ............... 2-17
Warranty, Emission control system warranty ..... 9-31
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch......... 2-36
Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-34
Washing ............................................................. 7-2
Waxing ............................................................... 7-3
10-8
MEMO
10-9
MEMO
MEMO
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION: designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
adversely affect the emission control The label is typically located on the driver
VK56VD engine side center pillar or on the driver’s door.
devices and systems of the vehicle.
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded Damage caused by such fuel is not For additional information, see “Wheels
premium gasoline with an octane rating of covered by the INFINITI new vehicle and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-
at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number limited warranty. it-yourself” section.
(Research octane number 96).
. U.S. government regulations require NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
If unleaded premium gasoline is not ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
available, you may use unleaded regular DURES RECOMMENDATION:
fied by a small, square, orange and black
gasoline with an octane rating of at least During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
label with the common abbreviation or
87 AKI number (Research octane number vehicle use, follow the recommendations
the appropriate percentage for that
91), but you may notice a decrease in outlined in the “Break-in schedule” in the
region.
performance. “5. Starting and driving” section of this
Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommen-
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: dations for the future reliability and
CAUTION . Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equiva- economy of your new vehicle.
lent
. Using a fuel other than that specified
. Engine oil with API Certification Mark
could adversely affect the emission
control systems, and may also affect . Viscosity SAE 5W-30
warranty coverage. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-
. Under no circumstances should a leaded
sumer information” section for engine oil
gasoline be used, because this will
and oil filter recommendation.
damage the three way catalyst.
. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-
85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2014 Infiniti QX80

Printing: June 2013 (09) / OM14E 0Z62U0 / Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Infiniti QX80 Owner’s Manual
1512389 EN QX80 OM Cover.indd 1 5/23/13 3:57 PM

2014 qx80 Owner Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 qx80 Owner Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 qx80 Owner Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2014 Infiniti QX80

2014 Infiniti QX80 Owner’s Manual

1512389 EN QX80 OM Cover.indd 1 5/23/13 3:57 PM

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Starting and driving 5

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Instrument panel............................................... 0-10

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

7. Towing hook (P.6-18)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

9. Rear window wiper and washer

1. Fuel-filler door (P.3-25) 5. Satellite antenna (P.4-47)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

control switch (P.3-30)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

— Audio control steering switch

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

**: Refer to the separate Navigation

1. Tachometer (P.2-8) 6. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

11. Drive belts (P.8-18)

VK56VD ENGINE 5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Warning Warning Indicator

Illustrated table of contents 0-13

0-14 Illustrated table of contents

are most effective when the passenger

seat with both feet on the floor and

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure Reclining:

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For remote release type (if so equipped):

For manual type:

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

3RD ROW SEATS Power reclining

1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-10 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

1-14 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1-20 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system